Ricoh 3035 3045 - Complete Manual

B264/B265 SERVICE MANUAL
002527MIU
B264/B265
SERVICE MANUAL
B264/B265 SERVICE MANUAL
002527MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION. All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks or the property of their respective companies. They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.
2005 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information regarding service techniques, procedures, processes and spare parts of office equipment distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to property or loss of warranty protection. Ricoh Corporation
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE B264 B265 GESTETNER DSm735 DSm745 COMPANY LANIER RICOH LD 235 Aficio 3035 LD 245 Aficio 3045 SAVIN 8035 8045
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. * DATE 10/2005 COMMENTS Original Printing
Rev. 04/2006
B264/B265
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................................................... 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1 1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-2 1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-2 1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS...............................................1-3 1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-5 1.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART ................................................................1-6 1.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION..............................................................1-7 1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-7 1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................1-8 Development Unit and PCU................................................................1-10 Toner Bottle ........................................................................................1-13 Paper Trays ........................................................................................1-14 Initialize TD Sensor and Developer.....................................................1-16 Set Paper Size for Paper Trays ..........................................................1-17 Electrical Total Counter.......................................................................1-18 HDD Caution Decal.............................................................................1-18 Exposure Glass Cleaner .....................................................................1-19 1.4 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (B542) ..........................................1-20 1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-20 1.4.2 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .....................1-21 1.5 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (B544) .............................................1-25 1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-25 1.5.2 1-BIN TRAY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE..................................1-26 1.6 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION (B538) ...................................................1-32 1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-32 1.6.2 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..............................1-33 1.7 TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION (B545)......................................1-35 1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-35 1.7.2 TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................1-36 1.8 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION (B377) ....................................................1-39 1.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-39 1.8.2 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...............................1-40 1.9 ARDF INSTALLATION (B714).................................................................1-43 1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-43 1.9.2 ARDF INSTALLATION PROCEDURE............................................1-44 1.9.3 ARDF SKEW ADJUSTMENT .........................................................1-48 1.10 LCT INSTALLATION (B543)..................................................................1-49 1.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-49 1.10.2 LCT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.............................................1-50
SM i B264/B265
Rev. 06/2006
1.11 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION (G329) ............................................1-52 1.12 BOOKLET FINISHER INSTALLATION (B546)......................................1-53 1.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-53 1.12.2 BOOKLET FINISHER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................1-54 1.13 1000 SHEET FINISHER (B408) ............................................................1-59 1.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-59 1.13.2 1000 SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.............1-60 1.14 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION ..........................................................1-63 1.15 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER.........................................................1-66 1.16 TRAY HEATER .....................................................................................1-68 1.17 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT) ...............................1-69 1.18 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ......................................1-70 1.18.1 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL ....................................................1-71 1.18.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................1-72 1.19 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT (B770)..................................................1-74 1.19.1 ACCESSORIES............................................................................1-74 1.19.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................1-75 1.20 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION (B815) .......................................1-76 1.20.1 ACCESSORIES............................................................................1-76 1.20.2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................1-77 Pre-installation ....................................................................................1-78 On-Site Installation..............................................................................1-84 1.21 CABINET INSTALLATION.....................................................................1-88 1.22 USER ACCOUNT ENHACEMENT UNIT TYPE E..................................1-91 1.22.1 INSTALLATION .............................................................................1-91
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ............................... 2-1
2.1 PM TABLE.................................................................................................2-1
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1
3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS..............................................................................3-1 3.1.1 LASER UNIT ....................................................................................3-1 3.1.2 USED TONER ..................................................................................3-1 3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ................................................3-2 3.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS .............................................................................3-2 3.2.2 LUBRICANTS ...................................................................................3-2 3.3 FRONT DOOR ..........................................................................................3-3 3.4 DUPLEX UNIT...........................................................................................3-4 3.5 RIGHT UPPER COVER ............................................................................3-5 3.6 BY-PASS TRAY UNIT ...............................................................................3-6 3.7 REAR COVERS ........................................................................................3-7 3.7.1 REAR UPPER COVER.....................................................................3-7 3.7.2 REAR LOWER COVER....................................................................3-7
B264/B265 ii SM
Rev. 04/2006
3.8 LEFT COVER ............................................................................................3-8 3.9 SCANNER UNIT........................................................................................3-9 3.9.1 ARDF................................................................................................3-9 3.9.2 EXPOSURE GLASS.......................................................................3-10 3.9.3 SCANNER EXTERIOR PANELS, OPERATION PANEL ................3-11 3.9.4 LENS BLOCK, SBU ASSEMBLY ...................................................3-12 3.9.5 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS ...........................................................3-13 3.9.6 EXPOSURE LAMP .........................................................................3-14 3.9.7 SCANNER HP SENSOR/PLATEN COVER SENSOR ...................3-15 3.9.8 SCANNER MOTOR........................................................................3-16 3.9.9 LAMP STABILIZER AND SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE BOARD .....3-17 3.9.10 SCANNER WIRE..........................................................................3-18 3.10 LASER UNIT .........................................................................................3-22 3.10.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS ...................................................3-22 3.10.2 LASER UNIT ................................................................................3-23 3.10.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ......................................................3-25 3.10.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR..................................3-26 3.10.5 LD UNIT........................................................................................3-27 Laser beam pitch adjustment..............................................................3-28 3.11 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ......................................................3-30 3.11.1 PCU ..............................................................................................3-30 3.11.2 DRUM...........................................................................................3-31 3.11.3 PICK-OFF PAWLS .......................................................................3-33 Pick-off pawl position adjustment........................................................3-33 3.11.4 CHARGE ROLLER AND CLEANING ROLLER ............................3-34 3.11.5 DRUM CLEANING BLADE 2........................................................3-35 3.11.6 DRUM CLEANING BLADE 1........................................................3-36 3.11.7 ID SENSOR..................................................................................3-37 3.12 DEVELOPMENT ...................................................................................3-38 3.12.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT .................................................................3-38 3.12.2 DEVELOPMENT FILTER .............................................................3-39 3.12.3 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER ...........................................................3-40 3.12.4 DEVELOPER................................................................................3-41 3.12.5 TD SENSOR.................................................................................3-43 3.13 TRANSFER UNIT..................................................................................3-44 3.13.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT ...............................................................3-44 3.13.2 TRANSFER BELT ........................................................................3-45 3.13.3 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING BLADE AND TONER OVERFLOW SENSOR .................................................................3-46 3.14 PAPER FEED........................................................................................3-47 3.14.1 PICK-UP, SEPARATION, AND FEED ROLLERS ........................3-47 3.14.2 RIGHT LOWER COVER...............................................................3-48 3.14.3 RELAY/UPPER PAPER FEED AND LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCHES...........................................................3-49 3.14.4 UPPER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 1 ..................................3-50 3.14.5 LOWER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 2 .................................3-51 3.14.6 PAPER END/PAPER HEIGHT/RELAY SENSORS ......................3-52 3.14.7 REGISTRATION SENSOR...........................................................3-53 3.14.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .....................................................................3-55
SM iii B264/B265
Rev. 04/2006
3.14.9 FEED/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR..................................................3-56 3.14.10 IDLE ROLLER DUST BLADE .....................................................3-57 3.14.11 REGISTRATION ROLLER DUST BLADE ..................................3-58 3.15 FUSING UNIT........................................................................................3-59 3.15.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL ............................................................3-59 3.15.2 FUSING UNIT EXIT GUIDE .........................................................3-60 3.15.3 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS .........................................................3-61 3.15.4 FUSING LAMPS ...........................................................................3-62 3.15.5 THERMISTORS AND THERMOSTATS .......................................3-64 3.15.6 HOT ROLLER/PRESSURE ROLLER...........................................3-65 3.15.7 FUSING UNIT SIDE FAN .............................................................3-67 3.15.8 FUSING UNIT CORNER FAN ......................................................3-69 3.16 BY-PASS TRAY ....................................................................................3-70 3.16.1 COVER REPLACEMENT .............................................................3-70 3.16.2 BY-PASS PAPER FEED AND PICK-UP ROLLER REPLACEMENT ...........................................................3-71 3.16.3 BY-PASS SEPARATION ROLLER...............................................3-72 3.16.4 PAPER END SENSOR, PICK-UP SOLENOID.............................3-73 3.16.5 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD REPLACEMENT .......................3-74 3.16.6 BY-PASS TABLE REMOVAL .......................................................3-75 3.16.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT....................................3-76 3.17 DUPLEX UNIT.......................................................................................3-77 3.17.1 DUPLEX COVER REMOVAL .......................................................3-77 3.17.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR REPLACEMENT.......................3-78 3.17.3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ..................................3-79 3.18 DRIVE AREA.........................................................................................3-80 3.18.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH, TRANSFER BELT CONTACT CLUTCH.......................................3-80 3.18.2 MAIN MOTOR ..............................................................................3-81 3.18.3 FUSING/EXIT MOTOR.................................................................3-82 3.18.4 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR............................................................3-83 3.19 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS ...............................................................3-84 3.19.1 NVRAM.........................................................................................3-84 3.19.2 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY .............................................3-86 3.19.3 IOB ...............................................................................................3-87 IOB DIP Switch Settings (SW101) ......................................................3-88 3.19.4 BICU BOARD ...............................................................................3-89 3.19.5 PSU ..............................................................................................3-90 3.20 HDD, CONTROLLER BOARD...............................................................3-91 3.21 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING ..................................3-92 3.21.1 PRINTING ....................................................................................3-92 Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side...........................................3-92 Blank Margin.......................................................................................3-93 Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................3-93 Parallelogram Image Adjustment ........................................................3-94 3.21.2 SCANNING...................................................................................3-95 Registration: Platen Mode...................................................................3-95 Magnification.......................................................................................3-95 3.21.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT .........................................................3-96
B264/B265 iv SM
Rev. 04/2006
Registration.........................................................................................3-96 3.21.4 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION ................................................3-97
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................4-1 4.1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................4-1 4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................4-2 4.1.3 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................4-3 4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................4-30 4.2.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................4-30 4.2.2 SWITCHES.....................................................................................4-32 4.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................4-32 4.4 LEDS .......................................................................................................4-33 4.5 TEST POINTS .........................................................................................4-33
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1 5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION.....................................5-1 Service Mode Lock/Unlock ...................................................................5-1 SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................5-2 Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode For Test Printing ..........5-2 Selecting the Program Number.............................................................5-2 5.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES .....................................................5-4 5.2.1 SERVICE TABLE KEY .....................................................................5-4 5.2.2 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK....................................................5-4 5.2.3 SERVICE TABLES ...........................................................................5-5 SP1-xxx: Feed ......................................................................................5-5 SP2-xxx: Drum......................................................................................5-9 SP3-xxx: Process................................................................................5-19 SP4-xxx: Scanner ...............................................................................5-21 SP5-xxx: Mode ...................................................................................5-37 SP6-xxx: Peripherals ..........................................................................5-76 SP7-xxx: Data Log ..............................................................................5-78 SP8-xxx: Data Log2 ............................................................................5-84 5.2.4 TEST PATTERN PRINTING: SP2-902.........................................5-119 Test Pattern Table (SP2-902-2: IPU Test Print)................................5-119 Test Pattern Table: SP2-902-3 Printing Test Patterns ......................5-120 5.2.5 INPUT CHECK .............................................................................5-121 Main Machine Input Check: SP5-803................................................5-121 ARDF Input Check: SP6-007 ............................................................5-125 5.2.6 OUTPUT CHECK .........................................................................5-126 Main Machine Output Check: SP5-804.............................................5-126 ARDF Output Check: SP6-008) ........................................................5-128 5.2.7 SMC PRINT OUT LISTS: SP5-990...............................................5-128
SM v B264/B265
Rev. 04/2006
5.2.8 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT: SP1-109 ...............................5-129 5.2.9 MEMORY CLEAR: SP5-801.........................................................5-130 5.2.10 SOFTWARE RESET ..................................................................5-132 5.2.11 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET .................5-132 System Setting Reset .......................................................................5-132 Copier Setting Reset.........................................................................5-133 5.3 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE ...............................................................5-134 5.4 UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA.....................................5-135 5.4.1 UPLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-824).......................................5-135 5.4.2 DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-825) ................................5-136 5.5 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ..................................................................5-137 5.5.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE AT POWER ON ...............................5-137 5.5.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE .......................................5-138 Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis ....................................................5-138 5.6 USER PROGRAM MODE .....................................................................5-140 5.6.1 HOW TO USE UP MODE.............................................................5-140 UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display........................5-140 System Settings ................................................................................5-140 Copier/Document Server Features ...................................................5-141 Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings .................................................5-141 Counter .............................................................................................5-142 5.7 DIP SWITCHES.....................................................................................5-143 5.8 USING THE DEBUG LOG.....................................................................5-144 5.8.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG ...........5-144 5.8.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD ....................5-148 5.8.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY ...........................................5-148 5.8.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES .........................................................5-149 SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key ..............5-149 SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log ...........................5-149 SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log .....................5-149
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1 6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................................6-1 6.1.2 PAPER PATH ...................................................................................6-3 6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-4 6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE...............................................................................6-5 6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM............................................................................6-5 6.2.2 CONTROLLER .................................................................................6-7 6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW................................................................6-11 Exposure.............................................................................................6-11 Drum charge .......................................................................................6-11 Laser exposure ...................................................................................6-11 Development.......................................................................................6-11 Image transfer.....................................................................................6-12 Separation ..........................................................................................6-12
B264/B265 vi SM
Rev. 04/2006
ID sensor ............................................................................................6-12 Cleaning..............................................................................................6-12 Quenching ..........................................................................................6-12 Cleaning..............................................................................................6-12 6.4 SCANNING..............................................................................................6-13 6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-13 6.4.2 SCANNER DRIVE ..........................................................................6-14 Book Mode..........................................................................................6-14 ADF mode...........................................................................................6-14 6.4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE.........................6-15 6.5 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-17 6.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-17 6.5.2 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT).......................................................6-18 6.5.3 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY (ADS) ......................................................6-19 6.5.4 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT).................................................6-20 Overview.............................................................................................6-20 6.5.5 IMAGE PROCESSING MODES .....................................................6-21 6.5.6 SUMMARY OF IMAGE PROCESSING FUNCTIONS ....................6-23 6.5.7 IMAGE PROCESSING STEPS AND RELATED SP MODES.........6-24 Text Mode...........................................................................................6-24 Text/Photo Mode ................................................................................6-25 Photo Mode ........................................................................................6-26 Pale (Low-Density Mode)....................................................................6-27 Generation Copy Mode.......................................................................6-28 6.5.8 PRE-FILTERING ............................................................................6-29 6.5.9 BACKGROUND ERASE.................................................................6-30 6.5.10 INDEPENDENT DOT ERASE ......................................................6-31 6.5.11 LINE WIDTH CORRECTION........................................................6-32 6.5.12 FILTERING ...................................................................................6-33 Interactive SP Codes ..........................................................................6-33 Text Mode MTF Filter..........................................................................6-38 Text/Photo, Photo Mode Filter ............................................................6-39 Pale, Generation Mode Filter ..............................................................6-40 Photo Mode Smoothing for Dithering ..................................................6-41 Photo Mode Grayscale .......................................................................6-41 Photo Mode Image Quality .................................................................6-42 6.5.13 OTHERS.......................................................................................6-43 Vertical Black Line Correction.............................................................6-43 Density Settings ..................................................................................6-43 ADS Level...........................................................................................6-44 6.5.14 PRACTICAL APPLICATION OF SP MODES ...............................6-45 Solving Problems ................................................................................6-45 Recommended Settings for MTF Filters .............................................6-46 6.6 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-48 6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-48 6.6.2 AUTO POWER CONTROL (APC) ..................................................6-49 6.6.3 DUAL BEAM WRITING ..................................................................6-50 6.6.4 LASER BEAM PITCH CHANGE MECHANISM ..............................6-51 6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCHES ................................................................6-52
SM vii B264/B265
Rev. 04/2006
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ........................................................6-53 6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-53 6.7.2 DRUM CLEANING..........................................................................6-54 6.7.3 DRIVE MECHANISM......................................................................6-55 6.7.4 DRUM PAWLS ...............................................................................6-55 6.7.5 DRUM TONER SEALS...................................................................6-55 6.8 DRUM CHARGE .....................................................................................6-56 6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-56 6.8.2 CHARGE ROLLER VOLTAGE CORRECTION ..............................6-57 Correction for Environmental Conditions ............................................6-57 6.8.3 CORRECTION FOR PAPER WIDTH AND THICKNESS ...............6-58 6.8.4 ID SENSOR PATTERN PRODUCTION TIMING............................6-59 6.8.5 DRUM CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING ..........................................6-59 6.9 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-60 6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-60 6.9.2 DRIVE MECHANISM......................................................................6-61 6.9.3 DEVELOPER MIXING ....................................................................6-61 6.9.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ...................................................................6-62 Mechanism .........................................................................................6-62 Correction for paper width and thickness (by-pass tray only) .............6-62 6.9.5 TONER SUPPLY ............................................................................6-63 Toner bottle replenishment mechanism ..............................................6-63 Toner supply mechanism....................................................................6-64 Toner Scatter Prevention ....................................................................6-65 Sensor Control Mode ..........................................................................6-66 Image Pixel Count Mode.....................................................................6-67 6.9.6 TONER NEAR END/END DETECTION .........................................6-67 Toner Near End ..................................................................................6-67 Toner End ...........................................................................................6-67 6.9.7 TONER END RECOVERY .............................................................6-68 6.9.8 TONER SUPPLY WITH ABNORMAL SENSORS ..........................6-68 6.10 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING.....................................6-69 6.10.1 DRUM CLEANING........................................................................6-69 6.10.2 TONER RECYCLING ...................................................................6-69 6.11 PAPER FEED........................................................................................6-70 6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-70 6.11.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE ...................................................................6-71 6.11.3 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM .............................................................6-71 6.11.4 PAPER LIFT .................................................................................6-72 6.11.5 PAPER END DETECTION ...........................................................6-73 6.11.6 PAPER REGISTRATION..............................................................6-74 6.11.7 PAPER SIZE DETECTION...........................................................6-75 6.12 BY-PASS TRAY ....................................................................................6-76 6.12.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-76 6.12.2 BY-PASS TRAY OPERATION .....................................................6-77 6.12.3 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION ..........................................6-78 6.13 DUPLEX UNIT.......................................................................................6-79 6.13.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-79
B264/B265 viii SM
Rev. 04/2006
6.13.2 DUPLEX DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................6-80 6.13.3 DUPLEX BASIC OPERATION .....................................................6-81 Longer than A4 lengthwise/LT lengthwise ..........................................6-81 Up to A4 lengthwise/LT lengthwise .....................................................6-81 6.13.4 DUPLEX UNIT FEED IN AND EXIT MECHANISM.......................6-82 Feed-in................................................................................................6-82 Inversion and Exit ...............................................................................6-82 6.14 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION .................................6-83 6.14.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-83 6.14.2 BELT DRIVE MECHANISM..........................................................6-84 6.14.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM ......................6-84 6.14.4 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM........................................................6-85 6.14.5 TRANSFER BELT CHARGE ........................................................6-86 Mechanism .........................................................................................6-86 Correction for paper width and thickness............................................6-87 Currents applied to leading edge, image areas - by-pass feed...........6-88 6.14.6 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING MECHANISM ..............................6-89 6.15 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT......................................................6-90 6.15.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-90 6.15.2 FUSING DRIVE ............................................................................6-91 6.15.3 FUSING DRIVE RELEASE MECHANISM....................................6-91 6.15.4 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT MECHANISM .....................6-92 6.15.5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE AND DE-CURLER ROLLERS .....................6-92 6.15.6 PRESSURE ROLLER...................................................................6-93 6.15.7 CLEANING MECHANISM ............................................................6-94 6.15.8 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER CLEANING.........................................6-95 Small Jobs ..........................................................................................6-95 Medium Jobs ......................................................................................6-96 Large Jobs ..........................................................................................6-96 SP Settings for Post-Job Cleaning......................................................6-97 6.15.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL..........................................6-98 Temperature Control...........................................................................6-99 Fusing Idling Temperature ................................................................6-100 6.15.10 CPM DOWN FOR THICK PAPER ............................................6-101 6.15.11 COOLING AND OVERHEAT PROTECTION ...........................6-102 6.15.12 OVERHEAT PROTECTION .....................................................6-103 6.16 ENERGY SAVER MODES ..................................................................6-104 6.16.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-104 6.16.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE............................................................6-105 Entering the energy saver mode.......................................................6-105 What happens in energy saver mode ...............................................6-105 Return to stand-by mode ..................................................................6-105 6.16.3 AUTO OFF MODE......................................................................6-106 Entering off stand-by and off modes .................................................6-106 Off Stand-by mode............................................................................6-106 Off Mode ...........................................................................................6-107 Returning to stand-by mode..............................................................6-107
SM
ix
B264/B265
Rev. 04/2006
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. 7-1
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................7-1 2. MACHINE CONFIGURATION .....................................................................7-3 3. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ...........................................................................7-5
PUNCH UNIT B377

SEE SECTION B377 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
1000-SHEET FINISHER B408

BRIDGE UNIT B538

PAPER TRAY UNIT B542

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B543

1-BIN TRAY B544

TWO-TRAY FINISHER B545

BOOKLET FINISHER B546

B264/B265
SM
Rev. 04/2006
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B714

FAX OPTION B779

PRINTER/SCANNER OPTION B783

SM
xi
B264/B265
IIMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY 1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged. 2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible. 3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off. 4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components. 5. If the Start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period (the Start key starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands away from the mechanical and the electrical components as the copier starts making copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed. 6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands. HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS 1. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention. OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS 1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service representative who has completed the training course on those models. 2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in accordance with local regulations.
1. SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an open flame. 2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.) 3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations. 4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes. CAUTION MARKING:
CAUTION VORSICHT
CATION-CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM VORSICHT-LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN
>PS<
3BLASERCAUTION.WMF
Conventions Used in this Manual This manual uses several symbols.

Symbol What it means Refer to section number See Core Tech Manual for details Screw Connector E-ring Clip ring Clamp
Lengthwise, SEF (Short Edge Feed)
Sideways, LEF (Long Edge Feed)
Cautions, Notes, etc.

The following headings provide special information:
WARNING
FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
CAUTION
Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries. NOTE: This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B714 FAX OPTION B779 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PAPER TRAY UNIT B542
PUNCH UNIT B377 1000-SHEET FINISHER B408 TWO-TRAY FINISHER B545 BOOKLET FINISHER B546 PRINTER/SCANNER OPTION B783
SERVICE TABLES
1-BIN TRAY B544
BRIDGE UNIT B538
TAB POSITION 8
TAB POSITION 7
SPECIFICATIONS
TAB POSITION 6
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
TAB POSITION 5
TAB POSITION 4
TROUBLESHOOTING
TAB POSITION 3
TAB POSITION 2
TAB POSITION 1
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION REVISION HISTORY Page 63 ~ 65 69 70 ~ 73 72 ~ 73 91 Date 10/19/2005 06/22/2006 06/22/2006 05/25/2006 12/06/2005 Added/Updated/New Updated Information Key Counter Installation Rearranged page layout Updated Information Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D Updated Information Remove step 15 from Installation Added User Account Enhancement Unit Install Procedure
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off. NOTE: The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data.
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS CAUTION

ARDF
Rating Voltage of Output Connector, Max. DC24 V
Scanner Unit
Finisher
LCT
B135I016.WMF
SM
1-1
B264/B265
Installation
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 2. Humidity Range: 3. Ambient Illumination: 4. Ventilation: 5. Ambient Dust: 10 C to 32 C (50 F to 90 F) 15% to 80% RH Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight.) Room air should turn over at least 30 m3/hr/person Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10/6 oz/yd3)
6. Avoid areas exposed to sudden temperature changes: 1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner. 2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater. 7. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases. 8. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level. 9. Place the main machine on a strong and level base. Inclination on any side should be no more than 5 mm (0.2"). 10. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
B264/B265
1-2
SM
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Place the main machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown:
A
B135I010.WMF
A: Front: >75 cm (29.6") B: Left: > 10 cm (4") C: Rear: > 10 cm (4") D: Right > 10 cm (4")
NOTE: The 75 cm (29.5") recommended for the space at the front is for pulling out the paper tray only. If the operator stands at the front of the main machine, more space is required.
SM
1-3
B264/B265
Installation
670 mm (26.4")
180 mm (7.1")
B135I012.WMF
680 mm (26.8")
670 mm (23.4")
520 mm (20.5")*1
B135I014.WMF
*1 Without tray extended.
B264/B265
1-4
SM
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
1. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and easily accessible. Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet. 2. Avoid multi-wiring. 3. Be sure to ground the machine. 1. Input voltage level: North America 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12.5 A Europe/Asia 220 V ~ 240V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: more than 6.8 A 2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10% to 15% 3. Never set anything on the power cord.
SM
1-5
B264/B265
Installation
INSTALLATION FLOW CHART
1.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

The following flow chart shows how to install the optional units more efficiently.
Unpack Copier
Does the user require the Paper Tray Unit, LCT, or Finisher? Yes Place Copier on the paper tray unit Install the paper tray unit No
Install the copier
Install the bridge unit (if required)
If the customer requires the 1-bin tray: Remove the scanner unit Install the 1-bin tray Replace the scanner unit
Install the remaining options in any order

B135I510.WMF
Bridge Unit: Needed for the finishers and external output tray. Paper Tray Unit: Needed for LCT and finishers. Other requirements: See Overall Machine Information Installation Option Table.
B264/B265
1-6
SM
MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
1.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list: Description Qty
1. Operation Instructions System Setting................................ 1 2. Operation Instructions Copy Reference .............................. 1 3. Exposure Glass Cleaner Holder ............................................ 1 4. Exposure Glass Cleaner ........................................................ 1 5. Paper Size Decal ................................................................... 1 6. Toner Supply Installation Decal ............................................. 1 7. Middle Front Cover ................................................................ 1 8. HDD Caution Decals (-17, -29, -57 Machines)....................... 1 9. Model Name Decal (-17, -19, -29, -57 Machines) .................. 1 10. Stamp (-17 Machine) ............................................................. 1 11. EU Safety Information (-26, -27, -57, -67 Machines) ............. 1 12. Operation Panel Indicator Decals (-26, -27, -57, -67 Machines) ................................................. 1 13. Gasket (for Optional ARDF (26, -27, -29, -57, -67 Machines) ......................................... 1 14. Ferrite Core (for Optional ARDF) (26, -27, -29, -57, -67 Machines) ......................................... 1 15. Address Information Sheet China (-21 Machine) ................ 1 16. Paper Caution Sheet China (-21 Machine) ......................... 1
SM
1-7
B264/B265
Installation
1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Remove the main machine from the box, and remove all shipping retainers and tapes. NOTE: Store all shipping retainers as you remove them. You will need them if the machine is moved to another location in the future. 2. Pull out the paper trays and remove all shipping materials [A].
[A]
B195I100.WMF
3. Remove scanner cushion [B]. NOTE: Do not discard the cushion. Store it inside the machine at [C]. You should install it the next time you move the machine. 4. Remove the middle front cover from the 2nd tray.
[C]
[B]
B195I101A.WMF
5. On the right side of the machine, open the by-pass tray, duplex unit, and transfer right cover. 6. Remove the shipping screws [D] ( x2) and tags. 7. Remove the other shipping tag [E]. NOTE: If the paper tray unit is to be installed, do this now. ( 1.4) [E]
[D]
B195I102.WMF
B264/B265
1-8
SM
B195I101.WMF
[A]
B195I103.WMF
[C]
[B]
[D]
8. If the paper tray unit is not to be installed, install the middle front cover [A] (provided in the second paper tray). 9. Attach the emblem [B] and panel [C] to the front cover [D]. 10. Push the panel in until the emblem and panel move into their positions with an audible click.
SM
1-9
B264/B265
Installation
Development Unit and PCU
[F] [B]
[E]
[D] [A]
B195I900.WMF
[C]
B195I511.WMF
1. Open the front door. 2. Loosen [A] ( x 1) (do not remove). 3. Push the base [B] the left. 4. Open the right cover [C]. 5. Raise the lever [D] 6. Pull out the PCU [E] and place it on a clean flat surface. 7. Remove clamps and wire [F].
B264/B265
1-10
SM
[A]
B135I512.WMF
[C]
[B]
B135I105.WMF
8. Spread a large piece of paper on a flat surface. NOTE: Make sure the area is free of pins, paper clips, staples, etc. to avoid attraction to the magnetic development roller. 9. Slide the development unit [A] out and place it on the paper. 10. Remove the tape and tag [B] from the development unit 11. Remove the entrance seal plate [C] ( x 2).
SM
1-11
B264/B265
Installation
[A]
[C]
[B]
B135I106.WMF
[D]
B135I513.WMF
B195I019.WMF
12. Remove the development roller unit [A] ( x 2), and set it on the paper. 13. Pour the developer [B] into the development unit. NOTE: The developer lot number is embossed on the end of the developer package. Do not discard the package until you have recorded the lot number. ( 1-16) 1) Pour approximately 1/3 of the developer evenly along the length of the development unit. 2) Rotate the drive gear [C] to work the developer into the unit. 3) Repeat until all the developer is in the development unit. 4) Continue to turn the drive gear until the developer is even with the top of the unit. 14. Reassemble the development unit. NOTE: Make sure that the earth plate [D] is positioned correctly. 15. Re-install the development unit and PCU.
B264/B265
1-12
SM
[E] [D]
[B] [C]
[A]
B195I514.WMF
Toner Bottle
1. Raise the toner bottle holder lever [A], push the lever [B] to the side, and then pull out the toner bottle holder [C]. 2. Unscrew the bottle cap [D] and set the bottle in the holder. NOTE: Do not touch the inner bottle cap [E]. 3. Push the toner bottle holder into the main machine until it locks in place, and then lower the holder lever [A] to secure the toner bottle. NOTE: The holder lever cannot be lowered until the toner bottle has been installed. 4. Attach the toner supply installation decal [E]. [E]
B195I101B.WMF
SM
1-13
B264/B265
Installation
Paper Trays
[A] [C] [B]
[D]
[E]
B135I107.WMF
B135I109.WMF
1. Open the 1st paper tray, and then press down on the right side of the lock [A] switch to unlock the side fences. 2. Press in on the sides of the fence release [B], and slide the side fences [C] to the appropriate mark for the paper size. 3. Turn the dial [D] to the correct setting for the paper size. 4. Pinch the sides of the bottom fence [E] and move it to the appropriate mark for the paper size, then load the paper. 5. Check the position of the stack. Confirm that there is no gap between the stack and the side fences. If you see a gap, adjust the position of the side fences. After loading the stack, confirm that the right side of the stack is not on top of both cushions.
B264/B265
1-14
SM
B135I108.WMF
B135I110.WMF
[B]
6. Press down the lock [A] to lock the side fences. 7. Attach the appropriate paper size decal [B] to the paper tray. 8. Paper size decals are also used for the optional paper tray unit. Keep any remaining decals for use with the paper tray unit. 9. Repeat this procedure to load paper in the 2nd paper tray.
SM
1-15
B264/B265
Installation
[A]
Initialize TD Sensor and Developer

1. Connect the main machine to the power outlet, switch on the main machine, and wait for the fusing unit to warm up. 2. On the operation panel, press Clear Mode . 3. Use the number keys to enter 107. 4. Press and hold Clear/Stop for three seconds. 5. On the touch-panel, press Copy SP. 6. Press SP Direct to highlight SP Direct, enter 2801, and then press .
B135I500.WMF
7. When the message prompts you to enter the lot number of the developer, enter the 7-digit lot number, press [Yes], and then press [Execute] on the touchpanel. This initializes the TD sensor. NOTE: The lot number is printed on the end of the developer package. Recording the lot number could help troubleshoot problems later. If the lot number is unavailable, enter any seven-digit number. 8. Press SP Direct to highlight SP Direct and enter 2805, press , and then press Execute on the touch-panel. This initializes the developer. 9. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
B264/B265
1-16
SM
1. Press User Tools/Counter .
B135I501.WMF
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
B135I502.WMF
3. Press the Paper Size Setting tab. 4. Press the button for the tray to change. 5. Change the setting and press the [OK] button. 6. Repeat for each tray installed. 7. Press Exit twice to return to the main display The 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th paper trays are provided with paper size dial selectors. The dial settings on the paper trays have priority over the UP settings. However, if you select the asterisk (*) position on the paper size dial, you can select the paper size with the UP setting. 8. Check the copy quality and machine operation. NOTE: The test pattern print procedure is slightly different for this machine. Use SP2-902 and select 2 for the IPU Test Print or 3 for the Print Test Patterns. ( 5.2.3 Test Pattern Printing)
SM
1-17
B264/B265
Installation
Set Paper Size for Paper Trays
Electrical Total Counter

The electrical total counter no longer requires initialization. The new incrementing counter is set to 0 at the factory.
HDD Caution Decal

1. Attach the HDD Caution decal [A] to the front cover.
10 mm (0.4")
25 mm (1.0")
[A]
B135I017.WMF
B195I018.WMF
B264/B265
1-18
SM
Exposure Glass Cleaner
[B]
[A]
B135I111.WMF
1. Attach the exposure glass cleaner holder [A] to the left side of the machine. 2. Place the exposure glass cleaner [B] inside the holder. NOTE: The exposure glass cleaner is used to clean the ARDF exposure glass and the glass strip to the left of the large exposure glass.
SM
1-19
B264/B265
Installation
PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (B542)
1.4 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (B542)

1. Knob Screw M3 .................................................................. 1 2. Knob Screw M4 .................................................................. 1 3. Joint Bracket .......................................................................... 1 4. Front Stand ............................................................................ 1 5. Rear Stand............................................................................. 1 6. Stand Bracket ........................................................................ 1 7. Installation Procedure ............................................................ 1
B264/B265
1-20
SM
1.4.2 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
B542I557.WMF
[A]
B542I112.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Unpack the paper tray unit. 2. Remove all tape and shipping materials. 3. Remove the paper trays [A].
SM
1-21
B264/B265
Installation
[B]
[F] [E] [H] [A] [C] [D]

B542I513.WMF
[J]
[G]
B542I517.WMF
[I]
4. Remove the middle front cover [A] and pull out the front handles [B]. 5. Using the front handles and rear handles, lift the machine and hold it over the paper tray unit [C]. 6. Slowly lower the machine onto the paper tray unit with the pegs [D] aligned with the peg holes on the bottom of the machine. NOTE: Do not lift the main machine by the scanner unit. 7. Re-install the middle front cover [A]. 8. Attach the spring washer [E] to the short knob screw [F]. Then, secure the paper tray unit. 9. Open the right cover of the paper tray unit [G]. 10. Secure the joint bracket [H] (1 long knob screw). 11. Remove the connector cover [I] of the main machine ( x 1). 12. Connect the paper tray unit harness [J] to the main machine and reinstall the connector cover.
B264/B265
1-22
SM
[B]
B542I518.WMF
[A]
[C]
B542I119.WMF
13. Install the front stand [A] and rear stand [B] as shown above. 14. Install the stand bracket [C].
SM
1-23
B264/B265
Installation
[A]
[A]
B542I500.WMF
15. Load paper into the paper tray and install the paper trays. 16. Attach the appropriate tray decals [A] which are included in the accessory box for the main machine. 17. Turn on the ac switch. 18. Turn the paper size dial to the correct setting for the paper size. 19. Check the machines operation and copy quality.
B264/B265
1-24
SM
1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (B544)
1.5 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (B544)

1. Ground Bracket...................................................................... 1 2. Connector Cover.................................................................... 1 3. Base Cover ............................................................................ 1 4. Arm Cover.............................................................................. 1 5. Copy Tray .............................................................................. 1 6. Mylar Strip.............................................................................. 2 7. Stepped Screw M3 x 8........................................................ 5 8. Screw M3 x 8 ....................................................................... 2 9. Screw M4 x 7 ...................................................................... 1 10. Tapping Screw M3 x 6 ........................................................ 2 11. Tapping Screw M3 x 14 ...................................................... 1 12. Tapping Screw M3 x 8 ........................................................ 1 13. Installation Procedure ............................................................ 1
SM
1-25
B264/B265
Installation
1.5.2 1-BIN TRAY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[A] [B]
B544I113.WMF
[C]
B544I114.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Remove Scanner Unit NOTE: If the ARDF is installed, remove the ARDF before removing the scanner unit. Remove the connector cover [A]. Disconnect the scanner cable [B]. Remove the scanner unit [C] ( x 3).
B264/B265
1-26
SM
[B] [A]
[F] [C]
B544I201.WMF
[E]
[D]
B544I102.WMF
2. Unpack the 1-bin tray unit and remove the tapes. 3. Remove the front bracket [A] ( x 1) and rear bracket [B] ( x 1) from the top of the paper exit cover [C]. 4. Remove the paper exit cover [C] ( x 4). 5. Cut away two covers [D] from the base cover [E]. 6. Trim the edges so they are smooth. 7. Install the base cover [E] ( x 3: stepped screw). 8. Set the 1-bin tray unit [F] on the base cover and slide onto the heads of the stepped screws.
SM
1-27
B264/B265
Installation
[A] [E] [D]
[G]
[C] [B]
B544I492.WMF
[F]
B544I103.WMF
9. Secure the 1-bin tray unit [A] ( x 1 M3 x14). 10. Remove the cover [B]. 11. Install the ground bracket [C] ( x 2 M3 x 6). 12. Connect the harness [D]. 13. Install the connector cover [E] ( x 1 M3 x 8) 14. Re-install the front bracket [F] ( x 2 M4 x 7, M4 x 10) and the rear bracket [G] ( x 1 M4 x 10).
B264/B265
1-28
SM
[A]
[B]
[E]
B544I493.WMF
[D]
B544I501.WMF
[C]
15. Attach the copy tray Bridge Unit (B538) has not been installed: 1) Secure [A] (stepped x 2) into the side of the 1-bin tray housing. 2) Attach the copy tray [B] to the stepped screws. Bridge Unit (B538) has been installed 1) Open the cover of the bridge unit [C]. 2) First, remove the copy tray bracket [D] ( x 1). 3) Re-install the copy tray bracket ( x 1: tapping screw). 4) Install the copy tray [E] ( x 1).
SM
1-29
B264/B265
Installation
[C]
[A]
[B]
B544I104.WMF
[D]
B544I500.WMF
16. Remove the scanner stand cover [A] ( x 2). 17. To adjust the height of the scanner stand, first remove [B] ( x 2) to release the scanner stand [C]. 18. Raise the scanner stand until the next set of screw holes in the main frame can be seen through the screw holes in the scanner stand. 19. Secure the stand ( x 2: , ) and install the arm cover [D] ( x 1).
B264/B265
1-30
SM
[B]
[A]
B544I106.WMF
20. Attach two mylar strips [A] to the scanner stand [B]. 21. Reinstall the scanner stand cover. 22. Reinstall the scanner unit. 23. Turn on the main switch and check the 1-bin tray unit operation.
SM
1-31
B264/B265
Installation
BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION (B538)
1.6 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION (B538)

1. Stepped Screw ...................................................................... 2 2. Connector Cover.................................................................... 1 3. Exit Mylar ............................................................................... 2 4. Installation Procedure ............................................................ 1
B264/B265
1-32
SM
1.6.2 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[A] [D]
B538I401.WMF
[E] [B]
B538I407.WMF
B538I500.WMF
[C]
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Unpack the bridge unit and remove all tapes shipping retainers. 2. Remove the inner tray [A]. 3. On the side of the machine, remove the three small covers [B]. If the optional external output tray (A825) will be installed (instead of a finisher), do Step 4. 4. Remove the two small covers [C]. 5. Remove the cover [D] ( x 1). 6. Remove the cap [E].
SM
1-33
B264/B265
Installation
[A]
[E] [B]
[D]
B538I402.WMF
[C]
B538I404.WMF
7. If an optional finisher is to be installed, attach two exit mylars [A] to the bridge unit. 8. Remove the cover [B]. 9. Install the bridge unit [C] ( x 2). 10. Connect the bridge unit I/F harnesses [D] ( x 2). 11. Install the connector cover [E]. 12. Turn on the main switch and check the bridge unit operation (make sure that there are no paper jams).
B264/B265
1-34
SM
TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION (B545)
1.7 TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION (B545)

1. Right Joint Bracket................................................................. 1 2. Left Joint Bracket ................................................................... 1 3. Shift Tray ............................................................................... 2 4. Screw M4 x 8 ...................................................................... 2 5. Screw M4 x 12 .................................................................... 5 6. Ground Plate.......................................................................... 1 7. Installation Procedure ............................................................ 1
SM
1-35
B264/B265
Installation
1.7.2 TWO-TRAY FINISHER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[A]
B545I101.WMF
[C]
[B]
B545I107.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. NOTE: The bridge unit (B538) and paper tray unit (B542) must be installed before installing this finisher. 1. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and shipping retainers from outside the unit [A]. 2. Open the front door [B] and remove all tapes and shipping materials from inside the finisher unit. 3. Save the retainer [C] and other shipping material. NOTE: The retainer [C] must be re-installed in the finisher before moving or shipping the finisher to another location.
B264/B265
1-36
SM
[A]
[B]
[C]
B545I104.WMF
[D]
B545I105.WMF
4. Install the left joint bracket [A] ( x 2 M4 x 12) and right joint bracket [B] ( x 2 M4 x 12). 5. Attach the ground plate [C] ( x 1 M4 x 12) to the center of the paper tray unit as shown. 6. Open the front door of the finisher, and pull out the locking lever [D] ( x 1). 7. Push the finisher to the side of the machine with the holes in the finisher aligned with the joint brackets, and then dock the finisher against the machine. 8. Push in the locking lever and secure it ( x 1), then close the front door.
SM
1-37
B264/B265
Installation
[A]
B545I103.WMF
[B]
B545I106.WMF
9. Install two shift trays [A] ( x 1 each). 10. Connect the finisher cable [B] to the main machine below the right, rear handle. 11. Turn on the main switch and check the finisher operation.
B264/B265
1-38
SM
PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION (B377)
1.8 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION (B377)

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list: Description Qty 1. Punch unit..............................................................................1 2. Sensor bracket.......................................................................1 3. Hopper ...................................................................................1 4. Step screw .............................................................................1 5. Spring ....................................................................................1 6. Spacer (2 mm) .......................................................................1 7. Spacer (1 mm) .......................................................................1 8. Tapping screw .......................................................................1 9. Tapping screw .......................................................................2
SM
1-39
B264/B265
Installation
1.8.2 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[A]
[B]
B377I102.WMF
[C]
B377I103.WMF
CAUTION
Switch off the main machine and unplug its power cord. If the Two-Tray Finisher is installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine. ( 1.7) 1. Unpack the punch unit and remove all tapes and shipping retainers. 2. Open the front door and remove the rear cover [A] ( x4). 3. Remove the bracket [B] ( x2) and paper guide [C] ( x 1).
B264/B265
1-40
SM
[B]
[A] [C]
B377I101.WMF
[E]
B377I104.WMF
[D] 4. Remove the hopper cover [A] ( x 2). 5. Install the sensor bracket [B] (stepped x 1). 6. Install the spring [C]. 7. Install the 2 mm spacer [D]. 8. Install the punch unit [E] ( x 2, stepped x 1)
SM
1-41
B264/B265
Installation
[A]
B377I105.WMF
[C]
[B]
B377I106.WMF
9. Connect the harnesses [A] and clamp them as shown. NOTE: No special DIP switch settings are required for this punch unit. The punch unit sends an identification signal to the machine board so it knows what type of punch unit has been installed. 10. Slide the hopper [B] into the machine. 11. Fasten the two 1 mm spacers [C] to the rear frame for future adjustment. NOTE: The spacers are used to adjust the horizontal positioning of the holes. 12. Reassemble the finisher and check the punch operation.
B264/B265
1-42
SM
ARDF INSTALLATION (B714)
1.9 ARDF INSTALLATION (B714)

1. Stepped Screw ...................................................................... 2 2. Screw M4 x 10 .................................................................... 2 3. Attention Decal - Scanner ...................................................... 1 4. Attention Decal Top Cover.................................................. 1 5. Installation Procedure ............................................................ 1 NOTE: The gasket and ferrite core for the ARDF are provided with the accessories of the main machine. ( 1.3.1)
SM
1-43
B264/B265
Installation
1.9.2 ARDF INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
B541I904.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Unpack the ARDF and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
B264/B265
1-44
SM
[A]
[B]

[C]
B541I900A.WMF
[E] [D]
B541I900B.WMF
2. Attach and tighten stud screws , . 3. Mount the ARDF by aligning the screw keyholes [A] of the ARDF support plate over the stud screws [B], then slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine. NOTE: To avoid damaging the ARDF, hold it as shown. 4. Secure the ARDF with the screws , . 5. Attach the gasket [C]. NOTE: The gasket is provided as an accessory with the mainframe. 6. Attach the ferrite core [D] to the I/F cable [E]. NOTE: The ferrite core is provided as an accessory with the mainframe. 5. Connect the I/F cable the main machine.
SM
1-45
B264/B265
Installation
[A]
B541I901.WMF
[B]
B541I902.WMF
6. Peel off the platen sheet [A] and place it on the exposure glass. 7. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [B] on the exposure glass. 8. Close the ARDF.
B264/B265
1-46
SM
[A]
B541I906.WMF
[C] [B]
B541I903.WMF
9. Attach the top cover decal [A] to the top cover as shown, choosing the language most suitable for the machine installed. 10. Attach the scanner decal [B] to the cover so that the arrow on the decal lines up with the groove [C] of the left scale as shown. As with step 9, choose the language most suitable for the machine installed. 11. Turn on the main switch. 12. Check the ARDF operation and copy quality. Be sure to check and adjust the registration for the ARDF with the SP modes
SM
1-47
B264/B265
Installation
1.9.3 ARDF SKEW ADJUSTMENT

[B] [C] [A]
B079I901.WMF
1. Remove the tape [A] covering the elliptical hole. 2. Remove right screw [B] and install it into the elliptical hole [C]. 3. Move the right side of the ARDF forward or back to adjust the position then tighten the screw.
B264/B265
1-48
SM
LCT INSTALLATION (B543)
1.10 LCT INSTALLATION (B543)

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list: Description Qty 1. Joint Pin ................................................................................. 2 2. Stepped Screw M3 x 18......................................................... 4 3. Installation Procedure ............................................................ 1
SM
1-49
B264/B265
Installation
1.10.2 LCT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[C]
[B] [A]
B543I504.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. The Paper Tray Unit (B542) or the Cabinet (FAC25) must be installed before installing the LCT. NOTE: Use the LCT mounting hardware supplied with the Cabinet (FAC25). 1. Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes. 2. Open the right cover of the paper tray unit [A]. 3. Open the lower right cover [B] and cut the holding band [C]. NOTE: When cutting the holding band, the upper part of the band should be cut as shown. Otherwise, paper jams may occur. 4. Remove the lower right cover.
B264/B265
1-50
SM
[A] [E]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B543I503.WMF
5. Install the joint pins [A] or the Cabinet (FAC25) joint pins. 6. Push the release lever [B] and slide the LCT to the right (front view). 7. Hang the LCT [C] on the joint pins, then secure the brackets [D] ( x 4). 8. Return the LCT to the previous position and connect the LCT cable [E]. 9. Open the LCT cover and load the paper. 10. Turn on the ac switch and check the LCT operation.
SM
1-51
B264/B265
Installation
PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION (G329)
1.11 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION (G329)
[C] [A]
[B]
[A]
B079I904.WMF
1. Install [A] ( x 2) on the top cover as shown. 2. Position the platen cover bracket [B] on the heads of the stud screws and slide the platen cover [C] to the left.
B264/B265
1-52
SM
BOOKLET FINISHER INSTALLATION (B546)
1.12 BOOKLET FINISHER INSTALLATION (B546)

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list. 7 5
4 2
9 1 10
6 3 Description
B546I101.WMF
8 Qty
1. Upper Tray...........................................................................1 2. Shift Tray .............................................................................1 3. Tapping Screw - M4 x 6.......................................................2 4. Rail Assy.............................................................................1 5. Joint Bracket ........................................................................1 6. Tapping Screw - M4 x 16.....................................................8 7. Rail Bracket .........................................................................1 8. Tapping Screw - M4 x 6.......................................................1 9. Harness Cover.....................................................................1 10. Sensor Feeler ....................................................................1
SM
1-53
B264/B265
Installation
1.12.2 BOOKLET FINISHER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
B546I102.WMF
B546I104.WMF
CAUTION
Keep the power cord unplugged when starting the following procedure. 1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes and shipping retainers.
B264/B265
1-54
SM
[A] [B]
B546I105.WMF
[E]
[D]
[C]
B546I103.WMF
2. Open the front under door and pull out the staple unit [A]. 3. Remove the stapler unit lock plate [B] ( x 1). 4. Push in the stapler unit and shut the front lower door. 5. Remove the right lower cover [C] ( x 4). 6. Remove the front pressure release bracket [D] ( x 1). 7. Remove the rear pressure release bracket [E] ( x 1). 8. Reattach the cover [C].
SM
1-55
B264/B265
Installation
[A] [B]
[C]
B546I106.WMF
[D]
B546I107.WMF
9. Set the hooks [A] of the shift tray [B] in the notches in the shift tray bracket, and secure the tray ( x2 M4). 10. Connect the shift tray sensor harness [C]. 11. Install the harness cover [D] (2 hooks).
B264/B265
1-56
SM
[A]
[C]
B546I108.WMF
B546I801.WMF
[B] [E] [D]
[F]
B546I921.WMF
12. Install the upper tray [A] (2 pins). 13. Attach the sensor feeler [B] (2 pins). 14. Remove the stand bracket [C]. 15. Attach the rail [D] to the rail bracket [E] as shown. 16. Install the rail bracket [F] on the left lower cover of the copier ( x 4).
SM
1-57
B264/B265
Installation
[A]
[C]
[D]
B546I920.WMF
[B]
B546I511.WMF
17. Install the joint bracket [A] on the left side of the copier ( x 4). 18. Secure the rail [B] to the booklet finisher with 1 M4 screw. 19. Align the finisher on the joint bracket and lock the 2 hooks [C] of the finisher on the joint bracket. 20. Connect the finisher cable [D] to the copier. 21. Turn on the main switch and check the finisher operation.
B264/B265
1-58
SM
1000 SHEET FINISHER (B408)
1.13 1000 SHEET FINISHER (B408)

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. 2 1 7 8 5
3 Description
10 9 Qty
B408I502.WMF
1 Right Joint Bracket................................................................1 2 Left Joint Bracket *1 ...............................................................1 3 Left Joint Bracket ..................................................................1 4 Grounding Plate....................................................................1 5 Copy Tray .............................................................................1 6 Staple Position Decal............................................................1 7 Screw - M4 x 14....................................................................4 8 Knob Screw - M4 x 10 ..........................................................1 9 Screw - M3 x 8......................................................................1 10 Knob Screw - M3 x 8 ..........................................................1
*1
: Rear joint bracket is not required for these models.
SM
1-59
B264/B265
Installation
1.13.2 1000 SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[A]
B408I102.WMF
B408I103.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. The following options must be installed before installing this finisher. - Bridge Unit (B538) - Paper Tray Unit (B542) 2. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes. NOTE: Be sure to keep screw [A]. It will be needed to secure the grounding plate in Step 3.
B264/B265
1-60
SM
[B]
[A]
[F] [E]
B408I503.WMF
[C] [D]
B408I201.WMF
2. Install the right joint bracket [A] (2 screws - M4 x 14) and left joint bracket [B] ( x 2 M4 x 14). 3. Install the grounding plate [C] to the finisher ( x 2 M3 x 8). NOTE: Use the screw removed in step 1 and the screw from the accessory box. 4. Open the front door [D] then pull the locking lever [E]. 5. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the locking lever. 6. Secure the locking lever ( x 1 knob screw M3 x 8). 7. Close the front door. 8. Install the copy tray [F] ( x 1 knob screw M4 x 10).
SM
1-61
B264/B265
Installation
[B] [A]
B408I504.WMF
9. Connect the finisher cable [A] to the main machine below the right rear handle. 10. Attach the staple position decal [B] to the ARDF as shown. 11. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
B264/B265
1-62
SM
Rev. 10/2005
KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION (A674)
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
A683I518.WMF
[E]
[F]
CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Hold the key counter plates [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B] and insert the key counter holder [C]. 2. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x2). 3. Attach the key counter cover [D] ( x2). 4. Remove the connector cover [E] ( x1). 5. Remove the knockout [F] from the connector cover.
SM 1-63 B264/B265
Installation
1.14 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION (A674)
Rev. 10/2005
[B]
[A] [D]
[C]
A683I965.WMF
6. Connect the key counter connector [A] to CN211 on the I/O board. 7. Reinstall the cover [B] ( x1). 8. Attach the double-sided tape to the key counter bracket. 9. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape and attach the key counter assembly [D] to the left side of the scanner unit. NOTE: When attaching the key counter assembly [C], press the assembly hard against the scanner cover. Otherwise, the key counter assembly may come off easily. 10. Set User Tools, System Settings, Key Operator Tools, and Key Counter Management to restrict access to each available function mode.
B264/B265
1-64
SM
Rev. 10/2005
This page intentionally left blank.
SM
1-65
B264/B265
Installation
ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
1.15 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER

1. Remove the ARDF and exposure glass. ( 3.9.1 and 3.9.2) 2. Remove the rear cover [A] of the scanner unit ( x2, x1) [A] 3. Remove the knockout [B]
[B]
B004I204.WMF
4. Push the 1st and 2nd scanners [C] to the right. 5. Lift the harness guide [D]
[C]
[D]
B004I205.WMF
6. Install the heater brackets [E] ( x2, M3x6). NOTE: Use the screws already attached at the same position. 7. Install the heater [F] ( x2, M4x6) and route the harness.
[F]
[E]
B004I206.WMF
B264/B265
1-66
SM
ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
[H] [G]
9. Remove the rear lower cover [I] ( x4). 10. Remove knockout [J]. 11. Pull out ac harness [K]. [J]
B004I207.WMF
[I] 12. Connect the ac harness [L] to the ac outlet [M]. NOTE: Do not remove the ground wire from the ac outlet. 13. Install the ac outlet. 14. Install the ground wire [N] ( x1, M4x6). 15. Re-install the rear cover, rear lower cover. [L] [M]
[K]
B004I208.WMF
16. Connect the harness [O].
[N]
B004I209.WMF
[O]
B004I210.WMF
SM
1-67
B264/B265
Installation
8. Install the ac harness assembly [G] ( x2, M4x6) and connect the connector [H].
TRAY HEATER
1.16 TRAY HEATER

[C] [A]
[B]
A284I531.WMF
[D]
[G]
B195I202.WMF
[E]
[H]
B004I203.WMF
[F]
CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Attach the tray heater [A] to the heater bracket [B]. 2. Install the harness holder [C]. 3. Remove the rear lower cover. 4. Remove the upper and lower paper trays from the main machine. 5. Install the heater assembly [D] ( x1). 6. Install the harness clamp [E]. 7. Fasten the harness [F] with the clamp. 8. Route the heater harness [G] and connect it to the ac harness [H].
B264/B265
1-68
SM
Rev. 06/2006
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
[A]
[C]
[B]
B004I531.WMF
[D]
B195I201.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Attach the optional tray heater [A] to the heater bracket [B]. 2. Install the harness holder [C]. 3. Remove the rear lower cover of the machine and the rear cover of the optional paper tray unit. 4. Remove the upper and lower paper trays of the optional paper tray unit. 5. Install the heater assembly [D] ( x1). [G] 6. Install four harness clamps [E]. 7. Route the harness [F] and connect it to the harness [G] and heater harness [H].
[E] [H]
SM 1-69
B004I203.WMF
[F]
B264/B265
Installation
1.17 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
Rev. 06/2006
1.18 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)

BEFORE YOU BEGIN THE PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values: z Supervisor login password z Administrator login name z Administrator login password If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure.
IMPORTANT NOTE
If the Customer forgets the Supervisor login password after changing it from the default setting, a service call is required and the NVRAM must be replaced to reset the Supervisor login and password. 2. Make sure that Admin. Authentication Machine Management is ON. [System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication Management] - [Machine Management] If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the installation procedure. 3. Make sure that under Machine Management Administrator Tools is enabled (selected). [System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication Management] [Machine Management] - [Available Settings] If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled (selected) before you do the installation procedure.
ACCESSORY CHECK
The B264/B265 uses a Type D Data Overwrite Security Unit. Check the accessories and their quantities against this list: Description Qty
1. SD Card ............................................................................... 1
B264/B265
1-70
SM
Rev. 06/2006
1.18.1 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL
[A]
B735I901.WMF
[B] 1. Ensure a customer witness is present when opening the DOSS option.
B735I903.WMF
2. Make sure that: 1) The box has two pieces of tape [A] attached to the corners in the photo, AND 2) These two tapes are blank. If you can see VOID on the surface of the tape, DO NOT install the components in the box. Stop this procedure and contact the Technical Hotline via the e-Lert form on the TSC Website. Retain the box and its contents. Any tampering of the DOSS option will need to be investigated. 3. If the results of Step 1 are OK, remove the two pieces of tape from the box. Note: After you remove the tapes, you will see VOID written on the box under the tape [B]. This is normal. 4. The procedures outline in this bulletin needs to be followed if the DOSS option is replaced due to a failure.
CAUTION Before you begin any procedure, always turn OFF the machine main power switch and unplug the power cord.
SM
1-71
B264/B265
Installation
Rev. 06/2006
1.18.2
INSTALLATION
Important The DOS SD card must be inserted in SD card slot C2. If the PostScript3 option is also installed, you must move the DOS application to the PostScript3 SD card with SP5873 001. 1. If the machine is ON, turn the operation switch and the main power switch OFF. 2. If the NIB is installed, disconnect the network cable. 3. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] (x1). 4. With the printed side of the SD card [B] facing the rear of the machine, install the DOS SD card in SD card slot C2. 5. If the NIB is installed, reconnect the network cable. 6. Turn the main power switch ON. 7. Do SP5878 (Option Setup). 8. Exit SP mode. 10. Turn the main power switch ON. 11. Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report). 12. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version on the diagnostic report are the same as those in the chart below . z z [A]: ROM Number/Firmware Version HDD Format Option [B]: Loading Program GW1a_zoffy (Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C) Loading Program GW2a_zoffy (Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D) Diagnostic Report: Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D ROM No. / Firmware Version [A] HDD Format Option: B7355050 / 0.04 HDD Format Option: B7355060 / 0.03 Loading Program [B] GW1a_zoffy: B7355050 / 0.04 GW2a_zoffy: B7355060 / 0.03
B735I101.WMF
[B]
[A]
9. Turn the operation switch OFF, and then turn the main power switch OFF.
Important: The ROM number and firmware version number change when the firmware is upgraded.
B264/B265
1-72
SM
Rev. 06/2006
If the ROM numbers are not the same, or the version numbers are not the same, this means the unit was not installed correctly. If this happens: Make sure the MFP model and unit type match (Type C or D). The B264/B265 uses a Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D. If they do not match: 1) Do the installation procedure again, from Step 1. 2) Replace the Data Overwrite Security Unit (SD card) with the correct type. Redo installation procedure. 3) Replace the NV-RAM. Redo installation procedure.
13. Turn Auto Erase Memory Setting ON: User Tools >> System Settings >> Administrator Tools >> Auto Erase Memory Setting >> ON If the customer has enabled Administrator Authentication Management Machine Management they will have to log in to change this User Tool setting. 14. Exit User Tools. 15. Power the machine OFF/ON. [A]
09/09/2003
Origi.
[B]
14:13
[C]
Total
Copies
16. Make sure the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed on the operation panel. If it is not displayed, do Step 7 again. 17. Make a sample copy. 18. Make sure the overwrite icon changes as follows: The bottom of the icon (white part) becomes thicker [B]. Next Copy is displayed for a short time under the icon. The icon returns to its usual shape [C].
SM
1-73
B264/B265
Installation
COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT (B770)
1.19 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT (B770)

1.19.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list: Description Qty 1. Bracket ............................................................................... 1 2. Screws................................................................................. 4 3. FFC (Short).......................................................................... 1 4. Harness (Short) .................................................................. 1 5. FFC (Long: Not Used) ......................................................... 1 6. Harness (Long: Not Used) ................................................... 1 7. Harness Clamp (Not Used)................................................. 1 8. ICIB (Illegal Copy Interface Board) ...................................... 1
8 7
B770I101.WMF
B264/B265
1-74
SM
COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT (B770)
1.19.2 INSTALLATION
1. Remove: [A]: Rear upper cover ( x2) [B]: Controller cover ( x2)
[A] [B]
B770I102.WMF
2. Remove the controller box [C] ( x5, x1)
[C]
B770I103.WMF
3. Attach the bracket [D] ( x2). 4. Attach the ICIB [E] ( x4) 5. Connect the short FFC [F]. 6. Connect the short harness [G] ( x2). 7. Reinstall the controller box. 8. Turn on the machine. 9. Enable the Copy Data Security function.
[G]
[D]
[G] [BICU]
[E]
[F]
B770I104.WMF
[User Tools]>System Settings>Administrator Tools>Copy Data Security Option
SM
1-75
B264/B265
Installation
SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION (B815)
1.20 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION (B815)

1.20.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list: Description Qty 1. Long I/F Cable ..................................................................... 1 2. Paper Exit Cover.................................................................. 1 3. Rack Stack Ass'y ................................................................. 1 4. Upper Right Cover ............................................................... 1 5. Spring Plates Operation Panel.......................................... 2 6. Hinge Stopper Right ........................................................ 1 7. Hinge Stopper Left ........................................................... 1 8. Adjusting Pin Spacers.......................................................... 2 9. Clamp NK-8N.................................................................... 1 10. Ferrite Core RFC-8 ......................................................... 1 11. Tapping Screw M3x6 (Blue) .............................................. 1 12. Tapping Screws M3x6 ....................................................... 5 13. Tapping Screw M3x8 ......................................................... 1 14. Tapping Screws M3x14 ..................................................... 4 15. Screws with Spring Washer M4x6 ..................................... 1 16. Knob Screws M4 ............................................................. 4 17. Harness Bands .................................................................. 2 18. Cable Cover....................................................................... 1 1 2 3
18
5 17 16
8 9
B815I100.WMF
15
14
13
12
11
10
B264/B265
1-76
SM
1.20.2 INSTALLATION
This option should be pre-installed at the service center or factory and the final installation should be done at the work site. Pre-installation ( pp. 1-78) Remove Short Scanner I/F Cable Connect the Long Scanner Cable to the Copier Install Anti-Static Springs on the Operation Panel Replace the Board Shield Plates On-Site Installation( pp. 1-84) Move the Scanner Unit to Its Accessible Location Remove the Horizontal Arm Connect the Long Scanner I/F Cable to the Copier Replace the Front Rubber Feet with the Adjustment Screws Connect the Scanner
SM
1-77
B264/B265
Installation
Pre-installation Remove Short Scanner Cable

1. If the ARDF is attached, remove it. 2. Remove: [A]: Rear scale ( x3) [B]: Left scale and exposure glass ( x2) [B] [A]
B815I101.WMF
3. Remove scanner rear cover [C] ( x2).
[C]
B815I103.WMF
B264/B265
1-78
SM
4. Remove: [A]: Lens block cover ( x4) [B]: Lens block assembly ( x4) [C]: Disconnect flat-film connector from the lens block.
[A] [B]
[C]
B815I102.WMF
5. Disconnect: [D]: Original length sensor ( x1) Push the sensor forward toward the front. It is not necessary to disconnect or remove the sensor. [E]: Ground wire [E] ( x1) [F]: Short scanner I/F cable ( x2).
[D]
[E]
[F]
B815I104.WMF
6. Remove the rear bracket [G] ( x5, x1) 7. Remove the connector cap [H] and disconnect the short scanner I/F cable [I] from the mainframe (x1, x1, x1). 8. Pull the short scanner I/F cable out of the scanner unit.
[G]
[H] [I]
B815I105.WMF
SM
1-79
B264/B265
Installation
Connect the Long Scanner Cable to the Copier

[F]
[D]
[B] [E]
[C]
[A]
[G]
B815I106.WMF
1. Position the cable [A] and ground wire [B] of the long scanner I/F cable as shown. 2. Reattach the long scanner I/F connectors [C] and ground wire [D] (x2) Make sure the ground wire and cable loop behind the large boss. 3. Reattach ( Pg. 72) Original length sensor ( x1). Lens block assembly ( x4). Lens block cover ( x4) 4. Set the collar [E] of the long scanner I/F cable in the bracket and clamp the cable (x1) 5. Reinstall rear bracket [F] ( x5, x2). 6. Pull the ferrite core [G] slightly away from the back of the machine. 7. Reattach: ( Pg. 72) Scanner rear cover ( x2) Rear scale ( x3) Exposure glass and left scale ( x2)
B264/B265
1-80
SM
Install Anti-Static Springs on Operation Panel
[B]
[A]
B815I107.WMF
1. Remove the screws holding the operation panel [A] ( x2. ) 2. Pull the operation panel away from the copier (do not disconnect or remove) and turn it over. 3. Peel the covers from an anti-static springs [B] and attach them as shown. 4. Press down gently on each spring to confirm that each spring is attached securely. 5. Reattach the operation panel to the machine ( x2).
SM
1-81
B264/B265
Installation
Replace the Board Shield Plates

1. Remove: [A]: Controller cover [A] ( x2) [B]: Rear upper cover ( x2) [B] [A]
B815I108.WMF
2. Remove controller box [C] ( x5, x1)
[C]
B815I109.WMF
B264/B265
1-82
SM
[C] 3. Remove: [A]: BICU shield plate ( x3) [B]: IPU shield plate ( x1) NOTE: A support on the BICU shield plate overlaps a support of the IPU shield below. One screw [C] fastens both. [B]
[A]
B815I110.WMF
4. Remove the harness clamps from the old IPU shield plate and attach them to the new plate (x2). 5. Reattach: New IPU shield plate ( x1) BICU shield plate ( x3). Controller box ( x5, x1) Reattach rear lower cover ( x4) Reattach the corner plate ( x2) ARDF
B815I111.WMF
Important: This completes the pre-installation procedure for this option. The mainframe can now be moved to the work site.
SM
1-83
B264/B265
Installation
On-Site Installation Move the Scanner Unit to Its Accessible Location

1. Disconnect the scanner unit from the machine ( x3, x1) 2. Lift the scanner unit and set it at the accessible location. [A]
B815I112.WMF
Replace the Cover

1. Remove the paper exit cover [A] ( x4) 2. Remove the upper right cover and replace it with the cover [B] provided with the Scanner Accessibility Option B815 ( x1). 3. Attach the paper exit cover [C] (provided with the option) ( x2). [A] [C]
[B]
B815I113.WMF
Remove the Horizontal Arm

1. Remove: [A]: Right cover( x1) [B]: Left cover ( x2) 2. To remove the horizontal arm [C] of the scanner stand, remove these screws: [D]: Top x2 [E]: Right side x6 [F]: Left side x6 [B] [A] [D] [F] [E] [C]
B815I114.WMF
B264/B265
1-84
SM
Connect the Long Scanner I/F Cable to Copier

[E]
[C] [B] [A]
[D] [F]
[G]
B815I115.WMF
1. Fasten the collar [A] of the long scanner I/F cable to the bracket [B]. 2. Fasten the bracket to the side of the housing [C] ( x2) 3. Connect the cable [D] to the cable connector ( x1). 4. Install the cable cover[E] over the cable connection and the vertical post [F] of the scanner stand ( x4). 5. Fasten the cable clamp [G] as shown ( x)1.
SM
1-85
B264/B265
Installation
Replace the Front Rubber Feet with the Adjustment Screws

1. Remove the cover [A] ( x3). 2. Under the right front corner of the scanner unit, insert a flathead screwdriver [B] behind the metal bracket [C] and dislodge the plastic pin [D]. 3. Pull out the plastic pin and remove the rubber foot [E].
[A] [D]
[E]
[C]
[B]
B815I116.WMF
4. Remove the seal [F] from the adjusting pin spacer [G], then attach the pin spacer to the scanner unit. 5. Turn the metal foot [H] until it stops. 6. Reinstall the cover [A] ( x3). 7. Repeat Steps 2 to 5 at the left front. [H] [G] [F] [G]
B815I117.WMF
[F]
B264/B265
1-86
SM
Connect the Scanner
40mm
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C] [D]
B815I118.WMF
1. Attach one ferrite core [A] to the cable 40 mm away from the scanner unit. 2. Attach one ferrite core [B] near the cable connector. 3. Connect the cable [C] to the scanner. 4. Attach the safety blocks [D] behind each hinge ( x 2 ea.). NOTE: These blocks prevent the ARDF from falling over if it is opened too far.
SM
1-87
B264/B265
Installation
CABINET INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1.21 CABINET INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[A] [B]
B542I557.WMF
[C]
[D]
B542I112.WMF
CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Unpack the cabinet. 2. Remove all tape and shipping materials. 3. Install the 2 longer [A] locating pins and the shorter [B] locating pin. 4. Install the LCT mounting screws [C] (2 types x2). 5. Remove the paper trays [D].
B264/B265
1-88
SM
[F] [E]
[A]
B542I113.WMF
[D] [C]
6. Remove the middle front cover [A] and pull out the front handles [B]. 7. Using the front handles and rear handles, lift the machine and hold it over the cabinet [C]. 8. Slowly lower the machine onto the cabinet with the pegs [D] aligned with the peg holes on the bottom of the machine. NOTE: Do not hold the scanner unit. 9. Re-install the middle front cover [A]. 10. Attach the step screw [E]. Then, secure the cabinet.
SM
1-89
B264/B265
Installation
[B]
[A]
[A]
B542I118.WMF
[B]
B542I119.WMF
11. Install the front and rear stands [A] as shown above. 12. Install the stand bracket [B].
B264/B265
1-90
SM
Rev. 12/2005
USER ACCOUNT ENHANCEMENT UNIT TYPE E
1.22.1 INSTALLATION
1. Remove the controller board [A] (! x4).
[A]
2. Align the 2 notches and the 1 connector of the user account enhancement unit and then insert it into the controller board pressing it down until it clicks into place. 3. Reinstall the controller board.
SM
1-91
B264/B265
Installation
1.22 USER ACCOUNT ENHANCEMENT UNIT TYPE E
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None
PM TABLE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

2.1 PM TABLE
NOTE: Amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints.
Preventive Maintenance
Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect

EM SCANNER/OPTICS Reflector 1st Mirror 2nd Mirror 3rd Mirror Scanner Guide Rails Platen Sheet Cover Exposure Glass Toner Shield Glass APS Sensor Exposure Glass (Sheet through) DRUM (OPC) AREA OPC Drum Charge Roller Charge Roller Cleaning Roller Drum Cleaning Blade 1 Drum Cleaning Blade 2 Quenching Lamp Pick-off Pawls Spurs ID Sensor Cleaning Entrance Seal Side Seal C 150K C C C C I I C C C C 300K C C C C I I C C C C 450K C C C C I I C C C C NOTE Optics cloth Optics cloth Optics cloth Optics cloth Do not use alcohol. Lubricate if necessary. Dry cloth or alcohol. Replace platen sheet if required. Dry cloth or alcohol Optics cloth Dry cloth or alcohol Dry cloth or alcohol
R R R R R R C C C I
R R R R R C R C C C I
R R R R R Dry cloth R C C C I Dry cloth or alcohol Perform SP3-001-2 after blower brush cleaning. Blower brush. Replace if required.
SM
2-1
B264/B265
PM TABLE
EM DEVELOPMENT UNIT Development Drive Gears Development Filter Developer Entrance Seal Side Seal Development Roller PAPER FEED Registration Roller Idle Roller Dust Blade Registration Roller Dust Blade Paper Feed Guides Relay Rollers Bottom Plate Pad Bottom Plate Pad (Bypass feed) Registration Sensor Paper Feed Roller Gear Upper Relay Sensor DUPLEX UNIT Upper Transport Roller Lower Transport Roller TRANSFER BELT UNIT Transfer Belt Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade
150K I R I I I C
300K I R R I I C
450K I R I I I C
NOTE
Dry cloth
C C C C C C C C L C C C C
C C R C C C C C L C C C
C C C C C C C L C C C
Water or alcohol. Detach and tap gently on flat surface to empty. Blower brush. Blower brush. Water or alcohol. Water or alcohol. Water or alcohol. Water or alcohol. Blower brush Silicone Grease G-501. See note below.*1 Blower Brush Water or alcohol. Water or alcohol.
R R
R R
R R
Transfer Belt Rollers C C C Entrance Seal C C C Transfer Entrance C C C C Guide Used Toner Tank I C C C Empty the tank. Note: Due to their durability and extended service life, the feed rollers, separation rollers, and pick-up rollers of the mainframe, optional paper trays, and LCT have been removed from the PM parts list.
Dry cloth. To prevent damage to the cleaning blade, always replace these items together. Dry cloth Dry cloth Dry cloth
B264/B265
2-2
SM
PM TABLE
EM 150K FUSING UNIT AND PAPER EXIT Fusing Entrance and C Exit Guide Plates Hot Roller R Pressure Roller R Fusing Thermistors R Cleaning Roller R Cleaning Roller L Bushings Hot Roller Strippers C Paper Exit Guide Ribs C Exit Sensor DRIVE Drive Belts
*1
300K C R R R R L R C C I
450K C R R R R L C C C
NOTE Water or alcohol.
Grease: Barrierta JFE 55/2 Water or alcohol. Water or alcohol. (See illustration below.) Blower brush Replace if necessary
: Lubricate the paper feed clutch gear [A] with Silicone Grease G501 every P.M.
B195P901.WMF
B195P902.02.
SM
2-3
B264/B265
Preventive Maintenance
PM TABLE
B714 ARDF (for originals) Pick-up Roller Feed Belt Separation Roller Sensors Drive Gears B542 PAPER TRAY UNIT Relay Rollers Bottom Plate Pad B543 LCT Bottom Plate Pad
EM C C C
80K R R R C L 150K C C
160K R R R C L 300K C C 300K C 300K
240K R R R C L 450K C C 450K C 450K
NOTE Belt cleaner Belt cleaner Dry or damp cloth Blower brush Grease, G501 NOTE Dry or damp cloth Dry or damp cloth NOTE Dry or damp cloth NOTE Water or alcohol. Replace if required. Dry cloth Blower brush Replace if required. Empty hopper.
EM
EM
150K C
B408/B545 EM 150K 1000-SHEET/TWO-TRAY FINISHER Rollers C Brush Roller I I (A681 only) Discharge Brush C C Sensors C Jogger Fences I I Punch Waste Hopper* I I
*: Only for B545
I C I I
I C I I
B546 BOOKLET FINISHER Transport Belt Stapler Paddles B544 1-BIN TRAY UNIT Rollers Copy Tray Sensors
EM
150K C C
300K C C 300K
450K C C 450K
NOTE
EM C C C
150K
NOTE Dry or damp cloth Dry or damp cloth Blower brush
B264/B265
2-4
SM

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None
GENERAL CAUTIONS
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS CAUTION
To avoid damage to the transfer belt, drum, or development unit when it is removed or re-installed, never turn off either power switch while electrical components are active.
CAUTION
Replacement Adjustment
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting any of the procedures in this section.
3.1.1 LASER UNIT

1. Do not loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode casing. Doing so would throw the LD unit out of adjustment. 2. Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit, as they are adjusted in the factory. 3. The polygon mirror and F-theta lenses are very sensitive to dust. Do not open the optical housing unit. 4. Do not touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare hands. 5. After replacing the LD unit, perform the laser beam pitch adjustment. Otherwise, an SC condition will be generated.
3.1.2 USED TONER

1. Dispose of used toner in accordance with local regulations. Never throw toner into an open flame, for toner dust may ignite.
SM
3-1
B264/B265
SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

3.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
Part Number A0069104 A2929500 VSSM9000 A2309003 A2309004 B6455010 B6456800 G0219350 Description Scanner Positioning Pin (4 pc./set) Test Chart S5S (10 pc./set) Digital Multimeter FLUKE 187 Adjustment Cam Laser Unit Positioning Pin Laser Unit SD Card USB Read/Writer Loop Back Connector Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3.2.2 LUBRICANTS
Part Number A2579300 52039502 Description Grease Barrierta S552R Silicone Grease G-501 Qty 1 1
B264/B265
3-2
SM
FRONT DOOR
3.3 FRONT DOOR
[A]
B195R901.WMF
1. Open front door. 2. To remove the front door, remove left pin [A], and right pin [B].
SM
3-3
B264/B265
[B]
DUPLEX UNIT
3.4 DUPLEX UNIT

[A] [C] [B]
[D]
B195R903.WMF
1. Connector cover [A] ( x1) 2. Duplex connectors [B] ( x2) 3. Duplex support arm [C] ( x1) 4. Duplex unit [D] NOTE: Grip the duplex unit with both hands, slowly rotate it towards you and then lift up.
B264/B265
3-4
SM
RIGHT UPPER COVER
3.5 RIGHT UPPER COVER
[A]
B195R904.WMF
NOTE: Work carefully to avoid damaging the development roller. Duplex unit ( 3.4) Transfer belt unit ( 3.13.1) Remove the upper right cover [A] ( x1) Loop fastener ( x1) ( x1, Bushing x1)
SM
3-5
B264/B265
BY-PASS TRAY UNIT
3.6 BY-PASS TRAY UNIT
[B]
[C] [D]
[A]
B195R902.WMF
Use this procedure to remove the complete by-pass tray unit from the machine. If you wish to remove only the table, or some of the components of this unit, see 3.16. 1. Duplex unit ( 3.4) 2. Left cover [A] ( x1) 3. Right cover [B] ( x1) 4. Connectors [C] ( x2) 5. By-pass unit [D] ( x4) NOTE: After removing the screws, lift to unhook the by-pass tray unit from the frame of the machine.
B264/B265
3-6
SM
REAR COVERS
3.7 REAR COVERS

3.7.1 REAR UPPER COVER
[A] [B]
B195R953.WMF
1. Rear upper cover [A] ( x2) 2. Controller cover [B] ( x2)
3.7.2 REAR LOWER COVER
[A]
B195R905.WMF
1. Rear lower cover [A] ( x4)
SM
3-7
B264/B265
LEFT COVER
3.8 LEFT COVER
[B]
[A]
B195R955.WMF
1. Left upper cover [A] ( x4) 2. Controller cover [B] ( x2)
B264/B265
3-8
SM
SCANNER UNIT
3.9 SCANNER UNIT

3.9.1 ARDF
[A]
[B]
B195R906.WMF
1. Interface connector (not shown) 2. ARDF [A] ( x2) Push the ARDF towards the rear of the machine to align the keyholes in the ARDF base with the heads of the stud screws and lift.
SM
3-9
B264/B265
SCANNER UNIT
3.9.2 EXPOSURE GLASS

[D] [A]
[C] [B]
B195R907.WMF
1. Open the ARDF or platen cover. 2. Rear scale [A] ( x3) 3. Left scale [B] ( x2) 4. Exposure glass [C] 5. DF exposure glass [D] NOTE: When reinstalling the exposure glass, make sure that the white dot is positioned at the rear left corner.
B264/B265
3-10
SM
SCANNER UNIT
3.9.3 SCANNER EXTERIOR PANELS, OPERATION PANEL

[E] [C]
[A]
[D]
[B]
B195R908.WMF
[C]
B195R909.WMF
1. ARDF (
3.9.1) 3.9.2)
2. Exposure glass and DF exposure glass ( 3. Operation panel [A] ( x2, x1) 4. Operation panel base [B] ( x4)
5. Scanner rear cover [C] ( x4). Carefully lift in the direction of the arrow to disconnect the tab. 6. Right cover [D] ( x3 ) 7. Left cover [E] ( x2)
SM
3-11
B264/B265
SCANNER UNIT
3.9.4 LENS BLOCK, SBU ASSEMBLY

[A]
[B]
[C]
B195R910.WMF
1. ARDF (
3.9.1) 3.9.2)
2. Exposure glass and DF exposure glass ( 3. Lens cover [A] ( x4) 4. Flexible cable [B] ( x1)
5. Lens block assembly [C] ( x4) NOTE: The elements of the lens block assembly have been factory adjusted and paint locked at 8 points. Do not attempt to replace these items. Replace the unit. 6. Perform scanner and printer copy adjustments ( 3.21)
B264/B265
3-12
SM
SCANNER UNIT
3.9.5 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS

[B] [A] [C]
B195R911.WMF
1. ARDF (
3.9.1) 3.9.2) 3.9.4)
2. Exposure glass ( 3. Lens block (
4. Original size sensor [A] ( x1, x1) 5. Original size sensor [B] ( x1, x1) 6. Original size sensor [C] ( x1, x1)
SM
3-13
B264/B265
SCANNER UNIT
3.9.6 EXPOSURE LAMP

[D] [C]
[A]
B195R912.WMF
[B]
1. ARDF (
3.9.1) 3.9.2)
2. Exposure glass (
3. Operation panel [A] ( x2, x1) 4. Slide 1st scanner [B] to the cutout to expose connector and screw. 5. Exposure lamp [C] ( x1, x1) Important Never touch the glass surface of the exposure lamp with bare hands [D]. Slide the exposure lamp toward the rear to disengage the tab on its base from the hole below and then lift out.
B264/B265
3-14
SM
SCANNER UNIT
3.9.7 SCANNER HP SENSOR/PLATEN COVER SENSOR

[B] [C]
[A]
B195R913.WMF
1. ARDF (
3.9.1)
2. Scanner rear cover ( 3.9.3) 3. Scanner HP sensor bracket [A] ( x1) 4. Scanner HP sensor [B] ( x1) 5. Platen cover sensor [C] ( x1, x1)
SM
3-15
B264/B265
SCANNER UNIT
3.9.8 SCANNER MOTOR
[A]
[C]
[B]
B195R914.WMF
1. ARDF (
3.9.1)
2. Scanner rear cover ( 3.9.3) 3. Rear bracket [A] ( x5, x2) 4. Scanner motor bracket [B] ( x3, x1, spring x1, timing belt x1) NOTE: Loosen motor bracket [B] ( x3) to release tension on belt (motor slides side to side). 5. Scanner motor [C] ( x2, x1) 6. Perform scanner and printer copy adjustments ( 3.21)
B264/B265
3-16
SM
SCANNER UNIT
3.9.9 LAMP STABILIZER AND SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE BOARD
[A]
[B]
[C]
B195R915.WMF
1. ARDF (
3.9.1)
2. Scanner rear cover ( 3.9.3) 3. Rear bracket [A] ( x5, x2) 4. Lamp stabilizer [B] ( x2, Standoffs x3) 5. Scanner motor drive board [C] ( x2, x2)
SM
3-17
B264/B265
SCANNER UNIT
3.9.10 SCANNER WIRE

[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B195R916.WMF
1. ARDF (
3.9.1) 3.9.2) 3.9.3)
2. Exposure glass (
3. Scanner exterior panels and operation panel ( Front wire: 4. Left stay [A] ( x5) 5. Right stay [B] ( x5) 6. Front stay [C] ( x6) 7. Front scanner rail [D] ( x2) 8. To replace the scanner wire, see page 3-20.
B264/B265
3-18
SM
SCANNER UNIT
Rear wire:
[A] [B]
[C]
[D]
B195R917.WMF
1. Scanner HP sensor bracket [A] ( x1) 2. Scanner motor ( 3.9.8) 3. Rear bracket [B] ( x9) 4. Rear scanner rail [C] ( x2) 5. Scanner drive pulley [D] ( x1)
SM
3-19
B264/B265
SCANNER UNIT
[A] [B]
B195R918.WMF
B195R920.WMF
[C] To replace the scanner wire: 1. Front and rear scanner wire bracket [A] ( x1 ea.) 2. Tension spring [B] 3. Tension bracket [C] ( x1). Loosen and do not remove! 4. Remove wires, front and rear. 5. Attach the new wires. NOTE: Illustration above shows the front wire. 6. Pass the wire through the pulleys as shown in the illustration, and then pass the bead-end of the wire through the slot in the pulley. 7. Turn the pulley until you see the red mark on the wire. 2 turns and 6 turns (see top illustration) 8. Without allowing the wire to loosen, tape the wire to the pulley. 9. Pass the wire through c. 10. Complete threading the wire: defTension springScrew 11. Scanner wire bracket g ( x1)
B264/B265
3-20
SM
SCANNER UNIT
[A]
[B]
[D] [A]
[C] Completion:
B195R921.WMF
1. Adjust the 1st scanner [A] position with the scanner positioning tools (P/N A0069104). 2. Secure the 1st scanner with the scanner wire brackets [B] ( x2) 3. Tighten tension bracket [C] ( x1) 4. Secure scanner wire pulley [D] (Allen screw x1) 1) Remove the positioning tools. After sliding the scanner to the right and left several times, set the positioning tools to check the scanner wire bracket and tension bracket again. 2) Reassemble the scanner and do the scanner and printer copy adjustments ( 3.21)
SM
3-21
B264/B265
LASER UNIT
3.10 LASER UNIT WARNING

Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting any of the procedures in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
3.10.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS

Two caution decals are located in the laser section as shown below. (See the next page for removal instructions.)
B195R500.WMF
CAUTION VORSICHT
CATION-CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM VORSICHT-LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN
>PS<
B195R922.WMF
B264/B265
3-22
SM
LASER UNIT
3.10.2 LASER UNIT

[D]
[A]
[B]
[E] [F] [C]

B195R211.WMF
WARNING
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting this procedure. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes. 1. Open the front door. 2. Raise the toner bottle holder handle [A]. 3. Remove front door [B] (Pins x2) 4. Remove toner collection plate [C] ( x). 5. Remove inner cover [D] ( x 2, x 1) 6. While pressing in the top leaf on the left side, remove the shield glass cover [E]. The shield glass cover holds the shield glass firmly in place and prevents it from accidental removal. When re-attaching the shield glass cover, the top leaf lies on top of the plastic form. 7. Shield glass [F]
SM
3-23
B264/B265
LASER UNIT
[B]
[C]
[A] 8. Shield plate [A] ( x 2)
B195R900.WMF
9. While holding the LD board securely, disconnect the laser unit [B] ( x 6, Flat film cable x1) 10. Hold the laser unit [C] by its casing, slide it out of the machine ( x 2)
B264/B265
3-24
SM
LASER UNIT
3.10.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR
[A]
[B]
B195R928.WMF
B195R923.WMF
1. Laser unit (
3.10.2)
2. Laser unit cover [A] ( x4, 2 hooks) 3. Polygon mirror motor [B] ( x4, x1) 4. After replacing the motor, do the image adjustment. ( 3.21)
SM
3-25
B264/B265
LASER UNIT
3.10.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR
[A]
B195R929.WMF
1. Laser unit (
3.10.2)
2. Laser synchronization detector [A] ( x1, x1).
B264/B265
3-26
SM
LASER UNIT
3.10.5 LD UNIT
[A]
B195R513.WMF
1. Laser unit (
3.10.2)
2. LD unit [A] ( x3, x1) NOTE: To avoid damaging the LD board, hold it securely when disconnecting the connectors. Hold the laser unit casing. 3. After replacing the LD board, perform SP 2-109 to adjust the laser beam pitch (described on the next page).
SM
3-27
B264/B265
LASER UNIT
Laser beam pitch adjustment

After replacing the LD board, perform the laser beam pitch adjustment. There are two laser beam pitch adjustment procedures: one for 400 dpi, and one for 600 dpi. These adjustments use the following SP modes.
SP2-110 SP2-109-1: SP2-109-2: SP2-109-3: SP2-109-4: Test Mode Dpi (0: 400 dpi, 8: 600 dpi) LD Beam Pitch Adjustment 400 dpi LD Beam Pitch Adjustment 600 dpi LD Initial Setting 400 dpi LD Initial Setting 600 dpi
1. Set SP2-110 to 0 (for 400 dpi), or to 8 (for 600 dpi). 2. Do SP 2-109-8 to reset all the beam pitch data. 3. For SP2-109-1 input 144. NOTE: The entry 144 is only a starting reference value that will allow the machine to operate. It is only a starting point for adjustment. 4. Do SP2-109-3. 5. Print the test pattern onto A3 (11" x 17") paper using SP2-902-3 No. 12. ( 5.2.3 Test Pattern Printing (SP2-902). 6. On the test pattern write 144, the value of SP2-109-1. 7. Change the value of SP2-109-1 and then print another test pattern, repeating steps 2 to 6. Print about 5 patterns with different values for SP2-109-1 (e.g. 48, 96, 192, 240). 8. Check these test patterns. If the laser beam pitch is not correct, the image looks like a black vertical stripe pattern. NOTE: For example, if the pattern made with the value 192 has fewer obvious stripes than the other printouts, the correct value is near 192. 9. Fine adjustment: Do steps 2 to 6 to adjust the laser beam pitch position until thin lines are of uniform thickness (no stripes should appear on the printout). NOTE: In step 3, input a value estimated to be correct (e.g., if 192 was the closest, try 182), then do steps 4 and 5, then if necessary go back to step 2 and try another value.
B264/B265
3-28
SM
LASER UNIT
10. After adjusting the laser beam pitch for 400 dpi, adjust it for 600 dpi, using the same procedure as for 400 dpi (use the SP modes for 600 dpi). Laser beam pitch for 600 dpi should be 24~48 more than for 400 dpi. OK: Adjustment Complete
B195R552.WMF
NG: Adjustment Not Complete
B195R553.WMF
SM
3-29
B264/B265
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
3.11 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)

3.11.1 PCU
[B]
[D]
[A]
B195R930.WMF
[C]
B195R931.WMF
1. Open the front door. 2. Lower the by-pass tray, open the duplex unit, and open the transfer unit right cover. 3. Spread a sheet of A4/ LTR paper on top of the open front door to catch loose toner. 4. Loosen [A] ( x 1). 5. Push [B] slightly to the left. 6. Raise the release lever [C]. 7. Hold the PCU at [D] and pull it out of the machine. 8. Cover the OPC with a sheet of paper to protect the drum from light. Reinstallation Open the right cover before you install the PCU in the machine. Make sure that the PCU brackets are engaged with the rails before you slowly push the PCU into the machine.
B264/B265
3-30
SM
3.11.2 DRUM
[B]
[A]
B195R932.WMF
[D] [C] 1. Remove the PCU ( 2. Toner cap [A] 3. Insert the toner cap [A] into the toner entrance hole [B]. NOTE: Make sure that the cap is inserted completely into the hole. 4. On the left side of the PCU, disconnect the spring [C]. 5. On the right side of the PCU disconnect the spring [D] and attach it to hooks as shown. To prevent breaking the weaker hook , use a pair of needle-nose pliers to disconnect the spring at , then re-attach to and . Moving this spring retracts the movable drum cleaning blade so it does not touch the surface of the drum when the drum is reinstalled.
3 3
B195R934.WMF
3.11.1)
1
B195R935.WMF
SM
3-31
B264/B265
[A] [B]
B195R936.WMF B195R97.WMF
[D]
[C]
6. Turn the PCU upside-down, and remove lower PCU cover [A] ( x 2, 3 pawls). 7. Pull the drum [B] towards the front (the left side in the illustration) while [D], and then remove releasing the charge roller [C] using the release lever the drum . CAUTION: Never touch the drum surface with bare hands. 8. Replace the drum and re-attach the lower PCU cover. 9. Detach the spring from .
and re-attach to
CAUTION: You must re-attach the spring to , in order for the cleaning blade to operate correctly. If you fail to re-attach the spring to , the movable cleaning blade will not contact the drum for cleaning, but the machine will operate without generating an error. However, copies will gradually become dirty due to toner collecting on the drum. 10. Re-attach the spring on the left side of the PCU.
1
B195R938.WMF
11. After replacing the drum, perform the ID sensor initial setting using SP3001 002. 12. Do SP2805 to initialize the developer.
B264/B265
3-32
SM
3.11.3 PICK-OFF PAWLS
[B]
B195R933.WMF
1. Remove the drum. ( 2. Pawl assembly [A]
3.11.2)
3. Pick-off pawl [B] (spring x 1, spur x 1)
Pick-off pawl position adjustment

If the pick-off pawl has marked the drum with a line, the pick-off pawl position can be adjusted using either method: Changing the spur position. Changing the pick-off pawl assembly position CAUTION: After re-assembly make sure that the front spring of the movable position. ( 3.11.2) cleaning blade is re-attached to the ,
SM
3-33
B264/B265
[A]
3.11.4 CHARGE ROLLER AND CLEANING ROLLER
[D]
[B] [A]
[E]
B195R937.WMF
[C] 1. Remove the drum. ( 3.11.2)
2. Two clip rings [A] ( x 2). 3. Push charge roller holder [B] toward the front of the PCU and remove the spring [C]. 4. Charge roller [D]. NOTE: Disengage the charge roller on the right side to remove. Try to avoid touching the charge roller. 5. Cleaning roller [E]. NOTE: Disengage the cleaning roller on the left to remove. 6. After replacing the charge roller and cleaning roller, check the value of SP2001 001. If it is not at the standard value (1500 V), set SP2001 001 to 1500 V. NOTE: If this is not done, the carrier will be attracted to the drum because the charge roller voltage will be too high. CAUTION: After re-assembly make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re-attached to the , position. ( 3.11.2)
B264/B265
3-34
SM
3.11.5 DRUM CLEANING BLADE 2
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C] 1. Remove the OPC drum. ( 3.11.2) 3.11.4)
B195R939.WMF
2. Remove the charge roller and cleaning roller. ( 3. Remove the movable cleaning blade [A]. ( x 1)
Re-installation Engage the left end of the cleaning blade first, then make sure that both arms [B] and [C] are through the holes on the left and right side. When you re-attach the clip-ring, make sure that the head of the clip ring [D] is below the blade. CAUTION: After re-assembly make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re-attached to the , position. ( 3.11.2)
SM
3-35
B264/B265
3.11.6 DRUM CLEANING BLADE 1
[A]
B195R940.WMF
1. Remove the drum. (
3.11.2) 3.11.4) 3.11.5)
2. Remove the charge roller and cleaning roller. ( 3. Remove the movable cleaning blade. (
4. Remove the stationary drum cleaning blade [A] ( x 2) CAUTION: After re-assembly make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re-attached to the , position. ( 3.11.2)
B264/B265
3-36
SM
3.11.7 ID SENSOR
[A]
[B]
B195R941.WMF
[C] Remove: Remove the PCU ( 3.11.1) Fusing unit ( 3.15) Development unit ( 3.12.1) 1. Remove the PCU rail [A] ( x2, x1) 2. Remove the ID sensor bracket [B] ( x1, x1) 3. Remove the ID sensor [C] ( x1) 4. Do SP3-001-2 to initialize the ID sensor.
SM
3-37
B264/B265
DEVELOPMENT
3.12 DEVELOPMENT
3.12.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
[B]
[C]
[A]
B195R943.WMF
B195R942.WMF
Open the right upper cover and front cover. PCU. ( 3.11.1) 1. Spread paper on a clean flat surface that is free of pins, paper clips, staples, screws or any other metal objects. 2. Loosen [A] ( x 1). 3. Push [B] slightly to the left. 4. Development unit [C] NOTE: Pull slowly to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller. 5. Set the development unit on the spread paper. 6. If you are temporarily installing a used development unit for test purposes, perform SP2-220 and 2-802-1 after installation. For more, see Section "5. Service Tables".
B264/B265
3-38
SM
DEVELOPMENT
3.12.2 DEVELOPMENT FILTER

[A]
[B]
[C]
1. Development unit (
3.12.1)
2. Upper development cover [A] ( x2) 3. Development filter [B] NOTE: Make sure that the surface with the red mark is facing up. 4. Make sure that the ground plate [C] is positioned correctly.
SM
3-39
B264/B265
DEVELOPMENT
3.12.3 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER

[A]
B195R946.WMF
1. Development unit ( 3.12.1) 2. Upper development cover ( 3.12.2) 3. Development roller [A] ( x2) NOTE: Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller.
B264/B265
3-40
SM
DEVELOPMENT
3.12.4 DEVELOPER
[B]
B195R947.WMF
[A] [D] [C]
B195R948.WMF
1. Development unit (
3.12.1) 3.12.3)
2. Remove the development roller ( 3. Tip out the old developer [A].
4. Turn drive gear [B] to ensure that no developer remains in the unit or on the developer roller. NOTE: Dispose of the used developer in accordance with local regulations. Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller. 5. Pour approximately 1/3 of the developer [C] evenly along the length of the development unit. 6. Rotate the drive gear [D] to work the developer into the unit. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until all toner is in the unit and level with the edges.
SM
3-41
B264/B265
DEVELOPMENT
[A]
B195R949.WMF
7.
Reassemble the development unit
8. Cover the toner entrance hole [A] with a piece of paper. 9. Install the development unit in the machine. 10. Turn on the main power switch, make sure that the machine has warmed up, then perform the TD sensor initial setting using SP 2-801. NOTE: When performing this setting, cover the toner entrance hole with a piece of paper. This prevents used toner falling from the PCU into the development unit during the TD sensor initial setting and interfering with the Vref setting (toner density reference voltage). 11. After performing the TD sensor initial setting, remove the sheet [A] from the development unit.
B264/B265
3-42
SM
DEVELOPMENT
3.12.5 TD SENSOR
[A]
B195R950.WMF
1. Remove the development unit. ( 3.12.1) 2. Empty all developer from the development unit 3. TD sensor [A] ( x1) NOTE: The TD sensor is attached to the casing with double-sided tape. Pry it off with the flat head of a screwdriver. Use fresh double-sided tape to re-attach the sensor. 4. Pour new developer into the development unit and perform the TD sensor initial setting using SP2-801. NOTE: When performing the TD sensor initial setting, cover the toner entrance hole with a piece of paper.
SM
3-43
B264/B265
TRANSFER UNIT
3.13 TRANSFER UNIT

3.13.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT
[A]
[B]
B195R952.WMF
B195R951.WMF
NOTE: To avoid exposing the PCU drum to strong light, cover it with paper if the right cover will be open for a long period. 1. Lower the by-pass tray, open the duplex unit, and open the right cover. 2. Transfer unit [A] (Hook x1) 3. Transfer belt [B] (springs x2, Hook x1) NOTE: Avoid touching the transfer belt surface.
B264/B265
3-44
SM
TRANSFER UNIT
3.13.2 TRANSFER BELT

[B] [E]
[A] [C] [D]

B195R954.WMF
[B] 1. Remove the transfer belt unit. ( 2. Belt drive gear [A] 3. Set screws [B] ( x2) 4. Lay on a flat, clean surface and fold the unit to release the tension on the belt [C]. 5. Transfer belt [D] NOTE: 1) Avoid touching the transfer belt surface. 2) Before installing the new transfer belt, clean all the rollers and shafts with alcohol to prevent the belt from slipping. 3) When reinstalling the transfer belt, make sure that the belt is under the pin [E]. 4) To avoid damaging the transfer belt during installation, manually turn the rollers and make sure that the new transfer belt is not running over the edges of any of the rollers. 3.13.1)
SM
3-45
B264/B265
TRANSFER UNIT
3.13.3 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING BLADE AND TONER OVERFLOW SENSOR
R Br Bl
[A]
[B]
B195R523.WMF
Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 1. Transfer belt unit. ( 3.13.1) 2. Transfer belt. ( 3.13.2) 3. Transfer belt cleaning blade [A] ( x3) NOTE: Avoid touching the edge of the new blade. Check the new blade for dust or damage. Toner Overflow Sensor 1. Transfer belt unit. ( 2. Transfer belt. 3. Transfer belt cleaning blade [A] ( x3) 4. Turn over the transfer unit and empty the used toner in the transfer unit. 5. Toner overflow sensor [B] ( x1, x3) NOTE: Re-install the color-coded wires in the correct order. R: Red, Br: Brown, Bl: Blue 3.13.1)
B264/B265
3-46
SM
PAPER FEED
3.14 PAPER FEED

3.14.1 PICK-UP, SEPARATION, AND FEED ROLLERS
[B]
[A]
B195R956.WMF
[C]
1. Paper tray 2. Pick-up roller [A] 3. Feed roller [B] ( x 1) 4. Separation roller [C] ( x 1)
SM
3-47
B264/B265
PAPER FEED
3.14.2 RIGHT LOWER COVER
1. Duplex unit (
3.4)
2. By-pass tray ( 3.6) 3. LCT (if installed) 4. Lower right cover [A] ( x5) 5. Vertical transport cover [B] NOTE: Push the cover completely to the left and then press in on the right tab to release the peg from the hole.
B264/B265
3-48
SM
PAPER FEED
3.14.3 RELAY/UPPER PAPER FEED AND LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCHES

[D] [E]
[A]
[F]
[C]
B195R958.WMF
[B] 1. Rear lower cover ( 3.7.2)
2. Remove the IOB. ( 3.19.3) 3. First paper feed clutch bracket [A] ( x2, bushing x1) 4. Second paper feed clutch bracket [B] ( x2, bushing x1) 5. Drive bracket [C] ( x1, spring x1, bearing x1) 6. Relay clutch [D] ( x1) 7. Upper paper feed clutch [E] ( x1) 8. Lower paper feed clutch [F] ( x1)
SM
3-49
B264/B265
PAPER FEED
3.14.4 UPPER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 1

[B]
[B]
[A] [B]
B195R959.WMF
[C]
B195R960.WMF
1. Upper paper tray 2. Right lower cover. ( 3.14.2) 3. Right upper cover ( 5. 3 relay gears [B] 6. Upper paper feed unit [C] ( x2, x1) 3.5) 4. Upper paper feed clutch [A] ( 3.14.3 )
B264/B265
3-50
SM
PAPER FEED
3.14.5 LOWER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 2
[B]
B195R962.WMF
[C]
[E] [D]
B195R961.WMF
1. Lower the paper trays 2. Right lower cover ( 3.14.2) 3. Remove the lower paper feed clutch [A] ( 3.14.3 ) 4. Relay gears [B] (x2) 5. Cover [C] ( x2) 6. Gear [D] (x1) 7. Lower paper feed unit [E] ( x2, x1)
SM
3-51
B264/B265
[A]
PAPER FEED
3.14.6 PAPER END/PAPER HEIGHT/RELAY SENSORS

[A] [B] [C]
[D]
B195R963.WMF
1. Remove the appropriate paper feed unit. ( 3.14.4, 3.14.5) 2. Paper height sensor [A] ( x1) 3. Paper end sensor [B] ( x1). 4. Relay sensor bracket [C] ( x1) 5. Relay sensor [D] ( x1).
B264/B265
3-52
SM
PAPER FEED
3.14.7 REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Remove [D] Front door ( 3-3) Rear upper cover ( 3.7.1) [C] Right upper cover ( 3.5) Transfer belt unit ( 3.13.1 PCU ( 3.11.1) 2. Development unit ( 3.12.1) 3. Inner cover [A] ( x2) 4. Front registration holder [B] ( x1) 5. Front registration roller gear [C] ( x1) 6. Registration roller bushing [D] (spring x 1) 7. High voltage power supply board [E] ( x3, x6) 8. Flywheel [F] ( x3) 9. Right rear cover [G] ( x3) [G] [E]
[B] [A]
B195R998.WMF
[F]
B195R981.WMF
10. Right cover switch bracket [H] ( x1) 11. Rear registration holder [I] ( x1) 12. Registration roller bushing [J] ( x1, spring x1)
[I]
[J] [H]
B195R982.WMF
SM
3-53
B264/B265
PAPER FEED
[B]
[A]
B195R983.WMF
[D] [E]
[C]
B195R984.WMF
13. Guide plate [A] and registration roller [B] (spring x1, x 1) 14. Registration guide plate [C] ( x2, x1) 15. Sensor bracket [D] ( x1) 16. Registration sensor [E] ( x1, x1)
B264/B265
3-54
SM
PAPER FEED
3.14.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR
[A]
[B]
B195R964.WMF
1. Rear lower cover (
3.7.2)
2. Remove the IOB ( 3.19.3) 3. Bracket [A] ( x2, x1) 4. Tray lift motor [C] ( x2)
SM
3-55
B264/B265
PAPER FEED
3.14.9 FEED/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR
[B]
[A]
[C] 1. Rear lower cover ( x4) ( 2. Rear upper cover ( x4) ( 3. Tray lift motor ( 3.14.8) 3.7.2) 3.7.1)
B195R985.WMF
4. Support [A] ( x2, harnesses x2) 5. Timing belt [B] (Raise arm to release tension on belt.) 6. Feed/development motor [C] ( x3, x2)
B264/B265
3-56
SM
PAPER FEED
3.14.10 IDLE ROLLER DUST BLADE
[A]
B195R986.WMF
1. Open the duplex unit and right door. 2. Detach the dust blade [A]. 3. Spread some paper on a flat surface and tap the dust blade gently to remove paper dust collected in its dust box.
SM
3-57
B264/B265
PAPER FEED
3.14.11 REGISTRATION ROLLER DUST BLADE
[A]
B195R988.WMF
[B] [C]
B195R987.WMF
1. Open the duplex unit and open the right door. 2. Remove the PCU ( 3.11.1) 3. Remove the development unit [A]. 4. Press the top of the blade [B] to unlock it and open it to the left. 5. Remove the dust blade [C] from the machine.
B264/B265
3-58
SM
FUSING UNIT
3.15 FUSING UNIT CAUTION

Allow time for the unit to cool before doing the following procedure.
3.15.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL

[B]
[C]
[A] [D]
B195R989.WMF
1. Open the front door, duplex unit, and right door. 2. Set screw [A] ( x 1) 3. Fusing unit release lever [B] 4. Slide out the fusing unit [C] NOTE: The larger knob [D] is provided to make turning the hot roller easier to free jams.
SM
3-59
B264/B265
FUSING UNIT
3.15.2 FUSING UNIT EXIT GUIDE
[A]
B195R990.WMF
1. Fusing unit (
3.15.1)
2. Exit guide [A]. Press the guide to the left and then press on the right end to release the peg from the hole.
B264/B265
3-60
SM
FUSING UNIT
3.15.3 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS

[A]
B195R991.WMF
1. Fusing unit (
3.15.1)
2. Fusing unit cover [A] ( x4) NOTE: Note the positioning of the step screws x2 and the set screws x2. 3. Hot roller strippers x7 and springs x7
SM
3-61
B264/B265
[B]
FUSING UNIT
3.15.4 FUSING LAMPS
[C]
[A] [B]
B195R992.WMF
[E]
[D]
B195R993.WMF
1. Fusing unit (
3.15.1)
2. Fusing unit cover ( 3.15.3) 3. Fusing entrance guide [A] ( x2) 4. Lower cover [B] ( x1) Left side 5. Two terminals [C] ( x2) 6. Center fusing lamp lead [D] (Clamps x3) 7. Bracket [E] ( x1)
B264/B265
3-62
SM
FUSING UNIT
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B] Right side 1. Two terminals [A] ( x2) 2. Spring [B] 3. Connector bracket [C] ( x2)
B195R994.WMF
4. Bracket [D] ( x1) Important To avoid breaking the fusing lamps, handle them with care. Avoid touching the lamps with bare hands. Note the top/bottom positioning of the fusing lamps as you remove them. The sizes of the holes in the holder match the sizes of the ends of the 650 W lamp (red) and 650 W lamp (brown). 5. Remove both fusing lamps.
SM
3-63
B264/B265
FUSING UNIT
3.15.5 THERMISTORS AND THERMOSTATS
[B] [A]
B195R995.WMF
[C]
[D] 1. Fusing unit ( 3.15.1) 3.15.3)
B195R996.WMF
2. Fusing upper and lower cover. (
3. Center thermistor [A] ( x1, x1, holder x1) 4. End thermistor [B] ( x1, x1, holder x1) CAUTION: The thermistors are thinly coated and extremely fragile. Handle with care to avoid damaging them. They should be replaced every 150K. 5. Center thermostat [C] ( x2) 6. End thermostat [D] ( x2)
B264/B265
3-64
SM
FUSING UNIT
3.15.6 HOT ROLLER/PRESSURE ROLLER
[C]
[A]
[B] 1. Fusing unit ( 3.15.1) 3.15.3) 3.15.4)
B195R997.WMF
2. Fusing upper and lower cover. ( 3. Fusing lamps. ( 4. Springs x2 [A] (both sides) 5. Arms x2 [B] (both sides) 6. Pawl bracket [C] ( x4)
SM
3-65
B264/B265
FUSING UNIT
[D] [A] [B] [E] [C]
[G]
[F]
B195R970.WMF
7. Hot roller [A] CAUTION: The hot roller is easily damaged. Always handle it carefully. 8. C-rings x2 [B] (both ends) 9. Drive gear [C] 10. Bushings x2 [D] (both ends) 11. Pressure roller [E] 12. Fusing knob [F] ( x1) 13. Bushings x2 [G] (both ends) NOTE: 1) Before installing the new hot roller, peel off 3 cm (1 inch) from both ends of the protective sheet on the new roller. 2) Never touch the surface of the rollers. 3) Work carefully to avoid damaging the surface of the hot roller. 4) The standard pressure roller spring position is the upper position. 5) When reinstalling the hot roller assembly and pressure roller assembly, make sure that the flange position of the bushings is as shown.
B264/B265
3-66
SM
FUSING UNIT
3.15.7 FUSING UNIT SIDE FAN

[A]
[B]
B195R971.WMF
B195R972.WMF
1. Open the duplex unit and right door. 2. Release the transfer unit [A] and remove it. 3. Remove the shaft cover [B] ( x 3).
SM
3-67
B264/B265
FUSING UNIT
[A]
B195R973.WMF
[C]
[B]
B195R919.WMF
4. Separate the fan connectors [A] ( x 1). NOTE: When re-connecting, thread the connector correctly between the gaps. 5. Close the right door. 6. Use a short screwdriver to remove the fan plate [B] ( x 2). 7. Pull the fan [C] out of the machine ( x 1).
B264/B265
3-68
SM
FUSING UNIT
3.15.8 FUSING UNIT CORNER FAN
[A]
B195R974.WMF
[C]
B195R975.WMF
[B] 1. Open the front door. 2. Open the duplex unit and right door. 3. Remove the fusing unit. ( 3.15.1) 4. Remove the magnet lock [A] of the front door ( x 2). 5. Remove the fan bracket [B] ( x 2). 6. Remove the fan [C] from the bracket ( x 2, x 1).
SM
3-69
B264/B265
BY-PASS TRAY
3.16 BY-PASS TRAY

3.16.1 COVER REPLACEMENT
[D] [A]
[B] [C]
B195R976.WMF
1. Rear cover [A] ( x1) 2. Front cover [B] ( x1) 3. Hinge cover [C] ( x1) 4. Upper cover [D] ( x2) 5. Close the duplex unit and pull out the upper cover.
B264/B265
3-70
SM
BY-PASS TRAY
3.16.2 BY-PASS PAPER FEED AND PICK-UP ROLLER REPLACEMENT

[C]
[B]
B195R977.WMF
[A]
1. Upper cover (
3.16.1)
2. Lift up paper end feeler [A] to lock feeler in position. NOTE: Before reinstalling the upper cover, return the paper end feeler to its original position. 3. Replace the paper feed roller [B] ( x1) 4. Replace the pick-up roller [C].
SM
3-71
B264/B265
BY-PASS TRAY
3.16.3 BY-PASS SEPARATION ROLLER
[A]
B195R978.WMF
1. Close the by-pass table. 2. Remove the separation roller [A] from the bottom ( x1)
B264/B265
3-72
SM
BY-PASS TRAY
3.16.4 PAPER END SENSOR, PICK-UP SOLENOID
[C]
[B]
[A]
B195R979.WMF
1. Upper cover (
3.16.1)
2. Lift paper end feeler [A]. NOTE: Before reinstalling the upper cover, return the paper end feeler to its original position. 3. Replace the paper end sensor [B] ( x1). 4. Pick-up solenoid [C] ( x1, ) x1, spring x1)
SM
3-73
B264/B265
BY-PASS TRAY
3.16.5 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD REPLACEMENT
[C] [B]
[A]
B195R980.WMF
1. Hook [A] 2. Paper tray [B] ( x1). 3. Size sensor board [C]. NOTE: To avoid breaking the hook of the paper size sensor board, handle it carefully during removal.
B264/B265
3-74
SM
BY-PASS TRAY
3.16.6 BY-PASS TABLE REMOVAL

[A] [B]
[C]
B195R801.WMF
Note: The entire by-pass tray unit can be removed, not just the table. ( 3.6) 1. Hinge cover ( 3.16.1) 2. Harness [A] ( x1). 3. Screws [B] ( x2) 4. By-pass table [C]. CAUTION: To relieve pressure on the spring during removal, depress it as shown in the illustration.
SM
3-75
B264/B265
BY-PASS TRAY
3.16.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
[A]
B195R802.WMF
[C] [B]
B195R803.WMF
1. By-pass tray (
3.16.6)
2. Paper feed unit [A] ( x2, x2) 3. Rear bracket [B] ( x4, x1, bushing x1, x2) 4. Paper feed clutch [C] ( x1)
B264/B265
3-76
SM
DUPLEX UNIT
3.17 DUPLEX UNIT

3.17.1 DUPLEX COVER REMOVAL
[A]
B195R804.WMF
1. Duplex unit cover [A] ( x4)
SM
3-77
B264/B265
DUPLEX UNIT
3.17.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A] [B]
B195R805.WMF
1. Duplex unit cover (
3.17.1)
2. Sensor holder [A] ( x1) 3. Entrance sensor [B] ( x1)
B264/B265
3-78
SM
DUPLEX UNIT
3.17.3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[A]
[B]
B195R806.WMF
1. Duplex unit ( 3.4) 2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x1) 3. Exit sensor [B] ( x1)
SM
3-79
B264/B265
DRIVE AREA
3.18 DRIVE AREA

3.18.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH, TRANSFER BELT CONTACT CLUTCH
[A] [B]
[D]
B195R807.WMF
[C]
B195R808.WMF
1. Rear upper cover ( x2) (
3.7.1)
2. High voltage supply board [A] ( x6, x3) NOTE: Make sure that you reconnect the wires in the correct order. They are labeled: 12BC 3. Flywheels [B] ( x3) 4. Registration clutch [C] ( x1, x1) 5. Transfer belt contact clutch [D] ( x2, x2)
B195R809.WMF
B264/B265
3-80
SM
DRIVE AREA
3.18.2 MAIN MOTOR
[A] [D]
[C] [B] Remove: Rear upper cover ( 3.7.1) High voltage power supply, flywheel ( 2. Timing belt [B] x1 3. Bracket [C] ( x2) 4. Main motor [D] ( x2, x3)
B195R924.WMF
3.18.1)
1. Remove the main cooling fan [A] ( x2, x1)
SM
3-81
B264/B265
DRIVE AREA
3.18.3 FUSING/EXIT MOTOR

Rear upper cover ( 3.7.1) Fusing unit cover ( 3.15.3) (Do not disconnect.) Paper output tray [A]: Harness clamps (x3) [B]: Connector bracket ( x1, x1) [C]: Main fan ( x1, x1) [A]
[C]
[B] [D]: Motor bracket ( x4, x2)
B195R925.WMF
[D] [E]: Fusing exit motor ( x4)
B195R926.WMF
[E]
B195R927.WMF
B264/B265
3-82
SM
DRIVE AREA
3.18.4 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR

[C]
[D] [B] [A]

B195R813.WMF
B195R810.WMF
[E]
[F]
1. Open the front door 2. Raise holder handle [A] 3. Push the holder lever [B] to the right 4. Stopper [C] 5. Toner bottle holder and bottle [D] 6. Motor harness [E] (clamps x 2) 7. Toner supply motor [F] (hooks x2, x1) NOTE: Press both sides of the motor to release it.
SM
3-83
B264/B265
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
3.19 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

3.19.1 NVRAM
The following data cannot downloaded from the SD card. Total count categories (SP7002*** Copy Counter) C/O, P/O Counter (SP7006*** C/O, P/O Count Display) Duplex, A3/DLT/Over 420 mm, Staple and Scanner application scanning counters (system settings). Important: Do not remove the NVRAM until you have uploaded its contents. Always touch a metal surface to discharge any static on your hands before you touch the controller board. Work carefully when removing the NVRAM to avoid damaging other components on the controller board or short circuiting the pins of other chips. 1. Do SP5990 001 to print the SMC report. 2. Turn off the main switch. 3. Remove the controller cover ( x2) ( 3.7.1) 4. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( x1). 5. Insert the SD card [B] into SD card slot C3. 6. Turn on the main switch. 7. Do SP5824. 8. Touch Execute to start uploading the NVRAM data. 9. Turn off the main switch and remove the SD card. 10. Remove the controller box ( x1) [B]
B195R806.WMF
[A]
B264/B265
3-84
SM
11. Remove the NVRAM (x2) from the controller board and replace them with the new chips. NOTE: Both NVRAM chips must be replaced. 12. Reinstall the controller box. 13. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data in SD card slot C3. 14. Turn on the machine. 15. Do SP5825. 16. Touch Execute to start downloading the NVRAM data. 17. Turn off the main switch and remove the SD card. 18. Turn on the machine. 19. Do SP5990 001 to print another SMC report. 20. Compare this new SMC report with the report you printed in Step 1. If any of the SP settings are different, enter the SP settings of the first report. 21. Execute SP5907 and enter the brand and model name of the machine for Windows Plug & Play capability. [A
SM
3-85
B264/B265
3.19.2 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
[A]
B195R820.WMF
1. Rear upper cover (
3.7.1)
2. High voltage power supply [A] ( x3, x6)
B264/B265
3-86
SM
3.19.3 IOB
[A]
B195R821.WMF
[B]
B195R822.WMF
1. Remove the rear lower cover [A] ( x 4). 2. Remove the IOB [B] ( All, x 4, Ribbon cable x 1). 3. The IOB is identical for the B264/B265. However, the DIP switches are set differently for each machine. Check the DIP switches then adjust settings as required. (See next page.)
SM
3-87
B264/B265
IOB DIP Switch Settings (SW101)

1. The position of SW 1 determines the engine speed. This switch should be UP (ON) for the B264 (35 cpm) or DOWN (OFF) for the B265 (45 cpm) NOTE: Move a switch UP to ON or DOWN to OFF. 2. SW 2, 3, 4, and 5 should all be DOWN (OFF). Do not change these settings. This information is only for reference:
SW 2 3 4 5 If set to ON Switches off jam detection. Engine program recovery. Print output for debugging. Switches off SC detection.
3. SW 6, 7, 8 should be set for the area where the machine is used and serviced.
6 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 7 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 8 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON Location Japan North America Europe China Taiwan Asia Korea Not used
ON: Up OFF: Down
B264/B265
3-88
SM
3.19.4 BICU BOARD
[A]
B195R823.WMF
1. IOB (
3.19.3)
2. BICU board [A] ( x5, x all)
SM
3-89
B264/B265
3.19.5 PSU
[A]
B195R824.WMF
1. Left cover (
3.8)
2. PSU [A] ( x4, x all)
B264/B265
3-90
SM
HDD, CONTROLLER BOARD
3.20 HDD, CONTROLLER BOARD
[A]
[B]
B195R826.WMF
[C] Important!
B195R825.WMF
The controller boards are machine specific and are not interchangeable: The controller board for the B264 (35 cpm) must be installed in a B264 copier. The controller board for the B265 (45 cpm) must be installed in a B265 copier. 1. Remove the controller cover ( x 2). ( 2. Controller board faceplate [A] ( x 2). 3. Controller board [B] ( x 4) 4. HDD unit bracket [C] ( x 3, x 2) 5. After replacing the HDD, execute SP 5853 to copy the stamp data from the firmware ROM to the new disk. 3.7.1)
SM
3-91
B264/B265
COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
3.21 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING

Perform these adjustments after replacing any of the following: Scanner Wire Lens Block/SBU Assembly Scanner Drive Motor Polygon Mirror Motor Paper Side Fence Memory All Clear
3.21.1 PRINTING
1. Make sure that the paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start the adjustments. 2. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-902-3, No. 10 to print the test pattern for the following procedures. 3. After completing these printing adjustments, be sure to set SP 2-902-3 to 0 again.
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side

1. Check the leading edge registration, and adjust it using SP1-001. Specification: 3 2mm. 2. Check side-to-side registration for each paper feed station, and adjust with the following SP modes.
1st paper feed 2nd paper feed 3rd paper feed (Optional PFU tray 1) 4th paper feed (Optional PTU tray 2) From the duplex tray By-pass feed LCT SP mode SP1-002-1 SP1-002-2 SP1-002-3 SP1-002-4 SP1-002-5 SP1-002-6 SP1-002-7 2 1.5 mm Specification
A B
B195R827.WMF
A: Leading Edge Registration B: Side-to-side Registration
B264/B265
3-92
SM
Blank Margin NOTE: If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within specifications, adjust the leading/left side edge blank margin.
1. Check the trailing edge and right edge blank margins, and adjust them with the following SP modes.
Trailing edge Right edge Leading edge Left edge Trailing edge (duplex copy, 2nd side) Left edge (duplex copy, 2nd side) Right edge (duplex copy, 2nd side) SP mode SP2-101-2 SP2-101-4 SP2-101-1 SP2-101-3 SP2-101-5 SP2-101-6 SP2-101-7 Specification 3 2 mm 2 +2.5/-1.5 mm 3 2 mm 2 1.5 mm 1.2 2 mm 0.3 1.5 mm 0.3+2.5/-1.5 mm
B
B195R828.WMF
D C
Main Scan Magnification
A: Trailing edge blank margin B: Right edge blank margin C: Leading edge blank margin D: Left edge blank margin
1. Use SP2-902-3, 5(Grid Pattern) to print a single dot pattern. 2. Check magnification, and then SP2-909-1 (Main Scan Magnification: Copy) to adjust magnification if required. Specification: 2%.
SM
3-93
B264/B265
Parallelogram Image Adjustment

Do the following procedure if a parallelogram prints while adjusting the printing registration or printing margin using a trimming area pattern. The following procedure should be done after adjusting the side-to-side registration for each paper tray station. [C] [B]
[D] [A] [E]
Turn clockwise
Turn counterclockwise
Use SP2-902-3 No. 10 (Trimming Area) to determine whether a parallelogram image appears. If the parallelogram pattern appears, perform the following procedure. 1. Laser unit [A] 2. Bracket [B] ( x2) 3. Install adjustment cam [C] (P/N: A2309003) 4. Secure positioning pin [D] (P/N A2309004) with the two screws removed with the bracket [B]. Do not tighten the screws at this time. 5. To adjust the position of the laser unit [E] 1) Adjust the laser unit position by turning the adjustment cam. (See the illustration above.) 2) Tighten the adjustment bracket. 3) Print the trimming area pattern to check the image. If the results are not satisfactory, (repeat steps 5-1 to 5-3).
B264/B265
3-94
SM
3.21.2 SCANNING
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment. NOTE: Use an OS-A3 test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Registration: Platen Mode

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust them with the following SP modes if necessary.
Leading Edge Side-to-side SP mode SP4-010 SP4-011
A: Leading Edge Registration B: Side-to-side Registration
B195R832.WMF
Magnification
Use an OS-A3 test chart to perform the following adjustment.
Sub Scan Magnification

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations. 2. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4-008 (Scanner Sub Scan Magnification) to adjust if necessary. Specification: 0.9%.
A
B195R9833.WMF
A: Main scan magnification
SM
3-95
B264/B265
3.21.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

Registration
B
A: Leading edge registration B: Side-to-side registration
B195R9834.WMF B195R9826.WMF
1. Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper. 2. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations. 3. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP Code SP6-006-1 SP6-006-2 SP6-006-3 SP6-006-4 What It Does Side-to-Side Registration Leading Edge Registration (Simplex) Leading Edge Registration (Duplex: Front) Leading Edge Registration (Duplex: Back) Adjustment Range 3.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.2 mm 4.2 mm
B264/B265
3-96
SM
3.21.4 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION

After clearing the memory, or if the touch panel detection function is not working correctly, follow this procedure to calibrate the touch screen. NOTE: Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are for design use only. 1. Press , press , and then press 5 times to open the SelfDiagnostics menu.
B195R834.WMF
2. On the touch screen press Touch Screen Adjust (or press ).
B195R9835.WMF
3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark 4. Press the lower right mark after it appears.
5. Touch a few spots on the touch panel to confirm that the marker (+) appears exactly where the screen is touched. If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and repeat from Step 2. 6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press ). 7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the calibration settings.
SM
3-97
B264/B265
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4.1.1 SUMMARY
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level A Definition To prevent damage to the machine, the main machine cannot be operated until the SC has been reset by a service representative (see the note below). SCs that disable only the features that use the defective item. Although these SCs are not shown to the user under normal conditions, they are displayed on the operation panel only when the defective feature is selected. The SC history is updated. The machine can be operated as usual. Turning the main switch off then on resets SCs displayed on the operation panel. These are redisplayed if the error occurs again. Reset Procedure Enter SP mode, and then turn the main power switch off and on. Turn the operation switch or main switch off and on.
C D
When a Level D SC code occurs When a Level D SC occurs, a screen opens on the operation panel to tell the operator: An error occurred The job in progress will be erased The machine will reboot automatically after approximately 30 seconds. The operator can wait until the machine reboots automatically or touch Reset on the screen to reset the machine immediately and go back to the copy screen. If the operator does not touch Reset The next message tells the operator that the machine will reset automatically and that the previous job was lost and must be started again. After reading the message, the operator touches Confirm on the screen. The next screen shows the number and title of the SC code, and stops until the operator turns the machine off and on. If the operator touches Reset If the operator touches "Reset" to bypass the 30-second interval for the machine to reboot, the machine reboots immediately and the operation panel displays the copy screen. Important Do not try to use the operation panel during an automatic reboot. If the Remote Service System is in use, the SC code is sent immediately to the Service Center
SM
4-1
B264/B265
Troubleshooting
The SC will not be displayed. Only the SC history is updated. Turn the operation switch off and on.
4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

Important If a problem concerns a circuit board, disconnect and reconnect the connectors and then test the machine. Often a loose or disconnected harness is the cause of the problem. Always do this before you decide to replace the PCB. If a motor lock error occurs, check the mechanical load before you decide to replace the motor or sensors. When a Level A or B SC occurs while in an SP mode, the machine cannot display the SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP mode. The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues a Level D SC code. This is done for Level D SC codes only.
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off. NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data.
B264/B265
4-2
SM
4.1.3 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

101 D Exposure lamp error The standard white level was not detected properly when scanning the white plate. 121 D Scanner home position error 2 The scanner home position sensor does not detect the off condition during initialization or copying. 143 C SBU auto adjust error One of the following occurred: When the machine was powered on, automatic adjustment of the SBU failed. Automatic white density adjustment failed when reading standard white plate. Exposure lamp defective Lamp stabilizer defective Exposure lamp connector defective Standard white plate dirty Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of position or dirty SBU defective SIB or scanner drive motor defective Scanner motor defective Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor disconnected Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor power source disconnected Scanner HP sensor defective Harness between SIB and HP sensor disconnected Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or carriage defective SIB or scanner motor drive board defective Scanner motor defective Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor disconnected Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor power source disconnected Scanner HP sensor defective Harness between SIB and scanner HP sensor disconnected Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or carriage defective Exposure lamp defective Lamp stabilizer defective Lamp stabilizer connection loose, disconnected or damaged White plate mounting is incorrect or defective Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of position or dirty SBU defective BICU (Ri10) defective SIB defective Harness connections between SIB and SBU loose, disconnected, or damaged.
120
Scanner home position error 1 The scanner home position sensor does not detect the on condition during initialization or copying.
SM
4-3
B264/B265
Troubleshooting
144
165
SBU communication error Immediately after power on, the operation check done by the SIB for the SBU failed because the SBU was not operating normally. Copy Data Security Unit error An error occurred when the machine attempted to set the Copy Data Security Unit SD card. Charge roller current leak A charge roller current leak signal was detected. Charge roller current correction error The charge roller bias correction is performed twice even if the maximum charge roller bias (-2000V) is applied to the roller. F-Gate error: No laser writing signal The laser writing signal (F-GATE) does not go to LOW for more than 30 seconds after the copy paper reaches the registration sensor. Synchronization error The synchronization signal was not issued within 500 ms after the LD fired while the polygon motor was turning at the prescribed number of revolutions.
302
304
Flat film or harness connectors between the SBU and SIB are loose, disconnected, or damaged Replace SBU Replace BICU The Copy Data Security Unit card not installed The Copy Data Security Unit card is installed, but it is not the correct type for the machine. Charge roller damaged High voltage supply board defective PCU harness defective or disconnected ID sensor defective
321
BICU board defective PCI harness between the controller board and the BICU defective or disconnected Laser synchronization board connectors loose, disconnected, or damaged Laser synchronization board defective LD drive board defective LD unit defective (not enough power, due to aging) Poor connection between the LD unit and the BICU board BICU defective HP sensor/harness defective LD unit home position sensor defective LD positioning motor harness defective LD unit movement blocked because of incorrect connector routing HP sensor/harness defective LD positioning/harness motor defective LD unit movement blocked because of incorrect connector routing
322
323
LD drive current too high The LD drive board applies more than 100 mA to the LD. LD unit home position error 1 The LD unit home position sensor does not detect an on condition when the LD unit moves to its home position.
327
328
LD unit home position error 2 The LD unit home position sensor does not detect an off condition when the LD unit moves from its home position.
B264/B265
4-4
SM
329
LD unit beam pitch adjusted incorrectly The LD unit HP sensor does not detect the ON condition while changing the LD unit position for correcting the LD position or changing the dpi.
After initialization of the SP modes, SP2-109-3 or SP2-109-4 was not executed. The harness is blocking the LD drive (PCB), preventing adjustment of the pitch. Polygon motor drive board I/F harness loose, disconnected, or damaged Polygon motor drive board defective Polygon motor defective Polygon motor drive board I/F harness loose, disconnected, or damaged Polygon motor drive board defective Polygon motor defective Polygon motor drive board I/F harness loose, disconnected, or damaged Polygon motor drive board defective Polygon motor defective I/F harness of the polygonal mirror motor disconnected or defective. Polygonal mirror motor or polygonal mirror motor driver defective. Polygonal mirror motor drive pulse is not output incorrectly. ID sensor defective ID sensor connector defective Poor ID sensor connector connection I/O board (IOB) defective High voltage supply board defective ID sensor dirty Defect at ID sensor pattern writing area of the drum ID sensor defective ID sensor connector defective Poor ID sensor connection I/O board (IOB) defective Scanning system defective High voltage supply board defective ID sensor dirty Defect at the ID sensor pattern writing area of the drum
335
Polygon motor error 1: On timeout The XSCRDY signal did not go LOW (Active) within 10 sec. after the polygon motor was turned on. Polygon motor error 2: Off timeout The XSCRDY signal did not go HIGH (Inactive) within 3 sec. after the polygon motor was turned off. Polygon motor error 3: XSCRDY signal error The XSCRDY signal did not go HIGH (Inactive) after the polygon motor had been rotating normally for 200 ms. Polygonal Mirror Motor Error 4: Unstable Timeout The XSCRDY signal is detected LOW) (Active) after the polygonal mirror motor switches on, but the signal is not detected LOW after 1 s has elapsed, and not detected after another 500 ms has elapsed. ID sensor pattern test error One of the following ID sensor output voltages was detected twice consecutively when checking the ID sensor pattern. 1) Vsp 2.5V 2) Vsg 2.5V 3) Vsp = 0V 4) Vsg = 0V ID sensor Vsg test error When the ID sensor was checked, the ID sensor output voltage was 5.0V while the PWM signal input to the ID sensor was 0.
336
337
338
350
351
SM
4-5
B264/B265
Troubleshooting
352
ID sensor, pattern edge detect error The ID sensor pattern edge voltage is detected to be not 2.5V twice consecutively during an 800 ms interval.
ID sensor defective ID sensor connector defective Poor ID sensor connector connection I/O board (IOB) defective High voltage supply board defective Dirty ID sensor Defect at the ID sensor pattern writing area of the drum ID sensor defective ID sensor harness defective ID sensor connector defective Poor ID sensor connection I/O board (IOB) defective Exposure system defective High voltage supply board defective Dirty ID sensor
353
354
ID sensor, LED current abnormal at initialization One of the following ID sensor output voltages is detected at ID sensor initialization. 1) Vsg < 4.0V when the maximum PWM input (255) is applied to the ID sensor. 2) Vsg 4.0V when the minimum PWM input (0) is applied to the ID sensor. ID sensor timeout abnormal at adjustment Vsg falls out of the adjustment target (4.0 0.2V) at the start of Vsg checking after 20 seconds
390
TD sensor error: Test value abnormal The TD sensor output voltage is less than 0.5V or more than 5.0V after 10 consecutive times during copying.
391
395
401
TD sensor error: Auto adjust error During automatic adjustment of the TD sensor, output voltage is less than 1.8V or more than 4.8V during TD sensor initial setting. Development output abnormal A development bias leak signal is detected. High voltage output to the development unit exceeded the upper limit (65%) for 60 ms. Transfer roller leak detected A transfer roller current leak signal is detected.
ID sensor defective ID sensor harness defective ID sensor connector defective I/O board (IOB) defective Exposure system defective Poor ID sensor connector connection High voltage supply board defective Dirty ID sensor TD sensor defective TD sensor not connected or connector damaged Poor connection between the TD sensor and the I/O board (IOB) I/O board (IOB) defective Toner supply defective TD sensor abnormal TD sensor disconnected Poor TD sensor connection I/O board (IOB) defective Toner supply defective High voltage supply board defective Poor connection at the development bias terminal Poor connection at the high voltage supply board High voltage supply board defective Poor cable connection or defective cable Transfer connector defective
B264/B265
4-6
SM
402
Transfer roller open error The transfer roller current feedback signal is not detected. Transfer belt position sensor error The transfer belt position sensor does not activate even if the transfer belt contact clutch has been switched on twice and rotated once. Transfer belt error The transfer belt does not move away from the drum during ID sensor pattern checking. Main motor lock A main motor lock signal is not detected within 2 seconds after the main motor turns on. Feed Development Motor Error The PLL lock signal remains LOW for 2 s while the feed development motor is operating. Exhaust fan motor lock An exhaust fan motor lock signal is not detected within 5 seconds after the exhaust fan motor turns on. Cooling fan motor lock A cooling fan motor lock signal is not detected within 5 seconds after the cooling fan motor turns on.
403
High voltage supply board defective Transfer connector cable defective Transfer connector defective Poor PCU connection Main motor/drive malfunction Transfer belt contact clutch defective Transfer belt position sensor defective Harness disconnected Main motor/drive malfunction Transfer belt position sensor defective Poor transfer belt position sensor connection Transfer belt contact clutch defective Too much load on the drive mechanism Main motor defective Motor lock caused by overload. Motor driver defective. Too much load on the drive mechanism Exhaust fan motor defective or a loose object is interfering with the fan Poor fan motor connector connection Too much load on the drive mechanism Cooling fan motor defective or a loose object is interfering with the fan Poor fan motor connector connection
405
440
450
490
492
501
1st tray lift malfunction The paper height sensor is not activated after the tray lift motor has been on for 10 seconds. If the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at the feed height, the paper height position is detected again. At this time, the paper height sensor should de-activate within 5 seconds after the paper bottom plate starts to drop. If it does not deactivate within 5 s four times consecutively, a message will prompt the user to reset Tray 1. After two attempts to release the error by re-setting the paper tray, if this does not solve the problem then this SC is displayed. Lift motor malfunction or disconnected Height sensor abnormal, or connector loose Loose paper or object between the tray and motor Pick-up arm malfunction
SM
4-7
B264/B265
Troubleshooting
502
503
504
506
507
2nd tray lift malfunction The paper height sensor is not activated after the tray lift motor has been on for 10 seconds. If the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at the feed height, the paper height position is detected again. At this time, the paper height sensor should de-activate within 5 seconds after the paper bottom plate starts to drop. If it does not deactivate within 5 s four times consecutively, a message will prompt the user to reset Tray 2. After two attempts to re-set the paper tray, if this does not solve the problem then this SC is displayed. Lift motor abnormal or disconnected Height sensor defective or disconnected Loose paper or object between the tray and motor Pick-up arm malfunction 3rd tray lift malfunction (optional paper tray unit) The paper height sensor is not activated after the tray lift motor has been on for 13 seconds. If the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at the feed height, the paper height position is detected again. At this time, the paper height sensor should de-activate within 5 seconds after the paper bottom plate starts to drop. If it does not deactivate within 5 s four times consecutively, the tray lift motor halts. After two attempts to re-set the paper tray, if this does not solve the problem, then this SC is displayed and tray control halts. Tray lift motor defective or disconnected Height sensor defective or disconnected 4th tray lift malfunction (optional paper tray unit) The paper height sensor is not activated after the tray lift motor has been on for 13 seconds. If the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at the feed height, the paper height position is detected again. At this time, the paper height sensor should de-activate within 5 seconds after the paper bottom plate starts to drop. If it does not deactivate within 5 s four times consecutively, the tray lift motor halts. After two attempts to re-set the paper tray, if this does not solve the problem, then this SC is displayed and tray control halts. Tray lift motor defective or disconnected Height sensor defective or disconnected Paper tray unit main motor lock Paper tray unit main motor defective (optional paper tray) Paper tray unit main motor connection loose A main motor lock signal is detected for more than 50 ms during rotation. Too much load on the drive mechanism LCT main motor lock LCT main motor defective A main motor lock signal is detected for Paper tray unit main motor connection loose more than 50 ms during rotation. Too much load on the drive mechanism
B264/B265
4-8
SM
510
520
541
LCT tray malfunction 1) One of the following has occurred: 2) The LCT lift sensor does not activate for more than 18 seconds after the LCT lift motor turned on. 3) The LCT lower limit sensor does not activate for more than 18 seconds after the LCT lift motor turned on. 4) The LCT lift sensor is already activated when the LCT lift motor turns on. 5) After the paper end sensor is actuated while the tray is raising, the upper limit sensor is not actuated within 5 s. A message is displayed to remind the user to set the paper and tray control halts. Resetting the display is done by opening and closing the LCT door. 6) The 4) state has been detected 3 times in succession. LCT lift motor defective or disconnected. Upper limit sensor defective or disconnected Pick-up solenoid defective or disconnected Paper end sensor defective Fusing/Feed-Out Motor Error The PLL lock signal remains LOW for 2 Motor lock caused by overload. s while the feed development motor is Motor driver defective. operating. Fusing thermistor open Fusing thermistor disconnected The fusing temperature detected by the Fusing thermistor connector defective thermistor was below 7C (44.6oF) for 5 Fusing thermistor damaged or seconds, or 2 seconds after reaching warped 45oC (113oF) the temperature does not reach an additional 15oC (59oF) after Fusing temperature 15% less than checking five times at 0.1 intervals. the standard input voltage Fusing temperature warm-up error The fusing temperature does not reach the fusing standby temperature of 45oC (113oF) within 9 seconds [for the B264 (35 cpm)]/14 seconds [for the B265 (45 cpm)] after switching on the main power or closing the front cover, or 40 seconds after reaching 50oC the fusing roller does not reach warm-up temperature. Fusing overheat error (software detection) A fusing temperature of over 230C (446oF) is detected for 5 seconds by the fusing thermistors at the center or at either end of the fusing roller. Fusing overheat error (hardware circuit detection) The dual monitoring circuitry of the BICU detects extremely high temperature and tripped the relay circuit off. Fusing lamp defective Poor fusing unit connector Thermistor warped or broken Thermostat has tripped BICU defective Power supply board defective
542
543
Power supply unit defective I/O board (IOB) defective BICU defective Fusing thermistor defective
544
Power supply unit defective I/O board (IOB) defective BICU defective Fusing thermistor defective
SM
4-9
B264/B265
Troubleshooting
545
546 547
A D
548
557
599
601
610
611
Fusing lamp remains on After warm-up the fusing lamp remains at full power for 10 seconds without the hot roller rotating. Fusing ready temperature unstable The fusing temperature is fluctuating. Zero cross signal error One of the following occurred: 1) The fusing relay remained off for 50 ms after power on and continued to remain off after the after 3 attempts to detect the zero-cross signal. 2) During 11 zero-cross signal detections, two zero-cross signal detections were below 44 Hz. 3) The zero-cross signal could not be detected within 3 sec. after the fusing relay switched on. Fusing unit installation error The machine cannot detect the fusing unit when the front cover and right cover are closed. Zero-cross frequencyover The applied power ac frequency was detected less than 66 Hz more than 10 times, or less than 44 Hz one time. 1-Bin tray motor lock A 1-bin tray motor lock signal is not detected for more than 300 ms during rotation. Communication error between BICU and scanner unit Within 800 ms after power on, after 3 attempts the BICU does not communicate with the SIB via the serial line. Communication timeout error between BICU and ADF The BICU cannot receive a response within 100 ms after 3 attempts after sending data to the ARDF. Communication break error between BICU and ADF The BICU receives a break signal from the ADF main board.
Thermistor is out of position.
Thermistor connection loose Fusing unit connector loose Switch the main switch off and on Defective fusing relay, replace the PSU
Fusing unit is not installed Fusing unit connection loose Nose on the ac power line
1-bin tray motor locked from overload 1-bin tray motor defective 1-bin tray motor connection loose Serial line connecting the BICU and SIB defective External noise on the serial line SIB board defective BICU board defective BICU board and ADF main board serial line connection defective External noise ADF main board defective BICU board defective Serial line connecting BICU and ADF unstable External noise ADF main board defective BICU board defective
B264/B265
4-10
SM
612
620
Communication command error between BICU and ADF The BICU sends a command to the ADF main board that it cannot execute. Communication timeout error between BICU and finisher or mailbox The BICU cannot receive a response within 100 ms after 3 attempts after sending data to the finisher or mailbox.
Abnormal operation performed by software
621
623
Communication timeout error between BICU and finisher or mailbox A break (low) signal was received from the finisher or the mailbox. Communication timeout error between BICU and paper tray unit The BICU cannot receive a response within 100 ms after 3 attempts after sending data to the paper tray unit.
Serial line connecting BICU and finisher unstable External noise BICU board and finisher main board connection defective or loose Finisher main board defective BICU board defective Serial line connecting BICU and finisher unstable External noise Serial line connecting BICU and paper tray unit unstable External noise BICU board and paper tray main board connection defective or loose Paper tray main board defective BICU board defective Serial line connecting BICU and paper tray unit unstable External noise BICU board and LCT main board connection defective or loose Optional paper feed unit interface board defective BICU board defective Serial line connecting BICU and LCT unit unstable External noise BICU board and LCT main board connection defective or loose LCT interface board defective BICU board defective Serial line connecting BICU and LCT unit unstable External noise BICU board and LCT main board connection defective or loose LCT interface board defective BICU board defective Occurred with a SC call, CC call, Supply Management call, User call, or CE call. Timeout while no response from the LADP, and signal on the RS-485 line between PI and LADP is abnormal.
624
Communication break error between BICU and paper tray unit The BICU cannot communicate with the paper tray unit normally as a result of receiving a break signal.
626
Communication timeout error between BICU and LCT The BICU cannot receive a response within 100 ms after 3 attempts after sending data to the LCT.
627
Communication break error between BICU and LCT The BICU cannot communicate with the LCT unit normally as a result of receiving a break signal.
630
Communication failure with CSS (RSS) The communication from the copier was detected as abnormal at the CSS center. This error occurs when the acknowledge signal from the LADP does not complete normally.
SM
4-11
B264/B265
Troubleshooting
632
633
Key/card counter device error 1 After 1 data frame is sent to the device, an ACK signal is not received within 100 ms, and is not received after 3 retries. Key/card counter device error 2 During communication with the device, the BCU received a break (Low) signal. Key/card counter device error 3 The backup battery of the counter device RAM is low. Key/card counter device error 4 After installation of the device a message alerts user to a battery voltage abnormal error. Engine startup error The BCU failed to respond with the prescribed time when the machine was turned on.
The serial line from the device to the copier is unstable, disconnected, or defective. The serial line from the device to the copier is unstable, disconnected, or defective. Replace the RAM backup battery. Device control board defective Device control board backup battery defective Connections between BCU and controller board are loose, disconnected, or damaged Replace the BCU Replace the controller board Controller stalled Controller installed incorrectly Controller board defective Operation panel harness disconnected or defective
634
635
670
672
692
Controller startup error After power on, the line between the controller and the operation panel did not open for normal operation. After normal startup, communication with the controller stopped. GAVD block I2C bus error The I2C bus is defective.
Replace the BICU.
B264/B265
4-12
SM
700
ARDF original pick-up malfunction After the pick-up motor is turned on, the original stopper HP sensor is not detected.
Original stopper HP sensor (output abnormal) Pick-up motor defective (not rotating) Timing belt out of position ADF main board defective Original pick-up HP sensor defective. Pick-up motor defective ADF main board defective Jogger HP sensor defective Jogger motor defective
701
722
724
725
726
727
729
ARDF original pick-up/paper lift mechanism malfunction The original pick-up HP sensor does not activate three times consecutively after the pick-up motor has turned on. Finisher jogger motor error The finisher jogger HP sensor does not return to the home position, or move out of the home position, within the specified time. Finisher staple hammer motor error Stapling does not finish within 600 ms after the staple hammer motor turned on. Finisher stack feed-out motor error The stack feed-out belt HP sensor does not activate within a certain time after the stack feed-out motor turned on. Finisher shift tray 1 lift motor error Tray shift does not finish within the specified time after the shift motor turned on, or the stack height sensor does not activate within the specified time after the shift tray lift motor turned on. Finisher stapler rotation motor error Stapler rotation does not finish within the specified time after the staple rotation motor turned on, or the stapler does not return to its home position within the specified time after stapling finished. Finisher punch motor error After the punch motor is turned on, the punch HP sensor does not activate within the specified time.
Shift motor defective or overloaded Shift tray lift motor defective or overloaded
Stapler rotation motor defective or overloaded Stapler rotation motor connection loose or connector defective
Punch motor defective or overloaded Punch HP sensor defective Punch motor connection loose or connector defective
SM
4-13
B264/B265
Troubleshooting
Staple jam Stapler overload caused by trying to staple too many sheets Staple hammer motor defective Stack feed-out HP sensor defective Stack feed-out motor overload Stack feed-out motor defective
730
731
732
Finisher stapler positioning motor error After the stapler motor is turned on, the stapler does not return to its home position within the specified time, or the stapler HP sensor does not activate within the specified time after the stapler motor is turned on. Finisher exit guide open/close motor error After the finisher exit guide open/close motor is turned on, the open/close sensor does not activate within the specified time. Finisher upper tray shift motor error The upper tray shift motor does not stop within the specified time.
Stapler positioning motor defective or overloaded Stapler HP sensor defective Stapler positioning motor connection loose or connector defective Finisher exit guide open/close motor defective Open/close sensor defective
Upper tray shift motor defective or overloaded Upper tray shift sensor defective
733
Finisher lower tray lift motor error The stack height sensor does not activate within a certain time period after the lower tray lift motor turned on. Finisher lower tray shift motor error The lower tray shift motor driving the lower tray does not stop within the specified time.
734
Lower tray lift motor defective or overloaded Upper stack height sensor defective Lower tray lower limit sensor defective Lower tray shift motor defective or overloaded Lower tray shift sensor defective
B264/B265
4-14
SM
740 741
D D
Booklet finisher error 1: Not Saddle Stitch Booklet finisher error 2: Saddle Stitch
See description below
SC740 and SC741 are issued when an error occurs in the 1000-Sheet SaddleStitch Finisher B546. Specific details about these SC codes are not displayed on the operation panel display. However, you can determine the specific cause of an error by observing the number of flashes and the lengths of the intervals between flashes. To Read SC740/SC741 from LED 2 1. Remove the upper rear cover. 2. Look at LED 2 and observe the number of flashes and the lengths of the intervals between flashes.
ON: 300ms OFF: 200ms
LED ON
LED OFF
2sec
START
1sec
Break: 500ms
Break: 500ms
Break: 500ms
Repeat
B195T901.WMF
What You See 500 ms ON, 500 ms OFF 2 s ON, 1 s OFF Example: 1-4-2 1 4 2
What It Means Finisher operating normally START The numbers refer to the flashes and intervals in the illustration above. 300ms ON, 500ms OFF 300ms ON, 200ms OFF (Repeats 3 times), 300ms ON, 500ms OFF (break) 300 ms ON, 200ms OFF, 300 ms ON, 500ms OFF (break) Returns to START and repeats (2 s ON, 1 s OFF, then 1-4-2)
SM
4-15
B264/B265
Troubleshooting
Pattern 1-1-1
Error Shutter movement
1-1-2
1-1-3 1-2-1 Exit motor
1-2-2
1-3-1
Upper exit plate movement
1-3-2
1-3-3
1-3-4
1-4-1
Jogger motor
1-4-2
1-5-1
Stapler motor
1-5-2
1-6-1
Staple hammer motor
1-6-2
Status The shutter position switch does not turn on within 1 second after the transport motor starts to turn in reverse. The shutter sensor does not deactivate within 1 second after the transport motor starts to turn in reverse. The shutter position switch is off when the shift tray safety switch is off. After the exit motor turns on, the exit motor sensor does not send the proper signal to the finisher board. The exit motor sensor does not send the clock signal to the finisher board for certain period while the exit motor is on. The upper exit guide 2 switch does not turn on within 1s after the guide plate motor turns on. The upper exit guide sensor does not activate within 1s after the guide plate motor turns on. The upper exit guide 2 switch does not turn on when the shift tray safety switch is off. The guide plate motor sensor does not send the clock signal to the finisher board for certain period while the exit motor is on. After the jogger motor turns on to move the jogger fence from its home position, the jogger HP sensor does not deactivate within 2s. After the jogger motor turns on to return the jogger fence to its home position, the jogger HP sensor does not activate within 2s. After the stapler motor turns on to move the stapler unit from its home position, the stapler unit HP sensor does not deactivate within 4s. After the stapler motor turns on to return the stapler unit to its home position, the stapler unit HP sensor does not activate within 4s. The staple hammer HP sensor does not deactivate within 0.5s after the staple hammer motor turns on. The staple hammer HP sensor does not activate within 0.5s after the staple hammer motor turns on.
Possible Cause Transport motor defective Shutter position switch defective Shift tray safety switch defective
Exit motor defective Exit motor sensor defective
Guide plate motor defective Upper exit guide 2 switch defective Upper exit guide sensor defective Shift tray safety switch defective
Jogger motor defective Jogger HP sensor defective
Stapler motor defective Stapler unit HP sensor defective
Staple hammer motor defective Staple hammer HP sensor defective
B264/B265
4-16
SM

Pattern 1-7-1 Error Tray lift motor Status The tray lift motor does not stop within 15s after being turned on. The shift tray HP sensor does not activate within 15s after the tray lift motor turns on. The shift tray upper limit switch turns on while the shift tray is being raised. Lift motor sensors 1 & 2 do not send the clock signals to the finisher board every 200ms while the tray lift motor is on. Abnormal communication data between finisher board and shift tray height sensor. No communication between finisher board and shift tray height sensor for a certain period. The finisher board detects a connection error with the connector for the shift tray height sensor. Adjustment error during shift tray height sensor adjustment. The check sum is abnormal when the main switch is turned on. Communication error between finisher board and copier mainframe. Communication error between finisher board and booklet unit board. Possible Cause Tray lift motor defective Lift motor sensor 1 defective Lift motor sensor 2 defective Shift tray HP sensor defective Shift tray upper limit switch defective Shift tray height sensor defective Finisher board defective
1-7-2 1-7-3
1-8-1
Shift tray height sensor
1-8-2
1-8-3
1-8-4 1-9-1 1-10-1 1-10-2 Back-up RAM Communication
Finisher board defective Finisher board defective Booklet unit board defective Poor connection of the interface harness
1-11-1
Positioning plate motor
1-11-2
1-12-2
Folder roller motor
After the positioning plate motor turns on to move the positioning plate from its home position, the positioning plate HP sensor does not deactivate within 1.25s. After the positioning plate motor turns on to return the positioning plate to its home position, the positioning plate HP sensor does activate within 1s. The folder roller motor sensor doesnt send the clock pulse to the booklet unit board within a certain period after the folder roller motor turns on.
Positioning plate motor defective Positioning plate HP sensor defective
Folder roller motor defective Folder roller motor sensor defective
1-13-1
Shutter guide motor
After the shutter guide motor turns on to Shutter guide move the shutter guide from its home motor defective position, the shutter guide HP sensor does not deactivate within 0.4s.
SM
4-17
B264/B265
Troubleshooting

Pattern 1-13-2 Error Status After the shutter guide motor turns on to return the shutter guide to its home position, the shutter guide HP sensor does not activate within 1s. After the booklet jogger motor turns on to move the booklet jogger plate from its home position, the booklet jogger HP sensor does not deactivate within 0.5s. After the booklet jogger motor turns on to return the booklet jogger plate to its home position, the booklet jogger HP sensor does not activate within 1s. The front staple hammer HP switch does not turn off within 0.5s after the front stapler motor turns on. The front staple hammer HP switch does not turn on within 0.5s after the front stapler motor turns on during jam recovery. The rear staple hammer HP switch does not turn off within 0.5s after the rear stapler motor turns on. The rear staple hammer HP switch does not turn on within 0.5s after the rear stapler motor turns on during jam recovery. After the folder plate motor turns on to return the folder plate to its home position, the folder plate HP sensor does not activate within 0.3s. After the folder plate motor turns on to move the folder plate from its home position, the folder plate HP sensor does not deactivate within 0.3s. After the folder plate motor turns on to return the folder plate to its home position, the folder plate return sensor does not deactivate within 0.3s. The pulse count from the folder plate motor sensor is lower than the target minimum. The connector of the shutter guide HP sensor is not connected. The connector of the folder plate HP sensor is not connected. Possible Cause Shutter guide HP sensor defective
1-14-1
Booklet jogger motor
Booklet jogger motor defective Booklet jogger HP sensor defective
1-14-2
1-15-1
Front stapler motor
Front stapler motor defective Front staple hammer HP switch defective Rear stapler motor defective Rear staple hammer HP switch defective
1-15-2
1-16-1
Rear stapler motor
1-16-2
1-17-1
Folder plate motor error
Folder plate motor defective Folder plate HP sensor defective Folder plate return sensor defective Folder plate motor sensor defective
1-17-2
1-17-3
1-17-4
1-18-1 1-18-2
Connector
Poor connection or no connection of the shutter guide HP sensor connector
B264/B265
4-18
SM

Pattern 1-18-3 Error Status The connector of the folder plate return sensor is not connected. Possible Cause Poor connection or no connection of the folder plate HP sensor connector Poor connection or no connection of the folder plate return sensor connector 1-19-1 Switch When the booklet entrance guide sensor, lower door sensor and booklet exit cover sensor are all activated (doors closed), the booklet entrance guide safety switch does not turn on within 1s after a copy job or warm-up idling begins. When the booklet entrance guide sensor, lower door sensor and booklet exit cover sensor are all activated (doors closed), the lower door safety switch does not turn on within 1s after a copy job or warm-up idling begins. When the booklet entrance guide sensor, lower door sensor and booklet exit cover sensor are all activated (doors closed), the booklet exit cover safety switch does not turn on within 1s after a copy job or warm-up idling begins. Booklet entrance guide safety switch defective Lower door safety switch defective Booklet exit cover safety switch defective
1-19-2
1-19-3
SM
4-19
B264/B265
Troubleshooting
818
Watchdog error The bus is being held by another device, or a CPU-device infinite loop has occurred. A module that the watchdog is monitoring has not closed properly at the conclusion of its task, or the module cannot continue processing.
System program defective; switch off/on, or change the controller firmware if the problem cannot be solved Controller board defective Controller option malfunction
819
Fatal kernel error Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system processing. One of the following messages was displayed on the operation panel. 0x696e init died 0x766d vm_pageout: VM is full 4361 Cache Error Other
System program defective Controller board defective Optional board defective Replace controller firmware
For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel.
820
Self-Diagnostic Error: CPU The central processing unit returned an error during the self-diagnostic test. Self-diagnostic error 2: ASIC The ASIC provides the central point for the control of bus arbitration for CPU access, for option bus and SDRAM access, for SDRAM refresh, and for management of the internal bus gate.
Controller board defective Software defective
821
ASIC (controller board defective)
NOTE: For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC
report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel.
822 B Self-diagnostic error 3: HDD 3003 Check performed when HDD is installed: HDD device busy for over 31 s. After a diagnostic command is set for the HDD, but the device remains busy for over 6 s. A diagnostic command is issued to the HDD device but the result is an error 3004 No response to the self-diagnostic command from the ASIC to the HDDs
HDD defective HDD harness disconnected, defective Controller board defective
HDD defective
B264/B265
4-20
SM
823
Self-diagnostic Error: NIC The network interface board returned an error during the self-diagnostic test.
Network interface board defective Controller board defective
824
Self-diagnostic error 4: NVRAM NVRAM device does not exist, NVRAM device is damaged, NVRAM socket damaged
NVRAM defective Controller board defective NVRAM backup battery exhausted NVRAM socket damaged Make sure NVRAM is seated correctly in its socket Replace the NVRAM on the controller board
826
Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM/Optional NVRAM The NVRAM or optional NVRAM returned an error during the self-diagnostic test.
827
828
Self-diagnostic error 7: ROM Measuring the CRC for the boot monitor and operating system program results in an error. A check of the CRC value for ROMFS of the entire ROM area results in an error.
Software defective Controller board defective ROM defective
NOTE: For more details about this SC 833, SC834 error, execute SP5990 to print an
SMC report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel. The additional error codes (0F30, 0F31, etc. are listed in the SMC report.
829 B Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM The optional RAM returned an error during the self-diagnostic test. Replace the optional memory board Controller board defective
838
Self-diagnostic Error: Clock Generator A verify error occurred when setting data was read from the clock generator via the I2C bus.
Replace the controller board
SM
4-21
B264/B265
Troubleshooting
Self-diagnostic Error: RAM The resident RAM returned a verify error during the self-diagnostic test.
Update controller firmware again Replace RAM DIMM
850
Net I/F error Duplicate IP addresses. Illegal IP address. Driver unstable and cannot be used on the network. IEEE 1394 I/F error Driver setting incorrect and cannot be used by the 1394 I/F.
IP address setting incorrect Ethernet board defective Controller board defective
851
NIB (PHY), LINK module defective; change the Interface Board Controller board defective
853
Wireless LAN Error 1 During machine start-up, the machine can get access to the board that holds the wireless LAN, but not to the wireless LAN card (802.11b or Bluetooth).
Wireless LAN card missing (was removed)
854
Wireless LAN Error 2 During machine operation, the machine can get access to the board that holds the wireless LAN, but not to the wireless LAN card (802.11b or Bluetooth).
Wireless LAN card missing (was removed)
855
Wireless LAN error 3 An error was detected on the wireless LAN card (802.11b or Bluetooth).
Wireless LAN card defective Wireless LAN card connection incorrect
856
Wireless LAN error 4 An error was detected on the wireless LAN card (802.11b or Bluetooth).
Wireless LAN card defective PCI connector (to the mother board) loose
857
USB I/F Error The USB driver is not stable and caused an error.
Bad USB card connection Replace the controller board
861
HDD re-try failure At power on with the HDD detected, power supply to the HDD is interrupted, after the HDD is awakened from the sleep mode, the HDD is not ready within 30 s.
Harness between HDD and board disconnected, defective HDD power connector disconnected HDD defective Controller board defective
B264/B265
4-22
SM
860
HDD startup error at main power on HDD is connected but a driver error is detected. The driver does not respond with the status of the HDD within 30 s. HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally, due to bad sectors generated during operation.
HDD is not initialized Level data is corrupted HDD is defective
863
HDD defective Note: If the bad sectors are generated at the image partition, the bad sector information is written to NVRAM, and the next time the HDD is accessed, these bad sectors will not be accessed for read/write operation.
864
865
HDD access error HDD responded to an error during operation for a condition other than those for SC863, 864.
HDD defective.
866
SD card error 1: Confirmation The machine detects an electronic license error in the application on the SD card in the controller slot immediately after the machine is turned on. The program on the SD card contains electronic confirmation license data. If the program does not contain this license data, or if the result of the check shows that the license data in the program on the SD card is incorrect, then the checked program cannot execute and this SC code is displayed. Program missing from the SD card Download the correct program for the machine to the SD card SD card error 2: SD card removed The SD card in the boot slot when the machine was turned on was removed while the machine was on.
867
Insert the SD card, then turn the machine off and on.
868
SD card error 3: SC card access
SM
4-23
B264/B265
Troubleshooting
HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to an CRC error query. Data transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the HDD.
HDD defective

An error occurred while an SD card was used. SD card not inserted correctly SD card defective Controller board defective Note: If you want to try to reformat the SC card, use SD Formatter Ver 1.1.
870
Address book data error Address book data on the hard Software defective. Turn the machine disk was detected as abnormal off/on. If this is not the solution for the when it was accessed from either problem, then replace the controller the operation panel or the firmware. network. The address book data HDD defective. cannot be read from the HDD or SD card where it is stored, or the data read from the media is defective. More Details Do SP5846 050 (UCS Settings Initialize all Directory Info.) to reset all address book data. Reset the user information with SP5832 006 (HDD Formatting User Information). Replace the HDDs. Boot the machine from the SD card. HDD mail receive data error The machine detected that the HDD was not operating correctly at power on. The machine detected that the HDD was not operating correctly (could neither read nor write) while processing incoming email HDD mail send data error An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was turned on, or power was turned off while the machine used the HDD.
872
HDD defective Machine was turned off while the HDD was being accessed. Do SP5832 007 to format the mail RX data on the HDD.
873
Do SP5832-007 (Format HDD Mail TX Data) to initialize the HDD. Replace the HDD
874
Delete All error 1: HDD A data error was detected for the HDD/NVRAM after the Delete All option was used. Note: The source of this error is the Data Overwrite Security Unit B660 running from an SD card.
Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again. Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit again. For more, see section 1. Installation. HDD defective
B264/B265
4-24
SM
875
Delete All error 2: Data area An error occurred while the machine deleted data from the HDD. Note: The source of this error is the Data Overwrite Security Unit B660 running from an SD card.
Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again.
876
Log data abnormal An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation. This can be caused by switching the machine off while it is operating.
Software error. Update the firmware NVRAM defective HDD defective
880
File Format Converter (MLB) error A request to get access to the MLB was not answered within the specified time.
MLB defective, replace the MLB Troubleshooting
900
Electrical total counter error The total counter contains something that is not a number.
NVRAM incorrect type NVRAM defective NVRAM data scrambled Unexpected error from external source Mechanical total counter defective
901
Mechanical total count error The IO board cannot receive the mechanical total count data. Printer error 1 An internal application error was detected and operation cannot continue.
920
Software defective; turn the machine off/on, or change the controller firmware Insufficient memory
SM
4-25
B264/B265
925
Net File function error The NetFile file management on the HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile management file is corrupted and operation cannot continue. The HDDs are defective and they cannot be debugged or partitioned, so the Scan Router functions (delivery of received faxes, document capture, etc.), Web services, and other network functions cannot be used. HDD status codes are displayed below the SC code:
Refer to the four procedures below (Recovery from SC 925).
Here is a list of HDD status codes:

Display (-1) (-2) (-3) (-4) (-5) (-6) (-7) (-8) (-9) (-10) (-11) (-12) (-13) Meaning HDD not connected HDD not ready No label Partition type incorrect Error returned during label read or check Error returned during label read or check filesystem repair failed filesystem mount failed Drive does not answer command Internal kernel error Size of drive is too small Specified partition does not exist Device file does not exist
B264/B265
4-26
SM
Recovery from SC 925 Procedure 1 If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865) with SC 925, do the recovery procedures for SC860 ~ SC865. Procedure 2 If the machine does not show one of the five HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865), turn the machine power off and on. If this is not the solution for the problem, then initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD with SP5832-011 (HDD Formatting Ridoc I/F). NetFiles: Jobs printed from the document server using a PC and DeskTopBinder Before you initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD, tell the customer that: Received faxes on the delivery server will be erased All captured documents will be erased DeskTopBinder/Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor job history will be erased Documents on the document server, and scanned documents, will not be erased. The first time that the network gets access to the machine, the management information must be configured again (this will use a lot of time). Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5832-011, do these steps: 1. Go into the User Tools mode and do Delivery Settings to print all received fax documents that are scheduled for delivery. Then erase them. 2. In the User Tools mode, do Document Management> Batch Delete Transfer Documents. 3. Do SP5832-011, then turn the machine power off and on. Procedure 3 If Procedure 2 is not the solution for the problem, do SP5832-001 (HDD Formatting All), then turn the machine power off and on. SP5832-001 erases all document and address book data on the hard disks. Ask the customer before you do this SP code. Procedure 4 If Procedure 3 is not the solution for the problem, replace the HDD.
SM
4-27
B264/B265
Troubleshooting
990
991
Software error 1 The software performs an unexpected function and the program cannot continue. Software error 2 The software performs an unexpected function. However, unlike SC990, recovery processing allows the program to continue.
Software defective, re-boot*1
Software defective, re-boot*1
*1
: In order to get more details about SC990 and SC991: 1) Execute SP7403 or print an SMC Report (SP5990) to read the history of the 10 most recent logged errors. 2) If you press the zero key on the operation panel with the SP selection menu displayed, you will see detailed information about the recently logged SC990 or SC991, including the software file name, line number, and so on. 1) is the recommended method, because another SC could write over the information for the previous SC. 992 D Software error 3: Undefined An error not controlled by the system occurred (the error does not come under any other SC code).
Software defective Turn the machine power off and on. The machine cannot be used until this error is corrected.
997
Software Error 4: Cannot select application function An application does not start after Software bug the user pushed the correct key on A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the the operation panel. application is not installed or not installed correctly. Software Error 5: Application cannot start Register processing does not Software bug operate for an application within 60 A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the s after the machine power is turned application is not installed or not installed on. No applications start correctly, correctly. and all end abnormally.
998
951
953
954
F-gate error at write request After the IPU receives an F-gate signal, it receives another F-gate signal. Scanner setting error The IPU does not respond with the scanner setting signal required to start scanning processing. Printer setting error The IPU does not respond with the settings that are required to start image processing by the printer.
Software defective BICU defective Software defective
Software defective
B264/B265
4-28
SM
955
984
Memory setting error The IPU does not respond with the settings that are required to start image processing using the memory. Print image data transfer error The image transfer from the controller to the engine via the PCI bus does not end within 15 s after starting. Scanner image data transfer error The image transfer from the engine to the controller via the PCI bus does not end within 3 s after starting. Software write parameter setting error An unstable area at the storage destination in the settings table is set NULL for the parameter received by the write module. Machine Type Information Error After the machine is powered on, a mismatch is detected between the CPM information sent from the controller to the engine.
Software defective
985
986
Controller board defective BICU defective Connectors between BICU and controller loose or defective Controller board defective BICU defective Connectors between BICU and controller loose or defective SIB defective Software defective
995
999
Program download error The download (program, print data, language data) from the IC card does not execute normally. Board installed incorrectly BICU defective IC card defective NVRAM defective Loss of power during downloading Important Notes About SC999 Primarily intended for operating in the download mode, logging is not performed with SC999. Note: If the machine loses power while downloading, or if for some other reason the download does not end normally, this could damage the controller board or the PCB targeted for the download and prevent subsequent downloading. If this problem occurs, the damaged PCB must be replaced.
SM
4-29
B264/B265
Troubleshooting
Replace the controller board with the correct board.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.2.1 SENSORS
Component (Symbol) Scanner Home Position (S1) Platen Cover (S2) CN 504-5(SIB) 504-8 (SIB) 505-3, 4 (SIB) Condition Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Original Length-1 (S4) 505-8,9 (SIB) Open Shorted LD Unit Home Position (S6) 204-B2 (IOB) Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Lower Paper Height (S16) 214-2 (IOB) Open Shorted SC328 is displayed when the laser beam pitch is changed. SC327 is displayed when the laser beam pitch is changed. The add toner indicator blinks even if there is toner in the development unit. SC390-01 is displayed. The Paper Jam indicator will light whenever a copy is made. The Paper Jam indicator lights even if there is no paper. The Paper Jam indicator lights even if there is no paper. The Paper Jam indicator will light whenever a copy is made. SC350-03 is displayed after copying. SC350-01 is displayed after copying. Add Paper is displayed even if there is paper. If this condition occurred four times, SC501-02 will be displayed. SC501-01 is displayed. Add Paper is displayed even if there is paper. If this condition occurred four times, SC502-02 will be displayed. SC502-01 is displayed. CPU cannot detect the original size properly. APS and ARE do not function correctly. Symptom SC121 is displayed. SC120 is displayed. APS and ARE do not function properly. No symptom. CPU cannot detect the original size properly. APS and ARE do not function correctly.
Original Width (S3)
Toner Density (TD) (S7)
222-5 (IOB)
Paper Exit (S8)
202-B2 (IOB)
Registration (S13) Image Density (ID) (S14) Upper Paper Height (S15)
224-B2 (IOB) 203-5 (IOB) 220-2 (IOB)
B264/B265
4-30
SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
Component (Symbol)
CN
Condition Open
Upper Paper End (S17)
220-8 (IOB) Shorted Open
Lower Paper End (S18)
214-8 (IOB)
Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted
Upper Relay (S19)
220-5 (IOB)
Lower Relay (S20) Transfer Belt Position (S21)
214-5 (IOB) 202-A10 (IOB)
SM
4-31
B264/B265
Troubleshooting
Symptom The Paper End indicator lights even if paper is placed in the upper paper tray. The Paper End indicator does not light even if there is no paper in the upper paper tray. The Paper End indicator lights even if paper is placed in the lower paper tray. The Paper End indicator does not light even if there is no paper in the lower paper tray. The Paper Jam indicator will light whenever a copy is made. The Paper Jam indicator lights even if there is no paper. The Paper Jam indicator will light whenever a copy is made. The Paper Jam indicator lights even if there is no paper. No symptom SC403 is displayed
BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
4.2.2 SWITCHES
Component (Symbol) Right Lower Cover (SW1) Main (SW3) Front Cover Safety (SW4) CN 216-4 (IOB) 102-1~4 (PSU) 107-1 (PSU) Condition Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Symptom Doors/Covers Open is displayed even if the right lower cover is closed. The LCD goes blank when the lower cover is opened. The machine does not turn on. The machine does not turn off. Doors/Covers Open is displayed even if the front cover is closed. Doors/Covers Open is not displayed even if the front cover is opened.
4.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

115V Power Supply Board 6.3A / 125V FU1 6.3A / 125V FU2 FU3 FU5 FU6 FU9 FU101 FU102 FU103 6.3A / 125V 6.3A / 125V 3.15A/125V 5A/125V 15A / 125V 10A / 125V 2A / 125V Fuse Rating 210 ~ 230V 6.3A / 250V 6.3A / 250V 6.3A / 250V 6.3A / 250V 3.15A/250V 4A/250V 8A/250V 5A / 250V 1A / 250V Symptom at power on Doors/Covers Open is displayed Doors/Covers Open for the finisher is displayed Paper end condition SC302, or SC403, or SC405 displayed
No response No response Normal operation (optional heaters do not work)
B264/B265
4-32
SM
LEDS
4.4 LEDS
BICU LED Sequences
LED 101 (Green) Flashes Flashes Flashes Flashes Flashes Off LED 102 (Yellow) Off On (1~2s) then Off On Flashes Off Off LED 103 (Red) Flashes Flashes Flashes Flashes Flashes Off
Normal Operation System Startup Firmware Update: Normal Execution Firmware Update: Error Firmware Update: Normal End Energy Save Mode
Controller LED Sequences

LED 1 (Red) System Startup (including Self-Diagnostics) Self-Diagnostic Error Normal Operation Firmware Update: Normal Execution Firmware Update: Error Firmware Update: Normal End On On Flashes Flashes Off On LED 2 (Red) Off On Off Flashes Off On
Troubleshooting B264/B265
NOTE: LED 1 monitors Data Bus Bit 14, LED 2 monitors Data Bus Bit 15.
4.5 TEST POINTS

Controller Board
Number TP1 TP3 TP6 TP8 TP9 TP10 TP11 TP12 TP13 TP14 TP15 TP16 TP17 Monitored Signal GND GND GND DB0 RXD DB0 TXD GND +5VE GND +5V +5VE GND R_FGATE W_FGATE
SM
4-33
SERVICE TABLES
SERVICE TABLES REVISION HISTORY Page
1 37 39 41 51 79 135 136 ~ 149
Date
04/11/2006 06/29/2007 08/07/2007 02/01/2007 05/18/2007 03/30/2007 06/29/2007 06/29/2007
Added/Updated/New
Updated Information Service Program Mode added Updated Information SP5-xxx Updated Information Service Program Mode Tables Updated Information - Service Program Mode Updated Information Error codes added to SP5816-208 Updated Information SP7504 New Information Errors During Firmware Update Page number change only. (Uploading/Downloading NVRAM Data)
Rev. 04/2006
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5. SERVICE TABLES
!CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off. NOTE: The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data.
5.1
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION

The service program mode is used to check electrical data, change modes, and adjust values. Two service program modes are provided: SP Mode (Service). Includes all the options in the SP displays for normal maintenance and adjustments. SSP Mode (Special Service). Includes the normal SP modes and some additional options in the SP displays not required for normal settings and adjustments. (Most are marked DFU (Design or Factory Use) in the following tables.) Do not change these important settings needlessly. For details, contact your supervisor.
Entering and Exiting SP mode

"# $%&# '# 1. Press the Clear Mode key. 2. Use the keypad to enter 107. 3. Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds. 4. Enter the Service Mode. To enter the Normal Service Mode: Copy SP ( Copy SP Exit On the touch-panel, press Copy SP. To enter the Special service Mode: Hold down ( and then press Copy SP. 5. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
NOTE: Use SP2-902 to perform test pattern printing. (! 5.2.4)
SM
5-1
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
SP Mode Button Summary Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
B004S500.WMF
! " # $ % & ' ( ) *
Opens all SP groups and sublevels. Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display. Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. To return to the SP mode screen, press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window. Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number and then press (. (SP Mode must be highlighted before you can enter the number. Just press SP Mode if it is not highlighted.) Press twice to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal operation. Press any Group number to open a list of SP codes and titles for that group. For example, to open the SP code list for SP1-nnn, press Group1. If an SP has sublevels, click the appropriate button to expand the list. Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group. Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display (page). Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line. Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
B264/B265
5-2
SM
Rev. 04/2006
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing 1) In the SP mode, select the test print and then press Copy Window. 2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings (paper size, etc.) for the test print. 3) Press Start ) to execute the test print. 4) Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1. Selecting the Program Number
Program numbers have two or three levels. 1. Before you begin, refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust. (! 5.1.3) 2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you want to adjust. 3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the SP number that you want to open, and then press that number to expand the list. 4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you want to set and press. The small entry box on the right is activated and displays the default initial and the current setting below.
B004S501.WMF
NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings. (! 5.1.3) 5. To enter a setting Press ! to toggle between plus and minus and then use the keypad to enter the appropriate number. The number you enter will write over the previous setting. Press ( to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the key press is ignored.) When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes. 6. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window and select the settings for the test print. Press Start ) twice, and then press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode display. 7. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
SM
5-3
B264/B265
Service Tables
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
Rev. 04/2006
5.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES

Please note these general changes in this section: Group 8(Data Log 2) is a new group of counters. Along with the addition of Group 8, many of the Group 7 counters have been removed.
5.2.1 SERVICE TABLE KEY

Notation [range / default / step] What it means Example: [-9 ~ +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be adjusted in the range 9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM reset, and the value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with each key press. Value stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, this default value (factory setting) is restored. An SP number set in bold-italics denotes a Special Service Program mode setting that appears only after entering the SP mode by pressing ( on the 10-key pad and Copy SP on the touch-screen together. B264 B265 Denotes Design or Factory Use. Do not change this value. The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this value.
* 1111
35 cpm 45 cpm DFU Japan only
5.2.2 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator. 1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then set Service Mode Lock to OFF. After he or she logs in:
[User Tools] > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF
This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes. The service technician can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to 1. 3. After machine servicing is completed: Change SP5169 from 1 to 0. Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine. The administrator will then set the Service Mode Lock to ON.
B264/B265
5-4
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5.2.3 SERVICE TABLES

SP1-xxx: Feed
1001* Leading Edge Registration Adjusts the printing leading edge registration using the trimming area pattern (SP2-902-3, No.11). [+9 ~ 9 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm] Use ! to toggle between before entering the value. Specification: 3 2 mm Side-to-Side Registration Adjusts the printing side-to-side registration from the 3rd paper feed station using the trimming area pattern (SP2-902-3, No.11).Tray3, Tray4 for Paper Feed Unit. Use the ! key to toggle between + and before entering the value. Specification: 2 1.5 mm Tray 1 [9 ~ +9/ +3.0 mm / 0.1 mm step] Tray 2 [9 ~ +9/ +3.0 mm / 0.1 mm step] Tray 3 [9~ +9/ +2.0 mm / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 4 [9~ +9/ +2.0 mm / 0.1 mm/step] From Duplex Unit [9 ~ +9/ +0.0 mm / 0.1 mm/step] Bypass Feed [9 ~ +9/ +3.0 mm / 0.1 mm/step] LCT (if present) [9 ~ +9/ +1.5 mm / 0.1 mm/step] Registration Buckle Adjustment Adjusts the relay clutch timing at registration. Relay clutch timing determines the amount of paper buckle at registration. (A + setting causes more buckling.) [9 ~+9 / 0 /1 mm step] Trays 2,3,4 LCT Duplex Bypass Tray 1 Feed [9 ~+9 / 1 /1 mm step] Bypass Thick Paper [9 ~+9 / -2 /1 mm step] By-pass Feed Paper Size Display Displays the paper width sensor data for the by-pass feed table. Exit Junction Solenoid Start Timing Adjusts the timing of the solenoids at the entrance and exit of the paper exit section to accommodate the increased speed of the duplex unit. This SP has been added to compensate for the increased operation speed of the duplex unit for this machine. Increase the value if the leading edges are jamming. Decrease the value if trailing edges are bending at the entrance Exit Entrance Junction 35 CPM: [200 ~ 450 ms / 370 ms / 10 ms] Solenoid 45 CPM: [200 ~ 450 ms / 300 ms /10 ms] Exit Last Junction Solenoid 35 CPM: [200 ~ 450 ms / 370 ms / 10 ms] 45 CPM: [200 ~ 450 ms / 370 ms /10 ms]]
1002*
1002 1 1002 2 1002 3 1002 4 1002 5 1002 6 1002 7 1003*
1003 1 1003 2 1003 3 1003 4 1003 5 1007*
1012*
1012 1* 1012 2*
SM
5-5
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
1103*
1103 1* 1103 2* 1103 3*
Fusing Idling Switches fusing idling on/off. When on, printing will not start until enough time has elapsed so the hot roller can reach optimum temperature. This ensures even heat on the hot roller. Switch on if fusing on the 1st and 2nd copies is incomplete (this may occur if the room is cold.) You must switch SP1103-1 ON before you set the fusing interval with SP1103-2. Enable Fusing Idling 0 = Off, 1 = On Fusing Idling Interval [0 ~ 60 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 sec.] Fusing Pre-Rotation Sets the machine to fusing idling only for 5 sec. for every job (when the original is set on the ARDF, when the ARDF cover is opened, etc.) and the fusing unit has reached the reload temperature (optimum temperature for operation). 0: Off. No 5 sec. idling done before a job. 1: On. 5 sec. idling done before every job. Note The pre-fusing idling set with SP5959 executes after the 5 sec. idling selected with this SP is finished. The idling stops if a new job is received before the idling completes. Fusing Temperature Control Selects the fusing temperature control method. After changing this setting, be sure to power the machine off and on again with the main power switch to enable the new setting. [0~1 / 0 / 1] 0: Normal (ON/OFF control). Allows full application from ac power supply to bring the hot roller up to the target fusing temperature then shuts off. Determines the on time from the present temperature (detected by the thermistor on the hot roller) and the temperature of 1 cycle before. 1: Phase (hysterisis) control. Sets the upper and lower limits for the temperature; at the lower temperature the fusing lamp is on and at the higher temperature the fusing lamp is off. Change this setting to 0 only if the user has excessive electrical noise or interference on the power supply line. Such interference can cause voltage to drop when power is applied using the ON/OFF control method. Interference can be caused by the general poor quality of the power supply lines, or if the machine is sharing a power supply with other electrical devices such as fluorescent lights. Before changing this setting, make sure that the machine is connected to a power supply not shared by other electrical equipment. Note: Selecting Phase control (1) could cause the fusing temperature control board to emit low pitched noise.
1104*
B264/B265
5-6
SM
Rev. 04/2006
1105*
Fusing Temperature Adjustment Allows adjustment of the hot roller temperature at the center and ends of the roller for the quality or thickness of the paper. The hot roller in this machine has two fusing lamps: one heats the center of the roller, the other heats both ends. Each fusing lamp can be adjusted separately. The re-load temperature is the print ready temperature. When the fusing temperature exceeds this setting, the machine can operate. Do not set up a reload temperature (Re-load Temp. = Fusing. Temp SP Value.) that is higher than the SP1-105-2 setting. Roller Center: Trays 35 cpm: [120 ~ 200/ 160 / 1 deg.] 45 cpm: [120 ~ 200 / 170 / 1 deg.] Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center of the hot roller. Roller Ends: Trays 35 cpm: [120 ~ 200 / 165 / 1 deg.] 45 cpm: [120 ~ 200 / 175 / 1 deg.] Adjusts the fusing temperature at the ends of the hot roller. Roller Center: Bypass 35 cpm: [120 ~ 220 / 170 / 1 deg.] 45 cpm: [120 ~ 220 / 170 / 1 deg.] Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center of the hot roller for bypass feed. Roller Center: Ends 35 cpm: [120 ~ 220 / 170 / 1 deg.] 45 cpm: : [120 ~ 220 / 170 / 1 deg] Adjusts the fusing temperature at the ends of the hot roller for bypass feed. Re-load Temp. Minus: [0 ~ 60 / 30 / 1 step] Roller Center Sets the reload temperature for the center of the hot roller. This setting depends on the target temperature. Reload temp. = Target Temp This SP Setting Note: Do not set a temperature that is higher than the setting for SP1105 1 (Roller Center: Trays) Re-load Temp. Minus: [0 ~ 60 / 30 / 1 step] Roller Ends Sets the reload temperature for the ends of the hot roller. This setting depends on the target temperature. Reload temp. = Target Temp This SP Setting Note: Do not set a temperature that is higher than the setting for SP1105 2 (Roller Ends: Trays) Roller Center: Bypass 35 cpm: [120 ~ 220 / 170 / 1 deg] (Thick Paper) 45 cpm: [120 ~ 220 / 170 / 1 deg] Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center of the hot roller for thick paper. Roller Ends: Bypass (Thick 35 cpm: [120 ~ 220 / 170 / 1 deg] Paper) 45 cpm: [120 ~ 220 / 170 / 1 deg] Adjusts the fusing temperature at the ends of the hot roller for thick paper. Re-load Temp. Minus: 35 cpm: [0 ~ 60 / 0oC/ 5] Roller Center (Thick Paper) 45 cpm: [0~ 60 / 5oC /1] Sets the temperature for re-heating the hot roller center for thick paper. Re-load Temp. Minus: 35 cpm: [0 ~ 60 / 0oC/ 5] Roller Ends (Thick Paper) 45 cpm: [0~ 60 / 5oC /1] Sets the temperature for re-heating the hot roller ends for thick paper.
1105 1
1105 2
1105 3
1105 4
1105 5
1105 6
1105 7
1105 8
1105 9*
1105 10*
SM
5-7
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
1106 1106 1 1106 2 1106 3
Fusing Temperature Display Roller Center Displays the fusing temperature for the center of the hot roller. Roller Ends Displays the fusing temperature for the ends of the hot roller. I/O Board Temp. Displays in the internal temperature of the machine when it at Power On was powered on. Fusing Nip Band Check Checks the fusing nip band. [0=Off, 1=On] Paper Reverse Timing (Duplex) [+5 ~ 5 / 0 mm / 1 mm step] Adjusts the timing for stopping the rotation of the reverse roller after the trailing edge of the paper passes the duplex entrance sensor. Adjust the timing if paper frequently jams at the inverter gate in the duplex unit. Motor Speed Adjustment Adjusts the speeds of the main motor, feed/development motor, and fusing exit motor. Each step decreases or increases motor speed in 0.15% increments Main Motor [-4 ~ +4 / 0 / 0.15%] Feed/Development Motor [-4 ~ +4 / 0 / 0.15%] Fusing/Exit Motor [-4 ~ +4 / 0 / 0.15%]
1109*
1111*
1801*
1801 1 1801 2 1801 3
B264/B265
5-8
SM
Rev. 04/2006
SP2-xxx: Drum
2001* 2001 1* 2001 2* Charge Roller Bias Adjustment Copying [1000 ~ 2000 / 1500V / 10V step] Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for copying. ID Sensor Pattern [0 ~ 700 / 250V / 10V step] Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller when making the VSDP ID sensor pattern (for charge roller voltage correction). The actual charge roller voltage is this value plus the value of SP2001 1. Charge Roller Bias Correction Charge Roller Voltage Correction 1 [0.1 ~ 1.0 / 0.85 / 0.05 step] Adjusts the lower threshold value for the charge roller correction. When the value of VSP/VSG is greater than this value, the charge roller voltage increases by 30 V (e.g., from 500 to 530). Charge Roller Voltage Correction 2 [0.1 ~ 1.0 / 0.90 / 0.05 step] Adjusts the upper threshold value for the charge roller correction. When the value of VSP/VSG is greater than this value, the charge roller voltage decreases by 30 V (absolute value). Charge Roller Voltage Adjustment 1 [1000 ~ 2000 / 1500V / 10V step] Adjusts the lower limit value for charge roller voltage correction. Charge Roller Voltage Adjustment 2 [1000 ~ 2000 / 2000V / 10V step] Adjusts the upper limit value for charge roller voltage correction. Charge Roller Voltage Step [0 ~ 100V / 30V / 10V step] Adjusts the correction voltage adjustment step size. Printing Erase Margin Adjusts the leading edge (top), trailing edge (bottom), left, and right margins Leading Edge (Top) [0.9 ~ 9.0 / 3 / 0.1 mm step] Spec: 2 mm Trailing Edge (Bottom) [0.9 ~ 9.0 / 3 / 0.1 mm step] Spec: 2 mm Left Edge [0.9 ~ 9.0 / 2 / 0.1 mm step] Spec: 1.5 mm Right Edge [0.9 ~ 9.0 / 2 / 0.1 mm step] Spec: 1.5 mm Trailing Edge - Back side [0.0 ~ 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1 mm step] Recommended: 2 1.5 mm Back Side - Left [0.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm step] Recommended: 2 1.5 mm Back Side - Right [0.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm step] Recommended: 2 +2.5/-1.5 mm LD Power Adjustment DFU Adjusts the intensity of the laser for the copier, printer, and fax unit. The Copier and Printer/Fax settings can be adjusted separately. LD1 (Copier) 35 cpm: [30~+64/10/1 LSB step 45 cpm: [30~64/5/1 LSB step]] LD2 (Copier) 35 cpm: [30~+79/30/1 LSB step 45 cpm: [30~79/25/1 LSB step]] LD1 (Printer, FAX) [50 ~ 35 / 45 /1 LSB step] LD2 (Printer, FAX) [50 ~ 35 / 45 /1 LSB step] LD1 Adjustment Start/End OFF/ON LD2 Adjustment Start/End OFF/ON
2005* 2005 1*
2005 2*
2005 3* 2005 4* 2005 5*
2101* 2101 1* 2101 2* 2101 3* 2101 4* 2101 5* 2101 6* 2101 7*
2103*
2103 1* 2103 2* 2103 3* 2103 4* 2103 5* 2103 6*
SM
5-9
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
2109*
2109 1*
2109 2*
2109 3*
2109 4*
2109 5*
2109 6
2109 7
2109 8
LD Beam Pitch Adjustment Adjusts the beam gap for the dual beam system. After replacing the LD unit or replacing or clearing the NVRAM, use this SP mode to adjust the laser beam pitch. This adjustment is performed by specifying the number of pulses to the stepper motor that will adjust the angle of rotation of the LD unit from the home position. 400 dpi [400 dpi: [8~ 262 / 144 / 1 pulse step] Adjusts the laser beam pitch value for 400 dpi resolution. After replacing the LD unit or replacing or clearing NVRAM, use this SP and SP2109-3 to adjust the laser beam pitch. 600 dpi [600 dpi: [30 ~ 284 / 168/ 1 pulse step] Adjusts the laser beam pitch value for 600 dpi resolution. After replacing the LD unit or replacing or clearing NVRAM, use this SP and SP2109-4 to adjust the laser beam pitch. 400 dpi Initial Setting Initializes the laser beam pitch for 400 dpi using the value for SP2-109-1. After entering a value for SP2-109-1, this SP must be used. 600 dpi Initial Setting Initializes the laser beam pitch for 600 dpi using the value for SP2-109-2. After entering a value for SP2-109-2, this SP must be used. Auto Pitch Adjustment [0 ~ 65535 / 1000 / 1 step] Interval Sets the interval for automatic laser beam pitch adjustment. When the number of times that the resolution has been changed reaches this value, the laser unit position is automatically corrected. Current LD Unit Position Displays the current LD unit position (number of pulses from home position). If this is different from the value of 2-109-1 or 2-109-2, LD unit positioning has failed. Beam Pitch Change Counter Displays how many times the LD unit position has been changed (how many times the resolution has changed.) When the laser beam pitch adjustment is done, this counter is reset to zero. Beam Pitch Data Reset Resets the values of SP2-109-6 and SP2-109-7. After replacing the LD unit, this SP mode must be performed. See the LD Unit Removal Procedure. Test Mode dpi DFU, [See below / 8/ 0 ~ 18] Sets the scanning resolution (dpi). Note: Any setting other than 0, 4, or 8 will cause an error. 0 = 400 x 400 dpi 15 = 439 x 430 dpi 1 = 391 x 406 dpi 16 = 476 x 476 dpi 4= 300 x 300 dpi 17 = 483 x 465 dpi 18= 465 x 483 dpi 8= 600 x 600 dpi
2110
B264/B265
5-10
SM
Rev. 04/2006
2112
Polygon Motor Off Timer [0 ~ 60 s / 10 s / 5 s step] Input the time that the polygon motor is to switch off after the printer has remained idle for the specified time and entered the standby mode. If set to zero, the polygon motor never switches off in standby mode. However, if the machine enters the energy saver mode, the polygon motor will ignore the zero setting and switch itself off. Development Bias Adjustment Development Bias [-200 ~ -700 / -560V / 10V step] Adjusts the development bias for copying. Use as a temporary measure to correct faint copies from an aging drum. ID Sensor Pattern [- 200 ~ -700 / -480V / 10V step] Adjusts the development bias for the ID sensor pattern for VSP Forced Toner Supply Forces the toner bottle to supply toner at 1-second intervals for up to 30 seconds. To start, press (. Toner Supply Mode [0: Sensor control, 1: Image pixel count] Selects the toner mode. If you select 1, SP2-209-002 should be set to its default value. Use image pixel count modes only as a temporary measure if the ID or TD sensor is defective. Toner Supply Rate Toner Rate [10 ~ 800 / 60 mg/s / 5 mg/s step] Sets the amount of toner supplied every second by the toner supply motor. The length of time the motor remains on is determined by the data read by the TD sensor and ID sensor. Increasing this value reduces the toner supply clutch on time. Use a lower value if the user tends to make lots of copies that have a high proportion of black. Toner Supply Correction Data [25 ~ 300 / 300 / 25 step] Displays the toner supply correction coefficient (K). It can also be used to adjust K, but the value is changed again when VT is measured for the next copy. The toner supply rate depends on the amount of toner in the toner bottle. This change is corrected using this coefficient. This SP can be used to check the toner supply condition. The lower the value of K, the lower the toner density ID Sensor Pattern Interval Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern prints. Job Page Count [0 ~ 200 / 10 / 1] Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern printing. For users that do not make many copies daily, set a smaller interval to compensate for the effects of seasonal and weather changes. Forced Page Count [2 ~ 999 / 200 / 1] Forces creation of the ID sensor pattern to prevent low density copies for customers who use the copier for long copy jobs.
2201* 2201 1*
2201 2*
2207
2208*
2209* 2209 1
2209 2*
2210* 2210 1*
2210 2*
SM
5-11
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
2213*
Copies After Toner Near-End Selects the number of copies that can be printed once the copier has detected toner near-end. [0~2/0/1 step] [0: 90 copies, 1: No copies, 2: 10 copies] Notes: If "1" is selected the machine stops printing when the TD sensor output drops below the prescribed level. Select 1 or 2 if the customer normally makes copies of very high density. Vref Manual Setting Adjusts the TD sensor reference voltage (Vref). Change this value after replacing the development unit with another development unit that contains toner. [1.0 ~ 5.00 V / 4.00V / 2.0 step] 1. Check the value of SP2-220 in both the machine containing the test unit and the machine that you are going to move it to. 2. Install the test development unit, and then input the VREF for this unit into SP2220. 3. After the test, put back the old development unit, and change SP2-220 back to the original value. Notes: Vt Display Current Displays the TD sensor output voltage for the immediately previous copy. Average Previous 10 copies Displays the average of the most recent TD sensor outputs (from the previous 10 copies). Rate of Change Displays the rate of change in the TD sensor output. GAIN Displays the GAIN value used to calculate the on time for the toner supply motor. Image Pixel Count Displays the image pixel count.
2220*
2223* 2223 1 2223 2
2223 3 2223 4 2223 5
2228
Developer Lot No. Use the keyboard display to enter the lot number of the developer. (The lot number is embossed on the top edge of the developer pack.) Press Execute to initialize the developer and force toner supply to the toner hopper at machine installation.
B264/B265
5-12
SM
Rev. 04/2006
2301 2301 1
2301 2
2301 3
2301 4
2301 5
2301 6
SM
5-13
B264/B265
Service Tables
2301 7
Transfer Current Adjustment 1st Side of Paper 35 CPM: [20 ~ 100A / 35 / 1A step] 45 CPM: [20 ~ 100A / 45] / 1A step] Adjusts the transfer current for printing the first side of the paper (image area). If the user uses thicker paper, the current may have to be increased to ensure sufficient transfer of toner. 2nd Side of Paper 35 CPM: [20 ~ 100A / 35 / 1A step] 45 CPM: [20 ~ 100A / 40] / 1A step] Adjusts the transfer current for printing the second side of the paper (image area). Leading Edge 35 CPM: [20 ~ 100A / 35 / 1A step] 45 CPM: [20 ~ 100A / 45] / 1A step] Adjusts the transfer current for copying at leading edge of the paper. Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high humidity and high temperature conditions. Bypass Feed (45ppm) 45 CPM: [20 ~ 100A / 45 / 1A step] Adjusts the transfer current for copying from the by-pass tray (image area) for the 45 CPM. If the user normally feeds thicker paper from the bypass tray, use a higher setting. Leading Edge Bypass Feed 45 CPM: [20 ~ 100A / 60 / 1A step] (45ppm) Adjusts the transfer current for copying at the leading edge of paper fed from the by-pass tray for the 45 CPM. Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high humidity and high temperature conditions. Bypass Feed (35 ppm) 35 CPM: [20 ~ 100A / 35 / 1A step] Adjusts the transfer current for copying from the by-pass tray (image area) for the 35 CPM. Leading Edge Bypass Feed (35 ppm) 35 CPM: [20 ~ 100A / 45 / 1A step] Adjusts the transfer current for copying at the leading edge of paper fed from the by-pass tray for the 35 CPM.
Rev. 04/2006
2309* 2309 1
2309 2
2309 3
2309 4
2309 5
2309 6
Transfer Current Correction Paper Lower Width (a) [0 ~ 297 / 150 / 1 mm step] Adjusts the lower paper width threshold for the transfer current, charge voltage, and development bias corrections. Use this SP when an image problem (e.g., insufficient toner transfer) occurs with a small width paper. If the paper width is smaller than this value, the transfer current will be multiplied by the factor in SP2-309-3 (paper tray) or SP2-309-5 (by-pass). Paper Upper Width (b) [0 ~ 297 / 216 / 1 mm step] Adjusts the upper paper width threshold for the transfer current, charge voltage, and development bias corrections. As for SP2-309-1, but the factors are in SP2-309-4 (paper tray) and SP2-309-6 (by-pass). Paper Tray (alpha) [1.0 ~ 3 / 1.2 / 0.1 mm step] Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient used if the paper width is less than the setting of SP2-309-1. Paper Tray (beta) [1.0 ~ 3 / 1.2 / 0.1 mm step] Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient used if the paper width is less than the setting of SP2-309-2. By-Pass Feed (gamma) [1.0 ~ 3 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm step] Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient used if the paper width is less than the setting of SP2-309-1. By-Pass Feed (delta) [1.0 ~ 3 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm step] Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient used if the paper width is less than the setting of SP2-309-2. TD Sensor Initial Setting Performs the TD sensor initial setting. This SP mode controls the voltage applied to the TD sensor to make the TD sensor output about 4.0 V. Press Execute to start. After finishing this, the TD sensor output voltage is displayed. Use this mode only after installing the machine, changing the TD sensor, or adding new developer. TD Sensor Manual Setting Allows you to adjust the TD sensor output manually for the following. VTS [1.00 ~ 5.00V / 4.78V / 0.02V step] Adjusts the TD sensor output (VT). Change this value after replacing the development unit with another one that already contains toner. For example, when using a development unit from another machine for test purposes. To adjust VT, use a similar procedure as for SP2-220. VTMAX [1.00 ~ 5.00V / 4.78V / 0.02V step] Adjusts the maximum value for SP2802 1. VTMIN [1.00 ~ 5.00V / 1.00V / 0.02V step] Adjusts the minimum value for SP2802 1. Developer Initialization Performs the developer initialization. Press Execute to start. This SP should be performed after doing SP2801 at installation and after replacing the drum.
2801*
2802* 2802 1
2802 2 2802 3
2805*
B264/B265
5-14
SM
Rev. 04/2006
2902 2902 2
2902 3
Test Pattern IPU Test Pattern Pattern 0 ~ 15 (!5.2.4) Prints the test patterns for the IPU chip. This SP mode is useful for finding whether the BICU or the SBU is defective. If the printout is not OK, the BICU is defective. Printing Test Pattern Pattern 0 ~ 38(!5.2.4) Prints the printer test patterns. Select the number of the test pattern that you want to print. This SP mode is useful for finding whether the LDDR or the BICU is defective. If the printout is not satisfactory, the LDDR is defective. Main Scan Magnification Adjusts the magnification in the main scan direction for copy mode and printer mode. Press ! to toggle . Copier [2.0 ~ +2.0 / 0 / 0.1% step] Printer [2.0 ~ +2.0 / 0 / 0.1% step] Transfer Current On/Off Timing La (On Timing) [30 ~ +30 / 0 mm / 1 mm step] Adjusts the transfer current on timing at leading edge. Lb (Switch Timing) [0 ~ +30 / 10 mm / 1 mm step] Adjusts the transfer current switch timing. This determines when the leading edge stops and the image area current begins (see SP2-301). Lc (Off Timing) [30 ~ +30 / 5 mm / 1 mm step] Adjusts the transfer current off timing. (e.g. 5 mm is 5 mm after the trailing edge.) Drum Reverse Rotation Interval DFU
2909*
2909 1* 2909 2* 2911 2911 1 2911 2
2911 3
2913*
Print Density for Test Pattern [0 ~ 15 / 15 / 1] Sets the print density for the patterns printed with SP2-902-3.
SM
5-15
B264/B265
Service Tables
2912*
Rev. 04/2006
2914* 2914 1*
2914 2*
2914 3*
2914 4*
Process Control Setting C-alpha [0 ~ 400 / 150 / 10V step] Adjusts the charge roller voltage used when paper with a small width is fed from the by-pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the value of SP2-309-1. Use this SP when an image problem (such as white spots at the center of black dots or breaks in thin black lines) occurs when paper with a small width is fed from the by-pass feed tray. C-beta [0 ~ 400 / 0 / 10V step] Adjusts the charge roller voltage used when paper with a small width is fed from the by-pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the value of SP2-309-2. Use this SP when an image problem (see 2-914-1) occurs when paper with a small width is fed from the by-pass feed tray. B-gamma [0 ~ 300 / 200 / 10V step] Adjusts the development bias used when paper with a small width is fed from the by-pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the value of SP2-309-1. Use this SP when an image problem (see 2-914-1) occurs when paper with a small width is fed from the by-pass feed tray. B-delta [0 ~ 300 / 50 / 10V step] Adjusts the development bias used when paper with a small width is fed from the by-pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the value of SP2-309-2. Use this SP when an image problem (see 2-914-1) occurs when paper with a small width is fed from the by-pass feed tray. LD Off Check DFU
2920 2960*
Toner Overflow Sensor [0 = No, 1 = Yes] Selects whether or not the toner overflow sensor is activated. Transfer Cleaning Blade [0 ~ 30/ 0 / 1 sheets] Forming Applies a pattern of toner to the transfer belt at a defined interval between sheets on the transfer belt in order to reduce friction between the belt surface and the cleaning blade. Under conditions of high temperature and high humidity, the density control feature may reduce the amount of toner, which also reduces the amount of toner on the surface of the transfer belt. With less toner on the belt, the friction between the belt and the blade increases, and could cause the blade to bend or scour the surface of the belt.
2964*
B264/B265
5-16
SM
Rev. 04/2006
2969* 2969 1*
2969 2*
LD PWM Selection Printer Output LD PWM Selection [1 ~ 4 / 1 / 1 step] Changes the LD power PWM control for printed copies. A smaller value produces a lighter image. Use this SP to adjust the image density for printing from a personal computer or printing a received fax message. 1: 87.5% 2: 75% 3: 62.5% 4: 50% Fax Output LD PWM Selection [1 ~ 4 / 1 / 1 step] Changes the LD power PWM control for printed fax messages. A smaller value produces a lighter image. Use this SP to adjust the image density for printing fax messages. 1: 87.5% 2: 75% 3: 62.5% 4: 50% Toner Full Sensor Count DFU
2971 2972*
2972 1*
2972 2*
Grayscale Limit A new feature of this machine that controls the halftone density level to prevent deterioration of the OPC. The halftone density is detected by the ID sensor, and the machine adjusts the intensity of the LD beam according to the upper/lower limit setting. Upper Limit [0 ~ 100 / 60 / 1 step] Defines the upper limit for grayscale. A larger value allows a wider range of halftones at the pale end of the scale. If the image contains pale areas with fuzzy borders surrounded by dark areas, reduce this value to make the borders clearer. Lower Limit [0 ~ 100 / 40 / 1 step] Defines the lower limit for grayscale. A smaller value allows a wider range of halftones at the dark end of the scale. Grayscale Copy Interval Check [0 ~ 1000 / 100 / 10 step] Sets the halftone operation interval in order to prevent deterioration of the OPC. If the number of copies exceeds this setting, at the end of the job, or if the door is opened and closed, charge correction is executed. Image Density Adjustment [1 ~ 5 / 3 / 1 step] Adjusts image density. Changing this setting adjusts development bias and ID sensor output voltage that in turn raises or lowers image density. Toner End Detection ON [0 ~ 2,000 / 0 / 10 s step] Time Sets a time limit for issuing the toner near end warning on the operation panel. The time may need to be shorter for customers who run especially large print jobs (working at night, for example) to ensure earlier warning of the toner near end condition so toner out does not interrupt a long job. 0: Normal end detection (90 sheets after near-end detected (SP2213) Service Tables
2973*
2974*
2975*
SM
5-17
B264/B265
Rev. 04/2006
2976*
Toner Bottle Total On Time [0 ~ 2,000,000 / 0 / 1 ms step] Displays the total ON time of the toner supply motor, calculated from when the toner bottle was replaced. Use this to check that the toner end count (SP2975) is working properly. When SP2975 is set to any value other than 0, this value is displayed when it matches the setting of SP2975. When SP2975 is set to 0, SP2976 is disabled. SP2976 is automatically set to zero by toner end recovery.) Charge Counter [0 ~ 1000000 / 0 / 1 step] Sets the number of pages to print after toner and carrier initialization before the charge input is increased to compensate for deterioration over time in the polarity of the carrier. The strength in the polarity of the carrier in the toner will eventually decrease and cause lower charge output. Setting the charge output to increase after a specified number of copies can compensate for this effect. Polygon Mirror Rotation Switch DFU Switches the number revolutions per minute of the polygon mirror motor. 0: Rpm determined by engine 1: Rpm for 35 CPM 2: Rpm for 45 CPM
2980*
2981
B264/B265
5-18
SM
Rev. 04/2006
SP3-xxx: Process
3001* 3001 1 ID Sensor Initial Setting ID Sensor PWM Setting [0 ~ 255 / 100 / 1 step] Allows you to reset the PWM of the ID sensor LED to avoid a service call error after clearing NVRAM or replacing the NVRAM. The PWM data is stored by executing SP-3001-2. ID Sensor Initialization Performs the ID sensor initial setting. ID sensor output for the bare drum (VSG) is adjusted automatically to 4.0 0.2 V. Press Execute to start. Perform this setting after replacing or cleaning the ID sensor, replacing the drum, or clearing NVRAM. ID Sensor Output Display Displays the current VSG, VSP, VSDP, and grayscale control. If the ID sensor does not detect the ID pattern, VSP = 5.0 V/VSG = 5.0 V is displayed and an SC code is generated. If the ID sensor does not detect the bare area of the drum, VSP = 0.0 V/VSG =0.0 V is displayed and an SC code is generated. Vsg (Drum Surface Output) [0V ~ 5.00V] Vsp (Pattern Output) [0V ~ 5.00V] Vsdp (Immediate Post-Pattern Output). [0V ~ 5.00V] Vsm/Vsg (Grayscale Post-Pattern Output) [0V ~ 5.00V] Hot Roller Stripper Cleaning After Job Toner and carbon clinging to the hot roller strippers can cause poor print quality. To prevent this, toner and carbon are dislodged from the hot roller strippers in two ways: 1) switching the fusing motor on/off after every print job, and 2) freely rotating the hot roller for 5 s at the beginning of every print job. These SP set up operation of the first method (switching the fusing motor on/off after a print job.)For details, see Section 6.6.2 Hot Roller Stripper Cleaning. Also see SP 5959. Number Rotations This SP sets the number of times the 1st Cleaning is done for the number of pages prescribed with SP3905 002 have been printed. [0.0~1.0/1.0/0.1] Note: All fans remain on during cleaning and then switch off 60 sec. after the cleaning cycle ends. Raising this setting can increase wear on the hot roller and cleaning roller and shorten the service life of the hot roller. Number of Pages This SP prescribes the number of pages to accumulate before the fusing motor is switched on/off (1 cycle). [0 ~ 1000 / 5 / 1] Unless you change this setting, 15 sec. after a total of 5 pages have been printed (the accumulated total of several small jobs), the fusing motor will switch on for 15 sec. and then switch off. This 15 sec. off/15 sec. on at the end of a cleaning job is the 1st Cleaning.
3001 2
3103*
3103 1* 3103 2* 3103 3* 3103 4* 3905*
3905 1*
3905 2*
SM
5-19
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
3905 3*
3905 4*
No. addtnl. sheets for 2nd HR stripper cleaning This SP prescribes the number of pages to print continuously before the fusing motor is switched on/off twice. [6 ~ 49 / 30 / 1] Unless you change this setting, 15 sec. after the end of every print job of 30 to 49 continuous pages, the 1st Cleaning will be done twice (fusing motor is switched on/off twice at 15 sec. intervals). No. addtnl. sheets for 3rd HR stripper cleaning This SP prescribes the number of pages to print continuously before the 1st Cleaning is done once at the end of the print job, pauses 45 sec., and then executes again. [50 ~ 999/ 100 / 1] Unless you change this setting, 15 sec. after the end of every print job of 50 to 999 continuous pages, the fusing motor will switch on for 15 sec., switch off for 4 sec. switch on for 15 sec. and then switch off. Switching the fusing motor on again for 15 sec. after 45 sec. have elapsed after the 1st Cleaning is called the 2nd Cleaning. No. of times for 3rd HR stripper cleaning This SP prescribes the number of times that the cleaning pattern of SP3905 004 is repeated for the number of pages prescribed by SP3905 004. [0~5/0/1] Unless you change this setting, the cleaning pattern of SP3904 (1st Cleaning, then the 2nd Cleaning after 35 sec.) is not repeated. If you change this setting to "1" for example, then the pattern will be repeated once. Job/HR stripper cleaning priority setting This SP setting determines whether cleaning is canceled if another job starts while cleaning is in progress. 0: New job priority 1: Cleaning priority Setting this SP to "1" ensures that every cleaning cycle executes completely before another job is allowed to start.
3905 5*
3905 6*
B264/B265
5-20
SM
Rev. 04/2006
SP4-xxx: Scanner
4008* Scanner Sub Scan [0.9 ~ 0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1% step] Magnification Adjusts the magnification of the sub scan direction during scanning. Changing this value changes the scanner motor speed. Press ! to toggle . Scanner Leading Edge [0.9 ~ 0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm step] Registration Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning. Press ! to toggle . As you enter a negative value, the image moves toward the leading edge. Scanner Side-to-Side [4.6 ~ +4.6 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm step] Registration Adjusts side-to-side registration for scanning. Press ! to toggle . As you enter negative values, the image will disappear at the left, and as you enter positive values, the image will appear at the left. Scanner Erase Margin Adjusts scanning margins for the leading and trailing edges (sub scan) and right and left edge (main scan). Do not adjust unless the customer desires a scanner margin greater than the printer margin. Leading Edge [0 ~ 9 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm step] (Specification: 3 2 mm) Trailing Edge [0 ~ 9 / 0.5 / 0.1 mm step] (Specification: 2 2 mm) Right [0 ~ 9 / 0.5 / 0.1 mm step] (Specification: +2.5 ~ -1.5 mm) Left [0 ~ 9 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm step] (Specification: 2 1.5 mm) Scanner Free Run Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp off. [OFF] [ON] White Board Read Adjust Read Start Position Adjusts the scanning start position on the white plate for auto shading. The default is 10.5 mm from the leading edge. The setting specifies how far scanning starts from the default position. [5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Read Width Adjusts the width of the area on the white plate (in the sub scan direction) that is scanned for auto shading. The default is 4.76 mm. The current setting specifies the difference from this default. [5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Scanner Optical Adjust Axis DFU Scanner Read Position DFU Service Tables B264/B265
4010*
4011*
4012*
4012 1* 4012 2* 4012 3* 4012 4* 4013
4016 4016 1
4016 2
4018 4019
SM
5-21
Rev. 04/2006
4020*
4020 1*
4020 2*
ADF Scan Glass Dust Check This function checks the narrow scanning glass of the ADF for dust that can cause black lines in copies. If dust is detected a system banner message is displayed, but processing does not stop. Check On/Off Change Issues a warning if there is dust on the narrow scanning glass of the ADF when the original size is detected before a job starts. This function can detect dust on the white plate above the scanning glass, as well as dust on the glass. Sensitivity of the level of detection is adjusted with SP4999 2. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1] 0: Off. No dust warning. 1: On. Dust warning. This warning does not stop the job. Note: Before switching this setting on, clean the ADF scanning glass and the white plate above the scanning glass. Detect Level Adjusts the sensitivity for dust detection on the ADF scanning glass. This SP is available only after SP49991 is switched on. [0~8/ 4/ 1] If you see black streaks in copies when no warning has been issued, raise the setting to increase the level of sensitivity. If warnings are issued when you see not black streaks in copies, lower the setting. Note: Dust that triggers a warning could move be removed from the glass by the originals in the feed path. If the dust is removed by passing originals, this is not detected and the warning remains on. APS Sensor Output Display Displays the time required to detect the size of the paper on the scanner exposure glass. (7) [00011111] (0) APS A5/LT Size Detection Determines whether an original of non-standard size is detected as A5/HLT size by the APS sensor. 0: Non-standard size not detected as A5/HLT 1: Non-standard size detected as A5/HLT LEF 2: Non-standard size detected as A5/HLT SEF If 0 is selected, Cannot detect original size will be displayed. Original Size Detection Selects whether or not the copier APS sensor detects the original as 8K/16K or A4/LT. 0: Normal (APS detects standard sizes) 1: A4 or LT original size detect enabled 1: 8K, 16K paper size detect enabled (For China, Taiwan only)
4301
4303*
4305*
B264/B265
5-22
SM
Rev. 04/2006
4307*
0: Original size detection at power on disabled. 1: Original size detection at power on enabled Determines whether or not the original size is detected while the exposure lamp lights during initialization. Scanner Adjustment DFU Flag Display Start Flag Reset SBU Setting DFU Scanner Evaluation Mode DFU Scanner: Text: Print These SP codes set the MTF (Modular Transfer Function*1) for text printed after scanning. Note: As a general rule, adjust the level (coefficient) before adjusting the strength. Raising the brightness or contrast level may increase the occurrence of moir MTF Filter Level: Main Scan Set the MTF coefficient for main/sub scan directions. MTF Filter Level: Sub Scan [0~15/8/1] 0: Weakest + 8: Default , 15: Strongest MTF Filter Strength: Main Scan Set the MTF strength for main/sub scan directions. MTF Filter Strength: Sub Scan [0~7/4/1] 0: Weakest + 4: Default , 7: Strongest Smoothing Filter Selects the level of smoothing for originals that contain dithered images. [0~7/0/1] 0: Default (Off) , 7: Strongest Brightness (Not Used) Sets the overall brightness of the image. [1~255/128/1] 1: Weakest + 128: Default , 255: Strongest Contrast (Not Used) Sets the overall contrast of the image. [1~255/128/1] 1: Weakest + 128: Default , 255: Strongest Isolated Dot Removal Sets the level of independent dot erasure to improve the appearance of background. [0~7/0/1] 0: Default (Off) , 7: Strongest
APS Sensor Output Display
4428 44281 44282 44283 4901* 4995 4550*
4550 1 4550 2
4550 3 4550 4
4550 5
4550 6
4550 7
4550 8
*1 When the CCD converts the original image to electrical signals, the contrast is reduced due to the influence that adjacent white and black pixels have on one another as a result of lens properties. Typically, you will see very narrow width and spacing between black and white areas. MTF corrects this problem and emphasizes image detail.
SM
5-23
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
4551*
4551 1 4551 2
4551 3 4551 4
4551 5
4551 6
4551 7
4551 8
Scanner: Text: OCR These SP codes set the MTF (Modular Transfer Function*1) for OCR scan mode. Note: As a general rule, adjust the level (coefficient) before adjusting the strength. Raising the brightness or contrast level may increase the occurrence of moir MTF Filter Level: Main Scan Set the MTF coefficient for main/sub scan directions. MTF Filter Level: Sub Scan [0~15/8/1] 0: Weakest + 8: Default , 15: Strongest MTF Filter Strength: Main Scan Set the MTF strength for main/sub scan directions. MTF Filter Strength: Sub Scan [0~7/4/1] 0: Weakest + 4: Default , 7: Strongest Smoothing Filter Selects the level of smoothing. [0~7/0/1] 0: Default (Off) , 7: Strongest Brightness (Not Used) Sets the overall brightness of the image. [1~255/128/1] 1: Weakest + 128: Default , 255: Strongest Contrast (Not Used) Sets the overall contrast of the image. [1~255/128/1] 1: Weakest + 128: Default , 255: Strongest Isolated Dot Removal Sets the level of independent dot erasure to improve the appearance of background. [0~7/0/1] 0: Default (Off) , 7: Strongest
B264/B265
5-24
SM
Rev. 04/2006
4552*
4552 1 4552 2
4552 3 4552 4
4552 5
4552 6
4552 7
4552 8
Scanner: Text/Photo These SP codes set the MTF (Modular Transfer Function*1) for Text/Photo mode. Note: As a general rule, adjust the level (coefficient) before adjusting the strength. Raising the brightness or contrast level may increase the occurrence of moir MTF Filter Level: Main Scan Set the MTF coefficient for main/sub scan directions. MTF Filter Level: Sub Scan [0~15/8/1] 0: Weakest + 8: Default , 15: Strongest MTF Filter Strength: Main Scan Set the MTF strength for main/sub scan MTF Filter Strength: Sub Scan directions. [0~7/4/1] 0: Weakest + 4: Default , 7: Strongest Smoothing Filter Selects the level of smoothing. [0~7/0/1] 0: Default (Off) , 7: Strongest Brightness (Not Used) Sets the overall brightness of the image. [1~255/128/1] 1: Weakest + 128: Default , 255: Strongest Contrast (Not Used) Sets the overall contrast of the image. [1~255/128/1] 1: Weakest + 128: Default , 255: Strongest Isolated Dot Removal Sets the level of independent dot erasure to improve the appearance of background. [0~7/0/1] 0: Default (Off) , 7: Strongest Service Tables
SM
5-25
B264/B265
Rev. 04/2006
4553*
4553 1 4553 2
4553 3 4553 4
4553 5
4553 6
4553 7
4553 8
Scanner: Photo These SP codes set the MTF (Modular Transfer Function*1) for Photo mode. Note: As a general rule, adjust the level (coefficient) before adjusting the strength. Raising the brightness or contrast level may increase the occurrence of moir MTF Filter Level: Main Scan Set the MTF coefficient for main/sub scan directions. MTF Filter Level: Sub Scan [0~15/8/1] 0: Weakest + 8: Default , 15: Strongest MTF Filter Strength: Main Scan Set the MTF strength for main/sub scan directions. MTF Filter Strength: Sub Scan [0~7/4/1] 0: Weakest + 4: Default , 7: Strongest Smoothing Filter Selects the level of smoothing. [0~7/0/1] 0: Default (Off) , 7: Strongest Brightness (Not Used) Sets the overall brightness of the image. [1~255/128/1] 1: Weakest + 128: Default , 255: Strongest Contrast (Not Used) Sets the overall contrast of the image. [1~255/128/1] 1: Weakest + 128: Default , 255: Strongest Isolated Dot Removal Sets the level of independent dot erasure to improve the appearance of background. [0~7/0/1] 0: Default (Off) , 7: Strongest
B264/B265
5-26
SM
Rev. 04/2006
4556*
4556 1 4556 2
4556 3 4556 4
4556 5
4556 6
4556 7
4556 8
Scanner Grey Scale These SP codes set the MTF (Modular Transfer Function*1) for Grayscale. Note: As a general rule, adjust the level (coefficient) before adjusting the strength. Raising the brightness or contrast level may increase the occurrence of moir MTF Filter Level: Main Scan Set the MTF coefficient for main/sub scan directions. MTF Filter Level: Sub Scan [0~15/0/1] 0: Weakest + 8: Default , 15: Strongest MTF Filter Strength: Main Scan Set the MTF strength for main/sub scan directions. MTF Filter Strength: Sub Scan [0~7/0/1] 0: Default (Off) , 7: Strongest Smoothing Filter Selects the level of smoothing. [0~7/0/1] 0: Default (Off) , 7: Strongest Brightness (Not Used) Sets the overall brightness of the image. [1~255/128/1] 1: Weakest + 128: Default , 255: Strongest Contrast (Not Used) Sets the overall contrast of the image. [1~255/128/1] 1: Weakest + 128: Default , 255: Strongest Isolated Dot Removal Sets the level of independent dot erasure to improve the appearance of background. [0~7/0/1] 0: Default (Off) , 7: Strongest Service Tables
*1 When the CCD converts the original image to electrical signals, the contrast is reduced due to the influence that adjacent white and black pixels have on one another as a result of lens properties. Typically, you will see very narrow width and spacing between black and white areas. MTF corrects this problem and emphasizes image detail. 4600* SBU Version This SP displays the ID code of the SBU. This is an 8-byte display. Bytes 3 to 0 are fixed (0010). Bytes 7 to 4 display the ID code of the SBU. Scanner Adjustment Use these SP codes to 1) display the status of the white level peak adjustment for the SBU, and 2) do the adjustment manually. Flag Display Displays the status of standard white plate density adjustment: 1: White level peak density adjusted 0: White level peak density not adjusted Start Sets the machine in the standard white plate density adjustment mode (a message is displayed on the LCD). Place a T6200 text chart on the exposure glass and press [1] to do the white level peak density adjustment with the standard white plate. After execution a message tells you whether the adjustment succeeded or not. 0: Off 1: On Flag Reset Resets the flag that indicates the status of the standard white plate density adjustment. 5-27 B264/B265
4605*
4605 1*
4605 2*
4605 3*
SM
Rev. 04/2006
4610*
Standard White Level Adjustment: This Time After the white peak level density has been adjusted manually with SP 4605 2, this SP code detects the difference between the adjustment and the target reference and stores this value in NVRAM. [0~255/150/1] Standard White Pre-Level Adjustment: Last Time DFU Standard White Level Adjustment: At Factory DFU BK Adjustment DFU These SP codes allow you to confirm the values for rough and detail adjustments of the black level even and odd channels when the machine was turned on. You can also adjust these values manually with the 10-key pad. If you change any of these SP codes manually, be sure to turn the machine off and on to enable the new settings. EVEN Rough adjustment, this time [0~255/200/1] ODD EVEN Detail adjustment, this time [0~255/200/1] ODD Gain Adjustment: Current When the machine is turned on, the SBU performs separate fine adjustments for Ech (the even channel) and Och (the odd channel). These SP codes read the values of adjustments done after the machine was powered on. These SP codes should display 2231, set by the white level peak adjustment as the fine gain adjustment and sent to the DAC. You can use these SP codes to adjust the value manually. Be sure to turn the printer off and on to enable any settings that you change. EVEN EVEN Channel (Ech) [0~255/0/1] ODD ODD Channel (Och) [0~255/0/1] SBU Setting DFU Black Level Loop Count: Offset 1 Black Level Loop Count: Offset 2
4613* 4616* 4624*
4624 1 4624 2 4624 3 4624 4 4629*
4629 1 4629 2 4640* 4640 1 4640 2 4641*
[0~255/0/1]
SBU Setting: White Level Loop Count Displays the number of loops executed during white peak level adjustment for AGC (Automatic Gain Control). This SP is for display only and the value cannot be adjusted. NIA [0~255/0/1]
B264/B265
5-28
SM
Rev. 04/2006
4646*
SBU Setting: Time-out Flag Use this SP to determine whether the automatic scanner adjustment loop has exceeded the prescribed number of loops and flagged a timeout. The position of the bits that display "1" tell you where the error has occurred. Bit No. Where the Error Occurred Bit 0 Black Level Scan Data Ech Bit 1 Black Level Scan Data Och Bit 2 Gain Adjustment Timeoout Ech Bit 3 Gain Adjustment Timeout Och Bit 7 Reference Adjustment Timeout BK Adjustment: Prev. DFU These SP codes allow you to confirm the values for rough and detail adjustments of the black level even and odd channels before the machine was powered on. You can also adjust these values manually with the 10-key pad. If you change any of these SP codes manually, be sure to turn the machine off and on to enable the new settings. EVEN Rough adjustment EVEN channel. [0~255/0/1] ODD Rough adjustment ODD channel. [0~255/200/1] EVEN Detail adjustment EVEN channel. [0~255/200/1] ODD Detail adjustment ODD channel. [0~255/200/1] SBU Setting: SBU Reset Flag Error DFU Gain Adjustment Last Time When the machine is turned on, the SBU performs separate fine adjustments for Ech (the even channel) and Och (the odd channel). These SP codes read the values of the adjustments in effect before the machine was powered on. These SP codes should display 2231, set by the white level peak adjustment as the fine gain adjustment and sent to the DAC. You can use these SP codes to adjust the value manually. Be sure to turn the printer off and on to enable any settings that you change. EVEN [0~255/0/1] ODD BK Rough Adjustment: Factory DFU EVEN [0~255/200/1] ODD EVEN ODD
4655*
4655 1 4655 2 4655 3 4655 4 4647 4659*
4659 1 4659 2 4674* 4674 1 4674 2 4674 3 4674 4
SM
5-29
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
4678*
46781 46782 4691* 4691 1 4691 2 4694* 4694 1 4694 2 4800
Gain Adjustment: Factory DFU When the machine is turned on, the SBU performs separate fine adjustments for Ech (the even channel) and Och (the odd channel). These SP codes read the values of the adjustments in effect before the machine was powered on. These SP codes should display 2231, set by the white level peak adjustment as the fine gain adjustment and sent to the DAC. You can use these SP codes to adjust the value manually. Be sure to turn the printer off and on to enable any settings that you change. EVEN [0~255/0/1] ODD White Peak Level EVEN [0~255/0/1] ODD Black Level EVEN ODD
[0~255/0/1]
Black Level Adjustment Mode DFU This SP switches the black offset compensation mode on and off. Black offset correction is done during automatic image density correction (ADS). Note: This SP operates only if the black offset correction circuit is built into the SBU. 0: Off 1: On SBU Setting: Standard White Level Adjustment Loop Count DFU Displays the number of loops executed during white peak level adjustment for AGC (Automatic Gain Control). This SP is for display only and the value cannot be adjusted.
4801*
B264/B265
5-30
SM
Rev. 04/2006
4903* 4903 5
4903 7
4903 8*
4903 10* 4903 12* 4903 13* 4903 15* 4903 16*
4903 20* 4903 21* 4903 22* 4903 23* 4903 24* 4903 25* 4903 26* 4903 27* 4903 28* 4903 29* 4903 30* 4903 31* 4903 32* SM
Filter Setting Many filter setting SP modes have discussions in section 6. (!6.2) Full Size Mode 0: No. Normal operation 1: Yes. Main scan magnification always full-size Selects whether the copy is always full size, even if the magnification ratio has been changed. Set to 1 to check the main scan magnification. If the magnification is not 100%, the image processing circuits could be malfunctioning. This SP is used to determine whether magnification is operating correctly. If this SP is set to 1 can make it easier to determine which part of the IPU is malfunctioning. Image Shift in Magnification DFU, [0~7199 / 0 / 1 step] Adjusts the amount of pixel shift in the main scan direction in the magnification mode. Fax 25%, 50% Reduction DFU, [0~3 / 0 / 1 step] Determines whether 25% and 50% reduction is available in the fax mode. 0: Off 1: Conducts fax mode OR processing for main scan for resolution below 100 dpi in only Text mode. 2: Conducts pre-filter processing for fax mode. 3: Conducts fax Text mode OR processing for main scan for resolution below 100 dpi. Pre-filter processing is done in every mode except Fax Text mode. 4903 10 to 4903 16, Pre-Filter Processing (!6.5) The following 5 SP modes Selects the filter processing setting for smoothing in order to reduce the incidence of moir in images in different original modes. Specifically, they set 1) the compression rate for parallel lines in the main scan direction and for long lines in the sub scan direction, and 2) the strength of smoothing. Enter the appropriate number with the10-key pad then press (. These settings attempt to smooth lines without making them standout. Increasing the strength of a setting can reduce the incidence of moir but can also decrease sharpness. Pre-Filter: Text [0~9 / 0 / 1] Pre-Filter: Photo Mode [0~9 / 0 / 1 step] Pre-Filter: Text/Photo [0~9 / 0 / 1 step] Pre-Filter: Light [0~9 / 0 / 1 step] Pre-Filter: Generation [0~9 / 0 / 1 step] 4903 20 to 4903 35, Text Mode MTF Filter Coefficient and MTF Filter Strength The following 15 SP modes select either the MTF filter coefficient (Level) or the MTF filter strength for text mode at various reproduction ratios. Each SP applies to either the main-scan direction or the sub-scan direction. (!6.5) Main Filter Level: Text 25%-64% [0~15 / 9 / 1 step] Sub Filter Level: Text 25%-64% [0~13 / 13 / 1 step] Main Filter Strength: Text 25%-64% [0~7 / 2 / 1 step] Sub Filter Strength: Text 25%-64% [0~15 / 2 / 1 step] Main Filter Level: Text 65%-154% [0~7 / 12 / 1 step] Main Filter Strength: Text 65%-154% [0~13 / 13 / 1 step] Sub Filter Level: Text 65%-154% [0~7 / 2 / 1 step] Sub Filter Strength: Text 65%-154% [0~7 / 2 / 1 step] Main Filter Level: Text 155%-256% [0~15 / 14 / 1 step] Sub Filter Level: Text 155%-256% [0~13 / 13 / 1 step] Main Filter Strength: Text 155%-256% [0~7 / 2 / 1 step] Sub Filter Strength: Text 155%-256% [0~7 / 2 / 1 step] Main Filter Level: Text 257%-400% [0~15 / 15 / 1 step] 5-31 B264/B265
Service Tables

4903 33* 4903 34* 4903 35*
Rev. 04/2006
4903 36* 4903 37* 4903 38*
4903 39* 4903 40* 4903 43* 4903 44* 4903 47* 4903 48* 4903 51* 4903 52*
4903 55* 4903 56*
4903 57* 4903 58*
4903 60* 4903 62* 4903 63*
Sub Filter Level: Text 257%-400% [0~13 / 13 / 1 step] Main Filter Strength: Text 257%-400% [0~7 / 2 / 1 step] Sub Filter Strength: Text 257%-400% [0~7 / 2 / 1 step] 4903 36 to 4903 38, Photo Mode MTF Filter Coefficients (!6.5) 4903 36: Selects the MTF filter coefficient for edges in the photo mode 4903 37: Selects the filter coefficient for smoothing in the photo mode. The higher the number you select, the greater the applied smoothing effect. 4903 38: Selects the MTF filter coefficient sharpening an entire image in the Photo mode. For 4093 36 and 4093 38, the higher the number you select, the greater the effect on sharpening low contrast text and thin lines. However, a high setting could cause background to drop or, or cause moir to appear in photos shaded with dots. (0:Off, 1: Softest, 7: Sharpest) Photo MTF (Edge) [[0~7 / 0 / 1] Smoothing Filter in Photo Mode [0~7 / 2 / 1] Photo MTF (All) [[0~7 / 0 / 1] 4903 39 to 4903 52, Text/Photo Mode MTF Filter Coefficient (!6.5) The following 8SP modes select the filter coefficients for either the edges (Edge) or for the entire image (All) for the Text/Photo mode at various reproduction ratios. Generally, increasing the value can improve the appearance of low contrast text; however, it can also cause background to fade or drop out completely or increase the incidence of moir. Each SP has a range of 0~7 (0:Off, 1: Softest, 7: Sharpest) Text/Photo (Edge) Coefficient 25-64% [0~7 / 1 / 1] Text/Photo (All) Coefficient 25-64% [0~7 / 4 / 1] Text/Photo (Edge) Coefficient 65-154% [0~7 / 1 / 1] Text/Photo (All) Coefficient 65-154% [0~7 / 4 / 1] Text/Photo (Edge) Coefficient 155-256% [0~7 / 1 / 1] Text/Photo (All) Coefficient 155-256% [0~7 / 4 / 1] Text/Photo (Edge) Coefficient 257-400% [0~7 / 1 / 1] Text/Photo (All) Coefficient 257-400% [0~7 / 4 / 1] 4903 55 and 4903 56, MTF Filter Coefficients for Light Originals (!6.5) These modes select the MTF filter coefficient (Level) and strength for originals scanned in the Pale mode. While these SPs can improve the appearance of low contrast originals, a high setting can also increase the incidence of moir. Filter Level: Light Original [0~6 / 6 /1] Filter Strength: Light Original 0: 1/32x, 1: 1/16x, 2: 1/8x, 3: 1/4x, 4: 1/2x, 5: 1x, 6: 2x, 7: 4x 4903 57 and 4903 58, MTF Filter Coefficients for Generation Copy (!6.5) These modes select the MTF filter coefficient (Level) and strength for originals scanned in the Generation Copy mode. While selecting a higher number strengthens the effect of the filter to improve contrast, a very high setting can increase the incidence of moir. Filter Level: Generation Copy [0~6 / 3 /1 step] Filter Strength: Generation 0: 1/32x, 1: 1/16x, 2: 1/8x, 3: 1/4x, 4: 1/2x, 5: 1x, Copy 6: 2x, 7: 4x 4903 60 to 4903 64, Independent Dot Erase Level The following 4 SP modes select the independent dot erase level for originals scanned in different modes. While selecting a higher setting erases more dots, setting a very high setting can cause very fine text or other detail to fade or drop out completely. 1: Weakest (fewest dots erased), 15: Strongest (most dots erased) Independent Dot Erase: Text Mode [0~15 / 5 / 1 step] Independent Dot Erase: Text/Photo [0~15 / 0 / 1 step] Independent Dot Erase: Light Original [0~15 / 0 / 1 step]
B264/B265
5-32
SM
Rev. 04/2006 4903 64*

Independent Dot Erase: Generation Copy [0~15 / 8/ 1 step] 4903 65 to 4903 69, Background Erase Level The following 5 SP modes adjust the threshold for background erase in originals scanned in different modes. A higher setting reduces more dirty background, but a very high setting can cause the image to reverse or cause other unexpected results. For all these modes, 0 = off (default). Background Erase Level: Text Mode [0~255 / 0 / 1 step] Background Erase Level: Photo Mode [0~255 / 0 / 1 step] Background Erase Level: Text/Photo Mode [0~255 / 0 / 1 step] Background Erase Level: Light Original [0~255 / 0 / 1 step] Background Erase Level: Generation Copy [0~255 / 0 / 1 step] 4903 75 to 4903 77, Line Width Correction 4903 75: Determines whether line thickness is adjusted in the main and/or sub scan direction. Enter the appropriate number with the 10-key pad then press ( 4903 76 and 4903 77: Select the threshold for line width detection in originals copied in the Generation Copy mode. Higher numbers make it easier to thicken thin lines. Line Width Correction: Generation Mode 0: None, 1: Thin, 2: Thin, 3: Thick LWC Threshold (Main Scan): Generation Mode [0~5 / 1 / 1 step] LWC Threshold (Sub Scan): Generation Mode [0~5 / 1 / 1 step] 4903 79 to 4903 93, Filter Strength: Edge, Filter Adj.: Edge Detection, Filter Adj.: Magnification (!6.5) The following 15 SP modes modify the effects of the MTF filter coefficients set by SP 4903 39 to 4903 52. The related SP mode is in parenthesis in the right column. See page 6-28for details about how they work. Filter Strength: Text/Photo (Edge) 25-64% [0~3 / 3 / 1] (SP4903 039) Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 25-64% [0~15 / 3 / 1] ] (SP4903 039) Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Mag.%) 25-64% [0~15 / 12 / 1] (SP4903 039) Filter Strength: Text/Photo (Edge) 65-154% [0~3 / 3 / 1] (SP4903 043) Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 65-154% [0~15 / 3 / 1] (SP4903 043) Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Mag.%) 65-154% [0~15 / 12 / 1] (SP4903 043) Filter Strength: Text/Photo (Edge) 155-256% [0~3 / 3 / 1] (SP4903 047) Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 155-256% [0~15 / 3 / 1] (SP4903 047) Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Mag.%) 155-256% [0~15 / 12 / 1] (SP4903 047) Filter Strength: Text/Photo (Edge) 257-400% [0~3 / 3 / 1] (SP4903 051) Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 257-400% [0~15 / 3 / 1] (SP4903 051) Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Mag.%) 257-400% [0~15 / 12 / 1] (SP4903 051) Filter Strength: Photo (Edge) [0~3 / 2 / 1] (SP4903 036) Filter Adj.: Photo (Edge Det.) [0~15 / 0 / 1] (SP4903 036) Filter Adj.: Photo (Mag.%) [0~15 / 15 / 1] (SP4903 036)
4903 65* 4903 66* 4903 67* 4903 68* 4903 69*
4903 75* 4903 76* 4903 77*
4903 79* 4903 80* 4903 81* 4903 82* 4903 83* 4903 84* 4903 85* 4903 86* 4903 87* 4903 88* 4903 89* 4903 90* 4903 91* 4903 92* 4903 93*
SM
5-33
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
4904* 4904 1*
4904 2*
4904 3*
4904 4*
4904 5*
4904 7*
4904 8*
IPU Setting Many IPU setting SP modes have discussions in section 6. (!6.5) Grayscale Photo Mode 0: Dithering and smoothing 1: Error diffusion and MTF filter processing Selects the method of grayscale processing for the Photo Mode. Dithering and smoothing is the same as the setting for Print Photo selected on the operation panel in Photo Mode. Dithering can be adjusted with SP4903 037. Error diffusion and MTF filter processing is the same as the setting for Normal or Glossy Photo selected on the operation panel in Photo Mode. Error diffusion can be adjusted with SP4903 036 and 038. Quality Photo Mode Value Method Lines Effect 0 4-Value Error --Best resolution Diffusion Dither 8x 8 75 Screening 1 3 Dither 8x 8 106 Best grayscale 2 Dither 6 x 6 142 Grayscale priority 4 Dither 4 x 4 212 Resolution priority Selects the size of the dither matrix for the photo mode. Density Setting for Low 0: Selects normal density Density Original Mode 1: Digitizes to near binary image Selects the density factor for the low-density original mode. Use to achieve better balance between text and images, correct shadows that appear around text in handwritten documents, to enhance documents written in pencil, or to achieve stark contrast when copying blueprints, building plans, etc. Density Setting for Copied 0: Selects normal density Original Mode 1: Digitizes to near binary image Selects the density factor for the copied original mode. Special Text Density [0~7 / 0 / 1] 0: Off, 1: Weaker, 7: Stronger Enter the appropriate number with the 10-key pad then press (. This SP code adjusts the density of the image to eliminate vertical black lines in originals that were caused by previous scanning with a dirty optics. While selecting a higher setting to erase more lines, selecting a very high setting can cause low contrast areas to become faint or cause them to drop out. (!6.5) Error Diffusion Pattern 0: Edge threshold pattern is used. 1: Texture Pattern (matrix) 0 is used 2: Texture Pattern (matrix) 1 used. 3: Texture Pattern 2 (matrix) used. Adjusts the threshold level for error diffusion processing in the Text/Photo mode. The effect of error diffusion can vary, depending on the image of the original. Adjust this setting if the results of the texture in copies is not what you expect, especially before starting a large copy job. 4904 8to 4904 12, Gray Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.), Photo (Edge Det.) The following 5 SP modes adjust the setting for edge detection during grayscale processing of originals scanned with the Custom Setting of the Text/Photo mode and Photo mode in the specified magnification range. At defined edges error diffusion executes on text to create sharp lines to better define text characters, but in other areas, error diffusion executes grayscale processing for photographs. Select a lower setting for better reproduction of photographs and a higher setting for sharper text. A lower setting improves the appearance of photographs, but can cause text and thin lines to drop out. A higher setting sharpens text and thin lines, but can also cause grayscale areas to degrade. (!6.5) Gray Adj: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 25-64% [0~15 / 8/ 1]
B264/B265
5-34
SM
Rev. 04/2006 4904 9* 4904 10* 4904 11* 4904 13*

Gray Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 65-154% Gray Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 155-256% Gray Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 257-400% [0~15 / 8/ 1] Gray Adj.: Photo (Edge Det.) [0~15 / 0 / 1] 4904 20 to 4904 23, Text (General) Quality (!6.5) The following 4 SP modes allow adjustment together with other SP codes to improve image quality of originals copied in Text Mode at magnification within the specified magnification range. Select a lower setting to prioritize reproduction of pictures without moir, and select a higher setting to prioritize reproduction of text and thin lines. 0: Off, 1: Pictures highest priority, 13: Text/thin lines highest priority Text (General) Quality 25-64% [0~13 / 0 / 1] Text (General) Quality 65-154% 45 cpm [0~13 / 0 / 1] 35 cpm [0~13 / 4 / 1] Text (General) Quality 155-256% [0~13 / 0 / 1] Text (General) Quality 254-400% Photo (General) Quality [0~10 / 0 / 1] 0: Off, 1: Picture high priority, 10:Text high priority Allows overall adjustment of photo images in originals scanned in the Photo mode. Select a lower setting to prioritize reproduction of pictures without moir, and select a higher setting to prioritize reproduction of sharp text. (!6.5) 4904 25 to 4904 28, Text/Photo (General) Quality (!6.5) The following 4 SP modes allow adjustment with other SP codes to improve quality of images scanned in the Text/Photo mode and in the specified magnification range. Select a lower setting to prioritize reproduction of pictures without moir, and select a higher setting to prioritize reproduction of sharp text. 0: Off, 1: Pictures highest priority, 10: Text highest priority Text/Photo (General) Quality 25-64% [0~10 / 0 / 1] Text/Photo (General) Quality 65-154% [0~10 / 0 / 1] Text/Photo (General) Quality 155-256% [0~10 / 0 / 1] Text/Photo (General) Quality 257-400% [0~10 / 0 / 1] Pale (General) Quality [0~13 / 0 / 1] 0: Off, 1: Picture high priority, 13:Text high priority Allows adjustment with other SP codes to improve the overall quality of images scanned in Pale Mode. Select a lower setting to prioritize reproduction of pictures without moir, and select a higher setting to prioritize reproduction of text and thin lines. (!6.5) Generation (General) [0~13 / 0 / 1] Quality 0: Off, 1: Picture high priority, 13:Text high priority Allows adjustment with other SP codes to improve the overall quality of images in originals scanned in Generation Copy mode. Select a lower setting to prioritize reproduction of pictures without moir, and select a higher setting to prioritize reproduction of text and thin lines. (!6.5)
4904 20* 4904 21* 4904 22* 4904 23* 4904 24*
4904 30*
SM
5-35
B264/B265
Service Tables
4904 25* 4904 26* 4904 27* 4904 28* 4904 29*
Rev. 04/2006
4905*
4905 1*
4905 4*
Image Data Path SP4905 1 allows switching between filter and magnification processing of the image for testing. SP4905 4 allows switching of the printout for testing. Filter Mag. Path DFU Switch 0: Uses settings of each application and mode 1: Through filter 2: Through magnification 3: Through filter, magnification Printout Type DFU Selection 0: Uses settings of each application, mode 1: Reverses image logic (normally inverse black/white). Image Data Path SP4909 1 selects the method for image quality through processing. SP4909 20 Forces switching of the data output format between writing for the Ri10, CDIA for testing. Image Quality DFU Through Processing 0: :Normal operation 1: Grayscale through processing 2: Gamma correction through processing 3: Printer gamma, grayscale through processing Image Data Path DFU Printer 0: Normal operation 1: Sets output from the Ri10 to the CDICA for grayscale output (1 pixel/8bits) 2: Sets output from the Ri10 to the write unit for grayscale output (4 pixles/8bits) 3: Sets output from the Ri10 to the CDICA for grayscale output (1 pixel/8bits), also sets output from the Ri10 to the write unit for grayscale output (4 pixels/8bit)
4909*
4905 1*
4905 20*
B264/B265
5-36
SM
Rev. 06/2007
SP5-xxx: Mode
5024* mm/inch Display Selection 0: Europe/Asia (mm), 1: North America (inch) Selects the unit of measurement. After selection, turn the main power switch off and on. Operation Panel Bit SW DFU
5044*
5045
Accounting Counter Selects whether the printer counter is displayed on the LCD. NOTE: You can change the setting only one time. [0~1/0/1] 0: Displays total counter only. 1: Displays both total counter and printer counter.
5047
Reverse Paper Display Determines whether the tray loaded with paper printed on one side is displayed. [0~1/1] 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed A3/DLT Double Count Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. Yes counts except from the bypass tray. When Yes is selected, A3 and DLT paper are counted twice, that is A4 x2 and LT x2 respectively. Density Level Setting [1~7 / 4 / 1 notch per step] Selects the image density level used in ADS mode. Example: If you set SP5106 6 to 2: Pressing the Auto Image Density key toggles the display off and manual notch 2 is selected. Adjust this SP if the customer cannot attain clean copies after performing automatic density adjustment Non-Std. Paper Sel. Determines whether a non-standard paper size can be input for the universal cassette trays (Tray 2, Tray 3) [0~1/1] 0: No 1: Yes. If 1 is selected, the customer will be able to input a non-standard paper size using the UP mode. Service Tables
5104*
5106*
5112
SM
5-37
B264/B265
Rev. 04/2006
5113 001
002
Optional Counter Type Default Optional Counter Type Selects the type of counter: 0: None 1: Key Card (RK3, 4) Japan only 2: Key Card Down 3: Pre-paid Card 4: Coin Rack 5: MF Key Card 11: Exp Key Card (Add) 12: Exp Key Card (Deduct) External Optional Counter Type Enables the SDK application. This lets you select a number for the external device for user access control. Note: SDK refers to software on an SD card. [0~3/1] 0: None 1: Expansion Device 1 2: Expansion Device 2 3: Expansion Device 3 Disable Copying Temporarily denies access to the machine. Japan Only [0~1/1] 0: Release for normal operation 1: Prohibit access to machine Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal Do not change. Japan Only [0~2/1] 0: Yes. Normal reset 1: Standby. Resets before job start/after completion 2: No. Normally no reset Counter Up Timing Determines whether the optional key counter counts up at paper feed-in or at paper exit. Japan Only [0~1/1] 0: Feed count 1: No feed count APS Off Mode 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled Selects whether the APS function is enabled or disabled with the contact of a prepaid card or coin lock.
5118
5120
5121
5127*
B264/B265
5-38
SM
Rev. 08/2007
5131*
Paper Size Type Selection 0: Japan, 1: North America, 2: Europe Selects the paper size (type) for both originals and copy paper. (Default depends on DIP SW 101 setting.) After changing the setting, turn the copier off and on. If the paper size of the archive files stored on the HDD is different, abnormal copies could result. By-Pass Length Setting 0: Off, 1: On Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not. Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is limited to 600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm. App. Switch Method 0: SW, 1: HW Determines whether the application screen is switched with a hardware switch or software switch. 0: Soft Key Set 1: Hard Key Set Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted for by an external accounting device. 0: Automatic printing 1: No automatic printing CE Login If you will change the printer bit switches, you must log in to service mode with this SP before you go into the printer SP mode. [0~1/1] 0: Off. Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted. 1: On. Printer bit switches can be adjusted.
5150*
5162*
5167
5169
SM
5-39
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
5212 5212 3
Page Numbering Duplex Printout Left/Right Position
5212 4
Duplex Printout High/Low Position
Horizontally positions the page numbers printed on both sides during duplexing. [10~+10/1 mm] 0 is center, minus is left, + is right. Vertically positions the page numbers printed on both sides during duplexing. [10~+10/1 mm] 0 is center, minus is down, + is up.
5179*
Bypass Size Error This SP determines whether a paper size error prompt appears when the machine detects the wrong paper size for the job and jams during feed from the bypass tray. [0~1/0/1] 0: Off 1: On Set Time DFU Sets the time clock for the local time. This setting is done at the factory before delivery. The setting is GMT expressed in minutes. [1440~1440/1 min.] JA: +540 (Tokyo) NA: -300 (NY) EU: +6- (Paris) CH: +480 (Peking) TW: +480 (Taipei) AS: +480 (Hong Kong) Auto Off Function Release Setting This SP prevents the user from easily disabling the auto off timer. This is done to conform with international Energy Star standards that specifically state that the user shall not be able to easily switch off the auto off feature. 0: On (Auto Off cannot be released 1: Off (Auto Off can be released)
5302
5305
B264/B265
5-40
SM
Rev. 02/2007
5307 5307 1
Summer Time Setting ON/OFF
[ 0 or 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step] 0: Disabled 1: Enabled NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0 Enables or disables the summer time mode. Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1". Start 03200210 Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode. There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a sevendigit setting. 1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12] 3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5] 4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday] 5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23] 7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step] 8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step] For example: 3500010 (EU default) The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March The digits are counted from the left. Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1". End 11100200 Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode. There are 8 digits in this SP. 1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12] 3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5] 4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday] 5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23] The 7th and 8th digits must be set to "00". The digits are counted from the left. Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
5307 3
Rule Set (Start)
5307 4
Rule Set (End)
SM
5-41
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 01/2007
5401 5401 6 5401 16 5401 26 5401 36 5401 46 5401 76 5401 86 5401 96 5401 103
5401 200 5401 201 5401 210 5401 211 5401 220 5401 221 5404
Access Control DFU This SP stores the settings that limit uses access to SDK application data. This SP codes are provided for User Recognition Copier future customization of the access User Recognition Document Server control feature. This is to be done User Recognition Fax at the factory, not in the field. DFU User Recognition Scanner User Recognition Printer User Recognition Expanded Function 1 User Recognition Expanded Function 2 User Recognition Expanded Function 2 Default Document ACL Used to assign the default access privileges of users to their own documents on the Document Server. 0:Read only (default) 1:edit 2:edit/delete 3:full control NOTE: Available only when using Windows / LDAP / Integration Server Authentication. Applies to new users only, it will not affect existing users. "SDK" is the "Software SDK1 Unique ID Development Kit". This data can be SDK1 Certification Method converted from SAS (VAS) when SDK2 Unique ID installed or uninstalled. DFU SDK2 Certification Method SDK3 Unique ID SDK3 Certification Method User Code Count Clear Clears the counts for the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict the use of the machine. Press [Execute] to clear. PM Alarm PM Alarm Level
5501* 5501 1*
5501 2*
Original Count Alarm
[0~9999 / 0 / 1 step] 0: Alarm off 1~9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1~9999) PM counter 0: No alarm sounds 1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing through the ARDF 10,000
5504*
Jam Alarm Japan Only Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not included). [0~3 / 3 / 1 step] 0: Zero (Off) 1: Low (2.5K jams) 2: Medium (3K jams) 3: High (6K jams) Error Alarm Sets the error alarm level. Japan only DFU [0~255 / 50 / 100 copies per step]
5505*
B264/B265
5-42
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5507 5507 1
Supply Alarm Paper Supply Alarm (0:Off 1:On)
5507 2
Staple Supply Alarm (0:Off 1:On)
5507 3
Toner Supply Alarm (0:Off 1:On)
5507 128* 5507 132* 5507 133* 5507 134* 5507 141* 5507 142* 5507 160* 5507 164* 5507 166* 5507 172*
Others Interval: A3 Interval: A4 Interval: A5 Interval: B4 Interval: B5 Interval: DLT Interval: LG Interval: LT Interval: HLT
Switches the control call on/off for the paper supply. DFU 0: Off, 1: On 0: No alarm. 1: Sets the alarm to sound for the specified number transfer sheets for each paper size (A3, A4, B4, B5, DLT, LG, LT, HLT) Switches the control call on/off for the stapler installed in the finisher. DFU 0: Off, 1: On 0: No alarm 1: Alarm goes off for every 1K of staples used. Switches the control call on/off for the toner end. DFU 0: Off, 1: On If you select 1 the alarm will sound when the copier detects toner end. The Paper Supply Call Level: nn SPs specify the paper control call interval for the referenced paper sizes. DFU [00250 ~ 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step]
SM
5-43
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
5508 5508 1 5508 2 5508 3 5508 4
CC Call Japan Only Jam Remains Continuous Jams Continuous Door Open Low Call Mode
5508 11
Jam Detection: Time Length
5508 12
Jam Detection Continuous Count
5508 13
Door Open: Time Length
5508 21
Jam Operation: Time Length
5508 22
Jam Operation: Continuous Count
5508 23
Door Operation: Time Length
Enables/disables initiating a call. [0~1/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable Enables/disables the new call specifications designed to reduce the number of calls. [0~1/1] 0: Normal mode 1: Reduced mode Sets the length of time to determine the length of an unattended paper jam. [03~30/1] This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is enabled (set to 1). Sets the number of continuous paper jams required to initiate a call. [02~10/1] This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is enabled (set to 1). Sets the length of time the remains opens to determine when to initiate a call. [03~30/1] This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is enabled (set to 1). Determines what happens when a paper jam is left unattended. [0~1/1] 0: Automatic Call 1: Audible Warning at Machine Determines what happens when continuous paper jams occur. [0~1/1] 0: Automatic Call 1: Audible Warning at Machine Determines what happens when the front door remains open. [0~1/1] 0: Automatic Call 1: Audible Warning at Machine
B264/B265
5-44
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5801
5801 1 5801 2 5801 3 5801 4 5801 5 5801 6 5801 7 5801 8 5801 9 5801 10
5801 11
5801 16 5801 17 5801 18 5801 19
SM
5-45
B264/B265
Service Tables
5801 12 5801 14 5801 15
Memory Clear Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these SP codes, print an SMC Report. All Clear Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below. Engine Clr Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings. SCS Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM update information. IMH Memory Clr Initializes the image file system. (IMH: Image Memory Handler) MCS Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored documents. (MCS: Memory Control Service) Copier Application Initializes all copier application settings. Fax Application Not used. Printer Application Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter. Scanner Application Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes. Web Service/ Network Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and Application thumbnails, and initializes the Job login ID. Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software NCS Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP addresses also), the SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings. (NCS: Network Control Service) R-Fax Deletes received faxes. Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings. Clear UCS Setting Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings. MIRS Setting Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service) settings. CCS Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service) settings. SRM Memory Clr Initializes information in non-volatile RAM. LCS Memory Clr Initializes information in non-volatile RAM.
Rev. 04/2006
5802*
Printer Free Run [Disable] [Enable] Performs a free run. The scanner scans once and the printer prints for the number of copies requested. To perform the free run, after selecting 1, press the Copy Window to enter copy mode, input the number of copies, and then press the Start key. To stop the free run, press *. Input Check Displays the signals received from sensors and switches. (!5.2.5) Output Check Turns on the electrical components individually for test purposes. (!5.2.6) Option Connection Check ARDF Bank (Paper Tray Unit) LCT Finisher (1000-sheet, Two-Tray finisher)
5803
5804
5807 5807 1 5807 2 5807 3 5807 4
Execution will return either a 1 or 0: 0: Device not connected correctly. 1: Device connected correctly.
5811
Machine No. Setting This SP presents the screen used to enter the 11-digit number of the machine. The allowed entries are "A" to "Z" and "0" to "9". The setting is done at the factory, and should not be changed in the field. DFU Service Tel. No. Setting Use these SP modes to input service and support telephone numbers. Enter the number and press Press the ! key to input a pause. Press the Clear modes key to delete the telephone number. Service Service representative telephone number. Facsimile Fax number of service representative Supply Supplier of consumables Operation Operation support
5812*
5812 1* 5812 2* 5812 3* 5812 4*
B264/B265
5-46
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5816 5816 1
5816 2 5816 3
5816 6
5816 7
5816 8
5816 9
5816 10
5816 11
5816 16
Remote Service I/F Setting Turns the remote diagnostics off and on. [0~2/1] 0: Remote diagnostics off. 1: Serial (CSS or NRS) remote diagnostics on. 2: Network remote diagnostics. CE Call Lets the customer engineer start or end the remote machine check with CSS or NRS; to do this, push the center report key Function Flag Enables and disables remote diagnosis over the NRS network. [0~1/1] 0: Disables remote diagnosis over the network. 1: Enables remote diagnosis over the network. Device Information Call Display Controls if the item for initial setting of the screen for the NRS device-information notification-call is shown. [0~1/1] 0: Enabled. Item initial setting not shown. 1: Disable. Item for initial setting shown. SSL Disable Controls if RCG (Remote Communication Gate) confirmation is done by SSL during an RCG send for the NRS over a network interface. [0~1/1] 0: Yes. SSL not used. 1: No. SSL used. RCG Connect Timeout Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when the RCG (Remote Communication Gate) connects during a call via the NRS network. [1~90/1 sec.] RCG Write to Timeout Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when sent data is written to the RCG during a call over the NRS network. [0~100/1 sec.] RCG Read Timeout Sets the length of time (seconds) for the timeout when sent data is written from the RCG during a call over the NRS network. [0~100/1 sec.] Port 80 Enable Controls if permission is given to get access to the SOAP method over Port 80 on the NRS network. [0~1/1] 0: No. Access denied 1: Yes. Access granted. Connection Method Selects how the remote service is connected. 0: Internet 1: Dial-up
SM
5-47
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
5816 21
5816 22
5816 23
5816 61 5816 62 5816 67
RCG C Registered (RCG C = Embedded Remote Communication Gate) This SP displays the RCG C installation end flag. 1: Installation completed 2: Installation not completed RCG C Registered Detail This SP displays the RCG C installation status. 0: RCG B not registered (RCG B = Remote Communication Gate) 1: RCG B registered 2: Device registered Connect Type (N/M) This SP displays and selects the RCG C connection method. 0: Internet connection 1: Dial-up connection Cert. Expire Timing DFU Proximity of the expiration of the certification. Use Proxy This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates with the service center. CERT: Up State Displays the status of the certification update. 0 The certification used by RCG C is set correctly. 1 The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated. 2 The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the successful update. 3 The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failed update. 4 The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being sent to the GW URL. 11 A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection. 12 The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the certification update request. 13 The notification of the request for certification update has completed successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update request from the rescue GW URL. 14 The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored. 15 The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the successful completion of this event. 16 The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of this event. 17 The certification update request has been received from the GW URL, the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was completed, but an certification error has been received, and the rescue certification is being recorded. 18 The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of the certification update.
B264/B265
5-48
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5816 68
5816 69 5816 83 5816 84 5816 85
5816 86 5816 87 5816 88 5816 89 5816 90
5816 91 5816 92 5816 93
CERT: Error Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the certification. 0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress. 1 Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired. 2 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification has expired. 3 Notification of shift from a common authtentication to an individual certification. 4 Notification of a common certification without ID2. 5 Notification that no certification was issued. 6 Notification that GW URL does not exist. CERT: Up ID The ID of the request for certification. Firmware Up Status Displays the status of the firmware update. Non-HDD Firm Up This setting determines if the firmware can be updated, even without the HDD installed. Firm Up User Check This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version of the firmware before the firmware update execution. If the option to confirm the previous version is selected, a notification is sent to the system manager and the firmware update is done with the firmware files from the URL. Firmware Size Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the firmware data files during the firmware update execution. CERT: Macro Version Displays the macro version of the NRS certification CERT: PAC Version Displays the PAC version of the NRS certification. CERT: ID2 Code Displays ID2 for the NRS certification. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asterisk (****) indicate that no NRS certification exists. CERT: Subject Displays the common name of the NRS certification subject. CN = the following 17 bytes. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asterisk (****) indicate that no DESS exists. CERT: Serial Number Displays serial number for the NRS certification. Asterisk (****) indicate that no DESS exists. CERT: Issuer Displays the common name of the issuer of the NRS certification. CN = the following 30 bytes. Asterisk (****) indicate that no DESS exists. CERT: Valid Start Displays the start time of the period for which the current NRS certification is enabled.
SM
5-49
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
5816 94 5816 200 5816 201
5816 202 5816 203 5816 204
5816 205 5816 206 5816 207
CERT: Valid End Displays the end time of the period for which the current NRS certification is enabled. Manual Polling No information is available at this time. Regist: Status Displays a number that indicates the status of the NRS service device. 0 Neither the NRS device nor RCG - C device are set. 1 The RCG - C device is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this status the RCG - B unit cannot answer a polling request. 2 The RCG - C device is set. In this status the RCG - B unit cannot answer a polling request. 3 The NRS device is being set. In this status the RCG - C device cannot be set. 4 The NRS module has not started. Letter Number Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the RCG - C device. Confirm Execute Executes the inquiry request to the NRS GW URL. Confirm Result Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816 203. 0 Succeeded 1 Inquiry number error 2 Registration in progress 3 Proxy error (proxy enabled) 4 Proxy error (proxy disabled) 5 Proxy error (Illegal user name or password) 6 Communication error 7 Certification update error 8 Other error 9 Inquiry executing Confirm Place Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the GW URL. Register Execute Executes RCG - C Registration. Register Result Displays a number that indicates the registration result. 0 Succeeded 2 Registration in progress 3 Proxy error (proxy enabled) 4 Proxy error (proxy disabled) 5 Proxy error (Illegal user name or password) 6 Communication error 7 Certification update error 8 Other error 9 Registration executing
B264/B265
5-50
SM
Rev. 05/2007
5816 208
5816 250
Error Code Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either SP5816 204 or SP5816 207 was executed. Cause Code Definition Illegal Modem Parameter -11001 Chat parameter error -11002 Chat execution error -11003 Unexpected error Operation Error, Incorrect -12002 Inquiry, registration attempted without Setting acquiring device status. -12003 Attempted registration without execution of an inquiry and no previous registration. -12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries for certification and ID2. -12005 @Remote communication is prohibited. The device has a problem with an internal @Remote function. -12006 After confirmation is completed, confirmation request was made again. -12007 Different request number was used for registration than the number which was used for confirmation. -12008 Certification update failed because the device was in use. Error Caused by -2385 Attempted dial up overseas without the Response from GW URL correct international prefix for the telephone number. -2387 Not supported at the Service Center -2389 Database out of service -2390 Program out of service -2391 Two registrations for same device -2392 Parameter error -2393 RCG - B not managed -2394 Device not managed -2395 Box ID for RCG - B is illegal -2396 Device ID for RCG - B is illegal -2397 Incorrect ID2 format -2398 Incorrect request number format CommLog Print Prints the communication log.
SM
5-51
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
5821* 5821 1* 5821 2*
Remote Service Address CSS PI Device Code RCG IP Address
Japan Only. Sets the PI device code. After changing this setting, you must switch the machine off and on. Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote Communication Gate) destination for call processing at the remote service center. [00000000h ~ FFFFFFFFh/ 00000000h /
5824
NVRAM Data Upload Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number) from NVRAM on the control board to a flash memory card. While using this SP mode, always keep the front cover open. This prevents a software module accessing the NVRAM during the upload. NVRAM Data Download Downloads the content of a flash memory card to the NVRAM on the control board.
5825
B264/B265
5-52
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5828 582850
Network Setting 1284 Compatibility (Centro)
582852
ECP (Centro)
582865 582866
Job Spool Setting Job Spool Clear
582869
Job Spool Protocol
582877 582878 582879 582884 582890
IPv4 DNS Server 2 IPv4 DNS Server 3 Domain Name (Ethernet) Setting List PrintPrint Settings List TELNET Operation SettingsTELNET (0:OFF 1:ON)
Enables and disables bi-directional communication on the parallel connection between the machine and a computer. [0~1/1] 0:Off 1: On Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284 Mode) for data transfer. [0~1/1] 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Switches job spooling spooling on and off. 0: No spooling 1: Spooling enabled This SP determines whether the job interrupted at power off is resumed at the next power on. This SP operates only when SP5828065 is set to 1. 1: Resumes printing spooled jog. 0: Clears spooled job. This SP determines whether job spooling is enabled or dispabled for each protocol. This is a 8-bit setting. 0 LPR 4 BMLinks (Japan Only) 1 FTP (Not Used) 5 DIPRINT 2 IPP 6 Reserved (Not Used) 3 SMB 7 Reserved (Not Used) Sets the IPv4 address for a DNS server. This address can be used among devices that have IPv4 devices (Ethernet, IPv4 Over 1394, IEEE 802.11b, etc.) Prints a list of the NCS parameter settings. Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP is disabled, the Telnet port is closed. [0~1/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable Disables or enables the Web operation. [0~1/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable This SP disables/enables Rendezvous operation. This is a set of protocols that allows a device on an IP network to automatically recognize and connect with other devices (such as a printer) on a network. Once a new device is connected to the network, it can be used immediately by every computer on the network. No special setup procedures or configuration settings are required 1: Enable 0: Disable Service Tables
582891
Web Operation Web (0:OFF 1:ON)
582896
Rendezvous Operation
SM
5-53
B264/B265
Rev. 04/2006
5832
5832 1 5832 2 5832 3 5832 4 5832 5 5832 6 5832 7 5832 8 5832 9 5832 10 5832 11 5833
HDD Formatting Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the execution ends, cycle the machine off and on. HDD Formatting (All) HDD Formatting (IMH) HDD Formatting (Thumbnail) HDD Formatting (Job Log) HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts) HDD Formatting (User Info1) Mail RX Data Mail TX Data HDD Formatting (Data for Design) HDD Formatting (Log) HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F) (for Ridoc Desk Top Binder) e-Cabinet Enable Enables the e-Cabinet function. Then, the user names in the cabinet are enabled for use with the POP server. [0~1/1] 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Operation Panel Image Exposure 0: Off (disable), 1: On (enable) Enables and disables the operation panel read (dump) feature. After powering on the machine, set this option to 1 to enable this feature. To reset the machine to 0, the machine must be turned off and on again. Selecting 0 for this option without cycling the power off and on does not restore the default setting (0). Capture Setting Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be initialized, displayed, or selected. [0~1/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable Panel Setting Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or updated from the initial system screen. [0~1/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable The setting for SP5836-001 has priority.
5834
5836 5836 1
5836 2
B264/B265
5-54
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5836 3
5836 71 5836 72 5836 73 5836 74 5836 75 5836 76 5836 77 5836 78 5836 81
5836 83 5836 84
5836 85 5836 86 5836 91
5836 92
5836 93
SM
5-55
B264/B265
Service Tables
5836 82
Print Backup Function (0:Off 1:On) Turns the print backup feature on and off. Default: 0 (Off) When this feature is on, the print backup features are shown in the initial system settings. Enabled only when optional File Format Converter (MLB:Media Link Board) is installed. [0~1/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable Reduction for Copy Color [0~3/1] 0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 DFU Reduction for Copy B&W [0~6/1] Text 0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3 Reduction for Copy B&W [0~6/1] Other 0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3 Reduction for Printer [0~3/1] Color 0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 DFU Reduction for Printer [0~6/1] B&W 0 1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3 Reduction for Printer [1~5/1] B&W HQ 1:1/2 3:1/4 4:1/6 5:1/8 Reduction for Printer Col 1200 dpi Reduction for Printer B&W 1200 dpi Format for Copy Color [0~3/1] 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR DFU Format for Copy B&W [0~3/1] Text 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR Format Copy B&W Other [0~3/1] 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR Format for Printer Color [0~3/1] 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR DFU Format for Printer B&W [0~3/1] 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR Format for Printer B&W [0~3/1] HQ 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR Default for JPEG [5~95/1] Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management server with the MLB, with JPEG selected as the format. Enabled only when optional File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) is installed. High Quality for JPEG Sets the quality level of JPEG images for high quality sent to the Document Server with the MLB (Media Link Board). [5~95/1] Low Quality for JPEG Sets the quality level of JPEG images for low quality sent to the Document Server with the MLB (Media Link Board). [5~95/1]

5836 94 Default Format for Backup Files
Rev. 04/2006
5836 95
Default Resolution for Backup Files
5836 97
Default Compression for Backup Files
5836 98
Back Projection Removal
Sets the format of the backup files. [0~2/1] 0: TIFF 1: JPEG 2: For printing This feature can be selected only if SP5836-3 is set to 1. Sets the resolution conversion ratio for the backup files. [0~3/1] 0: 1x 1: 1/2x 2: 1/3 x 3: 1/4x Sets the rate of compression for the backup files. [0~2/1] 0: Standard 1: Low 2: High Removes the ghost images that are copied from the back sides of two-sided originals. [0~1/1] 0: Disable 1: Enable
5839 5839 4 5839 7
5839 8
5839 9
5839 10
IEEE 1394 This SP is displayed only when an IEEE 1394 (firewire) card is installed. Host Name Enter the name of the device used on the network. Example: RNP0000000000 Cycle Master Enables or disables the cycle master function for the 1394 bus standard. [0~1/1] 0: Disable (Off) 1: Enable (On) BCR Mode Determines how BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) operates on the 1394 standard bus when the independent node is in any mode other than IRM. (NVRAM: 2-bits) [Always Effective] IRM 1394a Check Conducts a 1394a check of IRM when the independent node is in any mode other than IRM. [0~1/1] 0: Checks whether IRM conforms to 1394a 1: After IRM is checked, if IRM does not conform then independent node switches to IRM. Unique ID Lists the ID (Node_Unique_ID) assigned to the device by the system administrator. Bit0: Off Bit1: On OFF: Does not list the Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator. Instead, the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is used. ON: The Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator is used, and the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is ignored. Also, when the serial bus is reset, extra bus transactions are opened for the enumeration.
B264/B265
5-56
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5839 11 Logout Handles the login request of the login initiator for SBP-2. (1-bit) Bit0: Off Bit1: On OFF: Disable (refuse login). Initiator retry during login. Login refusal on arrival of login request (standard operation) ON: Enable (force logout). Initiator retry during login. Login refusal on arrival of login request, and the initiator forces the login. 5839 12 Login Enables or disables the exclusive login feature (SBP-2 related). Bit0: Off Bit1: On OFF: Disables. The exclusive login (LOGIN ORB exclusive it) is ignored. ON: Enables. Exclusive login is in effect. 5839 13 Login MAX Sets the maximum number of logins from the initiator (6-bits) [0~63/1] 0: Reserved 63: Reserved 5840 5840 6 IEEE 802.11b Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This bandwidth setting varies for different countries. [1~14/1] Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN. This bandwidth setting varies for different countries. [1~14/1] WEP Key Select Determines how the initiator (SBP-2) handles subsequent login requests. [0~1/1] 0: If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the request is refused. 1: If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the request is refused and the initiator logs out. Note: Displayed only when the wireless LAN card is installed.
5840 7
5840 11
SM
5-57
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
5841
5841 1 5841 7 5841 11 5841 12 5841 13 5841 14 5841 21 5841 22 5841 23 5842*
Supply Name Setting Press the User Tools key. These names appear when the user presses the Inquiry button on the User Tools screen. Toner Name Setting: Black Org Stamp StapleStd1 StapleStd2 Standard Staples for B698 StapleStd3 Standard Staples for B700/B701 Staple Std4 StapleBind1 StapleBind2 Booklet Staples for B700 StapleBind3 Net File Analysis Mode Setting This is a debugging tool. It sets the debugging output mode of each Net File process. Bit SW 0011 1111 DFU Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Groups System & other groups (LSB) Capture related Certification related Address book related Machine management related Output related (printing, delivery) Repository related
5844* 5844 1*
5844 2* 5844 3* 5844 4*
USB Transfer Rate Full Speed / Auto Change Sets the speed for USB data transmission. Full Speed: (12 Mbps fixed) Auto Change: 480 Mbps/12 Mbps auto adjust Vendor ID [0x0000~0xFFFF/ 0x05CA /1], DFU Sets the vendor ID: Initial Setting: 0x05CA Ricoh Company. Product ID [0x0000~0xFFFF/ 0x0403 /1], DFU Sets the product ID. Device Release Number [0000~9999/ 0100 /1], DFU Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display. Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number recognized as the BCD.
B264/B265
5-58
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5845* 5845 1* 5845 2*
5845 5
5845 6*
5845 8*
5845 9*
5845 10*
5845 11
Delivery Server Setting Provides items for delivery server settings. FTP Port No. [0~65535 / 3670 / 1] Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server. IP Address (Primary) Range: 000.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.255 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting. Capture Server IP Address Sets the IP address that is assigned to the PC that the capture server (eCabinet or ScanRouter) operates. This IP address is set remotely when the delivery server (Scan Router) IO device is registered. This SP only enables the IP address permit access to the DNS browser names. Delivery Error Display Time Netfiles: [0~999 / 300 / 1] Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external device. IP Address (Secondary) Range: 000.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.255 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting of the IP address without reference to the DNS setting. Delivery Server Model [0~4/ 0 / 1] Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device. 0: Unknown 1: SG1 Provided 2: SG1 Package 3: SG2 Provided 4: SG2 Package Delivery Svr Capability Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered. [0~255 / 0 / 1] (7) [0000 0000] (1) Bit7 = 1 Comment information exists Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to 0) Delivery Svr.Capability (Ext) These settings are for future use. They will let you increase the number of registered devices (in addition to those registered for SP5845 010). There are eight bits (Bit 0 to Bit 7). All are unused at this time.
SM
5-59
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
5846* 5846 1
5846 2
5846 3
5846 6
5846 7
5846 8
5846 10
UCS Setting Machine ID (for Delivery Server) Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is only displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary. 6-byte %02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X 8-byte %02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X Machine ID Clear (Delivery Server) Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory. Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable. After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on. Maximum Entries Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle. [2000~50000/1] If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed. Delivery Server Retry Timer Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server address book. [0~255/1 s] 0: No retries Delivery Server Retry Times Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server address book. [0~255/1] Delivery Server Maximum Entries Lets you set the maximum number of account entries and information about the users of the delivery server controlled by UCS. [20000~50000/1] LDAP Search Timeout Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server. [1~255/1]
B264/B265
5-60
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5846 40
5846 41
5846 47
5846 48
5846 49
5846 50
Addr Book Migration (SD -> HDD) This SP moves the address book data from an SD card to the HDD. You must cycle the machine off and on after executing this SP. 1. Turn the machine off. 2. Install the HDD. 3. Insert the SD card with the address book data in SD card Slot C3. 4. Turn the machine on. 5. Do SP5846 040. 6. Turn the machine off. 7. Remove the SD card from SD card Slot C3. 8. Turn the machine on. Notes: Executing this SP overwrites any address book data already on the HDD with the data from the SD card. We recommend that you back up all directory information to an SD card with SP5846 051 before you execute this SP. After the address book data is copied to HDD, all the address book data is deleted from the source SD card. If the operation fails, the data is not erased from the SD card. Fill Addr Acl Info. This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users. Procedure 1. Turn the machine off. 2. Install the new HDD. 3. Turn the machine on. 4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically. However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system administrator or key operator. 5. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041. After this SP executes successfully, any user can access the address book. Initialize Local Address Book Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a machine managed with UCS. Initialize Delivery Addr Book Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the delivery address book that is controlled by UCS. Initialize LDAP Addr Book Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the LDAP address book that is controlled by UCS. Initialize All Addr Book Clears everything (including users codes) in the directory information managed by UCS. However, the accounts and passwords of the system administrators are not deleted.
SM
5-61
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
5846 51 5846 52 5846 53
5846 60
5846 62
5846 63
Backup All Addr Book Uploads all directory information to the SD card. Restore All Addr Book Downloads all directory information from the SD card. Clear Backup Info. Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot. Deletes only the files uploaded for that machine. This feature does not work if the card is writeprotected. Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing. Search Option This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local address book. Bit Meaning 0 Checks both upper/lower case characters 1 Japan Only 2 3 4 --- Not Used --5 --- Not Used --6 --- Not Used --7 --- Not Used --Complexity Option 1 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the password. [0~32/1] Note: This SP does not normally require adjustment. This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book. Complexity Option 2 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case and defines the length of the password. [0~32/1] Note: This SP does not normally require adjustment. This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book.
B264/B265
5-62
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5846 64
5846 65
5846 90
5846 91
5846 94
Complexity Option 3 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers and defines the length of the password. [0~32/1] Note: This SP does not normally require adjustment. This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book. Complexity Option 4 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and defines the length of the password. [0~32/1] Note: This SP does not normally require adjustment. This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book. Plain Data Forbidden Lets you to prevent the address from transmission as plain data. This is a security function that prevents unauthorized access to address book data. [0~1/1] 0: No check. Address book data not protected. 1: Check. Enables operation of UCS without data from HDD or SC card and without creating address book information with plain data. FTP Auth. Port Settings Sets the FTP port to get the delivery server address book that is used in the individual authorization mode. [0~65535/1] Encryption Start Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the LDAP server. [0~255/1] No default
SM
5-63
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
5847
5847 1 5847 2 5847 3 5847 4 5847 5 5847 6
5847 21
Net File Resolution Reduction 5847 1 through 5847 6 changes the default settings of image data sent externally by the Net File page reference function. [0~2/1] 5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by NetFile. NetFile refers to jobs to be printed from the document server with a PC and the DeskTopBinder software. Rate After Copy Col [0~5/1] 0: 1x 1: 1/2x Rate for Copy B&W Text [0~6/1] 2: 1/3x Rate for Copy B&W Other [0~6/1] 3: 1/4x Rate for Printer Color [0~5/1] 4: 1/6x Rate for Printer B&W [0~6/1] 5: 1/8x Rate for Printer B&W HQ [0~6/1] 6: 2/3x1 1 : 6: 2/3x applies to 003, 005, 006 only. Network Quality Default for JPEG Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed. [5~95/1] Web Service 5847 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router. 5847 100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The default is equal to 1 gigabyte. Access Control. : NetFile (Lower 4 Bits Only) Bit switch settings. 0000: No access control 0001: Denies access to Desk Top Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan Router have no effect on capture. Acc. Ctrl.: Repository (only Lower 4 Bits) 0000: No access control 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Switches access control on and off. Acc. Ctrl.: Doc. Svr. Print (Lower 4 Bits) 0000: OFF, 0001: ON Acc. Ctrl.: User Directory (Lower 4 Bits) Acc. Ctrl.: Delivery Input (Lower 4 Bits) Acc. Ctrl Comm. Log Fax (Lower 4 Bits) Acc. Ctrl.: Job Control (Lower 4 Bits) Acc. Ctrl: Device Management (Lower 4 Bits) Acc. Ctrl: Fax (Lower 4 Bits) Acc. Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4 Bits) Acc. Ctrl: User Administration (Lower 4 Bits) Acc. Ctrl: Security Setting (Lower 4 Bits only) Repository: Download Image Max. Size [1~1024/1 K] Access Ctrl: Regular Trans No information is available at this time. 0: Not allowed 1: Allowed
5848
5848 1
5848 2 5848 3 5848 4 5848 5 5848 7 5848 9 5848 11 5848 13 5848 21 5848 22 5848 41 5848 100 5848 201
B264/B265
5-64
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5848 210 5848 211 5848 212 5848 213 5848 214 5848 215 5848 216 5848 217
Setting: Log Type: Job 1 No information is available at this time. Setting: Log Type: Job 2 No information is available at this time. Setting: Log Type: Access No information is available at this time. Setting: Primary Srv No information is available at this time. Setting: Secondary Srv No information is available at this time. Setting: Start Time No information is available at this time. Setting: Interval Time No information is available at this time. Setting: Timing No information is available at this time. Installation Date Displays or prints the installation date of the machine. Display The Counter Clear Day has been changed to Installation Date or Inst. Date. Switch to Print Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout for the total counter. [0~1/1] 0: No Print 1: Print Address Book Function Switch Module Selects the module for managing user information. [0~1/1] 0: SCS 1: UCS Select Title Selects the default heading of the address book. [2~4/1] 2: Heading 1 3: Heading 2 4: Heading 3
5849 5849 1 5849 2
5850 2
5851
Bluetooth Mode Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key. [0:Public] [1: Private]
SM
5-65
B264/B265
Service Tables
5850* 5850 1
Rev. 04/2006
5852*
5852 1* 5852 2* 5852 3* 5852 4* 5852 5* 5852 7*
5852 8* 5852 9* 5852 10* 5852 11* 5852 12*
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. The protocol for communication between Internet main MTAs (Message Transfer Agents). SMTP Server Name Allows you to specify the server by either its IP address or host name. If you use the host name, then you must also specify the DNS. SMTP Server Port Sets the port number of the SMTP server. Number [0~65535 / 25 / 1] SMTP Type SMTP User Name Enter a text string for the user name. SMTP Password Enter a character string for the password. POP Before SMTP During mail sending, determines whether the POP server connection is validated before connecting to the SMTP server. This prevents unauthorized access to the SMTP server and requires users to access and log onto the POP3 server before sending e-mail. 0: No. POP server connection validated. 1: Yes. POP server connection validated before SMTP connection. POP Server Name Sets the name of the POP server. You can use either the IP address or the host name. If you use the host name, then you must also specify the DNS. POP Server Port Sets the port number of the POP server. Number [1~65535 / 110 / 1] POP User Name Sets the POP user name used to validate POP connection before SMTP connection. This validation is switched on with SP5852 6 (POP Before SMTP). Limit: 63 characters. POP Password Sets the POP password used to validate POP connection before SMTP connection. This validation is switched on with SP5852 6 (POP Before SMTP). Limit: 63 characters. POP Auth. Determines whether encryption is done when POP Encryption connection is validated before SMTP connection. [0~2 / 0 / 1] 0: Automatic 1: No. Without encryption. 2: Yes. With encryption. Stamp Data Download Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROM and copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as required. This SP must be executed after replacing or formatting the hard disks. Note: This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed. Remote ROM Update When set to 1 allows reception of firmware data via the local port (IEEE 1284) during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the machine is cycled off and on. [0~1 / 0 / 1] 0: Not allowed 1: Allowed
5853*
5856
B264/B265
5-66
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5857 Save Debug Log 001 On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) Switches on the debug log feature. The debug log cannot be captured until this feature is switched on. [0~1/1] 0: OFF 1: ON 002 Target (2: HDD 3: SD Card) Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the event selected by SP5858will be stored if an error is generated [2~3 /1] 2: HDD 3: SD Card 005 Save to HDD Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk. 006 Save to SD Card Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card. 009 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB) Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies them to the SD Card. A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to each SD Card. 010 Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key) Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it to the SD Card. A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card. Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is no log on the HDD with no key specified. 011 Erase HDD Debug Data Erases all debug logs on the HDD 012 Erase SD Card Debug Data Erases all debug logs on the SD Card. If the card contains only debugging files generated by an event specified by SP5858, the files are erased when SP5857 010 or 011 is executed. To enable this SP, the machine must be cycled off and on. 013 Free Space on SD Card Displays the amount of space available on the SD card. 014 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB) Copies the last 4MB of the log (written directly to the card from shared memory) onto an SD card. 015 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB Any Key) This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. 016 Make HDD Debug This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. 017 Make SD Debug This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card.
SM
5-67
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
5858*
58581* 58582* 58583* 58584* 5859* 5859 1* 5859 2* 5859 3* 5859 4* 5859 5* 5859 6* 5859 7* 5859 8* 5859 9* 5859 10* 5860 5860 1
Debug Save When These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the destination selected by SP5857 002. SP58583 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC error codes. Engine SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON) Stores SC codes generated by copier engine errors. Controller SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON Stores SC codes generated by GW controller errors. Any SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON [0~65535 / 0 / 1] Jam (0:OFF 1:ON Stores jam errors. Debug Log Save Function These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for Key 1 functions that use common memory on the controller Key 2 board. (!5.3.1) Key 3 [-9999999~9999999 / 0 / 1] Key 4 Key Key Key Key Key Key 5 6 7 8 9 10
5860 2
5860 3
5860 4
5860 5
SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Server Name Allows you to specify the name of the SMTP server. Enter either the host name or the IP address. If you enter the host name, you must also specify the name of the DNS server. SMTP Server Port Number This SP sets the number of the SMTP server port. [1~65535/1] SMTP Certification This setting switches SMTP certification on and off for mail sending. 0: Off 1: On SMTP Certification User Name Allows you to set the user name to be used for SMTP certification. This user name is used only when the user name for SMTP certification has not been selected with the software application. The user name includes the "realmID" string. SMTP Certification Password Allows you to set the password to be used for SMTP certification. The length of the password is limited to 128 alphanumeric characters.
B264/B265
5-68
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5860 6
5860 7
5860 8
5860 9
5860 10
5860 11 5860 12 5860 13
5860 14
5860 15
5860 16
5860 17
SMTP Certification Encryption This setting determines whether the password for SMTP certification is encrypted. 0: Automatic 1: No encryption done 2: Encryption done POP Before SMTP This setting determines whether the transmission connects with the POP server first for certification before it connects to the SMTP server for sending. 0: No connection to POP server 1: Connection to POP server Standby Wait Time After POP3 Certification This SP sets the amount of time to allow for the connection to the SMTP server after the transmission has connected to the POP server and been certified during the execution of POP Before SMTP. [0~10000/300/1] RX Protocol This SP specifies POP3 protocol or switches off receiving. 0: No receiving 1: POP3 protocol POP3/IMAP4 Server Name This SP specifies the POP3/IMAP4 server that uses POP Before SMTP during mail receiving. The server can be specified either by IP address or host name. If you use the host name, you also need the name of the DNS server. POP3/IMAP4 User Name This SP sets the user name used during POP3/IMAP4 certification. POP3/IMAP4 Password This SP sets the password used during POP3/IMAP4 certification. POP3/IMAP4 Certification Encryption This SP specifies whether password encryption is done for POP3/IMAP4 certification. 0: Automatic 1: No encryption done 2: Encryption done POP3 Server Port Number This SP sets the number of the POP3 server port. [1~65535/110/1] IMAP4 Server Port Number This SP sets the number of the IMAP4 server port. [1~65535/143/1] SMTP RX Port Number This SP sets the number of the port that receives SMTP mail. [1~65535/25/1] Mail RX Interval This SP sets the timing for mail received at regular intervals. [2~1440/15/1 min.] Note: Setting this SP to "0" switches off receiving mail at timed intervals.
SM
5-69
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
5860 18
5860 19
5860 20
5860 21
5860 22
5860 23
5860 24
Limit Size of RX Mail This SP specifies the maximum size of mail that can be received. [1~50/2/1 MB] Server Mail Store This SP setting determines whether received mail is stored on the server. 0: Received mail not stored 1: All received mail stored 2: Stores only mail that generated errors during receiving Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1~168/72/1] Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this prescribed time. MDN Response RFC2298Compliance Determines whether RFC2298compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail. [0~1/1] 0: No 1: Yes SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account after the SMTP server is validated. [0~1/1] 0: No. From item not switched. 1: Yes. From item switched. SMTP Certification Account Mail This is the mail address for SMTP certification. When SMTP certification is done in response to a send request for a document or text mail, this SP sets the mail address for the SMTP protocol MAIL FROM command in the following cases: When the SMTP certification information has not been set from the software application. When the SMTP certification information for UCS has been set or not set on the mainframe with the User Tools. POP3/IMAP4 Account Mail Address This is the mail address for POP Before SMTP mail address. When POP Before SMTP certification is done in response to a send request for a document or text mail, this SP sets the mail address for the SMTP protocol MAIL FROM command in the following cases: When the POP Before SMTP certification information has not been set from the software application. When the SMTP certification information for UCS has been set or SMTP certification information has not set on the mainframe with the User Tools. Also, when SP5960 022 is set to "1" (Yes "From" item switched), this mail address is inserted into the header for the "From" item.
B264/B265
5-70
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5860 25
SMTP Auth Direct Sending Occasionally, all SMTP certifications may fail with SP5860 006 set to "2" to enable encryption during SMTP certification for the SMTP server. This can occur if the SMTP server does not meet RFC standards. In such cases you can use this SP to set the SMTP certification method directly. However, this SP can be used only after SP5860 003 has been set to "1" (On). Bit0: LOGIN Bit1: PLAIN Bit2: CRAM_MD5 Bit3: DIGEST_MD5 Bit4 to Bit 7: Not Used Account Setting Administrator Mail Address This SP sets the mail address of the system administrator. If the mainframe has a HDD installed, this address is saved in a file in UFS on the hard disk. If the mainframe has no HDD and uses RAM Disk, the address is saved in NVRAM. Main Subject Setting These SP codes enable and specify the character string to be displayed in the subject line of the email header. If the mainframe has a HDD installed, the information address is saved in a file in UFS on the hard disk. If the mainframe has no HDD and uses RAM Disk, then the address is saved in NVRAM. The SP codes listed below enable the IDs and allow you to enter character strings for the information (a character string) to appear in the subject line of mail headers. The IDs are paired. The first SP of each pair enables (or disables) the ID and the second SP of the pair allows you to enter the character string. The length of the character string that you can enter is 20 alphanumeric characters (SP_CHAR_CODE_DEF (20). ID=1 and ID=2 have default settings ("Urgent" and "High", respectively). The other IDs do not have default settings. Subject ID=1 Enable Flag Subject ID=1: Text/Character Code Set Subject ID=48Enable Flag Subject ID=48: Text/Character Code Set
5861 5861 1
5862
5862 1 5862 2 5862 47 5862 48
SM
5-71
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
5863 5863 1 5863 2 5863 3 5863 4 5863 6 5863 7
SMP/FTP/NCP Settings SMB Default User Name This SP sets the default user name used for SMB sending. SMB Default Password This SP sets the default password used for SMB sending. FTP Default User Name This SP sets the default user name used for FTP sending. FTP Default Password This SP sets the default password for FTP sending. NCP Default User Name This SP sets the default user name used for NCP sending. NCP Default Password This SP sets the default password for NCP sending. Common Key Info Writing Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRS specifications. Writing Note: These SPs are for future use and currently are not used. Initialize HDD Function Disable DFU Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to the HDD. After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on to enable the setting. [0~1/1] 0: OFF 1: ON Note: This SP is intended for use during installation of the Data Overwrite Security Unit B735 (a new option). For more, see section 1. Installation. HDD Overwrite Status Check DFU SD Card Appli Move Allows you to move applications from one SD card another. For more, see Printer/Scanner Service Manual 1.3 "Merging Applications on One SD Card". Move Exec Executes the move from one SD card to another. Undo Exec This is an undo function. It cancels the previous execution. SC Auto Reboot This SP determines whether the machine reboots automatically when an SC error occurs. Note: The reboot does not occur for Type A SC codes. Reboot Setting The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine does not reboot. Reboot Type The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs.
5870
5870 1 5870 3 5871
5872 5873
5873 1 5873 2 5875
5875 1 5875 2
B264/B265
5-72
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5878
Option Setup Data Overwrite Security (DOS) Setup Press [Execute] to initialize the Data Overwrite Security option for the copier. For more, see 1.18.2 Data Overwrite Security Unit, Installation. Edit Option Setup This SP is used to install the edit option card. Plug & Play Maker/Model Name Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names should be registered again. After selecting, press the Original Type key and # key at the same time. When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times. Switchover Permission Time Print Application Timer Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take control of the display when the application currently controlling the display is not operating because a key has not been pressed. [3~30/1 s] Print Application Set This SP prescribes the time interval to expire before the machine shifts to another application when another application currently holds access control for the standby mode while there is no key input. [0~1/1/1] Application Counter Display Printer Counter Copy Counter 0: Off, 1: On Selects whether or not these total counters are displayed in the UP mode. Service Tables
5879
5907
5913 5913 2
5913 102
5914* 5914 1* 5914 2* 5915
Mechanical Counter Detection 0: Not detected, 1: Detected, 2: Unknown Confirms that the mechanical counter inside the inner cover is connected. A3/DLT Counter Display [0, 1 / 0 / --] (0: OFF, 1: ON) Sets the key press display for the counter key. This setting has no relation to (SSP) SP5-104 A3/DLT Double Count. Border Removal Area Switching [0~1 / 0 / 1] Toggles between two settings that affect the appearance of the pages for border removal and printed facing pages: (1) Using the original area as the allotted area, or (2) Using only the copy paper as the allotted area. 0: Original 1: Paper
5918*
5923*
SM
5-73
B264/B265
Rev. 04/2006
5958*
59581* 59582* 59583* 5959*
Feed Clutch Start Timing Adjustment, DFU Adjusts the clutch timing to optimize the intervals between fed sheets to reduce jams in the feed unit. Start Timing: Tray 1, 2 [35 ~ 57.5 / 42.5 / 2.5mm] DFU Start Timing: Tray 3, 4, LCT 35 ~ 57.5 / 42.5 / 2.5mm] DFU Leading Edge Detection [19~34 / 26.5 /2.5 mm] DFU 1st Print Delay Timing [0~60 / 0 / 1 s] Sets the amount of time the machine waits to project the latent image onto the drum after the feed/development motor, main motor, and fusing/feed-out motor switch on. This setting allows the drum and hot roller to turn freely in order to allow more time for cleaning toner and carbon that has accumulated on the hot roller strippers. Changing this can improve image quality but can also slow down the first print time. Adjust only when necessary. Large Capacity Exit Mode 0: OFF, 1: ON Selects whether or not all stapled copies are sent to Shift Tray 1 when the TwoTray finisher is installed. 8K 16K Paper Mode 0: Off, 1: On. Switches on/off the use of 8-kai, and 16-kai China paper sizes. If Off, 8-kai, 16-kai paper sizes are not displayed after pressing the selection key. If On, 8-kai, 16-kai paper sizes displayed after pressing the selection key. For this setting to take effect, 2 must be selected for SP5131. With 2 (Europe) selected for SP5131, the ADF can select 16-kai LEF. With SP5962 set for 0 (Off), the nearest size is detected as shown below. 16-kai SEF 6-kai LEF 8-kai SEF Size Loaded B5 SEF B5 LEF B4 LEF Size Detected Power Consumption Reduction Mode DFU Copy Server Set Function 0: ON, 1: OFF Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting. Debug Serial Output DFU Determines whether the debug information is output by the serial port when the machine is powered on. [0~1 / 0 / 1] 0: Disable 1: Enable
5961*
5962*
5963 5967*
5970*
B264/B265
5-74
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5974
Cherry Server Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, Light or Full (Professional), is installed. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Light version (supplied with this machine) 1: Full version (optional) Onboard Device Setting The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1". On Board NIC 0: Disable 1: Enable On Board USB SP Print Mode (SMC Printout) All (Data List) Prints all of the system parameter lists for the item selected. (! 5.2.7) Input the number for the item that SP (Mode Data List) you want to print, and then press $: Execute on the User Program touch panel. Logging Data Diagnostic Report Non-Default NIB Summary Capture Log Copier User Program Scanner SP Scanner User Program Service Tables
5985
5985 1 5985 2 5990 5990 1 5990 2 5990 3 5990 4 5990 5 5990 6 5990 7 5990 8 5990 21 5990 22 5990 23
SM
5-75
B264/B265
Rev. 04/2006
SP6-xxx: Peripherals
6006* ADF Registration Adjust Adjusts the side-to-side and leading edge registration for simplex and duplex original feeding in ARDF mode. Press ! to toggle . SP6006 5 sets the maximum setting allowed for rear edge erase. Side-to-side [3 ~ +3 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm step] Leading Edge (Thin Original) [30 ~ +30 / 0.0 / 0.17 mm step] Leading Edge (Duplex Front) [42 ~ +42 / 0.0 / 0.12 mm step] Leading Edge (Duplex Rear) [42 ~ +42 / 0.0 / 0.12 mm step] Rear Edge Erase [20 ~ +20 / 3.0 / 0.5 mm step] ADF Input Check Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
6006 1* 6006 2* 6006 3* 6006 4* 6006 5* 6007 6007 1 6007 2 6007 3 6008
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the ARDF.( ! 5.2.5)
ADF Output Check Switches on each electrical component (ARDF motor, solenoid, etc.) of the ARDF for testing. (! 5.2.6) ADF Free Run Performs a free run with the ARDF for duplex and stamp testing. Input the number for the item you want to check, and then press $ to start. This is a general free run controlled from the copier. For more detailed free run modes, see the ARDF manual. Duplex Mode OFF/ON Stamp Mode OFF/ON ADF Stamp Position Adjustment [7~+7 / 0 / 0.5 mm steps] Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals. Japan Bit 0 1 7 DLT SEF 11"x15" North America Bit 0 1 6 DLT SEF 11" x 15" 5 LT LEF US Exec LEF 4 LT SEF 8"x10" SEF 3 LG SEF F4 SEF Europe Bit 0 1 2 DLT SEF 8-K SEF 1 LT SEF 16-K SEF 0 LT LEF 16-K LEF Determines which original sizes are detected when an original is detected that is larger than the size assigned to the original size sensor. This provides an alternate selection for detection, other than that assigned with SP5131. Original Size Decision Priority
6009
6009 1 6009 2 6010*
6016*
B264/B265
5-76
SM
Rev. 04/2006
6017*
Sheet Through Magnification [50.0 ~ +50.0 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step] Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for ADF mode. Use the ! key to toggle between + and - before entering the value Staple Position Adjustment [3.5~+3.5 / 0.0 / 0.5 mm step] Adjusts the staple position in the main scan direction when using the two-tray finisher. Press ! to toggle . A larger value shifts the staple toward the edge of the paper. Punch Hole Adjustment Adjusts the punch hole position. SP6113 1: 2-hole punches for Japan, North America, Europe, and 4-hole punches for Northern Europe. SP6113 2: 3-hole punches for North America, and 4-hole punches for Europe. Press ! to toggle . A larger value shifts the holes toward the edge of the paper. 2-Holes [7~+7 / 0 / 0.5 mm steps] 3-Holes [7~+7 / 0 / 0.5 mm steps] Fold Position Adjustment Allows fine adjustment of the fold position on paper when the Booklet Finisher is connected and used. A3/DLT [-30~+30 / 0 / 0.5 mm] B4 [-20~+20 / 0 / 0.5 mm] A4/LT [-15~+15 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
6105*
6113*
6113 1* 6113 2* 6902*
6902 1* 6902 2* 6902 3*
SM
5-77
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
SP7-xxx: Data Log

7001* Main Motor Operation Time Display: 00000000~99999999 min The number of prints and drive time for drum revolutions can be obtained by counting the main motor revolution time. If the amount of time required for the drum to revolve to print 1 copy increases, this data combined with the number of copies can be used to analyze problems and could be useful for future product development. Total SC Counter Displays the total number of service calls that have occurred. Display range: 0000~9999
7401*
7403* 7403 1* 7403 2* 7403 3* 7403 4* 7403 5* 7403 6* 7403 7* 7403 8* 7403 9* 7403 10* 7502*
SC History Latest Latest 1 Latest 2 Latest 3 Latest 4 Latest 5 Latest 6 Latest 7 Latest 8 Latest 9 Total Paper Jam Counter Total Original Jam Counter
Displays the most recent service calls successive groups of 10.
Displays the total number of copy jams. Display range: 0000~9999 Displays the total number of original jams. Display range: 0000~9999
7503*
B264/B265
5-78
SM
Rev. 04/2006
7504*
Paper Jam Counter by Jam Location Display range: 0000~9999 Displays the total number of copy jams by location. A Paper Late error occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the precise time. A Paper Lag paper jam occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed time. Error No. Error 1* At Power On 3* Tray 1: On 4* Tray 2: On 5* Tray 3/LCT: ON 6* Tray 4: On 7* External Tray: On 8* Registration: ON 9* External Tray: ON 10* Internal Tray: ON 13* Duplex Exit 2: ON 14* Duplex Exit 3: ON 16* Exit 1: Off 17* --18* --19* Ent. Duplex 1: Off 23* Exit Duplex: Off 24* --25* Finisher Entrance 26* Finisher Proof Tray 27* Finisher Shift Tray 28* Finisher Stapler 29* Finisher Exit 30* Mailbox Entrance 31* Mailbox Proof Tray 32* Mailbox Relay 33* Mailbox MBX 35* Booklet FIN Entrance 36* Booklet FIN Transport 37* Booklet FIN Early 38* Booklet FIN Staple 39* Booklet FIN Late Saddle Stitch 40* Ent. FIN Off 41* Exit FIN Off 57* LCT Tray 58 Vert. Trans 1: ON 59 Vert. Trans 2: ON 60 Registration: OFF 61 Transport Sensor 4 63 External Tray: OFF 64 --66 Duplex Exit 1: OFF 67 --68 Relay Sensor 2: OFF 69 Duplex Feed: OFF 73 Exit Duplex: ON 74 1-Bin Tray Sensor: OFF
SM
5-79
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
7505*
Total Original Jam by Location Display range: 0000~9999 Displays the total number of original jams by location. These jams occur when the original does not activate the sensors. Note: A Check In failure occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the precise time. A Check Out failure occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed time and causes a jam. The 3rd column in the table below tells you the correct component name used in the service manual. Operation Panel Display Service Manual Name 1 At Power On --3 Registration Sensor Check In Failure Skew Correction Sensor 4 Nip-in Sensor Check In Failure Interval Sensor 5 Registration Sensor (On Check) --6 Relay Sensor (On Check) 7 Inverter Sensor (On Check) 53 Registration Sensor Check Out Failure Skew Correction Sensor 54 Nip-in Check Out Failure Interval Sensor 55 Registration Sensor (Off Check) 56 Relay Sensor (Off Check) 57 Inverter Sensor (Off Check) Jam Count by Copy Size Displays the total number of copy jams by paper size. A4 LEF A5 LEF B5 LEF LT LEF HLT LEF A3 SEF A4 SEF A5 SEF B4 SEF B5 SEF DLT SEF LG SEF LT SEF HLT SEF Others
7506* 7506 5* 7506 6* 7506 14* 7506 38* 7506 44* 7506 132* 7506 133* 7506 134* 7506 141* 7506 142* 7506 160* 7506 164* 7506 166* 7506 172* 7506 255*
B264/B265
5-80
SM
Rev. 04/2006
7507*
7507 1* 7507 2* 7507 3* 7507 4* 7507 5* 7507 6* 7507 7* 7507 8* 7507 9* 7507 10* 7508*
Copy Jam History (Transfer Sheet) Displays the copy jam history of the transfer unit in groups of 10, starting with the most recent 10 jams. Display contents are as follows: CODE is the SP7-505-*** number. SIZE is the paper size code in hex. (See Paper Size Hex Codes below.) TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7-003) DATE is the date the previous jam occurred Sample Display: Latest CODE: 007 Latest 1 SIZE: 05h Latest 2 TOTAL: 0000334 Latest 3 DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000 Latest 4 Latest 5 Latest 6 Latest 7 Latest 8 Latest 9 Original Jam History Displays the original jam history of the transfer unit in groups of 10, starting with the most recent 10 jams. Display contents are as follows: CODE is the SP7-505-*** number. SIZE is the paper size code in hex. (See Paper Size Hex Codes below.) TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7-003) DATE is the date the previous jam occurred Sample Display: Latest CODE: 007 Latest 1 SIZE: 05h Latest 2 TOTAL: 0000334 Latest 3 DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000 Latest 4 Latest 5 Latest 6 Latest 7 Latest 8 Latest 9
75081* 75082* 75083* 75084* 75085* 75086* 75087* 75088* 75089* 750810*
Paper Size Hex Codes These codes are displayed by SP7507 and SP7508. Paper Size Code (hex) Paper Size Code (hex) A4 LEF A5 LEF B5 LEF LT LEF HLT LEF A3 SEF A4 SEF A5 SEF 05 06 0E 26 2C 84 85 86 B4 SEF B5 SEF DLT SEF LG SEF LT SEF HLT SEF Others 8D 8E A0 A4 A6 AC FF
SM
5-81
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
7801
ROM No./Firmware Version PM Counter Display PM Counter Reset
Displays the ROM number and firmware version numbers. Displays the PM counter since the last PM. Resets the PM counter. To reset, press $.
7803* 7804 7807
SC/Jam Counter Reset Resets the SC and jam counters. To reset, press $. This SP does not reset the jam history counters: SP7-507, SP7-508. Counter Reset Resets all counters except SP7-003-***, SP7-006-***. To reset, press $.
7808
7810
Access Code Clear Clears the access code. To clear, press $. Use to clear the access code if the customer forgets the code. After clearing the code is reset for Null and the password entry display does not open. Original Count Clear Clears the original total display, displayed with SP7002-***. To clear, press $.
7811
7816 7816 1 7816 2 7816 3 7816 4 7816 5 7816 6 7825 7826 7826 1 7826 2
Print Counter Reset by Tray Bypass Resets the total copy count by paper tray. To reset, press $. Tray 1 Use these SP modes when replacing the pick-up, feed, Tray 2 and separation rollers. Tray 3 Tray 4 LCT Total Counter Reset No longer used. (Has no effect)
MF Error Counter Japan Only Displays the number of counts requested of the card/key counter. Error Total A request for the count total failed at power on. This error will occur if the device is installed but disconnected. Error Staple The request for a staple count failed at power on. This error will occur if the device is installed but disconnected. MF Error Counter Clear Press Execute to reset to 0 the values of SP7826. Japan Only Self-Diagnosis Result Display Opens the Self-Diagnose Result Display Execute to open the Self-Diagnose Result Display to view details about errors. Use the keys on in the display on the touch-panel to scroll through all the information. If no errors have occurred, you will see the No Error notation.
7827
7832
B264/B265
5-82
SM
Rev. 04/2006
7833
7833 1* 7833 2* 7833 3* 7833 4* 7833 5* 7834
Pixel Coverage Ratio Displays the coverage ratio of the output (the ratio of the total pixel area of the image data to the total printable area on the paper). Note that this value is not directly proportional to the amount of toner consumed, although of course it is one factor that affects this amount. The other major factors involved include: the type, total image area and image density of the original, toner concentration and developer potential. Last Pages 0% to 100%. Average Pages 0% to 100%. Toner Bottles In Use 0 to 65,535 copies Copy Count: Previous Toner Bottle 0 to 999,999 copies Copy Count: Toner Bottle Before Previous 0 to 999,999 copies Clear Pixel Coverage Data These SPs clear the counters for the following items. Last & Average Toner Bottles Page Count: Bottle Dot Coverage Clear All Coverage Counts Total Memory Size Displays the memory capacity of the controller system. ADF Exposure Glass Counts the number of occurrences (0 ~ 65,535) when dust was detected on the scanning glass of the ADF. Detect Count Counts the occurrences. Counting is done only if SP4999 1 (ADF Scan Glass Dust Check) is switched on. Counter Clear Clears the count. Memory All Clear (SP5801) resets this counter to zero. Assert Info. DFU These SP numbers display the results of the occurrence of the most recent SC code generated by the machine. Source File Name Module name Line Number Number of lines Result Value
7834 1 7834 2 7834 3 7834 4 7834 255 7836
7852*
7852 2*
7901*
7991 1* 7991 2* 7991 3*
SM
5-83
B264/B265
Service Tables
7852 1*
Rev. 04/2006
SP8-xxx: Data Log2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers SP8211~SP8216 SP8401~SP8406 SP8691~SP8696 What They Do The number of pages scanned to the document server. The number of pages printed from the document server The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered: How is the document server actually being used? What application is using the document server most frequently? What data in the document server is being reused? Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an application). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.
PREFIXES T: C: F: P: S: L: Total: (Grand Total). Copy application. Fax application. Print application. Scan application. Local storage (document server) WHAT IT MEANS Grand total of the items counted for all applications (C, F, P, etc.).. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each application when the job was not stored on the document server. Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server. The L: counters work differently case by case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the document server; this can be in document server mode (from the document server window), or from another mode, such as from a printer driver or by pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode window. Sometimes, they include occasions when the user uses a file that is already on the document server. Each counter will be discussed case by case. Refers to network applications such as Web Image Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software Development Kit) will also be counted with this group in the future.
O:
Other applications (external network applications, for example)
B264/B265
5-84
SM
Rev. 04/2006
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand. Key for Abbreviations
ABBREVIATION / > AddBook Apl B/W Bk C ColCr ColMode Comb Comp Deliv DesApl Dev Counter Dup, Duplex Emul FC FIN Full Bleed GenCopy GPC WHAT IT MEANS By, e.g. T:Jobs/Apl = Total Jobs by Application More (2> 2 or more, 4> 4 or more Address Book Application Black & White Black Cyan Color Create Color Mode Combine Compression Delivery Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to store the job on the document server, for example. Development Count, no. of pages developed. Duplex, printing on both sides Emulation Full Color Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.) No Margins Generation Copy Mode Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1) Internet Fax Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc. Black (YMCK) Local Storage. Refers to the document server. Large (paper) Size Magnification One color (monochrome) New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor machines remotely. NRS is used overseas, CSS is used in Japan. Original for scanning Original Jam Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and converted to different formats. Personal Computer Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON. Print Jobs Paper 5-85 B264/B265
IFax ImgEdt K LS LSize Mag MC NRS Org OrgJam Palm 2
PC PGS PJob Ppr SM
Service Tables

ABBREVIATION PrtJam PrtPGS R Rez SC Scn Sim, Simplex S-to-Email SMC Svr TonEnd TonSave TXJob YMC YMCK
Rev. 04/2006
WHAT IT MEANS Printer (plotter) Jam Print Pages Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This machine is under development and currently not available. Resolution Service Code (Error SC code displayed) Scan Simplex, printing on 1 side. Scan-to-E-mail SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are recorded in the SMC report. Server Toner End Toner Save Send, Transmission Yellow, Magenta, Cyan Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, BlacK
NOTE: All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear, or the Counter Reset SP7 808.
B264/B265
5-86
SM
Rev. 04/2006
8001 8002 8003 8004 8005 8006
T:Total Jobs C:Total Jobs F:Total Jobs P:Total Jobs S:Total Jobs L:Total Jobs
These SPs count the number of times each application is used to do a job. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the other applications are used to send a job to the document server, plus the number of times a file already on the document server is used.
These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages processed. When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job. Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish. Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer using the SP modes are not counted. When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is counted at the time when either Delete Data or Specify Output is specified. A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending. When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter does not (the document server is not used). A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast are not counted separately). A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be counted until the transmission has been completed. A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter. The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving. When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments. When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters both increment. When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments. When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document server, only the L: counter increments. When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments. When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments. When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter increments.
SM
5-87
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
8011 8012 8013 8014 8015 8016 8017
T:Jobs/LS C:Jobs/LS F:Jobs/LS P:Jobs/LS S:Jobs/LS L:Jobs/LS O:Jobs/LS
These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the document server by each application, to reveal how local storage is being used for input. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments. When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments. When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments. When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments. When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
8021 8022 8023 8024 8025 8026 8027 T:Pjob/LS C:Pjob/LS F:Pjob/LS P:Pjob/LS S:Pjob/LS L:Pjob/LS O:Pjob/LS These SPs reveal how files printed from the document server were stored on the document server originally. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the C: counter increments. When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P: counters both increment. When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L: counter increments. When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode, then the L: counter increments. When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments. When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments. When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
B264/B265
5-88
SM
Rev. 04/2006
8031 8032 8033 8034 8035 8036 8037
T:Pjob/DesApl C:Pjob/DesApl F:Pjob/DesApl P:Pjob/DesApl S:Pjob/DesApl L:Pjob/DesApl O:Pjob/DesApl
These SPs reveal what applications were used to output documents from the document server. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of jobs printed from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the application that started the print job is incremented. When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
8041 8042 8043 8044 8045 8046 8047 T:TX Jobs/LS C:TX Jobs/LS F:TX Jobs/LS P:TX Jobs/LS S:TX Jobs/LS L:TX Jobs/LS O:TX Jobs/LS These SPs count the applications that stored files on the document server that were later accessed for transmission over the telephone line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted separately. The L: counter counts the number of jobs scanned from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
8051 8052 8053 8054 8055 8056 8057
T:TX Jobs/DesApl C:TX Jobs/DesApl F:TX Jobs/DesApl P:TX Jobs/DesApl S:TX Jobs/DesApl L:TX Jobs/DesApl O:TX Jobs/DesApl
These SPs count the applications used to send files from the document server over the telephone line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs merged for sending are counted separately. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O: counter increments.
SM
5-89
B264/B265
Service Tables
When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments. When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
Rev. 04/2006
8061
T:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the application. C:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the application. F:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the application. Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time. P:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the application. S:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the application. Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time. L:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified from the print window within document server mode. O:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the application. 806x 1 806x 2 806x 3 806x 4 806x 5 806x 6 806x 7 Sort Stack Staple Bookle t Z-Fold Punch Other Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is set for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter increments. (See SP8066 1) Number of jobs started out of Sort mode. Number of jobs started in Staple mode. Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple mode, the Staple counter also increments. Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode and set for folding (Z-fold). Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8064 6.) Reserved. Not used.
8062
8063
8064
8065
8066
8067
B264/B265
5-90
SM
Rev. 04/2006
8071
8072
8073
8074
8075
8076
8077
For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments. Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073). Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish. If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job. If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the time the error occurs. For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as 2.) The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072). When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is counted.
SM
5-91
B264/B265
Service Tables
807x 1 807x 2 807x 3 807x 4 807x 5 807x 6 807x 7
T:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the job, regardless of which application was used. C:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job. F:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job. P:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job. S:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job. L:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of pages in the job. O:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count and calculate the number of Other application jobs (Web Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job. 1 Page 807x 8 21~50 Pages 2 Pages 807x 9 51~100 Pages 3 Pages 807x 10 101~300 Pages 4 Pages 807x 11 301~500 Pages 5 Pages 807x 12 501~700 Pages 6~10 Pages 807x 13 701~1000 Pages 11~20 Pages 807x 14 1001~ Pages
Rev. 04/2006
8111
8113
T:FAX TX Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a telephone line. Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time. F:FAX TX Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax directly on a telephone line. Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
These counters count jobs, not pages. This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including documents stored on the document server. If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job started. If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination where both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (812x) also increments. The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
8121
8123
T:IFAX TX Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images using I-Fax. Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time. F:IFAX TX Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax. Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
These counters count jobs, not pages. The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at this time. The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
B264/B265
5-92
SM
Rev. 04/2006
8131
8135
T:S-to-Email Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or not. S:S-to-Email Jobs These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.
These counters count jobs, not pages. If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to be color or black-and-white then counted. If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted. If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled. If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once for Scan-to-PC).
8141 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan Router server. F:Deliv Jobs/Svr These SPs count the number of jobs scanned in fax mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
8143
These counters count jobs, not pages. The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router server cannot be confirmed. If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is counted as a Color job. If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted. If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled. Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
SM
5-93
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
8151
8155
T:Deliv Jobs/PC [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC). Note: At the present time, 8151 and 8155 perform identical counts. S:Deliv Jobs/PC These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent with Scan-to-PC.
These counters count jobs, not pages. If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted. If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted. If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled. Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
8161 8163 T:PCFAX TX Jobs F:PCFAX TX Jobs These SPs count the number of PC Fax transmission jobs. A job is counted from when it is registered for sending, not when it is sent. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Note: At the present time, these counters perform identical counts.
This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier.
B264/B265
5-94
SM
Rev. 04/2006
8191 8192 8193 8195 8196
T:Total Scan PGS C:Total Scan PGS F:Total Scan PGS S:Total Scan PGS L:Total Scan PGS
These SPs count the pages scanned by each application that uses the scanner to scan images. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
SP 8191 to 8196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical pages. These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color. Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted. A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned. Scans made in SP mode are not counted. Examples If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, the S: count is 4. If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6. If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6. If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
Service Tables SM 5-95 B264/B265
Rev. 04/2006
8201
8205
T:LSize Scan PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are not counted. Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display. S:LSize Scan PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are not counted. Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display. T:Scan PGS/LS C:Scan PGS/LS F:Scan PGS/LS S:Scan PGS/LS L:Scan PGS/LS These SPs count the number of pages scanned into the document server. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8211 8212 8213 8215 8216
Reading user stamp data is not counted. If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted. If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is 4. If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not change. If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6. If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
B264/B265
5-96
SM
Rev. 04/2006
8221
8221 1
8221 2
ADF Org Feeds [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back side scanning. Front Number of front sides fed for scanning: With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex scanning. With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user loads face up.) Back Number of rear sides fed for scanning: With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning. With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side scanning.
When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1. If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.
8231 Scan PGS/Mode [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to determine the work load on the ADF. Large Volume Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in the ADF at one time. SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the ADF. Mixed Size Selectable. Select Mixed Sizes on the operation panel. Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size. Platen Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the original directly on the platen.
8231 1 8231 2 8231 3 8231 4 8231 5
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode. The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application so if the originals page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted. If the user selects Mixed Sizes for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is enabled. In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
SM
5-97
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
8241
T:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs, regardless of which application was used. 8242 C:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs. 8243 F:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs. 8245 S:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs. 8246 L:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8241 8242 8243 8245 8246 824x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 824x 2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 824x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 824x 4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes 824x 5: Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes 824x 6: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No 824x 7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No 824x 8: Binary Yes No No Yes No 824x 9: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
B264/B265
5-98
SM
Rev. 04/2006
8251 8252 8254 8256 8257
T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
These SPs show how many times Image Edit features have been selected at the operation panel for each application. Some examples of these editing features are:
Erase> Border Erase> Center Image Repeat Centering Positive/Negative [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Note: The count totals the number of times the edit features have been used. A detailed breakdown of exactly which features have been used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. 8281 8285 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN S:Scan PGS/TWAIN These SPs count the number of pages scanned using a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Note: At the present time, these counters perform identical counts.
SM
5-99
B264/B265
Service Tables
8291 8293 8295 8296
T:Scan PGS/Stamp F:Scan PGS/Stamp S:Scan PGS/Stamp L:Scan PGS/Stamp
These SPs count the number of pages stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen
Rev. 04/2006
8301
8302
8303
8305
8306
830x 1 830x 2 830x 3 830x 4 830x 5 830x 6 830x 7 830x 8 830x 9 830x 10 830x 254 830x 255
T:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP 8-441]. C:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP 8-442]. F:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-443]. S:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-445]. L:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446]. A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 DLT LG LT HLT Full Bleed Other (Standard) Other (Custom)
B264/B265
5-100
SM
Rev. 04/2006
8311
8315
831x 1 831x 2 831x 3 831x 4 831x 5
T:Scan PGS/Rez [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings. S:Scan PGS/Rez [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings. Note: At the present time, 8311 and 8315 perform identical counts. 1200dpi ~ 600dpi~1199dpi 400dpi~599dpi 200dpi~399dpi ~199dpi
Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted. The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is done for the Fax application.
SM
5-101
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
8381 8382 8383 8384 8385 8386 8387
T:Total PrtPGS C:Total PrtPGS F:Total PrtPGS P:Total PrtPGS S:Total PrtPGS L:Total PrtPGS O:Total PrtPGS
These SPs count the number of pages printed by the customer. The counter for the application used for storing the pages increments. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is counted as 2. When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted for the application that stored them. These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the following pages are not counted as printed pages: Blank pages in a duplex printing job. Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets. Reports printed to confirm counts. All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.) Test prints for machine image adjustment. Error notification reports. Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
B264/B265
5-102
SM
Rev. 04/2006
8391
LSize PrtPGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger. Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine. T:PrtPGS/LS C:PrtPGS/LS F:PrtPGS/LS P:PrtPGS/LS S:PrtPGS/LS L:PrtPGS/LS These SPs count the number of pages printed from the document server. The counter for the application used to print the pages is incremented. The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8401 8402 8403 8404 8405 8406
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count. Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count.
SM
5-103
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
8411
Prints/Duplex
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing. Last pages printed only on one side are not counted. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8421
8422
8423
8424
8425
8426
8427
842x 1 842x 2 842x 3 842x 4 842x 5 842x 6 842x 7 842x 8 842x 9 842x 10 842x 11 842x 12 842x 13
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications. C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the copier application. F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the fax application. P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the printer application. S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the scanner application. L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window at the operation panel. O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by Other applications Simplex> Duplex Duplex> Duplex Book> Duplex Simplex Combine Duplex Combine 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up) 4> 4 pages on 1 side (4-Up) 6> 6 pages on 1 side (6-Up) 8> 8pages on 1 side (8-Up) 9> 9 pages on 1 side (9-Up) 16> 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up) Booklet Magazine
These counts (SP8421 to SP8427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption. Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page. Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
B264/B265
5-104
SM
Rev. 04/2006 Booklet Original Count Pages 1 1 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 3 6 4 7 4 8 4

Magazine Original Count Pages 1 1 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4
8431
8432
8434
8436
8437
843x 1 843x 2 843x 3
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below, regardless of which application was used. C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the copy application. P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the print application. L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below. O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with Other applications. Cover/Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2. Series/Book The number of pages printed in series (one side) or printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination. User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps were applied, including page numbering and date stamping.
SM
5-105
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
8441
8442
8443
8444
8445
8446
8447
844x 1 844x 2 844x 3 844x 4 844x 5 844x 6 844x 7 844x 8 844x 9 844x 10 844x 254 844x 255
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications. C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy application. F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax application. P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer application. S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner application. L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel. O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other applications. A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 DLT LG LT HLT Full Bleed Other (Standard) Other (Custom)
These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
B264/B265
5-106
SM
Rev. 04/2006
8451 8451 1 8451 2 8451 3 8451 4 8451 5 8451 6 8451 7 8451 8 8451 9 8451 10 8461
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station. Bypass Bypass Tray Tray 1 Copier Tray 2 Copier Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option) Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option) Tray 5 LCT (Option) Tray 6 Currently not used. Tray 7 Currently not used. Tray 8 Currently not used. Tray 9 Currently not used. T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications. These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing. Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted. During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page printed on one side counts as 1. C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy application. F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax application. P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer application. L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel. Normal Recycled Special Thick Normal (Back) Thick (Back) OHP Other
8462
8463 8464
8466
846x 1 846x 2 846x 3 846x 4 846x 5 846x 6 846x 7 846x 8
SM
5-107
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
8471 8471 1 8471 2 8471 3 8471 4 8471 5
PrtPGS/Mag [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed. ~49% 50%~99% 100% 101%~200% 201% ~
Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification adjustment as well. Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are also counted. Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document server are not counted. Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are counted. The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a rate of 100%.
8481 8484 T:PrtPGS/TonSave P:PrtPGS/TonSave These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature switched on. Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print application. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
B264/B265
5-108
SM
Rev. 04/2006
8511
T:PrtPGS/Emul
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8514 8514 1 8514 2 8514 3 8514 4 8514 5 8514 6 8514 7 8514 8 8514 9 8514 10 8514 11 8514 12 8514 13 8514 14
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed. P:PrtPGS/Emul [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed. RPCS RPDL PS3 R98 R16 GL/GL2 R55 RTIFF PDF PCL5e/5c PCL XL IPDL-C BM-Links Japan Only Other
SP8511 and SP8514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application. Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
SM
5-109
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
8521
8522
8523
8524
8525
8526
852x 1 852x 2 852x 3 852x 4 852x 5 852x 6 852x 7
T:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all applications. C:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy application. F:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax application. Note: Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available. P:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print application. S:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner application. L:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel. Sort Stack Staple Booklet Z-Fold Punch Other
NOTE: 1) If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled pages are still counted. 2) The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are counted.
8531 Staples This SP counts the amount of staples used by the machine. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
B264/B265
5-110
SM
Rev. 04/2006
8581
T:Counter [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine. Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is done for black only. O:Counter [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:) applications only. A3/DLT Duplex Staple
8591
8591 1 8591 2 8591 3
8631
8633
T:FAX TX PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number. Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is done for black only. F:FAX TX PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number. Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is done for black only. Service Tables
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as B/W or Color. At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and SP8633 are the same. The counts include error pages. If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for each destination. Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not. Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
SM
5-111
B264/B265
Rev. 04/2006
8641
8643
T:FAX TX PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax images using I-Fax. Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is done for black only. F:FAX TX PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax images using I-Fax. Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is done for black only.
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as B/W or Color. At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and SP8643 are the same. The counts include error pages. If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for each destination. Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not. Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
B264/B265
5-112
SM
Rev. 04/2006
8651
8655
T:S-to-Email PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications. Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is done for black only. S:S-to-Email PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for the Scan application only. Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is done for black only.
NOTE: 1) The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted. 2) If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together). 3) If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server). 4) Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
SM
5-113
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
8661
8665
T:Deliv PGS/Svr [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by both Scan and LS applications. Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is done for black only. S:Deliv PGS/Svr [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by the Scan application. Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is done for black only.
NOTE: 1) The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan Router server. 2) If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are not done. 3) The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router server.
8671 T:Deliv PGS/PC [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications. Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is done for black only. S:Deliv PGS/PC [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-to-PC with the Scan application. Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is done for black only.
8675
B264/B265
5-114
SM
Rev. 04/2006
8681 8683
T:PCFAX TXPGS F:PCFAX TXPGS
These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC Fax. These SPs are provided for the Fax application only, so the counts for SP8681 and SP8683 are the same. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC through the copier to the destination. When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B. The counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
8691 8692 8693 8694 8695 8696 T:TX PGS/LS C:TX PGS/LS F:TX PGS/LS P:TX PGS/LS S:TX PGS/LS L:TX PGS/LS These SPs count the number of pages sent from the document server. The counter for the application that was used to store the pages is incremented. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
NOTE: 1) Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count. 2) If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted for the application that stored them. 3) When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the number of pages sent to each destination.
8701 TX PGS/Port [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12. PSTN-1 PSTN-2 PSTN-3 ISDN (G3,G4) Network T:Scan PGS/Comp [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned into the document server, counted by the formats listed below. JPEG/JPEG2000 TIFF (Multi/Single) PDF Other Service Tables
8701 1 8701 2 8701 3 8701 4 8701 5 8 711
8 711 1 8 711 2 8 711 3 8 711 4
SM
5-115
B264/B265
Rev. 04/2006
8 715
8 715 1 8 715 2 8 715 3 8 715 4 8741
S:Scan PGS/Comp [0~9999999/ 1] These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned by the scan application, counted by the formats listed below. JPEG/JPEG2000 TIFF (Multi/Single) PDF Other
8741 1 8741 2 8741 3 8741 4 8741 5 8771
RX PGS/Port [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to receive them. PSTN-1 PSTN-2 PSTN-3 ISDN (G3,G4) Network Dev Counter [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the development rollers) for black and other color toners. Note: For machines that do not support color, the Black toner count is the same as the Total count. Pixel Coverage Ratio This SP displays the number of toner bottles used. The count is done based on the equivalent of 1,000 pages per bottle. LS Memory Remain This SP displays the percent of space available on the document server for storing documents. [0~100/ 0 / 1]
8781
8791
8801
Toner Remain [0~100/ 0 / 1] This SP displays the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP allows the user to check the toner supply at any time. Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is better than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 (10% steps). This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is done for black only.
B264/B265
5-116
SM
Rev. 04/2006
8831 8831 1 8831 2 8831 3 8831 4 8841 001 002 003 004 8851 8851 1 8851 2 8851 3 8851 4 8861 8861 1 8861 2 8861 3 8861 4 8871 8871 1 8871 2 8871 3 8871 4 8881 8881 1 8881 2 8881 3 8881 4 8901 8911
Pixel Cover Ave. Accum. Ave. K Accum. Ave. M Accum. Ave. C Accum. Ave. Y Pixel Cover Last Last Page K Last Page M Last Page C Last Page Y
Average Pixel Coverage Do not display for this machine.
Average Pixel Coverage Do not display for this machine.
Toner Coverage 0-10% [0~9999999] These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color toners. K Black toner Do not display for this machine. M Magenta toner C Cyan toner Y Yellow toner Toner Coverage 11-20% [0~9999999] These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color toners. K Black toner Do not display for this machine. M Magenta toner C Cyan toner Y Yellow toner Toner Coverage 21-30% [0~9999999] These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color toners. K Black toner Do not display for this machine. M Magenta toner C Cyan toner Y Yellow toner Toner Coverage 31 -% [0~9999999] These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color toners. K Black toner Do not display for this machine. M Magenta toner C Cyan toner Y Yellow toner Service Tables
Coverage Display (Toner Bottle: Previous) DFU Coverage Display (Toner Bottle: Before Previous) DFU
SM
5-117
B264/B265
Rev. 04/2006
8941
8941 1 8941 2 8941 3 8941 4 8941 5 8941 6 8941 7 8941 8 8941 9
Machine Status [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards. Operation Time Engine operation time. Does not include time while controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not operating). Standby Time Engine not operating. Includes time while controller saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes. Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing background printing. Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on. Includes time while machine is performing background printing. Off Mode Time Includes time while machine is performing background printing. Does not include time machine remains powered off with the power switches. SC Total down time due to SC errors. PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing. OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning. Supply PM Wait End Total down time due to toner end.
8951
8951 1 8951 2 8951 3 8951 4 8951 5 8951 6 8951 7 8951 8 8951 9 8951 10
AddBook Register These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data registration. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] User Code User code registrations. Mail Address Mail address registrations. Fax Destination Fax destination registrations. Group Group destination registrations. Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrations for relay TX. F-Code F-Code box registrations. Copy Program Copy application registrations with [0~255 / 0 / 255] the Program (job settings) feature. Fax Program Fax application registrations with the Program (job settings) feature. Printer Program Printer application registrations with the Program (job settings) feature. Scanner Program Scanner application registrations with the Program (job settings) feature.
B264/B265
5-118
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5.2.4 TEST PATTERN PRINTING: SP2-902

NOTE: Always print a test pattern to confirm correct operation of the machine. 1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-902. 2. Press + or ,. + IPU Test Print , Test Pattern 3. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press (. (See the tables below.) 4. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, press Yes. This selects the test pattern for printing. 5. Press Copy Window to open the copy window and then select the settings for the test print (paper size, etc.) 6. Press Start ) twice. (Ignore the Place Original messages) to start the test print. 7. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.
Test Pattern Table (SP2-902-2: IPU Test Print)

No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Test Pattern None Vertical Line (1-dot) Horizontal Line (1-dot) Vertical Line (2-dot) Horizontal Line (2-dot) Alternating Dot Pattern Grid Pattern (1-dot) Vertical Strips No. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Test Pattern Grayscale (Horizontal) Grayscale (Vertical) Cross Pattern Cross Shape Argyle Pattern Cross Pattern (256) Cross Pattern (64)
SM
5-119
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
Test Pattern Table: SP2-902-3 Printing Test Patterns

No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Test Pattern None Vertical Line (1-dot) Horizontal Line (1-dot) Vertical Line (2-dot) Horizontal Line (2-dot) Grid Pattern (1-dot) Independent Pattern (1-dot) Independent Pattern (2-dot) Full Dot Pattern Black Band Trimming Area Argyle Pattern Hounds Tooth Check (2-Dot Horizontal) Checker Flag Pattern Black Band (Vertical) Independent Pattern (4-Dot) Horizontal Line (1-Dot) (Reversed LD1, LD2) Grid Pattern (1-dot pair) (Reversed LD1, LD2) Independent Pattern (1-dot) (Reversed LD1, LD2) Grayscale (Horizontal) Grayscale (Vertical) Grayscale (Horizonta/Vertical) Grayscale (Grid) Grayscale (Horizontal Margin) Grayscale (Vertical Margin) Grayscale (Vertical/Horizontal Margin) White Pattern Grid (1-dot pair) (OR Outside Data 1)
B264/B265
5-120
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5.2.5 INPUT CHECK

Main Machine Input Check: SP5-803
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP5-803. 2. Enter the number (1 13) for the item that you want to check. A small box will be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0s and 1s. The meaning of the display is as follows. 00000000 Bit 76543210 3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in the table below.
Number Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description Fusing Exit Sensor Near End Sensor 2 Near End Sensor 1 Not Used Paper Size Sensor 4 Paper Size Sensor 3 Paper Size Sensor 2 Paper Size Sensor 1 Duplex Unit Set Sensor Near End Sensor 2 Near End Sensor 1 Fusing/Paper Output Motor Lock Paper Size Sensor 4 Paper Size Sensor 3 Paper Size Sensor 2 Paper Size Sensor 1 Zero Cross Signal Transfer Belt Unit HP Sensor Exhaust Fan Lock Signal Cooling Fan Lock Signal Main Motor Lock Signal Toner Overflow Sensor Cover Open Registration Sensor Reading 0 1 Activated Deactivated Activated Deactivated Activated Deactivated ----Activated Deactivated Activated Deactivated Activated Deactivated Activated Deactivated Unit set Unit not set Off On Off On Not Locked Locked Activated Deactivated Activated Deactivated Activated Deactivated Activated Deactivated Detected Not detected Not present Present Not locked Locked Not locked Locked Not locked Locked Tank not full Tank full Cover closed Cover opened Paper detected Paper not detected
1: Paper Feed 1 (Upper Tray)
2: Paper Feed 2 (Lower Tray)
3: Registration and Others
SM
5-121
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
Number
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Description Duplex reverse path door Paper End Sensor Not used Paper Size Sensor 4, By-pass Paper Size Sensor 3, By-pass Paper Size Sensor 2, By-pass Paper Size Sensor 1, By-pass Unit Set Signal Not used Unit Set Signal Paper Sensor Relay Sensor Exit Sensor Left Cover Switch Middle Cover Switch Right Cover Switch Feed Motor Lock F-Gate Signal Height Sensor Paper Exit Sensor Fusing Unit Total Counter Key Counter Key Card Present Front cover/open closed Vertical feed path 2nd Tray Height Sensor 1st Tray Height Sensor Lower Relay Sensor Upper Relay Sensor Lower Paper End Sensor Upper Paper End Sensor
Reading 0 Closed Paper detected Activated Activated Activated Activated Yes Yes Connected Paper detected Paper detected Paper detected Switch pressed (cover closed) Switch pressed (cover closed) Switch pressed (cover closed) No Active Feed height Paper detected Detected Not detected Detected Detected Open Clear Paper not at upper limit Paper not at upper limit Paper detected Paper detected Paper not detected Paper not detected 1 Open Paper not detected Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated No No Not connected Paper not detected Paper not detected Paper not detected Switch not pressed Switch not pressed Switch not pressed Yes Not active Not feed height Paper not detected Not detected Detected Not detected Not detected Closed Not clear Paper at upper limit Paper at upper limit Paper not detected Paper not detected Paper detected Paper detected
4: By-pass Feed
5: Relay Unit (Bridge Unit)
6: Unit Set
7: Paper End
B264/B265
5-122
SM
Rev. 04/2006
Number
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 8 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Description Dip Switch - 8 Dip Switch - 7 Dip Switch - 6 Dip Switch - 5 Dip Switch - 4 Dip Switch - 3 Dip Switch - 2 Dip Switch - 1 Not used Right cover open/closed 1-Bin Unit Set LD, HP sensor Exit Sensor (Jam) Entrance Sensor (Jam) Paper End Sensor Duplex Unit Switch Tray 4: Bit 1 Tray 4: Bit 0 Tray 3: Bit 1 Tray 3: Bit 0 Tray 2: Bit 1 Tray 2: Bit 0 Tray 1: Bit 1 Tray 1: Bit 0 By-pass Yes/No Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used LCT: Bit 2 LCT: Bit 1 LCT: Bit 0 On On On On On On On On
Reading 0 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Open Not detected Not positioned Paper not detected Paper not detected Paper not detected Cover open Capacity Full 50% or more 10% or more Out, or tray not set 1
8: DIP Switches
9: Duplex Unit
Closed Detected Positioned Paper detected Paper detected Paper detected Cover closed Bit 1 1 1 0 0 Bit 0 1 0 1 0
10: Remainder of Feed Tray 1
11: Remainder of Feed Tray 2
Bit 2 1 1 0 0 0
Bit 1 1 0 1 1 0
Bit 0 1 0 1 0 0
Capacity Full 80% or more 50% or more 30% or more 10% or more
SM
5-123
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
Number
Bit Description 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Mailbox 9-bin Mailbox 8-bin Not used Finisher: Shift Tray 1 Finisher: Shift Tray 2 Not used 1-Bin Exit Machine Exit Mailbox 7-bin Mailbox 6-bin Mailbox 5-bin Mailbox 4-bin Mailbox 3-bin Mailbox 2-bin Mailbox 1-bin Mailbox Proof Tray
Reading 0 Not full or no tray Not full or no tray Not full or no tray Not full or no tray Not full or no tray Not full or no tray Not full or no tray Not full or no tray Not full or no tray Not full or no tray Not full or no tray Not full or no tray Not full or no tray Not full or no tray 1 Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full
12: Full Exit Tray 1
13: Full Exit Tray 2
Table 1: By-pass Feed Table Paper Size Data

Number. Bit 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 Bit 3 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 Bit 2 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 Bit 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 Paper Width Post Card B6 SEF B5 SEF A5 SEF / 5.5" B4 SEF A4 SEF / 8.5" / 8" A3 SEF 11" x 17"
4: By-pass
B264/B265
5-124
SM
Rev. 04/2006
ARDF Input Check: SP6-007

1. Enter the SP mode and select SP6-007. 2. Enter the number (1 13) for the item that you want to check. A small box will be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0s and 1s. The meaning of the display is as follows. 00000000 Bit 76543210 3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in the table below.
Group Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Description Original width sensor 4 Original width sensor 3 Original width sensor 2 Original width sensor 1 Skew correction sensor Original set sensor Original B5 sensor Original LG sensor Original stopper HP sensor Pick-up HP sensor Top cover Sensor Lift sensor Inverter sensor Exit sensor Registration sensor Interval Sensor Original A4 sensor Reading 0 1 Paper not detected Paper detected Paper not detected Paper detected Paper not detected Paper detected Paper not detected Paper detected Paper not detected Paper detected Paper not detected Paper detected Paper not detected Paper detected Paper not detected Paper detected Original stopper up Original stopper down Cover closed Cover opened Cover closed Cover opened Pick-up roller up Pick-up roller down Paper not detected Paper detected Paper not detected Paper detected Paper not detected Paper detected Paper not detected Paper detected
SM
5-125
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
5.2.6 OUTPUT CHECK

NOTE: Motors keep turning in this mode regardless of upper or lower limit sensor signals. To prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an electrical component on for a long time.
Main Machine Output Check: SP5-804

1. Open SP mode 5-804. 2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check. (Refer to the table on the next page.) 3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item.
B195S901.WMF
NOTE: You cannot exit and close this display until you press off to switch off the output check currently executing. Do not keep an electrical component switched on for a long time.
B264/B265
5-126
SM
Rev. 04/2006
SP5-804 Output Check Table

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 13 14 17 18 19 20 21 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 35 36 38 39 40 41 42 Description 1st Paper Feed CL 2nd Paper Feed CL 3rd Paper Feed CL (PTU) 4th Paper Feed CL (PTU) By-pass Paper Feed CL LCT Paper Feed CL By-pass Pick-up Solenoid LCT Pick-up Solenoid Transport Motor 1 (Finisher) Transport Motor 2 (Finisher) Exit Motor (Finisher) Staple Motor (Finisher) Punch Motor (Finisher) LCT Motor Bank Motor (Paper Tray Unit) Fusing Exit Motor Main Motor Duplex Transport Motor Duplex Inverter Motor (Rev.) Duplex Inverter Motor (Fwd.) Feed/Development Motor Bank Relay Clutch (Paper Tray Unit) Relay Clutch LCT Relay Clutch Registration Clutch Development Clutch Exit Junction Gate Solenoid (Upper Unit) Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid (Lower Unit) 92 93 94 95 96 97 Shift Tray Lift Motor (Finisher) Jogger Motor (Finisher) Stapler Unit Motor (Finisher) Stack Feed Out Motor (Finisher) Shift Motor (Finishers) Stapler Rotation Motor (Two-Tray Finisher) No. 45 47 50 51 52 56 57 62 63 67 69 70 75 76 78 79 85 Description Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid Relay Junction Gate Solenoid Tray Junction Gate Solenoid Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid Positioning Roller Solenoid (Finishers) Toner Bottle Motor Transfer Belt Positioning Clutch Quenching Lamp Charge Bias Development Bias Transfer Belt Voltage ID Sensor LED Exhaust Fan Motor Elec. Equipment Cooling Fan Motor Relay Fan Motor Fusing Fan Motor Total Counter Service Tables 5-127 B264/B265
SM
Rev. 04/2006
ARDF Output Check: SP6-008)

1. Open SP mode SP6-008. 2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check. (Refer to the table below.) 3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing.
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Description Feed Motor (Forward) Feed Motor (Reverse) Drive Motor (Forward) Inverter Motor (Forward) Inverter Motor (Reverse) Feed Clutch Inverter Solenoid Pick-up Motor (Forward) Pick-up Motor (Reverse)
5.2.7 SMC PRINT OUT LISTS: SP5-990

1. Open SP mode 5-990 and select the number corresponding to the list that you wish to print.
SMC (System Parameter and Data Lists) 1 All Data List 2 SP Mode Data List 3 UP Mode Data List 4 Logging Data List 5 Self-Diagnostics Results List 6 Non-Default 7 NIB Summary 8 NetFile Log 21 Copy UP Mode List 22 Scanner SP Mode List 23 Scanner UP Mode List
2. Press Execute on the touch panel. 3. Select Single Face or Both Face. 4. After printing the list, press Close to return to the SP mode display. 5. Press Exit twice to close the SP Mode screen and return to copy mode.
B264/B265
5-128
SM
Rev. 04/2006
5.2.8 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT: SP1-109

When paper wrinkling or image offset occurs, the pressure from the pressure roller
OHP
[A]
Paper feed direction
B195S902.WMF
can be adjusted by changing the position of the pressure springs. At this time, the nip bandwidth can also be checked with SP1-109. 1. Execute SP5-802 to perform a free run of about 50 sheets. 2. Open SP1-109-1, press (, and then press Yes to confirm the selection. 3. Press Copy Window to return to the copy window. 4. Place an OHP sheet (A4/8.5" x 11" sideways) on the by-pass feed tray. 5. Press Start ) twice. The OHP sheet stops in the fusing unit for about 10 seconds, then it exits automatically.
Service Tables
6. Check the nip bandwidth [A]. The relationship between the position of the pressure spring and the bandwidth is as follows. NOTE: Check the nip bandwidth around the center of the OHP.
Pressure spring position Upper (default position) Lower Nip width 6.0 0.5 mm 6.5 0.6 mm
If the width is out of the above specification, the pressure spring should be replaced.
SM
5-129
B264/B265
Rev. 04/2006
5.2.9 MEMORY CLEAR: SP5-801

Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their default settings except the following:
SP7-003-1: SP5-811-1: SP5-907: Electrical total counter value Machine serial number Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting
1. Execute SP5-990 to print out all SMC Data Lists. 2. Open SP mode 5-801. 3. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select determines which application is initialized. For example, press 1 if you want to initialize all modules or select the appropriate number from the table below.
5801 5801 1 5801 2 5801 3 Memory Clear All Clear Engine
SCS IMH Memory Clr MCS Copier application Fax application Printer application Scanner application Web Service/Network Application NCS
5801 4
5801 5 5801 6 5801 7
5801 8
5801 9 5801 10
Comments Initializes items 2 ~ 12 below. *1 Initializes all registration settings for the engine and processing settings. *1 Initializes default system settings, CSS settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM update information. *1 Initializes the registration setting for the image memory handler by deleting all image files on the HDD. Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored documents. Initializes all copier application settings. Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer. Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer SP Bit SW, and printer CSS counter. Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all the Scanner SP modes. Deletes the NFA management files and thumbnails, and initializes the JOB login ID.
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP addresses also), the SmartNetMonitor for Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings. 5801 12 R-FAX Initializes the Job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for Admin, Job History, and local storage file numbers. 5801 13 Clear DCS Settings Initialization 5801 14 Clear UCS Settings Initialization 1* : Resetting 1~3 resets the operation panel screen coordinates, so after executing 1, 2, or 3, you must re-calibrate the screen.
5801 11
B264/B265
5-130
SM
Rev. 04/2006
4. Press Execute, and then follow the prompts on the display to complete the procedure. 5. Make sure that you perform the following settings: Do the laser beam pitch adjustment (SP2-109). Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments (!3.21). Do the touch screen calibration (! 3.21.4). Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter any values, which had been changed from their factory settings. Do SP 3-001-2 (ID Sensor Initial Setting). 6. Check the copy quality and the paper path, and do any necessary adjustments.
SM
5-131
B264/B265
Service Tables
Rev. 04/2006
5.2.10 SOFTWARE RESET

The software can be reboot when the machine hangs up. Use the following procedure. Turn the main power switch off and on. -orPress and hold down ! ( together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps once release both buttons. After Now loading. Please wait is displayed for a few seconds the copy window will open. The machine is ready for normal operation.
5.2.11 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET

System Setting Reset
The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the following procedure. 1. Press User Tools/Counter .
2. Hold down ( and then press System Settings. NOTE: You must press ( first.
B195S903.WMF
3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system settings, press Yes. 4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit.
B264/B265
5-132
SM
Rev. 04/2006
Copier Setting Reset

The copy settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the following procedure. 1. Press User Tools/Counter .
2. Hold down ( and then press Copier/Document Server Settings. NOTE: You must press ( first.
B195S904.WMF
3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings, press Yes. 4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit.
SM
5-133
B264/B265
Service Tables
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
Rev. 04/2006
5.3 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

1. Turn off the main power switch. 2. Remove the SD card [A] cover. 3. Insert the SD card [B] containing the software you wish to download into SD card slot C3. 4. Turn on the main power. 5. Follow the instructions displayed on the LCD panel 6. Monitor the downloading status on the operation panel. [B] While downloading is in progress, the LCD B195S913.WMF will display Writing. When downloading has been completed, the panel will display OK. For operation panel software, the Start key lights red while downloading is in progress, and then lights green again after downloading is completed. [A]
!CAUTION
Never switch off the power while downloading. Switching off the power while the new software is being downloading will damage the boot files in the controller. 7. After confirming that downloading is completed, turn off the main power and remove the SD card. 8. If more software needs to be downloaded, repeat steps 1 to 7. 9. Turn the main power on and confirm that the new software loads and that the machine starts normally.
B264/B265
5-134
SM
Rev. 06/2007
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
5.3.1
ERRORS DURING FIRMWARE UPDATE
An error message will display if an error occurs during the download. The error code consists of the letter E and a number (e.g., E20). Error Message Table
NO. 20 21 22 23 24 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 40 41 42 43 44 50 MEANING Cannot map logical address Cannot access memory Cannot decompress compressed data Error occurred when ROM update program started SD card access error No HDD available for stamp data download Data incorrect for continuous download Data incorrect after download interrupted Incorrect SD card version Module mismatch - Correct module is not on the SD card Module mismatch Module on SD card is not for this machine Cannot write module Cause other than E34, E35 Engine module download failed FAX module download failed Operation panel module download failed Stamp data module download failed Controller module download failed Electronic confirmation check failed SOLUTION Make sure the SD card is installed correctly, or use a different SD card. HDD connection incorrect, or replace HDD. Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is damaged. Controller program is defective. If the second attempt fails, replace the controller board. Make sure the SD card is installed correctly, or use a different SD card. HDD connection not correct or replace hard disks. Install the SD card with the remaining data necessary for the download, then re-start the procedure. Execute the recovery procedure for the module, then repeat the installation procedure. Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is damaged. The data on the SD is not correct. Get the correct data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install again. SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is for a different machine. Get the correct data then install again. SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is for a different machine. Get the correct data then install again. Replace the data for the module on the SD card and try again, or replace the BICU. Replace the data for the module on the SD card and try again, or replace the MBU. Replace the data for the module on the SD card and try again, or replace the LCDC. Replace the data for the module on the SD card and try again, or replace the HDD. Replace the data for the module on the SD card and tray again, or replace the Controller board. SD update data is not correct. The data on the SD card is for a different machine. Get the correct data then install again.
SM
5-135
B264/B265
Service Tables
UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA
Rev. 06/2007
5.4 UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA

The content of the NVRAM can be uploaded to and downloaded from an SD card.
5.4.1 UPLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-824)

1. Turn off the main switch. 2. Remove the SD card cover [A]. 3. Insert the SD card [B] into SD card slot C3. 4. Turn on the main switch. 5. Execute SP5-824. 6. Press to start uploading the NVRAM data. [A]
5.4.2 DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-825)
[B]
B195S905.WMF
The following data are not downloaded from the SD card: Total count categories (SP7-003-*** Copy Counter) C/O, P/O Counter (SP7-006-*** C/O, P/O Count Display) Dupelx, A3/DLT/Over 420 mm, Staple and Scanner application scanning counters (system settings). 1. Turn off the main switch. 2. Remove the SD card cover [A]. 3. Plug the SD card [B] into SD card slot C3. 4. Turn on the main switch. 5. Execute SP5-825. 6. Press to start downloading the NVRAM data. Note that the following errors could occur during [B] downloading: B195S906.WMF If a card is not installed in the card slot and a message tells you that downloading cannot proceed, you cannot execute downloading, even by pressing . If the correct card for the NVRAM data is not inserted in the card slot, after you press a message will tell you that downloading cannot proceed because the card is abnormal and the execution will halt. [A]
B264/B265
5-136
SM
Rev. 04/2006
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
5.5 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

5.5.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE AT POWER ON
As soon as the main machine is powered on, the controller waits for the initial settings of the copy engine to take effect and then starts an independent selfdiagnostic test program. The self-diagnostic test follows the path of the flow chart shown below and checks the CPU, memory, HDD, and so on. An SC code is displayed in the touch panel if the self-diagnostic program detects any malfunction or abnormal condition. Self-Diagnostic Test Flow
Power On
Initialization
Memory Check for Self-Diagnostic Test
Self-Diagnostic Mode Selection
CPU Check
Memory Check
RTC Check
Program ROM, DIMM CRC Check
IC Card I/FCheck
SSCG Check
Network Check
OPC Check
Engine I/F Check
NVRAM Check
Illegal Interrupt Check
HDD Check
System OS, Application Check
IEEE1284 I/F Check
B195S914.WMF
SM
5-137
B264/B265
Service Tables
ASIC Check
Font ROM Check
Rev. 04/2006
5.5.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

In addition to the self-diagnostic test initiated every time the main machine is powered on, you can set the machine in a more detailed diagnostic mode manually in order to test other components or conditions that are not tested during selfdiagnosis after power on. The following device is required in order to put the machine in the detailed self-diagnosis mode.
No. G02119350 Name Parallel Loopback Connector
Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis

Follow this procedure to execute detailed self-diagnosis. 1. Switch off the machine, and connect the parallel loopback device to the Centronics I/F port. 2. Hold down (, press and hold down -, and then while pressing both keys at the same time, switch on the machine. You will see Now Loading on the touch-panel, and then you will see the results of the test.
B264/B265
5-138
SM
Rev. 04/2006
A report like the one below is printed every time a detailed self-diagnostic test is executed, whether errors were detected or not.
MODEL NAME XXXX Serial No. : ACLD000034 Firmware P/# Firmware Version : ACP82XXXX : 2.49.01 [1/1] Wed Nov 22 13:15:30 2000
Self-Diagnosis Report
[System Construction] Kernel Version Board Type RTC Existence HDD Existence [Total Counter 0001000 [Program No. MAIN LCDC ADF FIN BANK MBX DPX [Error List @] : ACP82XXXX : V1.39 : B3515620B : : A6825150 : : @@@] (ERROR CODE ) SC CODE SC820 (0001) SC820 (0005) ]
: NetBSD 1.3.3 (SHINYOKOHAMA_ROM) #0: Sat Nov 11 16:15:35 JST 2000 CPU Pipeline Clock : 200.0 MHz ASIC Version RAM Capacity HDD Model : 1397306160 : 100.663296 MB : :7 : existence : existence
CPU System Bus Clock : 100.0 MHz
ENGINE : Ver1.96 PI SIB LCT FCU : : B0045383 : :
FIN_SDL :
SCCODE SC835 (110C) SC820 (0004)
(ERROR CODE)
SC CODE
(ERROR CODE)
SC CODE SC820 (0003)
(ERROR CODE)
SC820 (0002)
B195S907.WMF
SM
5-139
B264/B265
Service Tables
USER PROGRAM MODE
Rev. 04/2006
5.6 USER PROGRAM MODE

The user program (UP) mode is accessed by users and operators, and by sales and service staff. UP mode is used to input the copiers default settings. The default settings can be reset at any time by the user. (! 5.2.11)
5.6.1 HOW TO USE UP MODE

UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display
To enter the UP mode, press User Tools/Counter .
B195S908.WMF
System Settings
In the User Tools/Counter display, press System Settings. Click a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner, press to display more options. Perform the settings, press Exit to return to the User Tools/Counter display, and then press exit to return to the copy window.
B195S909.WMF
B264/B265
5-140
SM
Rev. 04/2006
USER PROGRAM MODE
Copier/Document Server Features

In the User/Tools Counter display, press Copy/Document Server Settings.
B195S910.WMF
Click a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner, press to display more options. Perform the settings, press Exit to return to the User Tools/Counter display, and then press Exit to return to the copy window.
Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings

In the User/Tools Counter display, press Printer Settings, Facsimile, or Scanner Settings to open the appropriate screen and then click the tab to display more settings. The screen below shows the Printer Features screen.
B195S911.WMF
SM
5-141
B264/B265
Service Tables
USER PROGRAM MODE
Rev. 04/2006
Counter
In the User/Tools Counter display, press Counter.
B195S912.WMF
View the settings, press Print Counter Exit to return to the User Tools/Counter display, and then press Exit to return to the copy window.
B264/B265
5-142
SM
Rev. 04/2006
DIP SWITCHES
5.7 DIP SWITCHES

Controller: DIP SW1
DIP SW No. ON 1 ROM Board 2~7 Keep at OFF 8 Keep at "ON" OFF SD Card Boot
I/O Board: DIP SW101

DIP SW No. Function 1 Copy Speed 2 Jam Detection (see Note) 3 --4 Print Output for Debugging 5 SC Detection 6 7 8 Destination ON 35 cpm (180 mm/s) Jam Detection Off ----SC Detection Off
JPN OFF OFF OFF NA ON OFF OFF EUR OFF ON OFF
OFF 45 cpm (230 mm/s) On Keep at "OFF". Keep at "OFF". SC Detection On

China OFF OFF ON Taiwan ON OFF ON Asia ON ON OFF Korea OFF ON ON
SM
5-143
B264/B265
Service Tables
NOTE: Disabling jam detection is effective only for the main machine (not for the options).
USING THE DEBUG LOG
Rev. 04/2006
5.8 USING THE DEBUG LOG

This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis. Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory but this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on. To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main features: Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD for later retrieval. Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card. When a user is experiencing problems with the machine, follow the procedure below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the HDD. Then ask the user to reproduce the problem.
5.8.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG

The debug information cannot be saved until the Save Debug Log function has been switched on and a target has been selected. 1. Enter the SP mode. Press " (Clear Modes) then use the 10-key pad to enter $%&. Press and hold down * (Clear/Stop) for more than 3 seconds. Press Copy SP on the touch-panel. Enter ./.& then press (. 2. Under 5857 Save Debug Log, press $.
COPY : SP-5857-001 Save Debug Log On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) _1_ Initial 0
3. On the control panel keypad, press 1 then press (. This switches the Save Debug Log feature on. NOTE: The default setting is 0 (OFF). This feature must be switched on in order for the debug information to be saved.
B264/B265
5-144
SM
Rev. 04/2006
USING THE DEBUG LOG
4. Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under 5857 Save Debug Log, touch 2 Target, enter 2 with the operation panel key to select the hard disk as the target destination, then press (.
COPY : SP-5-857-002 Save Debug Log Target (2:HDD 3:SD Card) _2_ Initial 2
NOTE: Select 3 SD Card to save the debug information directly to the SD card if it is inserted in the service slot. 5. Now touch 5858 and specify the events that you want to record in the debug log. SP5858(Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
1 2 3 4 Engine SC Error Controller SC Error Any SC Error Jam Saves data when an engine-related SC code is generated. Saves debug data when a controllerrelated SC Code is generated. Saves data only for the SC code that you specify by entering code number. Saves data for jams.
NOTE: More than one event can be selected. Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Service Tables
Touch the appropriate items(s). Press ON for each selection. This example shows Engine SC Error selected.
COPY : SP-5-858-001 Debug Save When Engine SC Error __OFF__ __ON__
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code Touch 3 Any SC Error, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control panel number keys, then press (. This example shows an entry for SC670.
COPY : SP-5-858-001 Debug Save When Any SC Error __670
NOTE: For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section 4. Troubleshooting.
SM
5-145
B264/B265
USING THE DEBUG LOG
Rev. 04/2006
6. Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information. Touch 5859. Under 5859 press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to record. Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press (. NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key. The example below shows Key 1 with 2222 entered.
COPY : SP-5-859-001 Debug Save Key No. Key 1 ___2222
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in parentheses indicate the names of the modules.) 4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
KEY NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 COPY PRINTER SCANNER 2222 (SCS) 2223 (SRM) 256 (IMH) 1000 (ECS) 1025 (MCS) 4400 (GPS) 5375 (Scan) 4500 (PDL) 5682 (NFA) 4600 (GPS-PM) 3000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 2224 (BCU) WEB
4848(COPY) 2224 (BCU)
5682 (NFA) 6600 (WebDB) 3300 (PTS) 6666 (WebSys) 2000 (NCS)
NOTE: The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (0). Key to Acronyms
Acronym ECS GPS GSP-PM IMH MCS NCS Meaning Engine Control Service GW Print Service GW Print Service Print Module Image Memory Handler Memory Control Service Network Control Service Acronym NFA PDL PTS SCS SRM WebDB Meaning Net File Application Printer Design Language Print Server System Control Service System Resource Management Web Document Box (Document Server)
The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on the HDD (the target selected with SP5-857-002) for the events that you selected SP5-858 and the memory modules selected with SP5-859.
B264/B265
5-146
SM
Rev. 04/2006
USING THE DEBUG LOG
Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting: Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer, Scanner, and Web memory modules. The initial settings are all zero. These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the settings, especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting, enter a zero for that key. You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the corresponding 4-digit numbers from the table. You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006~010. For example, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the settings from the 9 available selections for the PRINTER column only. One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is limited to 4 MB.
SM
5-147
B264/B265
Service Tables
USING THE DEBUG LOG
Rev. 04/2006
5.8.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD

1. Insert the SD card into service slot of the copier. 2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857 009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB) to write the debugging data to the SD card. NOTE: The SD card can hold up to 4MB of data. If the debugging data is larger than 4MB, you can switch to another SD card. 3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by email, or just send the SD card by mail.
5.8.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY

Since only SC errors and jams are recorded to the debug log automatically, for any other errors that occur while the customer engineer is not on site, please instruct customers to perform the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug data. Such problems would include a controller or panel freeze. NOTE: In order to use this feature, the customer engineer must have previously switched on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and selected the hard disk as the save destination (SP5857-002). 1. When the error occurs, on the operation panel, press0 (Clear Modes). 2. On the control panel, enter 01 then hold down 1 for at least 3 sec. until the machine beeps then release. This saves the debug log to the hard disk for later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives. 3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation. The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk so the service representatives can retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to an SD card.
B264/B265
5-148
SM
Rev. 04/2006
USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.8.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES

SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This function does not copy from one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4 MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the data during the copy operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log data from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card. This command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the specified key.
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log

This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a completely empty file. The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is created on the HDD when the first log is stored on the HDD, but this operation takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file already created on the HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-011 to delete the debug log data from the HDD and then execute this SP (SP5857-016).
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log

This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not a completely empty file. The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is created on the SD card when the first log is stored on the SD card, but this operation takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card. With the file already created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-012 to delete the debug log data from the SD card and then execute this SP (SP5857017).
SM
5-149
B264/B265
Service Tables
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None
OVERVIEW
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
5 6
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36
35 34 33 32
31 30
29 28
27
B195D901.WMF
SM
6-1
B264/B265
Detailed Descriptions
23 24 25 26
22
OVERVIEW
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Exposure Glass 2nd Mirror 1st Mirror Exposure Lamp

Original Width Sensors
Original Length Sensors Lens SBU Scanner Motor Hot Roller Entrance Sensor Inverter Gate Inverter Roller Pressure Roller Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade Upper Transport Roller Transfer Belt OPC Drum Registration Roller Lower Transport Roller Duplex Exit Sensor By-pass Tray
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
By-pass Pick-up Roller By-pass Paper End Sensor By-pass Paper Feed Roller By-pass Separation Roller Upper Relay Roller Feed Roller Separation Roller Pick-up Roller Bottom Plate Development Unit Charge Roller F Mirror Barrel Toroidal Lens (BTL) Polygonal Mirror Motor Laser Unit Toner Bottle Holder Exit Junction Gate Exit Roller Paper Exit Sensor 3rd Mirror Scanner HP Sensor
B264/B265
6-2
SM
OVERVIEW
6.1.2 PAPER PATH

8 9 1
2 3 4 7 5
B195D902.WMF
1 ARDF 2 Interchange unit 3 Duplex unit 4 By-pass tray 5 Large Capacity Tray (LCT) 6 Paper tray unit 7 Two-Tray Finisher 8 Bridge unit 9 1-Bin Tray
Detailed Descriptions 6-3 B264/B265
SM
OVERVIEW
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
1 2 3 4 5
Transfer Belt Contact Clutch Registration Clutch Upper Paper Feed Clutch Lower Paper Feed Clutch Relay Clutch
6 7 8 9
Paper Feed/Development Motor Development Clutch Main Motor Fusing/Exit Motor
In this machine, the development unit is provided with its own motor, separate from the main motor.
B264/B265
6-4
SM
BOARD STRUCTURE
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE

6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
RI O3 O pti on2
I EEE1284 M LB 2 I EEE1394
Wi rel ess LA N Bl uetooth GS R el ay
Ci rcui t T EL RG U
P ri m ary C om m . Ci rcui t SP DRV Ext. Tel Li ne D TM F R ec, Si G 4-A S D or S G 3-N EO S G 3-N EO
CPU R M 7035C
SD C ARD PC I
NVRAM 64 M B SP I SD CARD
LS D
FA M E
HDD
A TA 100 R A M -D I MM R A M -D I MM S STL2
ASI C T rum pet
A SI C S haker
PHY U S B 2. 0 DI MM O pti on SAF BACK UP FA C E3 FC U I /F
CCUDRV
M BU
FR O M SRAM
P ri m ary B ackup R eset
CCUI F EX S R A M (Expan.
SM B us R TC S EEP R O M (1kbi t) SSC G PCI (R A P I )
O pti on
C ontrol l er
G W FC U 3
MB
UART UART
+5V
NRS M K 1I /F
+5V E
SD RA M 8M B
F-R O M 2M B
I CI B
SI B O PU
CCD 4. 7m V LC D C
S ync SC I
CDI CA
2 I C
BI CU
G AVD T ype-R EEP R O M PM AC A PM AC A
P ol ygon m otor
LD B
LD LD
LM 98513 DAC G A SB U P P /H
LV D S D ri ver
LV D S
LV D C R eci ver
RI 1001A
SB U ADF
A KS
H 8/ 3297
UART UART
eS O C (m 66485)
2C I
SR A M 256kB
FR O M 2M B
D ul ex U ni t LD R otate M ai n M otor Feed M otor Fuser M otor
+5V E +5V +24V +12V -12V Fuser U ni t
D C -D C 1 D C -D C 2 AC D ri ve
A C -D C
PSU
B ypath T ray
Exposure Lam p
D C -D C C onv. eI O eI O
S ync. SC I
I nverter D ri ver
UART
UART
S can. M otor
M DB
D ri ver
5V 12V
I OB
Fi ni sher
LC T BANK
UART
P. P.
S ensor A cyuator
1bi n T ray
B 408
B 545
B 546
B195D920.WMF
This machine uses the R2K architecture, which allows the copier to be expanded as an MFP by installing simple modular components (SD cards) on the controller board. The BICU and FCU are connected to the controller via a PCI bus.
SM
6-5
B264/B265
BOARD STRUCTURE
SBCU (Scanner and Base engine and Image Control Unit). This is the engine control board. It controls the following functions. Engine sequence Timing control for peripherals Image processing, video control Scanner Motor Controller. The R2K Controller (05S) controls memory and all peripheral devices. The NCU (Network Control Unit) and USB 2.0 are built into this control board. FCU (Facsimile Control Unit). This option controls fax communications and fax features. ICIB (Copy Data Security Unit). This option provides copy protection of sensitive documents. Once a document is copied or printed with an RCPS or other printer driver that supports this function, the hard copy cannot be copied on a copier that supports hard copy protection. IOB (Input/Output Board). The IOB uses the new eI0 chips and handles the following functions. Drive control for the sensors, motors, and solenoids of the main unit PWM control for the high voltage supply board Serial interface with peripherals Fusing control Paper feed control The IOB is located behind the rear covers for easy access. The same IOB is used for both the B264 and B265 but the DIP switches must be set correctly for each model. ( 3.19.3) LDB (Laser Drive Board). Holds the laser diodes. The board and diodes are controlled by the GAVD Type-R mounted on the BICU not the LDB itself. MB (Mother Board). Interfaces the BICU with controller and the optional FCU. OPU (Operation Panel Unit). Controls operation panel and display. PSU (Power Supply Unit). The improved PSU on this machine consumes less than 1 W when the machine is in the energy save (low power) mode. SBU (Sensor Board Unit). Receives analog signals from the CCD (now encased in plastic, not ceramic) and converts them into digital signals. SIB (Scanner Interface Board). Controls the scanner, and serves as the signal I/F board for the SBU and the OPU. The SIB passes signals between the BICU and the scanner unit components, and transmits video signals from the SBU to the BICU.
B264/B265
6-6
SM
BOARD STRUCTURE
6.2.2 CONTROLLER
P O N C TL C trl 1.3VEP 1.5VEP 2.5VEP 3.3VEP N orm al l y 1.8VE 3.3VE 5VE 5V C PU I /F Engi ne Energy Saver O FF
CPU (RM7035C-466)
SSCG
ICS960009
Extension
Connector
LV C 244
HDD1
LV C 245
C TL H D D (1) D A TA H D D (1) ATA100
C TL H D D (1) D A TA H D D (1)
D A T A H D D (2) SD I /F
SSTL_2 I/F
ASIC
Trumpet
D EB U G ( 0) I /F D EB U G ( 1) I /F
DDR SDRAM SO-DIMM (PC2100)
Bootable SD D EB U G
D EB U G ( 0) I /F D EB U G ( 1) I /F
LV 07
ENGINE I/F PEACE CSS
VHC T VHC T 244 244
SD C L K
C SS I /F P EA C E I /F
SD (A ) I /F
A LV C 245 A LV C 244
PCI 66 B U S (32bi t) / LO C A L B U S
SD SD SD
100B ase
RTC SECURE ROM2 EEP R O M
SD
C SS I /F P EA C E I /F
I 2C ( GI O) P C I B U S (R api 64)
Option Board Slot 1 Option Board Slot 2 (RIO3) (R i 03)

Selectable
SD
SD
External S D I /F (P ortB )
RCS0 RCS1 P C II /F (P C I A D 16: 1) LV C 244 LA L(8: 1) LA L(16: 9) LV C 374 LA H (24: 7) FLASH 16MB
Energy S ave C trl
LV 07
E nergy S ave C trl
W U P /R D Y
V H C T 244
ASIC ASIC
Shaker Bassoon
P A N EL I /F
P C II /F (P C I A D 16: 1)
LV C 244 LV C 245 LV C 244 AHLE
P A N EL I /F
LV C 125
P C II /F (P C I C M D 3: 0) BUFDIR PC I I /F (P C I A D 15: 0)
O E/W E
USB
U SB 2. 0I /F PHY
T C LK
LD ( 15: 0) LD(8:0)
MI II /F
NVRAM (Std)
NIC
OSC 25MHz I2C IC Card I/F SPI1 SPI2

U SB C LK SDCLK
NVRAM 32kB 2
TIO I/F
XTL 30MHz SSCG
ICS960008
B195D926.WMF
The controller controls all applications, including copier, printer, scanner, and fax applications. To add the optional printer, scanner, or fax applications, SD cards must be inserted in the SD card slots of the controller. The fax option, however, requires installation of an FCU.
SM
6-7
B264/B265
BOARD STRUCTURE
ASCI Trumpet. Contains the dedicated R2K controller chips of the shared resources (the CPU, memory, and HDD hardware) for the copying and printing functions. CPU (RM7035C-466) The central processing unit that controls the operation of the controller board. HDD. The interface for connection of the flat film cable connection to the HDD unit. The hard disk is mounted on the controller board. SD (Bootable C3). Service slot for firmware version updates, moving applications to other SD cards, and downloading/uploading NVRAM contents. DDR SDRAM. The image memory for the printer function where image compression, image rotation and other operations are done. ASIC Shaker. Controls the following functions: USB, Ethernet, PCI (optional boards for Bluetooth, FireWire, Wireless LAN, and Centronics), debug serial, I2C, applications on SD cards mounted in SD card slots C1 and C2, and the energy save features. SD. This is the interface for SD card slots C1, and C2. C1 is for the Printer/Scanner B783. C2 is for PostScript3 B720 or Data Overwrite Security B735. Board Option Slots 1, 2. Only one of the following options can be installed in either Slot 1 or Slot 2: IEEE1284 Interface Board B679 (Centronics), IEEE802.11b G813 (Wireless LAN), IEEE1394 Interface Board B581 (FireWire), Bluetooth Interface Unit B736. The following options can also be installed in either slot: File Format Converter B609 (MLB), and Key Browser Unit B720 Flash ROM. Stores the program. Maximum capacity: 32 MB. USB. The interface for USB 2.0 devices. Supports both low-speed and highspeed modes. USB support is built-into the controller. No installation is required for the USB function. But, SP5895 001 must be set to "1" to enable the network functions. NIB. The Ethernet interface connection. Network support is built-into the controller. No installation is required for the network function. But, SP5895 002 must be set to "1" to enable the network functions. EEPROM. Stores the data for the SP code settings. NVRAM. The memory that stores the system configuration and other information.
B264/B265
6-8
SM
BOARD STRUCTURE
HDD: A 3.5" HDD (more than 20 GB) can be connected using an IDE I/F. The hard disk is partitioned as shown below. How the HDD Is Partitioned
Name a b d Power OFF Remains Remains Remains Size (MB) 256 256 7900 Files 256 --3000 Function Object Area Swap Area Copy server, local storage, print job storage, document storage Management (user stamps, etc.) Electronic sorting SAF Thumbnails Font download, form registration Job spooling area LS thumbnails SDK Log For SDK Job Log Fax, Debug Log Address Book (Local, Distribution, LADP) --Distribution History (Application), Temporary area for emails, For email TX (DCS) --Temporary storage area for printer. Comments ROM update, etc. Debugging Document server application. Stamps: 100 MB Image Overlays: 900 MB imh management, used for other applications SAF = Store and Forward Stored on HDD even after cycling machine off/on. Spooling long print jobs MCS SDK = Software Development Kit SDK SCS, Fax UCS DCS 2 MB used forDCS/Scanner applications. --For print jobs using PDF, PCL, PS, RTIFF. Jobs erased after machine is cycled off/on. This ROM data on the HDD s used in the rescue or recover modes. Detailed Descriptions
Remains Erased e f g h i j k l m n o p q Remains Remains Remains Remains Remains Remains Remains Remains Remains Remains Remains Remains Erased
1000 5370 300 500 500 2000 200 1000 200 150 300 200 1002 500 500
--100 2500 6600 5000 1000 --10000 50 30 256 10 16102 10100 1000
r Total
Remains
30 22.1 GB
1~2
ROM update data
SM
6-9
B264/B265
BOARD STRUCTURE
Allotment of Temporary Pages on the HDD

Application Common Area Copy NFA Fax Print Collating Scanner Remote Fax Sample Print MCS Thumbnails Swapping Other Capacity (MB) 4415 400 25 256 100 100 64 --10 ----Pages 1000 200 50 1000 100 50 100 --10 -----
B264/B265
6-10
SM
COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW
6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW
[A]
B195D904.WMF
[H] [I] [J] [B] [C]
[G]
[F] [E]
[D]
B195D167.WMF
Exposure
The xenon lamp [A] exposes the original. The reflected light is passed to the CCD, where it is converted into analog data, processed, and stored in the memory. The data is retrieved and sent to the laser diode for printing The charge roller [B] gives a negative charge to the organic photoconductive (OPC) drum. The charge remains on the surface of the drum because the OPC layer has a high electrical resistance in the dark.
Drum charge
Laser exposure
Processed data from the scanned original is retrieved from the memory and transferred to the drum by two laser beams [C], which form an electrostatic latent image on the drum surface. The amount of charge remaining as a latent image on the drum depends on the laser beam intensity, controlled by the BICU.
Development
The magnetic developer brush on the development roller [D] contacts the latent image on the drum. Toner particles are electrostatically attracted to the areas of the drum surface where the laser reduced the negative charge on the drum.
SM
6-11
B264/B265
COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW
Image transfer
Paper is fed into the area between the drum surface and the transfer belt [E] at the proper time to align it with the image on the drum. The transfer bias roller applies a high positive charge to the reverse side of the paper through the transfer belt. This positive charge pulls the toner particles from the drum surface onto the paper while the paper is electrostatically attracted to the transfer belt.
Separation
Paper separates from the drum as a result of the electrical attraction between the paper and the transfer belt. Pick-off pawls [F] help separate the paper from the drum.
ID sensor
The ID sensor [G] measures the reflectivity of the pattern formed by the laser on the surface of the drum. This output signal is used for toner supply control and also measures the drum surface reflectivity, which is used for charge roller voltage control.
Cleaning
The drum cleaning blade [H] removes any toner remaining on the drum surface after the image is transferred to the paper.
Quenching
The light from the quenching lamp [I] electrically neutralizes the charge on the drum surface.
Cleaning
The 2nd drum cleaning blade [J] removes any remaining toner.
B264/B265
6-12
SM
SCANNING
6.4 SCANNING
6.4.1 OVERVIEW
11 12 1 2 3 4 5
10
B195D905.WMF
1 Exposure lamp 2 1st Scanner 3 Exposure glass 4 Lens block 5 Scanner drive motor 6 Original length sensor 3
7 Original length sensors 1, 2 8 Original width sensors 9 2nd Scanner 10 Anti-condensation heater (option) 11 Exposure glass (for document feeder) 12 Scanner HP sensor
The original is illuminated by the exposure lamp (a xenon lamp). The image is reflected onto a CCD (charge coupled device) on the lens block via the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd mirrors, and through the lens on the lens block. The 1st scanner consists of the exposure lamp, a reflector, and the 1st mirror.
The exposure lamp is energized by a dc supply to avoid uneven light intensity while the 1st scanner moves in the sub scan direction (down the page). The entire exposure lamp surface is frosted to ensure even exposure in the main scan direction (across the page). The light reflected by the reflector is of almost equal intensity in all directions, to reduce shadows on pasted originals. When the optional optics anti-condensation heater is installed on the left side of the scanner, it turns on whenever the power cord is plugged in.
SM
6-13
B264/B265
SCANNING
6.4.2 SCANNER DRIVE

[E] [D] [C] [A]
[B] [C]
B195D907.WMF
Book Mode
Scanner drive motor [A] and timing belt drive the scanner drive shaft [B]. The drive shaft drives the pulleys attached to the two scanner wires [C] (front and back). The scanner wires move the 1st and 2nd scanners [D] on their rails. The 2nd scanner speed is half that of the 1st scanner. The scanner interface board (SIB) controls the scanner drive motor. In full size mode, the 1st scanner speed is 230 mm/s during scanning. In reduction or enlargement mode, the scanning speed depends on the magnification ratio. The returning speed is always the same, whether in full size or magnification mode. The image length change in the sub scan direction is done by changing the scanner drive motor speed, and in the main scan direction it is done by image processing on the BICU board. NOTE: Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the scanner drive motor speed using SP4-008. ADF mode The scanners are always kept at their home position (the scanner home position sensor [E] detects the 1st scanner) to scan the original. The ADF motor feeds the original through the ADF. In reduction/enlargement mode, the image length change in the sub-scan direction is done by changing the ADF motor speed. Magnification in the main scan direction is done in the BICU board, like for book mode. NOTE: Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the ADF motor speed using SP6-017. In the main scan direction, it can be adjusted with SP2-909, like for book mode.
B264/B265
6-14
SM
SCANNING
6.4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE
[C]
[A]
B195D908.WMF
[B]
The original width sensors [A] detect the original width, and the original length sensors [B] detect the original length. These reflective photo sensors are referred to collectively as the APS (Auto Paper Select) sensors. While the power is on, these sensors are active and the original size data is always sent to the CPU. However, the CPU checks the data only when the platen cover sensor [C] is activated after the platen reaches about 15 cm above the exposure glass as it is closed. The main CPU detects the original size by the on/off signals received from the APS sensors. NOTE: If the copy is made with the platen fully open, the main CPU determines the original size from the sensor outputs after the Start key is pressed.
SM
6-15
B264/B265
SCANNING
L1
L2
L3
W1 W2
B195D909.WMF
Original Size A4/A3 version A3 B4 F4 A4-L B5-L A4-S B5-S A5-L, A5-S LT/DLT version 11 x 17 10 x 14 8.5 x 14 (8 x 13) 8.5 x 11 11 x 8.5 5.5 x 8.5, 8.5 x 5.5
Length Sensor L3 O O O X X X X X L2 O O O O X X X X L1 O O O O O X X X
Width Sensor W2 W1 O O X O X X X X X X O O X O X X
SP4-301 display 00011111 00011101 00011100 00001100 00000100 00000011 00000001 00000000
NOTE: L: Lengthwise, S: Sideways, O: Paper present X: Low For other combinations, "CANNOT DETECT ORIG. SIZE" will be indicated on the operation panel display. The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size. This original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan and increases the machine's productivity. However, if the by-pass tray is used, note that the machine assumes that the copy paper is lengthwise (L). For example, if A4 sideways paper is placed on the bypass tray, the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans a full A3 area, disregarding the original size sensors.
B264/B265
6-16
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5 IMAGE PROCESSING
Drum
LD Driver
LD Controller (GAVD)
FCI
CCD
SBU
SIB SIB
Mother Board
IPU
Controller
HDD
LDDR
BICU
B195D903.WMF
6.5.1 OVERVIEW
SBU: The SBU (Sensor Board Unit) converts the analog signal from the CCD to an 8-bit digital signal and sends it to the SIB. SIB: Relays image signals and controls the scanner. BICU: The BICU (Base Engine Image Control Unit) performs timing control and command control. The IPU on the BICU processes auto shading, filtering, magnification, correction, and gradation. The memory controller performs image compression, decompression, and memory address control (for binary picture processing mode only) LD Unit: Performs dual channel multi-beam exposure, multiple exposure, and synchronous detection. Controller: Performs dual channel multi-beam exposure, multiple exposure, and synchronous detection.
SM
6-17
B264/B265
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.2 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT)

SIB SBU
Serial Driver A/D Converter
BICU
Analog Processing ASIC
CCD
8 bit Serial Data
A/D Converter
IPU
GA
B195D910.WMF
The CCD converts the light reflected from the original into an analog signal. The CCD line has 7200 pixels at a resolution of 600 dpi. The CCD has two output lines to the analog processing ASIC, one for handling odd and one for handling even pixels. The analog processing ASIC performs the following operations on the signals received from the CCD: Z/C (Zero/Clamp): Adjusts the black level for even pixels to match the odd pixels. Signal composition: Analog signals for odd and even pixels from the CCD are merged by a switching device. Signal amplification: The analog signal is amplified by amplifiers in the AGC circuit. The maximum gains of the amplifiers are controlled by the CPU on the BICU board. After the above processing, the analog signals are converted to 8-bit signals by the A/D converter. This gives a value for each pixel on a scale of 256 shades of gray. Then, this data goes to the BICU via the SIB.
B264/B265
6-18
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.3 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY (ADS)

0.5mm
[A]
15mm 75mm
Sub scan direction

B195D911.WMF
This mode prevents the background of an original from appearing on copies. The copier scans the auto image density detection area [A]. This corresponds to a narrow strip at one end of the main scan line, as shown in the diagram. As the scanner scans down the page, the IPU on the BICU detects the peak white level for each scan line, within this narrow strip only. From this peak white level, the IPU determines the reference value for A/D conversion for the scan line. Then, the IPU sends the reference value to the A/D controller on the SBU. When an original with a gray background is scanned, the density of the gray area is the peak white level density. Therefore, the original background will not appear on copies. Because peak level data is taken for each scan line, ADS corrects for any changes in background density down the page. As with previous digital copiers, the user can select manual image density when selecting auto image density mode and the machine will use both settings when processing the original.
SM
6-19
B264/B265
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.4 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT)

Overview
SIB SBU
BICU
Mother Board Controller
IPU
LDDR LD 1 LD 2
LD Driver
FCI GAVD
HDD
B195D906.WMF
The image data from the SBU goes to the IPU (Image Processing Unit) IC on the BICU board, which carries out the following processes on the image data: 1. Auto shading 2. Filtering (MTF and smoothing) 3. Magnification 4. correction 5. Grayscale processing 6. Binary picture processing 7. Error diffusion 8. Dithering 9. Video path control 10. Test pattern generation The image data then goes to the HDD.
B264/B265
6-20
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.5 IMAGE PROCESSING MODES

The user can select one of the following modes with the User Tools screen: Text, Text/Photo, Photo, Pale, Generation. Each of these modes has a range of different settings (e.g. Soft, Normal, Sharp, etc). For each mode, a Custom Setting options is also available. This Custom Setting holds the values selected with the SP modes, which can be adjusted to meet special requirements that cannot be covered by the standard settings. To display this screen, press User Tools/Counter> Copier/Document Server Settings> General Features> Copy Quality.
B195D912.WMF
Mode Text Text/Photo Photo Pale Generation Copy
Function Best reproduction of text and sharp lines. Ignores background texture. ( pg. 6-24) Good reproduction of mixed text and photographs with accurate grayscaling, better than that achieved in the Text mode. ( pg. 6-25) Best possible reproduction of photographs. ( pg.6-26) Reproduction similar to Text mode, but of lower contrast. Ideal for copying thin originals. ( pg.6-27) Attempts to achieve the best reproduction of copied originals, which have faded due to making copies of copies. ( pg.6-28)
SM
6-21
B264/B265
IMAGE PROCESSING
General Image Processing Flow

Signals from SBU Shading Correction Pre- Filter Background Erase Pre-Filter Smoothing Main Scan Magnification
(Text/Photo, Photo)
Processing conducted as required.
Primary Compression, Decompression
Controller HDD
Independent Dot Erase Filtering

(Text, Pale, Generation)
Secondary Compression, Decompression Sent to HDD Video Control Scanner/Printer Application FCU FAX Application
Coefficient Grayscale Processing LD Unit
B264/B265
6-22
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.6 SUMMARY OF IMAGE PROCESSING FUNCTIONS

Shading correction: Compensates for the possible differences in the amount of light at the edges and center of a scanned image caused by the scanner lens, or scatter among pixels of the CCD. Pre-Filter Background erase: Attempts to eliminate the heavy background texture from copies (newspaper print or documents printed on coarse paper). Elements below the selected threshold level are eliminated. Pre-Filter Smoothing: Reproduces halftones while reducing the incidence of moir which can occur as a result of compressing and then decompressing the image. Main scan magnification: Adjusts magnification to the desired level by processing adjusting multiple, adjacent pixels in the direction of main scanning. Adjustment of magnification in the sub scan direction is done by changing the scanning speed. Independent dot erase: Attempts to recognize and eliminate scattered, independent dots in copies. Processes only pixels of high density and eliminates those of low density. Filtering (MTF filter/smoothing): Performs mainly edge enhancement with the MTF filter. Performs smoothing only in the Photo mode. The matrix size of the filter is 9 pixels x 7 lines. Gamma () coefficient: Controls the image density for images processed with grayscaling. Copy density adjustment is achieved with special notch coefficient conversion. The best coefficient suited for the selected mode can be stored and adjusted as needed. Grayscale processing: Performs reproduction of grayscales, using mainly error diffusion. (In the Photo mode, conducts processing with dithering.)
Detailed Descriptions SM 6-23 B264/B265
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.7 IMAGE PROCESSING STEPS AND RELATED SP MODES

Text Mode
The Text mode achieves quality reproduction of text and sharp lines and ignores background texture. Processing is conducted with a high resolution MTF filter; special processing with the coefficient prevents background reproduction and achieves the best reproduction of images with error diffusion. Because the Soft and Normal settings use a weak MTF filter, the quality of the image is improved with the elimination of moir. The Sharp selection uses an MTF filter stronger than that of the Normal setting, thus increasing the sharpness of lines.
Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes
Scanner Image Correction
Shading Correction
Pre-Filter Processing
Background Erase
SP4903 65 (Background Erase Level: Text Mode)
Pre-Filter Smoothing
SP4903 10 (Pre-Filter: Text)
Magnification
Main Scan Direction
SP2909 1 (Main Scan Magnification)
Independent Dot Erase
SP4903 60 (Independent Dot Erase: Text Mode)
Filter Processing
MTF Correction
SP4904 20~23 Text (General Quality) ( 0)
Density Control
Coefficient
Grayscale Processing
Error Diffusion
NOTE: An SP code number and name set in bold italic denotes an SSP (Special Service Program) mode. To access an SSP, enter the SP mode: press and hold down on the 10-key pad then Copy SP on the touch-screen.
B264/B265
6-24
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Text/Photo Mode
Text/Photo mode achieves high quality reproduction of pictures with accurate grayscaling. Processing is conducted with the special coefficient which reproduces a wide range of grayscale. Compared with the Text mode, text reproduced in the Text/Photo mode appears lighter and textured backgrounds could appear on copies, but the incidence of moir is reduced with and edge detection filter. Because Photo Priority uses an MTF filter weaker than that of the Normal setting, the quality of the image is improved with the elimination of moir. The Text Priority selection uses an MTF filter stronger than that of the Normal setting, thus increasing the sharpness of lines.
Shading Correction
Background Erase
SP4903 67 (Background Erase Level: Text/Photo Mode)
SP4903 13 (Pre-Filter: Text/Photo)
Magnification
Main Scan Direction
SP4903 62 (Independent Dot Erase Level)
Filter Processing
MTF Correction
Density Control
Coefficient
Error Diffusion
SM
6-25
B264/B265
SP4904 25~28 Text/Photo (General) Quality ( Text Photo Mode, pg.6-36)
IMAGE PROCESSING
Photo Mode
Photo mode emphasizes grayscale processing to achieve the best possible reproduction of photographs and eliminate moir by using the highest density and coefficient in the reproduction of grayscales and dithering. Print Photo performs smoothing and dithering for photos copied from magazines, newspapers, etc. The Normal selection uses a higher resolution setting and employs error diffusion but does not use smoothing to improve the appearance of text in photographs. Glossy photo paper employs MTF filter processing and error diffusion to copy glossy or matte photographs and achieves a low incidence of moir, thus reproducing copies of photographs of high resolution. For photo mode, the features used depend on which type of greyscale processing has been selected for Photo mode (either dithering and smoothing or error diffusion and MTF); this depends on the setting of SP 4904 001. Details are explained later in this section.
Shading Correction
Background Erase
SP4903 66 (Background Erase Level: Photo Mode)
SP4903 12 (Pre-Filter: Photo Mode)
Magnification
Main Scan Direction
Filter Processing
Smoothing/MTF Correction
SP4904 024 Photo (General Quality) ( pg. 6-35)
Density Control
Coefficient
Dither/Error Diffusion
SP4904 2 (Quality Photo Mode)
B264/B265
6-26
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Pale (Low-Density Mode)

Pale achieves image quality comparable with Text mode, but of lower contrast. Pale employs an MTF filter stronger than that employed by the Text mode and uses a darker coefficient, thus increasing the incidence of copying textured backgrounds. Ideal for copying extremely thin originals. Soft employs an MTF filter weaker than Normal, thus achieving a softer image with less moir. Sharp employs an MTF filter stronger than that of Normal, thus increasing the sharpness of lines.
Shading Correction
Background Erase
SP4903 68 (Background Erase Level: Light Original)
SP4903 15 (Pre-Filter: Light)
Magnification
Main Scan Direction
SP4903 63 (Independent Dot Erase: Light Original)
Filter Processing
MTF Correction
SP4904 29 Pale (General) Quality ( pg. 6-37)
Density Control
Coefficient
Error Diffusion
SM
6-27
B264/B265
IMAGE PROCESSING
Generation Copy Mode

Generation Copy, based mainly on Text mode, aims to achieve the best reproduction of copied originals (so called generation copies or copies of copies). This mode 1) employs an MTF filter weaker than that of the Text mode to eliminate spurious dots, 2) uses the coefficient to smooth the image, and 3) uses generation processing to thicken thin lines. Soft employs an MTF filter weaker than the Normal setting to achieve a softer image with less moir. Sharp employs an MTF filter stronger than that for Normal to emphasize lines for better image quality.
Shading Correction
Background Erase
SP44903 69 (Background Erase Level: Generation Copy)
SP4903 16 (Pre-Filter: Generation Copy)
Magnification
Main Scan Direction
SP4903 64 (Independent Dot Erase: Generation Copy)
Generation Mode
SP4903 75 ~ 77 (Line Width Correction: Generation Copy)
Filter Processing
MTF Correction
SP4904 30 Generation (General) Quality ( pg. 6-37)
Density Control
Coefficient
Error Diffusion
B264/B265
6-28
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.8 PRE-FILTERING
SP mode settings 4903 10 ~ 15 select pre-filters by changing the filter coefficient settings.
Original Mode Text Photo Text/Photo Pale Generation Range SP No. SP4903 10 SP4903 12 SP4903 13 SP4903 15 SP4903 16 0~9 Default 0 0 0 0 0 Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Mag. 25% ~ 400% 25% ~ 50% 25% ~ 50% 25% ~ 50% 25% ~ 99% 25% ~ 99% 25% ~ 99% 25% ~ 400% 25% ~ 400% 25% ~ 400% Smoothing OFF Weak Medium Strong Weak Medium Strong Weak Medium Strong
NOTE: An SP code number and name set in bold italic denotes an SSP (Special Service Program) mode. To access an SSP, enter the SP mode: press and hold down on the 10-key pad then Copy SP on the touch-screen. These SP mode settings are provided to reduce the incidence of moir in the reproduction of images whose data signals have been compressed in the direction of the main scan. However, these SP adjustments can cause different effects in the reproduction of images depending on: Whether they contain areas shaded with dot screening (newspaper, magazine photos) Their reduction ratios. These adjustments can also cause blurring in the reproduction of images that contain: Low density dots Low contrast text characters Fine lines While filter processing is provided to reduce the incidence of moir generated from digital signals, you must always pay attention to how these adjustments affect text characters and fine lines.
SM
6-29
B264/B265
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.9 BACKGROUND ERASE

SP4903 65 ~ 69 cut the background from around images scanned from an original of rough texture such as a newspaper or parchment. The larger the setting done for this SP, the more background drops out from behind the image or text. This SP mode setting for image processing executes separately from the ADS (Auto Image Density) function that is performed in the SBU to set the peak white level for scanning to eliminate background. For example, if this SP is set for 20, then the scanning data up to 20 is set to 0 and cut from the image. The range for this SP code adjustment is 0 ~ 255. The recommended range for a normal document is 0 ~ 60. An official document on rough texture paper would fall in the recommended range of 120 ~ 160. The correct setting for any original will vary with the texture and quality of the background, but remember that selecting a higher numbers for this setting will eventually lower the quality of the document or cause unexpected results.
Mode Text Photo Text/Photo Pale Generation Copy
255
INPUT
0 20 255
B195D913.WMF
Background Erase Filter SP4903 65 SP4903 66 SP4903 67 SP4903 68 SP4903 69
Default 0 0 0 0 0
Range
0 ~ 255
NOTE: The 0 setting switches off the background erase filter.
B264/B265
6-30
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.10 INDEPENDENT DOT ERASE

Independent dot erase (set with the SP mode settings listed in the table below) remains in effect even when a Custom Setting is selected with the User Tools. Independent dot erase targets for elimination random, irregular shaped black dots on the surface of the original that would otherwise appear in the copy after scanning and printing. The strength of the application of this feature can be adjusted for each mode. The filter compares each pixel with the pixels around an area 7 pixels x 7 lines. If the sum of the pixels at the edges is smaller than the threshold value, the object pixel is changed to zero (white), depending on the strength of the SP mode setting. Setting a larger setting increases the number of dots erased, but if set too high, this SP can also remove small or fine text characters or even portions of large text characters.
Mode Text Text/Photo Pale Generation Copy Independent Dot Erase Filter SP4903 60 SP4903 62 SP4903 63 SP4903 64 Default 5 0 0 8 Range 0 ~ 15
NOTE: The 0 setting switches off the filter.
SM
6-31
B264/B265
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.11 LINE WIDTH CORRECTION

This section describes how to select a setting for line width correction (LWC) for the Generation Copy mode. LWC (Line Width Correction) can make lines thicker or thinner in generation copies. SP4903 75 LWC: Generation Mode
Setting 0 1 2 3 Effect No correction Lighter lines Darker lines (Default) Thick lines
SP4903 75 adjusts the thickness of lines in faint generation copies. Specifically, this adjustment affects the lines targeted for adjustment by: SP4903 76 (LWC Threshold (Main Scan): Generation Mode). Targets main scan, lines parallel to the direction of feed [A]. SP4903 77 LWC Threshold (Sub Scan): Generation Mode). Targets sub scan, lines at right angles to the direction of feed [B]. For sharp thin lines, set SP4903 75 for a higher LWC setting, and for softer lines set a lower setting. For thick lines, select 3. Scan Direction To thin (or thicken) lines in the main scan B195D914.WMF direction, select an SP4903 75 setting larger (or smaller) than the setting for SP4903 76 To thin (or thicken) lines in the sub scan direction select an SP4903 75 setting larger (or smaller) than the setting for SP4903 77. However, remember that too large a setting can cause unexpected results in copied images.
SP Mode SP4903 76 LWC Threshold (Main Scan): Generation Mode SP4903 77 LWC Threshold (Sub Scan): Generation Mode Default 1 1 Range 0~5
[A]
[B]
B264/B265
6-32
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.12 FILTERING
Interactive SP Codes Overview
The tables in this section are for quick reference. For details about how each SP code operates and interacts with other SP settings, please refer to the sections that follow. Many of the SP codes used for image processing adjustments are interactive in that they exist as master and slave SPs. Use the master SP codes for gross adjustment. If you need to fine adjust a master setting, set the master setting to 0 to access its slave SP codes. NOTE: In the tables below, the master SP codes are set in bold type. The slave SP codes are indented and set in normal type. Keep the following points in mind while you are using these SP codes: The slave SP codes cannot be accessed until the master SP is set to 0. For the slave SP code settings to take effect, the master SP code must remain set to 0. If the master SP code is reset to any value other than 0, then the slave SP codes are disabled and their adjustments have no effect on image processing. If a master SP code is provided with both a Strength and Level (coefficient) adjustment, adjust the Strength setting first to achieve the approximate effect that you want, then do the Level adjustment.
SM
6-33
B264/B265
IMAGE PROCESSING
Text Mode
Adjust the image for the Text mode with the four master settings within their allowed ranges (for ranges see Section 5. Service Tables. To fine adjust a master setting set it to 0 then perform the adjustments listed below.
SP4904 020 = 0 SP4903 020 SP4903 021 SP4903 022 SP4903 023 SP4904 021 = 0 SP4903 024 SP4903 025 SP4903 026 SP4903 027 SP4904 022 = 0 SP4903 028 SP4903 029 SP4903 030 SP4903 031 SP4904 023 = 0 SP4903 032 SP4903 033 SP4903 034 SP4903 035 Text (General) Quality 25-64% Main Scan Filter Level: Text 25%-64% Sub Scan Filter Level: Text 25%-64% Main Scan Filter Strength: Text 25%-64% Sub Scan Filter Strength: Text 25%-64% Text (General) Quality 65-154% Main Scan Filter Level: Text 65%-154% Sub Scan Filter Level: Text 65%-154% Main Scan Filter Strength: Text 65%-154% Sub Scan Filter Strength: Text 65%-154% Text (General) Quality 155-256% Main Scan Filter Level: Text 155%-256% Sub Scan Filter Level: Text 155%-256% Main Scan Filter Strength: Text 155%-256% Sub Scan Filter Strength: Text 155%-256% Text (General) Quality 257%-400% Main Scan Filter Level: Text 257%-400% Sub Scan Filter Level: Text 257%-400% Main Scan Filter Strength: Text 257%-400% Sub Scan Filter Strength: Text 257%-400%
B264/B265
6-34
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Photo Mode
Dithering or Error Diffusion for Photo Mode Use SP4904 001 to select either dithering or error diffusion to process image fills and halftones. 0: 1: Selects the dithering and smoothing filter. Selects the error diffusion and MTF filter.
Photo Mode Dithering: SP4904 001 = 0 If you select 0 for SP4904 001 to enable dithering halftones, only one SP code is available for fine adjusting dithering.
SP4903 037 Smoothing Filter in Photo Mode
Photo Mode Error Diffusion: SP4904 001 = 1 If you select 1 for SP4904 001 to enable error diffusion, all the SP codes in the Mode tables below (Text Mode, Text/Photo Mode, etc.) are available for adjustment. Use the master SP codes gross adjustment of the image processing mode after you have set SP4904 001 = 1 for error diffusion. If you need to fine adjust a master setting, set the master setting to 0 to access its slave SP codes. Adjust the image for the Photo mode with the one master setting within its allowed range (for the range, see Section 5. Service Tables). To fine adjust the master setting set it to 0 then perform the adjustments listed below.
SP4904 024 = 0 SP4903 036 SP4903 038 SP4903 091 SP4903 092 SP4903 093 SP4904 013 Photo (General Quality) Photo MTF (Edge) Photo MTF (All) Filter Strength: Photo (Edge) Filter Adj.: Photo (Edge Det.) Filter Adj.: Photo (Mag.%) Halftone Adjustment: Edge Detection
SM
6-35
B264/B265
IMAGE PROCESSING
Text/Photo Mode
Adjust the image for the Text/Photo mode with the four master settings within their allowed ranges (for ranges, see Section 5. Service Tables). To fine adjust a master setting set it to 0 then perform the adjustments listed below.
SP4904 025 = 0 SP4903 039 SP4903 040 SP4903 079 SP4903 080 SP4903 081 SP4904 008 SP4904 026 = 0 SP4903 043 SP4903 044 SP4903 082 SP4903 083 SP4903 084 SP4904 009 SP4904 027 = 0 SP4903 047 SP4903 048 SP4903 085 SP4903 086 SP4903 087 SP4904 010 SP4904 028 = 0 SP4903 051 SP4903 052 SP4903 088 SP4903 089 SP4903 090 SP4904 011 Text/Photo (General) Quality 25%-64% Text/Photo (Edge) Coefficient 25%-64% Text/Photo (All) Coefficient 25%-64% Filter Strength: Text/Photo (Edge) 25%-64% Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 25%-64% Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Mag.%) 25%-64% Gray Adj: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 25-64% Text/Photo (General) Quality 65%-154% Text/Photo (Edge) Coefficient 65%-154% Text/Photo (All) Coefficient 65%-154% Filter Strength: Text/Photo (Edge) 65%-154% Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 65-154% Filter Adj. Text/Photo (Mag.%) 65%-154% Gray Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 65-154% Text/Photo (General Quality) 155%-256% Text/Photo (Edge) Coefficient 155%-256% Text/Photo (All) Coefficient 155%-256% Filter Strength: Text/Photo (Edge) 155%-256% Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 155%-256% Filter Adj.; Text/Photo (Mag.%) 155%-256% Gray Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 155-256% Text/Photo (General) Quality 257%-400% Text/Photo (Edge) Coefficient 257%-400% Text/Photo (All) Coefficient 257%-400% Filter Strength: Text/Photo (Edge) 257%-400% Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 257%-400% Filter Adj.: Text/Photo (Mag.%) 257%-400% Gray Adj.: Text/Photo (Edge Det.) 257-400%
NOTE: An SP code number and name set in bold italic denotes an SSP (Special Service Program) mode. To access an SSP, enter the SP mode: press and hold down on the 10-key pad then Copy SP on the touch-screen. Also, SP4904 007 adjusts the error diffusion process that is used in text/photo mode. Gray adjustment: At areas defined as edges, error diffusion is done on text to create sharp lines to better define text characters, but in other areas, grayscale processing for photographs is done. Select a lower setting for better reproduction of photographs and a higher setting for sharper text. For details, refer to the SP table.
B264/B265
6-36
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Pale Mode
Adjust the image for the Pale mode with the one master setting within its allowed range (for range see Section 5. Service Tables. To fine adjust the master setting set it to 0 then perform the adjustments listed below.
SP4904 029 = 0 SP4903 055 SP4903 056 Pale (General) Quality Filter Level: Light Original Filter Strength: Light Original

Adjust the image for the Generation Copy mode with the one master setting within its allowed range (for range see Section 5. Service Tables. To fine adjust the master setting set it to 0 then perform the adjustments listed below.
SP4904 030 = 0 SP4903 057 SP4903 058 Generation (General) Quality Filter Level: Generation Copy Filter Strength: Generation Copy
SM
6-37
B264/B265
IMAGE PROCESSING
Text Mode MTF Filter

This section describes how to select the MTF filter coefficient and filter strength for the Text mode. You can use the SP mode settings listed in the table below to adjust these items for scanning in Text mode: MTF filter coefficient for the main scan and sub scan MTF filter strength for the main scan and sub scan
Text Mode (Mag.) 25% ~ 64% 65% ~ 154% 155% ~ 256% 257% ~ 400% Ranges Coefficient Main Scan . Sub Scan . SP4903 20 SP4903 21 SP4903 24 SP4903 25 SP4903 28 SP4903 29 SP4903 32 SP4903 33 0 ~ 15 0 ~ 13 Strength Main Scan . Sub Scan . SP4903 22 SP4903 23 SP4903 26 SP4903 27 SP4903 30 SP4903 31 SP4903 34 SP4903 35 0~7 0~7
Strengthening the MTF filter sharpens the edges of text characters and improves the appearance of low contrast text but can also cause moir to appear in photos on the same original. Conversely, weakening the MTF filter softens the edges of text characters and reduces the occurrence of moir but low contrast characters may fade. Strengthen or weaken the MTF filter for the Text mode only when necessary. Adjustment of the MTF filter coefficient performs very fine level adjustment of the applied strength of the MTF filter. Adjustment of the MTF filter strength greatly affects the rate of the change applied to the image. Basically, you should first adjust the MTF filter strength in 1 step increments without adjusting the coefficient to achieve nearly the effect you want, and then use the coefficient settings for fine adjustment. Coefficient and strength adjustments for main scan affect lines parallel to the direction of scanning [A]. Coefficient and strength adjustments for sub scan affect lines at right angles to the direction of scanning [B].
Scan Direction
B195D916.WMF
[A]
[B]
B264/B265
6-38
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Text/Photo, Photo Mode Filter

SP mode settings listed in Columns 2~4 below adjust the clarity of originals that contain text, thin lines, and photos; the SP codes of Columns 5~6 are intended to adjust the clarity of originals with text and thin lines or only photos. The photo mode settings are only valid if SP 4904 001 is set to 1.
Mode, Mag. Text/Photo 25 ~ 64% Text/Photo 65 ~ 154% Text/Photo 155 ~ 256% Text/Photo 257 ~ 400% Photo (Error Diffusion) Ranges Filter Setting: Edge SP4903 39 SP4903 43 SP4903 47 SP4903 51 SP4903 36 0~7 Filter Setting: All SP4903 40 SP4903 44 SP4903 48 SP4903 52 SP4903 38 0~7 Filter Strength: Edge SP4903 79 SP4903 82 SP4903 85 SP4903 88 SP4903 91 0~3 Filter Adj.: Edge Det. SP4903 80 SP4903 83 SP4903 86 SP4903 89 SP4903 92 0~15 Filter Adj.: Mag. SP4903 81 SP4903 84 SP4903 87 SP4903 90 SP4903 93 0~15
NOTE: An SP code number and name set in bold italic denotes an SSP (Special Service Program) mode. To access an SSP, enter the SP mode: press and hold down on the 10-key pad then Copy SP on the touch-screen. Filter Setting: Edge (Column 2): Provides filter processing of edges to improve the clarity of originals that contain text and lines. Selecting a larger value sharpens the clarity. However, increasing the value also increases the possibility of producing moir in the image. Filter Setting: All (Column 3): Provides filter processing for the overall image, not to improve just text, lines, or photographs, but to improve the image as a whole. This filter coefficient reduces the incidence of moir in images that contain shaded areas created with dots. Increasing the value improves reproduction of low contrast text and lines. However, increasing the value also increases the possibility of producing moir in the image. Filter Strength: Edge (Column 4): Aims to increase the strength of the Filter Setting: Edge effect that processes edges to improve the clarity of originals that contain text and lines. Increasing this setting not only increases the strength of the effect and creates thicker text characters and lines, but can also cause moir to appear in the image. On the other hand, decreasing this setting lessens the effect, creating thinner characters and lines and also reduces the incidence of moir. Filter Adj.: Edge Detection (Column 5): Broadens the range of the effect of the Filter Setting Edge SP. Lowering this setting broadens the range for edge filter processing and increases clarity. Also, using this SP together with Filter Adj. Mag. below can sharpen edges to an extent that an abnormal looking image is created.
SM
6-39
B264/B265
IMAGE PROCESSING
Filter Adj.: Magnification (Column 6): Allows gradual adjustment of clarity in original images that contain varying degrees of clarity between text and lines, or between areas of the same image. Increasing these settings in large increments could easily cause moir to appear in the images. These settings should always be changed in small increments. Follow these general rules with these settings: Increasing the settings dramatically increases clarity but can also increase the incidence of moir. Reducing the settings produces a smoother image, reduces the incidence of moir, but also reduces the effect of the filters. Adjusting the Filter Adj. Mag. SPs in combination with other settings can even produce abnormal images. Also, SP4904 007 adjusts the error diffusion process that is used in text/photo mode.
Pale, Generation Mode Filter

The SP mode settings listed in the table below are used to adjust MTF filter coefficient and strength for the Pale mode and Generation Copy modes.
Mode Pale Mode Generation Copy Ranges Coefficient SP4903 55 SP4903 57 0~6 Strength SP4903 56 SP4903 58 0~7
Strengthening the MTF filter sharpens the edges of text characters and improves the appearance of low contrast text but can also cause moir to appear in photos on the same original. Conversely, weakening the MTF filter softens the edges of text characters and reduces the occurrence of moir but low contrast characters may fade. Strengthen or weaken the MTF filter for the Text mode only when necessary. Adjustment of the MTF filter coefficient performs very fine level adjustment of the applied strength of the MTF filter. Adjustment of the MTF filter strength greatly affects the rate of the change applied to the image. Basically, you should first just the MTF filter strength in 1 step increments without adjusting the coefficient to achieve the effect you want, and then use the coefficient settings for fine adjustment.
B264/B265
6-40
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Photo Mode Smoothing for Dithering

Strengthening this SP4903 37 (Smoothing Filter in Photo Mode) makes images smoother and reduces the occurrence of moir but can also cause fading. Strengthen this setting only when necessary. Only valid if SP 4901 001 is at 0.
Smoothing Coefficient SP4903 37 (Smoothing Filter in Photo Mode) Range 0~7
Photo Mode Grayscale

This SP mode adjustment sets how grayscales are processed when the user selects Photo mode on the operation panel. SP4904 1 Grayscale Photo Mode
Setting 0 1 Description Dithering and smoothing Error diffusion, MTF filter correction for edges
If 0 is selected, the image grayscales are processed with dithering and filter processing, just as they are processed with the Print Photo selection on the operation panel. In this case the filter processing means smoothing only. The filter coefficient for smoothing can be adjusted with SP4904 37 (Smoothing Filter in Photo Mode). If 1 is selected, then the image grayscales are processed with error diffusion processing, just as they are processed with the Normal and Glossy Photo settings on the operation panel. The MTF filter applied is the same as that applied for the Normal setting. To achieve better photo image quality with slightly less clarity in lines and text, select 0 for dithering. You can also adjust SP4904 2 to achieve better reproduction of photographs. On the other hand, to achieve better clarity in text and lines, with a slight sacrifice in the quality grayscale and smoothness in photographs, select 1 for error diffusion. To improve the clarity of fine lines and text, you can also increase the strength of the MTF filter. However, increasing the strength of the filter can also increase the incidence of moir in areas of newspaper, magazine, or other photographs created with dot screening.
SM
6-41
B264/B265
IMAGE PROCESSING
Photo Mode Image Quality

This section describes how to select a setting to improve image quality in the Photo mode with dithering in order to create an extremely smooth photo image. Generally, a larger dithering matrix uses rougher dither pattern to reproduce a smoother gray image, but lowering the resolution can make text and lines more difficult to see. Conversely, a smaller dithering matrix uses a finer dithering pattern to reproduce a gray image of rougher texture, but raising the resolution can make text and lines easier to see. SP4904 002 Quality Photo Mode
Setting 0 1 2 3 Dither Pattern 8 x 8 (75 lines) 8 x 8 (106 lines) 6 x 6 (142 lines) 4 x 4 (212 lines) Picture Quality High Highest Medium Low Text Quality Low Low Medium High Processing Priority Dot screen areas Filled areas (highest priority) Default Filled areas Resolution
For these dither adjustments to take effect, SP4904 1 (Grayscale Photo Mode) must be set to 0 to enable dithering. Here are some general rules: If your main concern is reproducing legible text, use the smaller matrixes, but a smaller matrix could cause spurious lines to appear in images. When using the smallest matrix with setting 3 (4 x 4), you should switch off the smoothing filter for the Photo mode by setting SP4903 37 to 0. Use the largest dither matrix (setting 0) for originals that contain dot screening such as newspaper and magazine photographs.
B264/B265
6-42
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.13 OTHERS
Vertical Black Line Correction
This section describes how to select a setting to correct vertical black lines. SP4904 5 (Special Text Density) adjusts the overall intensity of the image to eliminate vertical black lines in originals caused by documents scanned on a copy machine with dirty optics.
SP Mode SP4904 5 Special Text Density Default 0 Range 0~7
Normally, the default setting (0) leaves this feature switched off. Select a higher setting to increase the effect or a lower setting to decrease the effect. High density vertical black lines may require a higher setting, but a higher setting could cause the overall density of the copy to lower, or could cause low density areas to drop out completely. NOTE: Generally, this SP code corrects most low density vertical black lines but may not be able to correct extremely dark or wide black lines.
Density Settings
This section describes how to adjust the density settings for the Pale mode Generation Copy mode, and Text mode. SP4904 3 is used to switch the density characteristics to binary digital processing for black and white originals to achieve better balance between text and images, correct shadows that appear around text in handwritten documents, to enhance documents written in pencil, or to achieve stark contrast when copying blueprints, building plans, etc.
Settings 0 1 Density Characteristics Selects normal density (Default). Digitizes to near binary image. Detailed Descriptions B264/B265
SP4903 3 Density Setting for Low Density Original Mode
SP4904 4 is used to switch between normal density and better reproduction of areas with graduated fill in originals copied in the Generation Copy mode. To improve the appearance of graduated fill areas of high density, set to 1 so the process can ignore black and more accurately reproduce areas with graduated fill. For example, the 1 setting is ideal for copying Generation Copy originals of medical charts that contain images of internal organs.
SM
6-43
IMAGE PROCESSING
SP4904 4 Density Setting for Copied Original Mode

Settings 0 1 Density Characteristics Selects normal density (Default) for Generation Copy originals. Produces better gradation in fill areas of high density.
If 1 is selected for SP4904, the following SP mode settings may also need adjustment.
SP No. SP4903 57 SP4903 58 SP4903 64 SP4903 69 SP4903 75 Function Filter Level: Generation Copy Filter Strength: Generation Copy Independent Dot Erase: Generation Copy Background Erase Level: Generation Copy Line Width Correction: Generation Mode Recommended Setting 4 (or change as required) 2 (or change as required) 0 (OFF) 0 OFF 0 (LWC OFF)
ADS Level
This section shows you how to adjust the center notch for the ADS (Automatic Density Setting) level. The notches are not displayed during ADS adjustment. Of 7 steps (notches) the center notch is 4. This is the value adjusted with this SP code. SP5106 6 (ADS Level Selection) selects the image density used in ADS mode. For example, if you set SP5106 66 to 2, pressing the Auto Image Density key toggles the display off and manual notch 2 is selected. This SP code is adjusted, if the customer cannot attain clean copies after performing automatic density adjustment. This mode prevents the background of an original from appearing on copies. The copier scans the auto image density detection area, a narrow strip at one end of the main scan line. As the scanner scans down the page, the IPU on the BICU detects the peak white level for each scan line in this narrow strip only. The IPU uses this peak white level as a reference value for analog-to-digital conversion of the scan line, then the IPU sends the reference value to the A/D controller on the SBU. When an original with a gray background is scanned, for example, the density of the gray area becomes the peak white level density, so the original background will not appear on copies. Because peak level data is taken for each scan line, ADS corrects for any changes in background density down the page. As with previous digital copiers, the user can select manual image density when selecting auto image density mode and the machine will use both settings when processing the original.
B264/B265
6-44
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.14 PRACTICAL APPLICATION OF SP MODES

Solving Problems
This section describes some common problems that can be solved with SP code adjustments. This table lists the recommended settings; fine adjustments may be required for the actual type of originals that the customer is copying. NOTE: To do the settings in the table below, first you must set the Master SP code to 0. ( FILTERING, 6-23~6-31)
Job Eliminate blue lines from graph paper, or erase shadows caused by originals that have been pasted up for layout. User Tool Lighten the image density for Text mode. Select Soft for Text mode (User Tools). Custom Setting Adjustment Increase the setting of SP4903 60 (Independent Dot Erase) to about 6 ~ 10. Increase the setting of SP4903 65 (Background Erase) to about 20 ~ 60. Increase the setting of SP4903 60 (Independent Dot Erase) to about 10 ~ 15. Increase the setting of SP4903 65 (Background Erase) to about 120 ~ 160.
Eliminate orange or other color backgrounds from official documents.
Reproduce blue lines of graph paper.
De-emphasize fine lines in jagged valleys and reduce the occurrence of moir.
Darken the image density for Text/Photo mode. Select Sharp for the Text/Photo mode (User Tools). Select Soft for Text mode (User Tools).
Reduce the occurrence of moir when reducing the size of the original for copying.
Select Soft for Text mode (User Tools).
Reproduce areas of graduated fill in high density originals in Photo mode. Sharpen text in Photo mode.
Select Glossy Photo for Photo mode (User Tools). Select Normal or Glossy Photo for Photo mode (User Tools).
Improve the appearance of originals handwritten with pencil, or make lighter copies of color originals (invoices and other commonly used business forms)
Select Sharp for Pale mode (User Tools). Select Sharp for Text mode (User Tools).
Set SP4904 1 to 1 to enable error diffusion. Strengthen the settings for the Photo mode MTF filters coefficients: SP4903 36: Select 3 SP4903 38: Select 1 Strengthen the MTF filters for Pale mode: SP4903 55: Select 3 SP4903 56: Select 4 Strengthen the MTF filters for Text mode: SP4903 24: Set to 9. SP4903 25: Set to 13. SP4903 26: Set to 3. SP4903 27: Set to 3.
SM
6-45
B264/B265
Weaken the MTF filters for Text mode: SP4903 24, Main Scan: 9 SP4903 25, Sub Scan: 13 SP4903 26, Main Scan: 2 SP4903 27, Sub Scan: 2 Weaken the MTF filters for Text mode reduction: SP4903 20, Main Scan: 14 SP4903 21, Sub Scan: 13 SP4903 22, Main Scan: 1 SP4903 23, Sub Scan: 1
IMAGE PROCESSING
Recommended Settings for MTF Filters Text Mode

Text Mode Filter Setting (25% ~ 64%)
MTF Strength Default Settings: SP4903 20 Main Filter Level: Text SP4903 21 Sub Filter Level: Text SP4903 22 Main Filter Strength SP4903 23 Sub Filter Strength: Text Strong 15 13 2 2 14 13 2 2
Sharp
Default
Normal
Soft
Weak 10 13 1 1 9 10 1 1
12 12 2 2
10 12 2 2
9 13 2 2
9 10 2 2
14 13 1 1
Text Mode Filter Setting (65% ~ 154%)

MTF Strength Default Settings: SP4903 24 Main Filter Level SP4903 25 Sub Filter Level SP4903 26 Main Filter Strength SP4903 26 Sub Filter Strength Strong
Sharp
9 11 3 3 15 13 2 2 14 13 2 2
Default
Normal
Soft
Weak 14 13 1 1 11 13 1 1
9 13 3 3
12 13 2 2
10 13 2 2
9 13 2 2
Text Mode (155% ~ 256%)

MTF Strength Default Settings: SP4903 28 Main Filter Level SP4903 29 Sub Filter Level SP4903 30 Main Filter Strength SP4903 31 Sub Filter Strength Strong 11 13 3 3 10 13 3 3
Sharp
Default
Normal
Soft
Weak 9 13 2 2 9 10 2 2
9 13 3 3
9 10 3 3
14 13 2 2
12 13 2 2
10 13 2 2
Text Mode (257% ~ 400%)

MTF Strength Default Settings: SP4903 32 Main Filter Level SP4903 33 Sub Filter Level SP4903 34 Main Filter Strength SP4903 35 Sub Filter Strength Strong 12 13 3 3 11 13 3 3
Sharp
Default
Normal
Soft
Weak 10 13 2 2 9 13 2 2
10 13 3 3
9 13 3 3
15 13 2 2
14 13 2 2
12 13 2 2
B264/B265
6-46
SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Pale Mode
MTF Strength Default Settings: SP4903 55 Filter Level: Light Original SP4903 56 Filter Strength: Light Original Strong
Sharp
4 4 3 4 2 4
Default
Normal
Soft
Weak 2 3 6 2
5 4
6 3
4 3
3 3

MTF Strength Default Settings: SP4903 57 Filter Level: Generation Copy SP4903 58 Filter Strength: Generation Copy Strong
Sharp
6 2 5 2 4 2
Default
Normal
Soft
Weak 5 1 4 1
2 2
3 2
2 2
6 1
SM
6-47
B264/B265
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6 LASER EXPOSURE

6.6.1 OVERVIEW
5 4 6 7 8
1 1 LD unit 2 Cylindrical lens 3 Polygonal mirror 4 Shield glass 5 Mirror
B195D917.WMF
6 Synchronization detector 7 BTL (Barrel Toroidal Lens) 8 F-theta mirror 9 Toner shield glass
This machine uses two laser diodes to produce electrostatic images on an OPC drum. The laser diode unit converts image data from the BICU board into laser pulses, and the optical components direct these pulses to the drum. To produce a high quality copy image, these are 256 gradations for the laser power. The output path from the laser diode to the drum is shown above. The LD unit outputs two laser beams to the polygon mirror through the cylindrical lens and the shield glass. Each surface of the polygon mirror reflects two full main scan lines. The laser beams go to the F-theta mirror, mirror, and BTL (barrel toroidal lens). Then these laser beams go to the drum through the toner shield glass. The laser synchronization detector determines the main scan starting position. NOTE: The front door and upper right door (transfer door) are equipped with safety switches that automatically shut down the laser unit when either door is opened.
B264/B265
6-48
SM
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.2 AUTO POWER CONTROL (APC)

The LD driver on the LDDR drives the laser diode. Even if a constant electric current is applied to the laser diode, the intensity of the output light changes with the temperature. The intensity of the output decreases as the temperature increases. In order to keep the output level constant, the LDDR monitors the electrical current passing through the photodiode (PD). Then it increases or decreases the current to the laser diode as necessary, comparing it with the reference level. This auto power control is done just after the machine is turned on and during printing while the laser diode is active. The reference levels are adjusted on the production line. Do not touch the variable resistors on the LDDR in the field.
SM
6-49
B264/B265
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.3 DUAL BEAM WRITING

This LD unit employs two laser diodes [A] (LD) and [B] (L2). Each face of the polygon mirror writes two main scan lines, and twelve main scans are [A] produced when the polygon mirror rotates once. This reduces polygon motor rotation speed, reduces noise generated by the polygon motor, and reduces the frequency of the image data clock. The two laser beams follow the path: collimating lenses [C] prism [D] polygon mirror [E] [B]
[C] [D] [E]
B195D918.WMF
2 mm
P1
P2
P1: 400 dpi P2: 600 dpi
B195D919.WMF
The two laser beams arrive on the drum surface about 2 mm apart in the main scan direction and about 0.06 mm apart (at 400 dpi) in the sub scan direction. The two-mm difference in the main scan direction allows the machine to detect the laser synchronization signal for each beam.
B264/B265
6-50
SM
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.4 LASER BEAM PITCH CHANGE MECHANISM

[C]
[B]
[A]
B195D543.WMF
The LD positioning motor [A] moves the LD unit housing [B] up and down and changes the position of L2 (L1 does not move). Both LD unit positions are at fixed distances from the LD unit home position sensor [C].
Usually, the LD unit moves directly to the proper position. However, when the number of times that the resolution has changed reaches the value of SP2-109-5 (Auto Pitch Adjustment Interval), the LD unit moves to the home position, and this re-calibrates the LD unit positioning mechanism.
SM
6-51
B264/B265
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCHES
BICU
CN312-15,4,2
LDDR
CN402-1,4,14 +5V CN403-1
Upper Right Cover Switch
LD5V CN301-10 LD2 LD1
CN403-3 Front Cover Safety Switch
PSU
CN109-8 +5V
B195D930.WMF
To ensure personal safety and to prevent the laser beam from inadvertently switching on during servicing, power to the laser diode is switched off when the front cover or upper right cover is opened. Four safety switches are installed in series on the LD5 V line from the power supply unit (PSU) via the BICU board.
B264/B265
6-52
SM
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)

6.7.1 OVERVIEW
1 11 2 3
10 9 8 7 5 4
6
B195D931.WMF
1. Toner Collection Coil 2. Toner Collection Plate 3. Image Density Sensor 4. Pick off Pawl 5. OPC Drum (60 mm) 6. Transfer Entrance Guide
7. Charge Roller 8. Charge Roller Cleaning Roller 9. Drum Cleaning Blade 2 11. Drum Cleaning Blade 1
Detailed Descriptions B264/B265
10. Quenching Lamp
SM
6-53
6.7.2 DRUM CLEANING

[B] [A]
B195D932.WMF
The PxP (Polyester Polymerization) toner of this machine is of much finer particle size so in addition to the stationary cleaning blade, mounted with two screws at the bottom of the PCU, an additional cleaning blade [A] has been added to increase the efficiency of drum cleaning. The new cleaning blade is held in contact with the drum by two small springs [B] (one on each end) that keep the cleaning blade in contact with the drum. This cleaning blade is not a counter blade. The tension of these springs has been reduced for this model in order to reduce the amount of pressure applied by the blade against the drum. Every time the PCU is opened for replacement or cleaning, the spring closest to the front of the PCU must moved in order to retract the cleaning blade away from the OPC drum. After cleaning or replacement, the spring must be returned to its original position to keep the blade in contact with the OPC drum for normal operation. For details, see Section 3 Replacement and Adjustment.
B264/B265
6-54
SM
6.7.3 DRIVE MECHANISM

The drive from the main motor [A] is transmitted to the drum [B] through a series of gears, a timing belt [C], and the drum drive shaft [D]. The main motor has a drive controller, which outputs a motor lock signal when the rotation speed is out of the specified range. The flywheel [E] on the end of the drum drive shaft stabilizes the rotation speed (this prevents banding and jitter on copies).
[A] [C] [B] [E]
[D]
B195D933.WMF
6.7.4 DRUM PAWLS

The pick-off pawls [A], mounted in the holders [B] on the drum and in contact with the drum, strip the paper from the drum if it has not yet separated. The gears [C] are removable, and the positions of the holders can be adjusted.
[A]
[B] [C]
B195D934.WMF
6.7.5 DRUM TONER SEALS

Seals have been added to the structure of the PCU (photoconductor unit) to further prevent toner leakage.
B195D935.WMF
SM
6-55
B264/B265
DRUM CHARGE
6.8 DRUM CHARGE

6.8.1 OVERVIEW
[F] [D] [E]
[C] [A]
[B]
B195D936.WMF
This copier uses a drum charge roller to charge the drum. The drum charge roller [A] contacts the surface of the drum [B] to give it a negative charge. The high voltage supply board [C] supplies a negative dc voltage to the drum charge roller through the charge roller terminal [D], bias plate [E], and the rear roller bushing [F] to give the drum surface a negative charge of 850V.
B264/B265
6-56
SM
DRUM CHARGE
6.8.2 CHARGE ROLLER VOLTAGE CORRECTION

Correction for Environmental Conditions
[A]
ID Sensor Pattern
3 cm
3 cm 3 cm
[B]
Sub Scan Direction

Charge Voltage -1500 V
Laser Diode Drum Potential
On Off -850 V
Development Bias
-600 V -550 V -480 V
ID Sensor Output
-150 V V sg (4.00 V) V sdp (3.50 V)
V sp (0.31 V)
t
B195D506.WMF
The voltage transferred from roller to drum could vary with the temperature and humidity around the drum charge roller. The lower the temperature or humidity, the higher the applied voltage required. The ID sensor measures the effects of ambient conditions, and any small change in drum potential caused by changes in temperature/humidity is reflected in the amount of toner transferred to the drum. This measurement is done immediately after the ID sensor pattern for toner density control. After creating ID sensor pattern [A], another pattern [B] is made. To do this, the LD switches off, the charge roller voltage drops, and the drum potential is reduced to -600V. At the same time, development bias returns to -550V. The drum potential is now slightly higher than the development bias, so only a very small amount of toner transfers to the drum. The ID sensor measures the density of pattern [B], and Vsdp, the output voltage, is compared with Vsg which was read from the bare drum at the same time.
SM
6-57
B264/B265
DRUM CHARGE
6.8.3 CORRECTION FOR PAPER WIDTH AND THICKNESS

NOTE: This correction is done for the bypass tray only. The by-pass tray can be used for non-standard paper narrower than sizes accepted by the paper trays. Thicker paper, OHP sheets, etc. can also be loaded in the by-pass tray but adjustments must be performed with the SP modes listed below in order to avoid jams and copy quality problems.
SP Mode SP2001 1 SP2309 1 SP2309 2 SP2914 1 SP2914 2 SP Name Charge Roller Bias Adjustment Paper Lower Width [a] Paper Upper Width [b] C-alpha C-beta Width 216 - 297 mm (Default: -1450 V) Width limit (Default: 150 mm) Width limit (Default: 216 mm) Adjust 10V/step (Default: 150 V) Adjust 10V/step (Default: 0 V)
The way that these SP modes are used is shown below.
0 mm
SP 2309 1 Default: 150 mm
SP 2309 2 Default: 216 mm
297 mm
Voltage: SP2001 1 + SP2914 1 Default: -1500 + 150 V
Voltage: SP2001 1 Default: -1500 V
B195D928.WMF
For example, with the default settings, if the paper width fed from the by-pass tray is 200 mm, the charge roller voltage will be 1500 +0 V.
B264/B265
6-58
SM
DRUM CHARGE
6.8.4 ID SENSOR PATTERN PRODUCTION TIMING

An ID sensor pattern is created after the main machine is powered on, and after finishing a job of 10 or more sheets. The ID sensor pattern production interval can be adjusted with SP2-210 (ID Sensor Pattern Interval).
ID sensor pattern Vsp/Vsg ID sensor pattern Vsp/Vsg
3
........
9 10
12 13 14 15
........
Series of copies Vref Decision New Vref Decision New Vref Decision
B195D937.WMF
6.8.5 DRUM CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING
[B]
[A]
B195D938.WMF
The drum charge roller [A] (always in contact with the drum), gets dirty easily. The brush roller [B] remains in contact with the charger roller to clean the charge roller.
SM
6-59
B264/B265
DEVELOPMENT
6.9 DEVELOPMENT
6.9.1 OVERVIEW
7 6
3 5
B195D939.WMF
1 2 3 4
Drum Development Roller Paddle Roller TD Sensor
5 Mixing Auger 6 Development Filter 7 Doctor Blade
B264/B265
6-60
SM
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.2 DRIVE MECHANISM

The feed/development motor [A] drives the development roller [B] through the gears and the paddle roller gear [C]. The drive shaft engages and disengages the paddle roller gear when the development unit is inserted into and removed from the machine. NOTE: The development drive gears are helical gears, quieter than normal gears.
[A]
[B]
[C]
B195D940.WMF
6.9.3 DEVELOPER MIXING

[B]
[C]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B195D941.WMF
The dual mixing roller consists of the outer paddle [A] and the inner auger [B]. The outer paddle moves developer to the front and supplies it to the development roller. Developer that spills off by the doctor blade passes through the holes [C] in the outer paddle, and is transported to the rear by the inner auger. While the dual mixing roller is moving the developer, some developer also passes back to the development unit through the holes in the bottom of the paddle roller . New toner from the toner bottle and recycled toner from the toner collection coil both enter the development unit at [D].
SM
6-61
B264/B265
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS

Mechanism
Black areas of the latent image are at a low negative charge (about 150 V) and white areas are at a high negative charge (about 850 V). To attract negatively charged toner to the black areas of the latent image on the drum, the high voltage supply board [A] applies a bias of 560 volts to the development roller throughout the image development process. The bias is applied to the development roller shaft [B] through the bias terminal spring [C] and bias terminal [D]. [B] [A] [D]
[C]
B195D942.WMF
The development bias voltage (-560 V) can be adjusted with SP2-201 (Development Bias).
Correction for paper width and thickness (by-pass tray only)

The by-pass tray can be used for non-standard paper narrow than sizes accepted by the paper trays. Thicker paper, OHP sheets, etc. can also be loaded in the bypass tray but adjustments must be performed with the SP modes listed below in order to avoid jams and misfeeds.
SP Mode SP2201 1 SP2309 1 SP2309 2 SP2914 3 SP2914 4 SP Name Development Bias Paper Lower Width [a] Paper Upper Width [b] Process Control Setting (B) Process Control Setting (B) Width 216 - 297 mm (Default: -560V) Width limit (Default: 150 mm) Width limit (Default: 216 mm) Adjust 10V/step (Default: 200V) Adjust 10V/step (Default: 50V)
The way that these SP modes are used is shown below.

0 mm SP 2309 1 Default: 150 mm SP 2309 2 Default: 216 mm 297 mm
Voltage: SP2201 1 Default: -560 V
B195D915.WMF
For example, with the default settings, if the paper width fed from the by-pass tray is 200 mm, the development bias voltage will be 560 + 50 V.
B264/B265
6-62
SM
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.5 TONER SUPPLY

Toner bottle replenishment mechanism [F]
[H] [G]
[D]
[C]
[E]
[B] [A]
B195D800.WMF
When the toner bottle is installed in the bottle holder [A], pin [B] slides up the side of the PCU [C], pulling out the toner shutter [D]. When the toner bottle holder lever [E] is returned to its original position, the cap [F] pulls away and is kept in place by the chuck [G]. The toner bottle holder lever [E] cannot be lowered: Until a toner bottle is installed in the holder. This prevents toner falling out of the holder unit as a result of lowering the handle with no toner bottle installed. Until the holder and bottle have been pushed into the machine completely and locked in place. Instruct the customer to always follow the bottle replacement instructions of the new decal attached to the toner bottle. The toner bottle has a spiral groove [H], which rotates the bottle to move toner to the development unit. When the bottle holder unit is pulled out, the chuck [G] releases the toner bottle cap and the toner shutter [D] closes and blocks the opening.
SM
6-63
B264/B265
DEVELOPMENT
Toner supply mechanism

[A] [B] [C]
B195D943.WMF
[D]
[E]
B195D944.WMF
The toner supply motor [A] rotates the toner bottle [B] and the mylar blades [C] (see below). Toner falls into the toner bottle holder, and the toner supply mylar blades [C] transfer the toner to slit [D]. Installing the PCU opens the shutter [E]. The toner falls into the development unit through the port. The left side of the entrance seal is higher than the right. This improves the efficiency of seal on the left side, especially when the PCU is removed.
B264/B265
6-64
SM
DEVELOPMENT
Toner Scatter Prevention

To reduce toner scattering, a velvet strip [A] extends across the length of the fusing unit, Seals are attached at each end of the strip [B] and [C].
[C]
[A] [B]
B195D945.WMF
SM
6-65
B264/B265
DEVELOPMENT
Toner density control There are two modes for controlling and maintaining constant toner supply: sensor control (both direct and indirect) and image pixel count control. The mode can be changed with SP2-208-1 (Toner Supply Mode). NOTE: The factory setting is sensor control mode; image pixel count mode should only be used temporarily until a defective TD or ID sensor can be replaced.
Sensor Control Mode

In the sensor control mode, the amount of toner required to print the page is calculated by the CPU; it adds up the image data value of each pixel and converts the sum to a value between 0 and 255. (255 would mean a completely black page.) The machine must vary toner supply for each copy in order to maintain the correct amount of toner in the developer and to account for changes in drum reflectivity due to changes in temperature and humidity. The CPU uses data from the TD sensor and ID sensor to determine whether or not the toner supply motor should be switched on and to calculate how long it should remain on in order to supply more toner to the mixture in the development unit. TD Sensor. When new developer of standard toner concentration is installed, namely 20 g of toner per 500 g of developer (4.0% by weight), the TD sensor must be set to its initial setting of 4.0V with SP2-801. This initial setting is used as the toner supply reference voltage or Vref. For every copy cycle, the TD sensor directly checks the toner density in the developer mixture, and after 10 copies these 10 readings are averaged and this value becomes TD sensor output voltage Vt(10). The machine compares Vt(10) with Vref. If Vt(10) is greater than Vref, the toner concentration in the development unit judged to be low. When Vt(10) is detected to be greater than Vref 20 times, then this indicates that the toner concentration is consistently low, Vref is incremented by 0.1V, and the conditions are checked again. The result of this check determines the value of K, the toner supply rate coefficient, which is one of the factors that is used in the toner supply motor ontime calculation. ID Sensor. In addition to comparing Vt(10) from the TD sensor and Vref, after every 10 copies the ID sensor, located at the lower right area of the drum, checks both the reflectivity (Vsg) and the pattern on the drum (Vsp), created by the laser diodes and charge roller. If the reflected light is too strong, this indicates that toner is low and toner is added to the development unit. (The frequency of these checks can be adjusted with SP2-210 (ID Sensor Pattern Interval).
B264/B265
6-66
SM
DEVELOPMENT
Image Pixel Count Mode

This mode should only be used only as a temporary measure while waiting for replacement parts, such as a TD sensor. This mode controls the toner supply amount using the same method for determining the toner bottle motor on time. However, the values that were in effect when the toner density control mode was changed over to image pixel count mode with SP2-208-1 (Toner Supply Mode) remain in effect and cannot be changed.
6.9.6 TONER NEAR END/END DETECTION

Toner Near End
The machine triggers the toner near-end alert and starts to rotate the toner supply bottle when either of the following two conditions occur. The machine detects (1) the toner supply rate (amount of toner supplied per second set with SP2209 1) drops to 25, (2) the current output of the TD sensor (Vt) has dropped below the target value after 40 samples, and then (3) still fails to detect the target Vt after an additional 40 samples. The machine determines that the toner density is too light after it detects that (1) the difference between Vref (the TD sensor reference voltage) and the averaged density of the previous 10 copies is more than 0.2V, and (2) Vsp (the reflectivity of the ID sensor pattern) is greater than 0.7V. Toner End After the machine enters the toner near-mode, it will trigger the toner end alert if any of the conditions below continue to exist: TD sensor output does not reach the target value within 90 copies after the toner near-end alert ("90" is the default setting for SP2213). The ID sensor output from reading the ID sensor pattern (Vsp) is extremely low (light). The averaged TD sensor output Vt exceeds 0.15V.
SM
6-67
B264/B265
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.7 TONER END RECOVERY

If the front door is opened and then closed while a toner near end/end condition exists, the machine will attempt to recover. When the front door is closed, the toner supply motor turns on to supply toner. The machine checks the TD sensor output 2 seconds after the main motor turns on (Vtp), and the sensor is checked again every 1 second (Vtp1) The machine detects the toner concentration using Vref, Vt (10), Vtp, and Vtp1. If the toner concentration is still too low, the toner supply motor remains on for another 10 seconds while the machine checks Vt. If toner concentration is judged to be at the standard level, then the toner near end/end condition is cancelled and K (toner supply coefficient) is reset. If toner concentration has not reached the standard level, the toner supply motor rotates continuously until it does (maximum motor on time is 16 seconds) and then it will switch off.
6.9.8 TONER SUPPLY WITH ABNORMAL SENSORS

The TD sensor is checked every copy. If the readings from the TD sensor become abnormal during a copy job, the machine holds the GAIN factor constant (GAIN is normally calculated from TD sensor readings) to allow toner supply to vary with only pixel count for the rest of the copy job. Then at the end of the copy job, an SC code is generated and the machine must be repaired. The ID sensor is checked every 10 copies. If readings become abnormal, an SC code is generated and the machine must be repaired. If this happens during a copy job, Vref is not changed, the copy job is allowed to finish, and then the SC code is generated. If spare parts are not available, the technician can use SP2-208 to temporarily put the machine in image pixel count mode. ( Chapter 5 Service Tables)
B264/B265
6-68
SM
DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING
6.10 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING

6.10.1 DRUM CLEANING
[A] [D] [E] This machine employs a counter blade system. After the image is transferred to paper, a cleaning blade [A] removes any toner remaining on the drum. The toner collection coil [B] carries scraped off toner to the toner collection plate [C]. The collar [D] on the cleaning blade bracket contacts the outer rim of cam gear [E], which moves the cleaning blade side to side. This side-to-side movement disperses accumulated toner to prevent early blade edge wear at one location. The drum reverses about 5 mm after every print job to remove particles on the edge of the cleaning blade.
[C] [B]
B195D946.WMF
6.10.2 TONER RECYCLING

Toner collected by the toner collection coil [A] is transported to the opening [B]. This toner falls into the development unit with new toner coming from the toner bottle. The paddle roller [C] mixes the collected toner with the new toner. NOTE: A screen filter [D) has been added to strain out paper dust and other foreign matter.
[A]
[B]
[C] [D]
B195D947.WMF
SM
6-69
B264/B265
PAPER FEED
6.11 PAPER FEED

6.11.1 OVERVIEW
4 1 16 15 10 2 3 5 6
8 9
14
13
B195D948.WMF
12
11
1 Upper pick-up roller 2 Upper paper height sensor 3 Upper paper feed roller 4 Upper relay sensor 5 Upper relay roller 6 Upper separation roller 7 Lower relay sensor 8 Lower relay roller
9 Lower paper feed roller 10 Lower separation roller 11 Lower paper height sensor 12 Lower pick-up roller 13 Lower paper size dial 14 Lower paper size switch 15 Upper paper size dial 16 Upper paper size switch
Each paper tray, which employs the FRR system, can hold 500 sheets. Two relay sensors, positioned above each set of relay rollers, detect paper jams. A selection dial allows you to select the setting for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
B264/B265
6-70
SM
PAPER FEED
6.11.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE

The feed/development motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanism of both the upper and second paper feed stations through gears and the paper feed clutches [B]. When the paper feed clutch turns on, the pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and separation roller start rotating to feed the paper. The paper feed clutch stays on until shortly after the registration sensor [C] actuates. [A] [C]
[B]
B195D949.WMF
6.11.3 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM

When the paper tray [A] is not inside the machine, the separation roller [B] is away from the paper feed roller [C] and the pick-up roller [D] stays in the upper position. [A] [C]
[E]
[B] When the paper tray is set into the machine, it pushes the release lever [E]. This causes the pick-up roller [D] to go down and the separation roller [B] to move up and contact the paper feed roller.
B195D950.WMF
[D]
B195D951.WMF
SM
6-71
B264/B265
PAPER FEED
6.11.4 PAPER LIFT

The paper size switch [A] detects when the paper tray [B] is set in the machine, and the tray lift motor [C] rotates, and the coupling gear [D] on the tray lift motor engages the pin [E] on the lift arm shaft [F]. Then the tray lift arm [G] lifts the tray bottom plate [H].
[H]
[E]
[D]
[F]
[A]
[G]
[C] [B]
B195D952.WMF
[J] When the paper tray is set in the machine, the pick-up roller [I] lowers. When the top [K] sheet of paper reaches the proper height for paper feed, the paper pushes up the pick-up roller, and the actuator [J] on the pick-up roller supporter activates the paper height sensor [K] to stop the tray lift motor. After several paper feed cycles, the paper level gradually lowers and the paper height sensor is de-activated. The tray lift motor turns on again until this sensor is activated again. When the paper tray is removed from the machine, the tray lift motor coupling gear disengages the pin on the lift arm shaft, and the tray bottom plate then drops under its own weight. [I]
B195D953.WMF
B264/B265
6-72
SM
PAPER FEED
6.11.5 PAPER END DETECTION
[B] [A]
[C]
B195D954.WMF
If there is paper in the paper tray, the paper end feeler [A] is raised by the paper stack, and the paper end sensor [B] is deactivates. When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout [C] in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated.
SM
6-73
B264/B265
PAPER FEED
6.11.6 PAPER REGISTRATION

[C] [F] [H] [G] [D] [E]
[A]
[B]
B195D955.WMF
The registration drive roller [A] and idle roller [B] correct the skew of the paper to ensure that the leading edge of the paper is positioned correctly at the drum. The paper feed/development motor [C] drives the registration mechanism. The registration sensor [D] is positioned just before the registration rollers. When the leading edge activates the registration sensor, the registration clutch is switched off and the registration rollers stop turning. However, the relay clutch [E] remains on slightly longer. This delay allows more time for the paper to press against the registration rollers and buckle slightly to correct any skew. The registration sensor also detects misfeeds. Next, the registration clutch [F] and the relay clutch actuates at the correct time to align the paper with the image on the drum. The registration rollers then feeds the paper to the image transfer section. Two new dust blades have been added around the registration roller. The idle roller dust blade [G] cleans the registration idle roller. This dust blade has a small dust box that collects paper dust that must be emptied periodically. The registration roller dust blade [H] cleans the registration roller. For details about how to remove and clean these new parts, see Section 3 Replacement and Adjustment.
B264/B265
6-74
SM
PAPER FEED
6.11.7 PAPER SIZE DETECTION

The paper size switch includes four microswitches. Actuators behind the paper size dial actuate the switches. Each paper size has its own actuator, with a unique combination of notches. To determine the paper size, the CPU reads which switches the actuator had turned off. The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected. If the paper size actuator is broken, or if there is no tray installed, the printer control board recognizes that the paper tray is not installed. When the paper size actuator is at the mark, the paper tray can be set up to accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using one of the user tools on the machines operation panel.
Models North America 81/2" x 13" Portrait A4 Landscape A4 Portrait 11" x 17" Portrait 81/2" x 14" Portrait 81/2" x 11" Portrait 81/2" x 11" Landscape Europe/Asia A3 Portrait A4 Landscape A4 Portrait A5 Portrait 8" x 13" Portrait 81/2" x 11" Portrait 81/2" x 11" Landscape Paper Size Switch 1 2 3 4 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF
ON: Pushed
OFF: Not Pushed
SM
6-75
B264/B265
BY-PASS TRAY
6.12 BY-PASS TRAY

6.12.1 OVERVIEW
1
[1]
2 3
4 5
B195D956.WMF
1 2 3 4 5
Paper feed roller Paper end sensor Pick-up roller By-pass tray Separation roller
B264/B265
6-76
SM
BY-PASS TRAY
6.12.2 BY-PASS TRAY OPERATION
[A]
[B]
B195D957.WMF
[C] [D] [E]

B195D958.WMF
The by-pass unit is directly driven by the copier through gear [A]. When the print key is pressed, the pick-up solenoid [B] turns on and the pick-up roller [C] moves onto the paper. When the by-pass tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler [D] drops into the cutout in the by-pass tray and the paper end sensor [E] is activated.
SM
6-77
B264/B265
BY-PASS TRAY
6.12.3 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION
[A]
B195D959.WMF
11"
81/2"
51/2"
A3
B4
A4L
B5L
A5L
B6L
B195D960.WMF
The paper size sensor board [A] monitors the paper width. The rear side fence is connected to the terminal plate. The pattern for each paper width is unique. Therefore, the copier determines which paper has been placed in the by-pass tray by the signal output from the board. However, the copier does not determine the paper length from the by-pass tray hardware.
B264/B265
6-78
SM
DUPLEX UNIT
6.13 DUPLEX UNIT

6.13.1 OVERVIEW
1 2 3
6
B195D961.WMF
2 3
Inverter gate Inverter roller
5 6
Lower transport roller Exit sensor
SM
6-79
B264/B265
Entrance sensor
Upper transport roller
DUPLEX UNIT
6.13.2 DUPLEX DRIVE LAYOUT

2 1
B195D962.WMF
1 2 3
Inverter roller Inverter motor Upper transport roller
4 5
Transport motor Lower transport roller
B264/B265
6-80
SM
DUPLEX UNIT
6.13.3 DUPLEX BASIC OPERATION

To increase the productivity of the duplex unit, copies are printed as follows.
Longer than A4 lengthwise/LT lengthwise The duplex unit can store only one sheet of copy paper.
Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of copy paper (if shaded, this indicates the second side). [A]
2
1
[B]
B195D963.WMF
Up to A4 lengthwise/LT lengthwise
The duplex unit can store two sheets of copy paper Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of copy paper (if shaded, this indicates the second side). [A]
2
1
7
[B]
B195D964.WMF
SM
6-81
B264/B265
DUPLEX UNIT
6.13.4 DUPLEX UNIT FEED IN AND EXIT MECHANISM

[A]
[D] [B] [E] [C] [F]
[G]
B195D965.WMF
B195D967.WMF
Feed-in
The inverter gate solenoid [A] stays off and the inverter rollers [B] rotate clockwise. A sheet of paper is sent to the inverter section [C]. NOTE: The cover guide has been eliminated in order to accommodate paper sizes longer than A4/LT in the reverse feed path which has been lengthened in the design of this machine.
Inversion and Exit The inverter gate solenoid turns on and the inverter motor turns on in reverse shortly after the trailing edge of the paper passes through the entrance sensor [D]. As a result, the inverter gate [E] is opened and the inverter roller rotates counterclockwise. The paper is sent to the copier through the upper and lower transport rollers [F, G].
B264/B265
6-82
SM
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
6.14 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6.14.1 OVERVIEW
1 2 3
10 4 9 8 7 6 5
B195D966.WMF
1 Transfer belt 2 Drive roller 3 Transfer belt cleaning blade 4 Transfer roller 5 Idle roller
6 OPC 7 Pick-off pawls 8 ID sensor 9 Contact lever 10 Transfer belt contact clutch/cam
SM
6-83
B264/B265
6.14.2 BELT DRIVE MECHANISM

After the main motor switches on during copying, the transfer belt contact clutch [A] switches on after a specified interval and the cam [F] makes a half-turn to raise the contact lever [E] to bring the transfer belt [D] into contact with the drum. The actuator [C], on the same axis as the cam, and the transfer belt position sensor [B] detects whether the drum and transfer belt are in contact. [F] [E]
[A]
[B] [C]
[D]
When the main motor is off, or when the ID sensor pattern is being measured, the B195D968.WMF transfer belt unit separates from the drum. The ID sensor pattern must not be transferred to the belt. Also, the transfer belt and drum must not remain in contact for too long, to prevent contamination of the drum with oil or other foreign material from the transfer belt.
6.14.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM

The belt contact and release mechanism consists of the belt contact clutch [A], cam [B], and contact lever [C]. The belt contact clutch turns on and the cam attached to the clutch rotates half a complete rotation. The contact lever, riding on the cam, is lifted up and the springs [D] push the belt into contact with the drum. The transfer belt position sensor [E] detects the home position of the cam (this is when the belt is away from the drum). The belt must be released from the drum between copy jobs in order to prevent the ID sensor pattern from being rubbed off and to prevent contamination of the drum from the surface of the belt. [E] [A] [B]
[C] [D]
B195D969.WMF
B264/B265
6-84
SM
6.14.4 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM

When the registration clutch switches on to align the leading edge of the paper [A] with the image on the drum [B], the transfer belt is [C] is away from the drum.
[C]
[B]
[A] At the designated time after the main motor switches on, the transfer belt contact clutch switches on and the transfer belt touches the drum.
B195D970.WMF
B195D971.WMF
When the paper enters the gap between the belt and the drum, the high voltage supply board [D] applies a high positive current to the belt to transfer the image to the paper. After receiving the image from the drum, the paper is fed by the belt. The paper moves to the end of the transfer belt unit, where it separates from the belt as the belt curves away. Then the paper moves on to the fusing unit.
[D]
B195D972.WMF
SM
6-85
B264/B265
6.14.5 TRANSFER BELT CHARGE

Mechanism
[C] [B] [A]
[D]
[E]
B195D973.WMF
The high voltage supply board [A] applies a positive current to the transfer belt [B] through the terminal block [C], terminal plate [D], and the bias roller [E]. The high voltage supply board adjusts the current to the roller to keep a small but constant current flow to ground through the belt, paper, and drum. If this current is not kept constant, efficiency of toner transfer and paper separation will vary with paper thickness, type, environmental condition, or changes in transfer belt surface resistance.
B264/B265
6-86
SM
Correction for paper width and thickness

A range of SP modes is available in order to adjust the machine so it can handle papers of non-standard size and thickness. For paper width, there are two thresholds. The factory settings are 150 mm (5.9) and 216 mm (8.5). Below 216 mm, the transfer current can be increased. By default, the current is multiplied by 1.2 for the main machine paper trays. For paper widths below 150 mm, the transfer current can be set higher, but by default it is kept the same as the current for paper widths below 216 mm. The higher current allows for the tendency of the current to flow directly from the transfer belt to the drum and not through the paper which could cause an insufficient amount of toner to transfer to narrow width paper. Thick paper must be fed from the by-pass tray because SP modes are available only for the by-pass tray in order to accommodate thick paper. By default, the current for paper narrower than 216 mm is 1.5 times the normal current. This illustration shows the SP modes, which control these currents. The base transfer current (current in the diagram) depends on SP 2-301. This is different for various parts of the image, and is different for the by-pass tray; see the next page for details.
SP2-309-1 Default: 150 mm SP2-309-2 Default: 216 mm
0 Paper Tray
297 mm
SP2-309-3 Current x 1.2
SP2-309-4 Current x 1.2
Current x 1.0
By-pass Tray SP2-309-5 Current x 1.5 SP2-309-6 Current x 1.5 Current x 1.0
B195D974.WMF
SM
6-87
B264/B265
Currents applied to leading edge, image areas - by-pass feed

Transfer current can also be adjusted for the leading edge and the image area, and for by-pass feed. The timing for starting to apply leading edge current, for the switchover from leading edge current to image area current, and for switching off at the trailing edge can also be changed. The table below lists the SP modes you can use to adjust these settings.
SP2-301 Transfer Current Adjustment Image areas SP2-301-1 1st Side of Paper SP2-301-2 2nd Side of Paper SP2-301-4 By-pass Feed SP2-301-3 Leading Edge Leading edge areas SP2-301-5 Leading Edge By-pass Feed SP2-911 Transfer Current Timing Timing SP2-911-1 On Timing (at leading edge) SP2-911-2 Switch Timing (from leading edge to image area current SP2-911-3 Off Timing (at trailing edge)
B264/B265
6-88
SM
6.14.6 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING MECHANISM
[A]
[C]
[B]
B195D975.WMF
The cleaning blade [A], always in contact with the transfer belt, scrapes off toner and paper dust remaining on the transfer belt. Scraped off toner and paper dust falls into the toner collection tank [B] in the transfer belt unit. This toner is not recycled. When the toner overflow sensor [C] detects toner overflow, the toner overflow indicator lights. Up to 999 copies can be made before the toner overflow condition shuts down the machine.
SM
6-89
B264/B265
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
6.15 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

1 18 2 3 4
17
5 6
16 7 8 15 14 13 9 10 12 11
B195D976.WMF
6.15.1 OVERVIEW
1 Paper exit sensor 2 De-curler rollers 3 Junction gate
10 Cleaning roller 11 Entrance guide 12 Fusing lamp (center) 13 Fusing lamp (ends) 14 Thermistors (center/end) 15 Thermostats (center/end) 16 Hot roller 17 Hot roller strippers 18 Exit roller
4 Idle roller (duplex unit) 5 Fusing unit exit sensor 6 Spring 7 Fusing exit guide plate 8 Pressure roller 9 Pressure arm
B264/B265
6-90
SM
6.15.2 FUSING DRIVE

The fusing exit motor [A] drives the fusing unit through the gears [B] and also drives the paper exit rollers [C] through a gear and a timing belt [D]. [C]
[A]
[B] [D]
B195D603.WMF
6.15.3 FUSING DRIVE RELEASE MECHANISM

The fusing unit drive release mechanism automatically disengages the fusing unit drive gear [A] when the right door [B] is opened. When the right cover is opened, the actuator plate [C] pulls release wire [D]. The wire pulls the fusing drive gear bracket [E] and the fusing unit drive is disengaged. [B]
B195D978.WMF
[A] [E] [D]
[C]
SM
6-91
B264/B265
6.15.4 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT MECHANISM

The entrance guide [A] has two holes on each side to adjust for paper thickness to prevent creasing. Normally, the left screw hole [C] on each side is used. For thin paper, use screw holes [B] to move the entrance guide to the left. This setting allows more direct access to the gap between the hot and pressure rollers, and prevents thin paper from buckling against the hot roller which can cause [C] blurring at the leading edge of the copy. [B] [A]
B195D979.WMF
6.15.5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE AND DE-CURLER ROLLERS

[D] The exit guide plate [A] also functions as a pressure roller stripper. The exit guide plate can be moved in order to remove jammed paper. Stacking has been improved by mounting a face-curl correction mechanism at the paper exit roller. Two de-curler rollers [B] and [C] have been added under the exit roller [D] to correct the curl that paper acquires during transport through the fusing unit. [B] [A]
[C]
B195D980.WMF
B264/B265
6-92
SM
6.15.6 PRESSURE ROLLER

The pressure springs [A] apply constant pressure between the hot roller [B] and the pressure roller [C]. The applied pressure can be changed by adjusting the position of the pressure springs. The left position [D] is the normal setting. The right position [E] increases the pressure to prevent insufficient fusing by the fusing unit. A stopper counters the tension of the pressure springs to keep the pressure roller pressing against the hot roller with constant pressure. This prevents the pressure roller from flattening and increasing the width of the nip band as shown at [A]. This can lead to paper slippage and paper jams in the fusing unit.
[D] [E]
[A]
[C]
[B]
B195D981.WMF
[A]
B195D925.WMF
Until the machine is installed, two screws and maintain a gap between the pressure roller and hot roller.
These screws are removed and discarded when the machine is installed.
B195D982.WMF
SM
6-93
B264/B265
This relieves pressure on the surface of the pressure roller and prevents it from becoming deformed during storage before the machine is shipped.
6.15.7 CLEANING MECHANISM

The cleaning roller [A], in constant contact with the pressure roller [B], collects toner and paper dust from the surface of the pressure roller. Because the cleaning roller is metal, it can collect adhering matter better than the pressure roller, which is coated with Teflon. Some new design features have been implemented in order to cope with the lower temperatures required for new toner which has a melting temperature much lower than the previous toner. The cleaning roller [A] is composed of an aluminum shell with an internal heat pipe suspended in the middle of the roller to dissipate heat more rapidly. [B]
[A]
B195D983.WMF
B264/B265
6-94
SM
6.15.8 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER CLEANING

Toner clinging to the hot roller strippers can cause black dots to appear on the back sides of copies. To ensure that the hot roller strippers are clean and not contaminated by old toner; The widths of the strippers have been reduced from 3 mm to 0.5 mm. The machine can be set so the fusing/exit motor switches on and rotates the drum freely for 5 sec. at the beginning of every job. This feature can be switched on with SP5959. The amount of time for free rotation can be adjusted with this SP code. Make sure that the customer understands that increasing this SP setting slows down the start of the job. The machine switches on the fusing/exit motor and rotates the drum after the job. The drum rotation sequence at the end of a job depends on the size of the job.
Small Jobs
Job End
1st Cleaning
Fusing Motor
15 s 15 s
B195D921.WMF
SM
6-95
B264/B265
After the machine prints a total of 5 sheets (five jobs of 1-sheet each for example, or a continues print of up to 29 pages), 15 sec. after the job ends the fusing/exit motor switches on for 15 sec. and then stops. This 15 sec. on/off cycle, called the 1st Cleaning is done once.
Medium Jobs
1st Cleaning x2
Job End
Fusing Motor
15 s 15 s 15 s 15 s
B195D922.WMF
After the machine prints a job of 30 to 99 continuous pages, the 1st Cleaning is done twice. (15 sec. after the job ends the fusing/exit motor switches on for 15 sec., pauses for 15 sec. then switches on again for 15 sec.)
Large Jobs
Job End
1st Cleaning + 45 sec. wait + 1st Cleaning
Fusing Motor
15 s 15 s 45 s 15 s
B195D923.WMF
After the machine prints a job of over 100 continuous pages, the 1st Cleaning is done, there is a pause of 45 sec. then the 1st cleaning is done again.
B264/B265
6-96
SM
SP Settings for Post-Job Cleaning

The previous description of stripper cleaning with drum rotation after small, medium, and large print jobs is based on the default settings of SP3905. These settings can be adjusted. These are the SP codes that control how cleaning is done at the end of a job.
No. 3905 001 3905 002 3905 003 No. addtnl. sheets for 2nd HR stripper cleaning No. addtnl. sheets for 3rd HR stripper cleaning No. addtnl. sheets for 3rd HR stripper cleaning Name Number Rotations Number of Pages Function Sets the number of times the 1st Cleaning is done. Default: 1 Sets the number of pages (accumulative total) to print before 1st Cleaning is done ("Small Jobs" on previous page. Default: 5 Sets the number of pages to print (continuous print job) before 1st Cleaning is done twice ("Medium Jobs" on previous page). Default: 30 Sets the number of pages to print (continuous print job) before 1st Cleaning is done once, then done again after a 15 sec. interval ("Large Jobs" on previous page).(Default: 100 Sets the number of times that the cycle for SP3905 004 is repeated for "Large Jobs". Default: 0. If set to "1", for example, the cleaning sequence is repeated once. This SP determines what happens if a new job starts while cleaning is in progress. Default: 0 (Off): If a new job starts while cleaning is in progress, cleaning is canceled so the new job can start. If you set this SP to "1", a new job cannot start until cleaning has been completed.
3905 004
3905 005
3905 006
Job/HR stripper cleaning priority setting
Here are some important points to keep in mind about hot roller stripper cleaning: If the machine switches to any of the energy saver modes (low power mode, etc.) while cleaning is in progress, the cleaning cycle will not be interrupted. The cleaning cycle is not interrupted by free rotation of the hot roller when the machine is getting ready to print. Opening the front door, however, while cleaning is in progress will stop a cleaning cycle.
SM
6-97
B264/B265
6.15.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL

[D] [C]
[B]
[A]
B195D985.WMF
The fusing unit has two fusing lamps: the first fusing lamp (center: 650W) [A] heats the center of the fusing roller, and the second fusing lamp (ends: 650W) [B] heats both ends of the hot roller. This arrangement ensures even heat on all surfaces of the roller. In order to control the temperature of the roller, two high response thermistors are attached to the unit, one near the center [C] and one at the end [D] of the hot roller.
B264/B265
6-98
SM
Temperature Control
(35 cpm) Fusing Temp. 165C 160C Center End Ce nte r C 200 145 140 Center End (45 cpm) Fusing Temp. 175C 170C
C 200
135 130 100
100 Ce nte r
50
En d
50
En d
Main SW ON
Re-load
Main SW ON
Re-load
B195D929.WMF
There are two types of temperature control: On/off control (Default) Phase control. Either mode can be selected with SP1104 (Fusing Temperature Control). After the machine is powered on, the CPU checks the ac frequency for 500 ms, in case phase control is selected later for the temperature control, and then switches on the fusing lamp. As soon as both the center and end thermistors detect the print ready temperature (also known as the re-load temperature), the machine can operate. The reload temperature is 3 C below the fusing temperature (this depends on the settings of SP1105 1~4, 7, 8). As soon as the thermistors detect the fusing temperature, the CPU switches the lamps off but frequently switches on/off again in order to maintain the fusing temperature. The default temperatures of SP1105 for these models are set 10 ~ 30 degrees lower than the temperatures for the previous machines. Some new SP codes have been added and others removed. For details, see Section 5. Service Tables.
SM
6-99
B264/B265
Fusing Idling Temperature

If copies are not sufficiently fused soon after the main power switch is turned on, fusing idling should be enabled with SP1103 1. When fusing idling is enabled, it is done when the temperature reaches the print ready (re-load) temperature. The re-load temperature can be adjusted with SP1105 5,6. In the opposite case, even if fusing idling is disabled, it is done when the temperature at power-up 15 C The fusing idling time is as follows.
Temperature at power-on 0: Disabled 30 s Fusing Idling Mode 1: Enabled 30 s
SP1103 1 SP1103 2
15 C or less
Higher than 15C
Not done
30 s
B264/B265
6-100
SM
6.15.10 CPM DOWN FOR THICK PAPER

Because the fusing temperatures are set lower for the new toner which has a lower melting point, the results of printing on thick paper cannot be guaranteed at 45 cpm. Therefore, the 45 cpm line speed is adjusted down to 35 cpm as follows: After switching from Normal to Thick Paper for printing, the machine halts temporarily and re-starts for 35 cpm running. If the previous job included stapling or other finisher processing, these settings remain in effect for the next job on thick paper after the line speed is adjusted. If the print job on thick paper does not include an image on the page (a cover), then the speed is not adjusted down from 45 cpm to 35 cpm. NOTE: The previous machine automatically reduced line speed 30% (ppm down) for thick paper. In these models, however, the speed is reduced from 45 cpm to 35 cpm for the 45 cpm machine. This adjustment is performed automatically for the 45 cpm machine only. Note these other important points regarding cpm down for thick paper on the 45 cpm machine: When the line speed switches from 45 cpm to 35 cpm for thick paper, the transfer current changes to the settings specified with SP2301 (Transfer Current Adjustment). (For details, see Section 5. Service Tables.) Bias voltage, development and other settings are not affected. Fusing temperature adjustment switches on, but no operation can start until the machine reaches the temperature specified for the job. The ID sensor pattern is created and the line speed remains the same until the end of the job. The intensity of the LD unit is lowered evenly, 30 steps from its specified value.
SM
6-101
B264/B265
6.15.11 COOLING AND OVERHEAT PROTECTION
[A]
[B]
B195D986.WMF
The fusing unit operates at temperatures lower than the previous model in order to accommodate the new toner which has a lower melting temperature. In order to further ensure cooler running temperatures for the fusing unit, two cooling fans have been added. The side cooling fan [A] and corner cooling fan [B] switch on when the temperature of the fusing unit exceeds 150 C and switch off when the main motor switches off.
B264/B265
6-102
SM
6.15.12 OVERHEAT PROTECTION

If the hot roller temperature becomes greater than 250C, the CPU cuts off the power to the fusing lamp, and SC543 (Fusing Overheat Error) will be displayed. Even if the thermistor overheat protection fails, there is a thermostat in series with the common ground line of the fusing lamp. If the temperature of the thermostat reaches 199C, the thermostat opens, removing power from the fusing lamp. At the same time, the copier stops operating. At this time, SC542 (Fusing Temperature Warm-up Error) will be displayed.
SM
6-103
B264/B265
ENERGY SAVER MODES
6.16 ENERGY SAVER MODES

6.16.1 OVERVIEW
Operation Sw. Off -orAuto Off Timer (10 s to 4 hrs / Default: 60 s)
Stand-by Mode
Energy Saver Key On -orEnergy Saver Timer (10 s to 4 hrs / Default: 60 s) Operation Sw. Off -orAuto Off Timer - Energy Saver Timer
Energy Saver Key Off Return Time Less than 3 s
Energy Saver Mode (Low Power Mode)

Operation Sw. On Platen Cover Open/Close Original Set ADF
Auto Off Mode
Return Time Less Than: 10 s: Model A-C2b 15 s: Model A-C2c
Off Mode
FAX: RX, etc. Printer Data in
After Printing
Off Stand-by Mode
B195D987.WMF
When the machine is not used, the energy saver function reduces power consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature. This machine has two types of energy saver mode as follows. 1) Energy saver mode 2) Auto Off mode These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes. Energy timer (UP mode) Auto off timer (UP mode) Auto off disabling (SP mode)
B264/B265
6-104
SM
ENERGY SAVER MODES
6.16.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE

Entering the energy saver mode
The machine enters energy saver mode when one of the following occur. The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Key is held down for a second. The energy saver timer runs out after the end of a job. What happens in energy saver mode When the machine enters energy saver mode, the fusing lamp drops to a certain temperature, and the operation panel indicators are turned off except for the Energy Saver LED and the Power LED. If the CPU receives the image print out command from an application (e. g. to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the fusing temperature rises to print the data.
Return to stand-by mode

If one of the following occur, the machine returns to stand-by mode: The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed An original is placed in the ADF The ADF is lifted A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table The recovery time from energy saver mode is about 3 s.
Mode Operation Switch Energy Saver LED Fusing Temp. +24V System +5V
Energy Saver
On
On
B264: 130oC B265: 150oC
On
On
SM
6-105
B264/B265
ENERGY SAVER MODES
6.16.3 AUTO OFF MODE

There are two Auto Off modes: Off Stand-by mode and Off mode. The difference between Off Stand-by mode and Off mode is the machines condition when the machine enters Auto Off mode.
Entering off stand-by and off modes

The machine enters the Off Stand-by mode or Off mode when one of the following occur: The auto off timer runs out The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off If one or more of the following conditions exits, the machine enters Off Stand-by mode. If none of these conditions exist, the machine enters Off Mode. Error or SC condition An optional G4 unit is installed Image data is stored in the memory During memory TX or polling RX The handset is off hook An original is in the ADF The ADF is open
Off Stand-by mode

The system +5V is still supplied to all components. When the machine detects a ringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job, the +24V supply is activated and the machine automatically prints the incoming message or executes the print job.
B264/B265
6-106
SM
ENERGY SAVER MODES
Off Mode
The system +5V supply also turns off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy saver mode) is still activated. When the machine detects a ringing signal, off-hook signal, or receives a print job, the machine returns to the Off Stand-by mode and the system +5V and +24V supplies are activated.
Returning to stand-by mode

The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The recovery time is about 10 s (B264) or 15 s for the (B265).
Mode Operation Switch Energy Saver Mode Fusing Lamp +24V System +5V Note
Off Stand-by Off
Off Off
Off Off
Off (On when printing) Off
On Off
On Off +5VE is supplied
SM
6-107
B264/B265
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration Copy Process Original Original Size Copy Paper Size Desktop Dry electrostatic transfer system Sheet/Book Maximum A3/11" x 17" A3/11" 17" - A5 SEF Paper tray, Duplex: By-pass tray: A3/11" 17" - A6 SEF Non-standard sizes: Paper Tray/ Duplex: By-pass: 7R5E: Width: 100 - 297 mm (3.9" 11.7") Length: 148 - 432 mm (5.8" 17.0") 64 - 105 g/m2 (20 - 28 lb.)
Copy Paper Weight
Reproduction Ratios
Copying Speed First Copy Time Warm-up Time Continuous Copy Paper Capacity Paper Output
Power Source Dimensions (w x d x h) Weight Resolution Gradation Original Archive Toner Replenishment Total Counter
52 - 163 g/m2 (16 44 lb.) Metric version (%): 400, 200, 141, 122, 115, 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25 Inch version (%): 400, 200, 155, 129, 121, 93, 85, 78, 73, 65, 50, 25 Zoom: 25 ~ 400% in 1% steps B264: 35 cpm A4, 81/2" x 11" LEF, 1-to-1 (ADF) 45 cpm, A4, 81/2" x 11" LEF, 1-to-1 (ADF) B265: B264: 4.1 s, 1st Tray, A4/81/2" x 11" LEF B265: 3.5 s, 1st Tray, A4/81/2" x 11" LEF B264: Less than 12.5 s (Basic), 15 s (MFP B265: Less than 12.5 s (Basic), 15 s (MFP 1~999 (operation panel entry) 1,050 sheets (500 sheets/tray x 2 with 50 sheets in by-pass tray) A4, 81/2" x 11" and 500 sheets smaller: B4 and larger: 250 sheets North America: 120V/60 Hz, More than 12.5 A Europe/Asia: 220 240 V/50, 60 Hz, More than 6.8 A Without ADF 670 mm x 650 mm x 720 mm (26.3" x 25.6" x 28.3") With ADF 670 mm x 650 mm x 870 mm (26.3" x 25.6" x 34.3") Less than 79 kg (174 lb.) 600 dpi (Scanning and Printing) 256 levels (Scanning and Printing) More than 2,500 A4 pages for document server (ITU-T No. 4 Chart) Cartridge exchange (550 g) Electric counter
SM
7-1
B264/B265
Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Consumption Mainframe only

Copying Warm-up Stand-by Auto Off Mode Maximum B264 Less than 1.3 kW Less than 1.4 kW NA Less than 123W EU, Asia Less than 126W NA Ave. 1.2W EU, Asia Ave. 1.2W Less than 1.44 kW (NA) Less than 1.5 kW (EU, Asia) B265 Less than 1.3 kW Less than 1.4 kW NA Less than 148W EU, Asia Less than 138W NA Ave. 1.2W EU, Asia Ave. 1.2W Less than 1.44 kW (NA) Less than 1.5 kW (EU, Asia)
Full system (including options)

Copying Warm-up Stand-by Auto Off Mode Maximum B264 Less than 1.4 kW Less than 1.3 kW NA Less than 125W EU, Asia Less than 130W NA Ave. 8.5W EU, Asia Ave. 8.5 Less than 1.44 kW (NA) Less than 1.5 kW (EU, Asia) B265 Less than 1.4 kW Less than 1.3 kW NA Less than 159W EU, Asia Less than 149W NA Ave. 8.5 EU, Asia Ave. 8.5 Less than 1.44 kW (NA) Less than 1.5 kW (EU, Asia)
Noise Emission:
Mode Copying Model B264 B265 Stand-by B264 B265 Mainframe Only NA 64.0 EU, Asia 65.0 NA 67.0 EU, Asia 67.0 NA 34.0 EU, Asia 34.0 NA 34.0 EU, Asia 34.0 Full System NA 69.8 EU, Asia 65.0 NA 70.9 EU, Asia 67.0 NA 37.1 EU, Asia 43.0 NA 37.1 EU, Asia 34.0
NOTE: 1) The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779. 2) Full system measurements include the ARDF, Finisher and LCT unit. 3) In the above stand-by condition, the polygonal mirror motor is not rotating.
B264/B265
7-2
SM
SPECIFICATIONS
2. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
1 2
11
12
4 7 5 9
10
7
B195/B264V901.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Platen cover ARDF One-bin tray Duplex unit By-pass tray LCT (Large Capacity Tray) Copier
8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Paper tray unit Two-tray finisher (2 shift trays) Booklet Finisher 1000 Sheet Finisher (1 shift tray) Bridge Unit
NOTE: The Bridge Unit is required for the optional finishers.
SM
7-3
B264/B265
Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS Key: Symbol: U: Unique option, C: Option also used with other products
Item B264 B265 ARDF (See Note 1.) Platen Cover (See Note 1.) Paper Tray Unit LCT (Large Capacity Tray) 1-Bin Tray Bridge Unit 1000-sheet Finisher (See Note 2.) Two-tray Finisher (See Note 2.) Booklet Finisher Punch Unit (See Note 3.) Punch Unit (See Note 3.) Punch Unit (See Note 3.) Key Machine Code B264 B265 B714 G329 B542 B543 B544 B538 B408 B545 B546 B377-17 (2/3-hole) US B377-27 (2/4-hole) Metric B377-31 (4-hole) Northern Europe/ A674 G395 B669 B735 B770 B815 B779 B780 G578 A646 B783 B720 B581 G813 B736 G818 B609
Copier
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C U U U C C U U C C C C C
Key Counter Bracket User Account Enhance Unit PI Board Kit Data Overwrite Security Copy Data Security Unit Scanner Accessibility Option Fax Option G3 Interface Unit Fax SAF Memory Handset (USA model only) Printer/Scanner Unit PostScript3 Unit 1394 Interface Unit Printer/ IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN Scanner Bluetooth Memory Unit 256 MB File Format Converter
NOTE: 1) The ARDF and platen cover cannot be installed together. 2) The finishers require the paper tray unit and bridge unit. 3) The punch unit requires the two-tray finisher.
B264/B265
7-4
SM
SPECIFICATIONS
3. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
ARDF (B714)
Original Size: Normal Original Mode: A3 to B6, DLT to HLT Duplex Original Mode: A3 to B5, DLT to HLT Original Weight: Normal Original Mode: 40 ~ 128 g/m2 (11 ~ 34 lb.) Duplex Original Mode: 52 ~ 105 g/m2 (14 ~ 28 lb.) Table Capacity: 80 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.) Original Standard Position: Rear left corner Separation: Feed belt and separation roller Original Transport: Roller transport Original Feed Order: From the top original Reproduction Range: 30 ~ 200% (Sub scan direction only) Power Source: DC 24V, 5V from the copier Power Consumption: Less than 60 W Dimensions (W D H): 570 mm x 518 mm x 150 mm (22.4" x 20.4" x 5.9") Weight: 12 kg
PAPER TRAY UNIT (B542)

Paper Size: Paper Weight: Tray Capacity: Paper Feed System: Paper Height Detection: Power Source: A5 SEF to A3 SEF 51/2" x 81/2" SEF to 11" x 17" SEF 64 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2 (20 lb. ~ 28 lb.) 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. ) FRR 4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end) 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from the copier) 120 Vac: 115 V version (from the copier) 220 ~ 240 Vac: 224/240 V version (from the copier) 50 W Less than 25 kg (55.1 lb.) 540 mm x 600 mm x 270 mm (21.3" x 23.6" x 10.6")
Power Consumption: Weight: Size (W x D x H):
SM
7-5
B264/B265
Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
ONE-BIN TRAY (B544)

Paper Size: Paper Weight: Tray Capacity: Power Source: Power Consumption: Weight: Size (W x D x H): A5 SEF to A3 SEF 51/2x81/2 SEF to 11x17 SEF 60 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2 (16 lb. ~ 28 lb.) 125 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.) 5 Vdc, 24 Vdc (from copier) 15 W Less than 4 kg (8.8 lb.) 470 mm x 565 mm x 140 mm (18.5" x 22.2" x 5.5")
1000 Sheet Finisher (B408)

Upper Tray Paper Size Paper Weight Paper Capacity Lower Tray Paper Size A3 to A6 11" x 17" to 51/2" x 81/2" 60 to 157 g/m2 (16 to 42 lb.) 250 sheets, A4 LEF, 81/2" x 11" SEF or smaller, 80 g/m2 (20 lb.) Staple Mode Off: A3 to B5, 11" x 17" to 51/2" x 81/2" Staple Mode On: A3, B4, A4, B5, 11" x 17" to 81/2" x 11" Staple Mode Off: 60 to 157 g/m2 (16 ~ 43 lb.) Staple Mode On: 64 to 90 g/m2 (17 ~ 24 lb.) 30 sheets (A3, B4, 11" x 17", 81/2" x 14" 50 sheets (A4, B5 LEF, 81/2" x 11" Staple Mode Off: 1,000 sheets, A4, 81/2" x 11" or smaller, 80 g/m2 (20 lb.) 500 sheets, A3, B4, 11" x 17", 81/2" x 14", 80 g/m2 (20 lb.) Staple Mode On: 80 g/m2 (20 lb.) Number of Sets Set Size Size A4, 81/2"x14" LEF A4, 81/2"x11" SEF A3, B4, 11"x17", 81/2"x14" Staple Positions Staple Replenishment Power Source Power Consumption Weight Dimensions 1 Staple: 2 positions (Front, Rear) 2 Staples: 2 positions (Upper, Left Cartridge (5,000 staples/cartridge) DC 24 V, 5V (from copier) 50 W 25 kg (55.2 lb.) 527 x 520 x 790 mm 20.8" x 20.5" x 31.1" 2 to 9 100 100 50 10 to 50 10 to 30 31 to 50 100 to 20 100 to 20 50 to 10 50 to 10 50 to 10 ---
Paper Weight Stapler Capacity Paper Capacity
B264/B265
7-6
SM
SPECIFICATIONS
TWO-TRAY FINISHER (B545)

NOTE: The punch unit is an option for this machine.
Paper Size Normal/Shift Mode: A3 to A5/DLT to HLT (A6L in no shift mode and no staple mode) Staple Mode: A3 to B5/DLT to LT Punch Mode: 2 Holes: A3 to A5/DLT to HLT 3 Holes: A3 to B5/DLT to LT 4 Holes (Europe/Asia) : A3 to A5/ DLT to HLT 4 Holes (North Europe): A3 to B5/DLT to LT Normal/Shift Mode: 52 g/m2 ~ 163 g/m2 (14 ~ 43 lb.) Staple Mode: 64 g/m2 ~ 90 g/m2 (17 ~ 23 lb.) Punch mode (All types): 52 g/m2 ~ 163 g/m2 (14 ~ 43 lb.) Upper Tray: 500 sheets (A4S ~ A5S/LTS, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.) 250 sheets (A3 ~ A4L/DLT ~ LTL, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.) 100 sheets (A5L/HLT, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.) Lower Tray (Multi-tray Staple Mode): 1500 sheets (A4S/LTS, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.) 750 sheets (A3 ~ B5/DLT ~ LTL, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.) 500 sheets (A5S, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.) 100 sheets (A5L/HLT, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.) Lower Tray (Normal Mode): 2000 sheets (A4S/LTS, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.) 750 sheets (A3 ~ B5/DLT ~ LTL, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.) 500 sheets (A5S, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.) 100 sheets (A5L/HLT, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.) No Mixed Original Mode: 50 sheets (A4 ~ B5/LT, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.) 30 sheets (A3 ~ B4/DLT ~ LG, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.) Mixed Original Mode: 30 sheets (A4S/A3, B5S/B4, LTS/DLT, 80 g/m2, 20 lb.) 4 positions 1 staple: 3 positions (Front, Rear, Rear-Slant) 2 staple: 1 position Cartridge (5,000 staples) 24 Vdc (from copier) 60 W Less than 53 kg (116.8 lb.) (without punch unit) Less than 55 kg (121.3 lb.) (with punch unit) 680 mm x 620 mm x 1030 mm (26.8" x 24.4" x 40.6")
Paper Weight
Tray Paper Capacity
Stapler Tray Capacity
Staple Position Staple Replenishment Power Source Power Consumption Weight Size (W x D x H)
SM
7-7
B264/B265
Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
Booklet Finisher (B546)

Paper Size Tray Proof tray Modes No staple mode Staple Rear Mode Front/Slant Rear/Slant 2 Staple Booklet tray Paper Weight Staple Mode Sizes A3 to A5, DLT to HLT A3 to A5, DLT to HLT A4 SEF, LG SEF, LT SEF A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B4 SEF, B5 LEF, DLT SEF, LG SEF, LT LEF/SEF A3 SEF, A4 LEF, B4 SEF, B5 LEF, DLT SEF, LT LEF A3 SEF, A4, LEF, B4 SEF, B5 LEF, DLT SEF, LT LEF A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, DLT SEF, LT SEF Weight 52 g/m to 163 g/m2, 14 to 42 lb 64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2, 17 to 21 lb 64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2, 17 to 21 lb 64 g/m2 to 128 g/m2, 17 to 34 lb (Cover sheet only)
2
Shift tray
Tray Stack mode Staple mode Saddle stitch mode
Paper Capacity*1
Tray Proof tray
Modes
No staple
Shift tray
Paper size A4 LEF, LT LEF or shorter A4 SEF, LT SEF or longer A4 LEF, LT LEF or shorter A4 SEF, LT SEF or longer A4 LEF, LT LEF or shorter A4 SEF, LT SEF or longer 1-5 sheets 6-10 sheets 11-15 sheets
Capacity 150 sheets 75 sheets 1000 sheets 500 sheet 750 sheets, or 30 sets *2 500 sheets, or 30 sets *2 25 sets 15 sets 10 sets
Staple
Booklet tray
*1
: 80 g/m2, 20 lb *2: Setting DIP SW 3 No. 5 to ON releases the 30 set limit.
B264/B265
7-8
SM
SPECIFICATIONS
Staple Capacity
Modes Staple
Paper size A4 LEF, LT LEF or shorter A4 SEF, LT SEF or longer
Staple Position
Staple Replenishment Power Source Power Consumption Dimensions (w x d x h) Weight:

*1
Saddle stitch Staple mode: 4 positions 1 staple: 3 positions (Rear, Front/Slant, Rear/Slant) 2 staples: 1 position Saddle stitch mode: 2 positions, 2 staples (center), fixed position Cartridge Staple: 5000 staples Saddle stitch: 2000 staples 24 Vdc (from copier) Less than 170 W 689 x 603 x 1055 mm 27.1 x 23.7 x 41.5 in. 49 kg (107.8 lb.)
Total capacity 50 sheets 30 sheets 15 sheets
: 80 g/m2, 20 lb
BRIDGE UNIT (B538)

Paper Size Standard sizes A6 lengthwise to A3 HLT to DLT Non-standard sizes Width: 100 to 305 mm Length: 148 to 432 mm 52 g/m2 ~ 135 g/m2, 16 lb. ~ 42 lb.
Paper Weight
LCT (B543)
Paper Size Paper Weight Tray Capacity Remaining Paper Detection Power Source Power Consumption Weight Size (W x D x H) A4 (S)/LT (S) 60 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2, 16 lb. ~ 28 lb. 1500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb.) 5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near end) 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from copier) 40 W Less than 17 kg (37.5 lb.) 390 mm x 500 mm x 390 mm (15.4" x 19.7" x 15.4")
SM
7-9
B264/B265
Specifications
PUNCH UNIT TYPE 1045 B377

PUNCH UNIT TYPE 1045 (B377) REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None
PUNCH UNIT B377

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1
1.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT.............................................................. 1
2. DETAILS...........................................................................................2
2.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM ...................................................................... 2 2.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ................................................................... 4
SM
B377
PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT

1.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT
To adjust the position of the punch holes in the paper feed direction, use SP6113 (Punch Hole Adjustment). The punch position can be adjusted by up to 4 mm using combinations of the 3 spacers provided with the finisher. To adjust the horizontal position of the holes, use the spacers provided with the punch unit.
[B]
[A]
B377R119.WMF
1. Rear cover ( x 4) 2. Punch unit [A] ( x 3, x 5) 3. Spacers [B]
SM
B377
Punch Unit B377
PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM
2. DETAILS
The punch unit punches holes in printed sheets, one by one. The punch unit is provided with a new punch mechanism to improve the accuracy of punching. NOTE: The illustrations below show the unit for Europe for 2/4 hole punching. The North American unit has five holes for 2/3 hole punching.
2.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM

[A] [F] [D] [E] [C]
[B]
B377D505.WMF
The punch motor [A] drives the punch mechanism. At the correct time after the trailing edge of the paper passes the finisher entrance sensor [B], the punch motor turns on and the paper stops. The punch clutch [C] turns and drives the punch heads [D]. The punch HP sensor [E] detects the home position for the actuator. The punch unit switches off when the cut-out in the punch shaft disk [F] enters the punch HP sensor. NOTE: SP6113 (Punch Hole Adjustment) adjusts the punch hole position in the sub scan direction for two holes (001 2-Hole) or for three holes (002 3Hole). Use the spacers provided with the punch unit to adjust the position of the punch in the main scan direction. For details, refer to the installation of the punch unit in section 1. Installation).
B377
SM
PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM
[C]
[D]
[B]
B377D504.WMF
When the finisher has received the command that changes the number of punch holes for the job, the punch hole motor [A] turns on until the actuator disk changes the status of the punch hole switch [B] (until it switches on or off). This indicates that the cover [C] and the punch cam [D] have moved to one side or the other to determine which punchers are used.
SM
B377
Punch Unit B377
[A]
PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION
2.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION
[A]
[B]
[C]
B377D506.WMF
Waste punchouts are collected in the punch waste hopper [A] below the punch unit inside the finisher. When the top of the punchout waste in the hopper reaches and actuates the hopper sensor [B], a message will be displayed on the operation panel after the current job is completed. This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed. When the waste hopper is taken out, the arm [C] moves down and this will actuate the sensor and display a message in the operation panel. This message is the same as for the hopper full condition.
B377
SM

1000 SHEET FINISHER SR790 REVISION HISTORY Page Date None Added/Updated/New

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 MAIN PCB .................................................................................................... 1 1.2 STAPLER UNIT............................................................................................ 2 1.3 MOTORS...................................................................................................... 3 1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR.................................................................................... 3 1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR .............................................................................. 3 1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR ........................... 4 1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR .......................................................... 4 1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS........................................................................... 5 1.4.1 PREPARATION ................................................................................... 5 1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR .................................................................. 6 1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR..................................................... 6 1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR .............................................................. 7 1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR ............................................................... 7
2. TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................................................8
2.1 JAM DETECTION......................................................................................... 8
3. SERVICE TABLES...........................................................................9
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ............................................................................. 9
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ..........................................................10

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 10 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT...................................................... 11 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION............................................ 13 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 15 JUNCTION GATES .................................................................................... 16 Upper Tray Mode ................................................................................... 16 Sort/Stack Mode .................................................................................... 16 Staple Mode........................................................................................... 16 4.6 UPPER TRAY............................................................................................. 17 4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS ................................................ 18 4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM ..................................................................... 19 4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM............................... 20 4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE................................................................................. 21 4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM .......................................................................... 22 4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM ........................................... 23 4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM ........................................................... 24
SM
B408
MAIN PCB

CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols. : See or Refer to : Screws : Connector : E-ring
: Clip ring
1.1 MAIN PCB

[A]
1000-Sheet Finisher B408
B408R110.WMF
[B]
B408R109.WMF
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2) 2. Main PCB [B] ( x 4, All )
SM
B408
STAPLER UNIT
1.2 STAPLER UNIT

1. Side cover [A] ( x 2) 2. Open exit guide plate [B] 3. Upper side cover [C] ( x 2) [A] [C] [B]
B408R102.WMF
4. Front cover support plate [D] ( x 1) 5. Front cover [E] 6. Front inner cover [F] ( x 2)
[D] [E] [F]
B408R113.WMF
7. Harness [G] 8. Unhook the spring [H] 9. Turn the stapler unit [I] and take it out. 10. Bracket [J] ( x 2) [H] [J]
[G]
[I]
B408R114.WMF
B408
SM
MOTORS
1.3 MOTORS
1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR
1. Rear cover ( 1.1) 2. Shift motor [A] ( x 2, x 1) [A]
B408R123.WMF
1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR

1. Rear cover ( 1.1) 2. Stapler motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
[A]
B408R124.WMF
SM
B408
MOTORS
1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR

1. Rear cover ( 1.1) 2. Motor assembly [A] ( x 4, x 2) 3. Upper transport motor [B] ( x 4) 4. Exit motor [C] ( x 4) [A]
[B] [C]
B408R112.WMF
1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Main PCB ( 1.1) 2. Lower transport motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
[A]
B408R111.WMF
B408
SM
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS

1.4.1 PREPARATION
1. Front cover and inner cover ( 1.2) 2. Upper side cover [A] ( x 2) 3. Upper tray [B] ( x 1) [B] [A]
[C]
B408R116.WMF
5. Loosen the 2 screws [D]. 6. Lower the lower tray guide plate [E].
[D]
B408R117.WMF
7. Guide plate [F] ( x 4)
[F]
B408R118.WMF
SM
B408
4. Lower side cover [C] ( x 2)
[E]
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR

1. Stack height sensor assembly [A] ( x 1) [A] 2. Stack height sensor [B] ( x 1)
[B]
B408R121.WMF
1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR

1. Stapler tray paper sensor [A] ( x 1)
B408R120.WMF
[A]
B408
SM
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR

1. Lower tray lift motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
[A]
B408R119.WMF
1. Stack feed-out motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
[A]
B408R122.WMF
SM
B408
1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR
JAM DETECTION
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 JAM DETECTION
Shift Mode Staple Jam Entrance sensor: On check Entrance sensor: Off check Lower tray exit sensor: On check Tray exit sensor: Off check Stapler tray entrance sensor: On check Stapler tray entrance sensor: Off check Lower tray exit sensor: On check Lower tray exit sensor: Off check Content The entrance sensor does not turn on within the normal time after the main machine exit sensor turns on The entrance sensor does not turn off within the normal time after it turns on. The lower tray exit sensor does not turn on within the normal time after the entrance sensor turns off. The tray exit sensor does not turn off within the normal time after it turns on. The stapler tray entrance sensor does not switch on within the normal time after the entrance sensor switched on. The staple tray entrance sensor does not turn off within the normal time after it turns on. The lower exit sensor does not turn on after the feed-out pawl feeds out the outputs. The lower exit sensor turns on when the feed-out pawl returns to its home position after feeding out the outputs.
B408
SM
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those listed in the table below.
SW100 1 0 1 2 0 0 Description Normal operation mode (Default) Packing mode.
Before packing the machine, do the following: Set switch 1 to 1 then back to zero. The lower tray moves to the lowest position. Then turn off the main switch. After unpacking the machine, do the following: After turning the main switch back on, the lower tray returns to home position automatically.
SM
B408
GENERAL LAYOUT
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
2 1 13 4 5 6 12 7 3
11
10 8 9
B408D101.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
B408
Upper Tray Upper Tray Exit Roller Entrance Roller Tray Junction Gate Upper Transport Roller Stapler Junction Gate Lower Transport Rollers
10
8. Stapler 9. Stack Feed-out Belt 10. Positioning Roller 11. Shift Roller 12. Lower Tray 13. Lower Tray Exit Roller
SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1 11 4 10 5 2 3
9
B408D102.WMF
12
19 18 20
13 14
21
17
16
B408D103.WMF
15
1. Upper Cover Switch 2. Paper Limit Sensor 3. Entrance Sensor 4. Exit Guide Plate Motor 5. Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor 6. Front Door Safety Switch 7. Stack Height Sensor 8. Lower Tray Exit Sensor 9. Lower Tray Upper Limit Switch 10. Shift HP Sensor 11. Shift Motor
12. Jogger Fence HP Sensor 13. Positioning Roller Solenoid 14. Stapler HP Sensor 15. Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor 16. Stapler Tray Paper Sensor 17. Stapler Hammer Motor 18. Staple Sheet Sensor 19. Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor 20. Stapler Rotation HP Sensor 21. Staple Sensor
SM
11
B408
22 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 23
24
B408D104.WMF
22. Tray Junction Gate Solenoid 23. Lower Tray Lift Motor 24. Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor 25. Stapler Motor 26. Jogger Fence Motor 27. Stack Feed-out Motor 28. Main Board 29. Lower Transport Motor 30. Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid 31. Exit Motor 32. Upper Transport Motor
B408
12
SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Symbol Motors M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 Sensors S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 Solenoids SOL1 SOL2 Tray Junction Gate Stapler Junction Gate Drives the tray junction gate. Drives the stapler junction gate. 22 30 Entrance Paper Limit Jogger Fence HP Shift HP Stack Feed-out Belt HP Stapler HP Exit Guide Plate HP Stapler Tray Entrance Lower Tray Exit Stack Height Lower Tray Lower Limit Stapler Tray Paper Staple Sheet Stapler Rotation HP Staple Detects copy paper entering the finisher and checks for misfeeds. Detects when the paper stack height in the upper tray is at its limit. Detects when the jogger fence is at home position. Detects when the shift roller is at home position. Detects when the stack feed-out belt is at home position. Detects when the stapler is at home position. Detects when the exit guide plate is at home position. Detects copy paper entering the stapler tray and checks for misfeeds. Checks for misfeeds. Detects the top of the copy paper stack. Detects when the lower tray is at its lower limit position. Detects when there is copy paper in the stapler tray. Detects the leading edge of the staple sheet. Detects when the staple hammer is at home position. Detects whether there are staples in the staple cartridge. 3 2 12 10 19 14 5 15 8 7 24 16 18 20 21
Name Upper Transport Lower Transport Jogger Fence Staple Hammer Stack Feed-out Exit Guide Plate Exit Lower Tray Lift Shift Stapler
Function Drives the entrance roller and upper transport rollers. Drives the lower transport rollers and the positioning roller. Drives the jogger fences. Drives the staple hammer. Drives the stack feed-out belt. Opens and closes the exit guide plate. Drives the exit roller. Moves the lower tray up or down. Moves the shift roller from side to side. Moves the stapler unit from side to side.
Index No. 32 29 26 17 27 4 31 23 11 25
SM
13
B408

Symbol SOL3 Switches SW1 SW2 SW3 PCBs PCB1 Main Controls the finisher and communicates with the copier/printer. 28 Lower Tray Upper Limit Front Door Safety Upper Cover Detects when the lower tray is at its upper limit position. Cuts the dc power when the front door is opened. Cuts the dc power when the upper cover is opened. 9 6 1 Name Positioning Roller Function Moves the positioning roller. Index No. 13
B408
14
SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
4.4 DRIVE LAYOUT

1 2 4 5
3 6
7 8 9
B408D107.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Exit Motor Upper Transport Motor Lower Transport Motor Shift Motor Exit Guide Plate Motor
6. 7. 8. 9.
Lower Tray Lift Motor Stack Feed-out Motor Jogger Motor Stapler Motor
SM
15
B408
B408D105.WMF
B408D106.WMF
JUNCTION GATES
4.5 JUNCTION GATES
[A] [C] [B] [D]
B408D108.WMF
Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or down by the combination of the tray junction gate [A] and stapler junction gate [B]. These gates are controlled by the tray junction gate solenoid [C] and stapler junction gate solenoid [D].
Upper Tray Mode The tray junction gate solenoid remains off. The copies go up to the upper tray. Sort/Stack Mode The tray junction gate solenoid turns on and the stapler junction gate solenoid remains off. The copies are sent to the lower tray directly. Staple Mode The tray junction gate solenoid and the stapler junction gate solenoid both turn on.
The copies go down to the jogger unit.
B408
16
SM
UPPER TRAY
4.6 UPPER TRAY
[A]
B408D109.WMF
SM
17
B408
When the paper limit sensor [A] switches on during feed-out for each of three consecutive sheets of paper, paper overflow is detected.
LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS

[G] [A] [D]
[B]
[F]
[E]
[C]
B408D112.WMF
The vertical position of the lower tray [A] depends on the height of the copied paper stack on the lower tray. The stack height sensor feeler [B] contacts the top of the stack, and the lower tray lift motor [C] controls the tray height. When the lower tray reaches its lowest possible position, the actuator [D] turns on the lower tray lower limit sensor [E], and copying stops. Tray Up When the copy paper on the tray is removed, the stack height sensor [F] turns off and the tray lifts up. Then, the tray stops when the sensor turns on again (the tray pushes up the feeler). If the stack height sensor fails, the lower tray upper limit switch [G] detects the tray and stops the motor. This is a safety measure against stack height sensor failure. Sort/Stack Mode (Tray Down) Every five sheets of paper, the tray goes down until the sensor turns off again. Then, it goes up until the sensor is on again. Staple Mode (Tray Down) After a stapled copy is fed out, the tray goes up for 220 ms and stops for 300 ms. Then, it goes down for 1 second, waits for 500 ms, then goes up until the sensor turns on.
B408
18
SM
PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM
4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM

[F] [B] [A] [D] [E] [C]
B408D110.WMF
In the sort/stack mode, the shift roller [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of copies. The horizontal position of the shift roller is controlled by the shift motor [B] and the shift gear disk [C]. After the trailing edge of the copy passes the upper transport roller, the shift motor turns on, driving the shift gear disk and the link [D]. After the paper is delivered to the lower tray [E], the shift roller moves to its home position, which is detected by the shift HP sensor [F]. Then, when the trailing edge of the next copy passes the upper transport roller, the shift roller shifts again. This operation is done every sheet. When the trailing edge of each page in the next set of copies passes the upper transport roller, the shift roller shifts in the opposite direction.
SM
19
B408
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
B408D113.WMF
[B] [E]
[F]
[A] [C]
B408D114.WMF
[D] In staple mode, each sheet of copy paper is vertically and horizontally aligned when it arrives in the jogger unit. For the vertical paper alignment, the positioning roller solenoid [A] turns on shortly after the stapler tray entrance sensor [B] turns off, and the positioning roller [C] pushes the copy against the bottom of the stack stopper [D]. For the horizontal paper alignment, the jogger front fence [E] and the rear fence [F] move to the waiting position, which is 18 mm away from the side of the paper. When aligning the paper vertically, the jogger fence moves in 14 mm from the waiting position. After the vertical position has been aligned, the jogger fence pushes the paper 4 mm against the rear fence to align the paper horizontally. Then the jogger fence moves back to the previous position.
B408
20
SM
EXIT GUIDE PLATE
4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE

[B] [C] [D] [A]
B408D111.WMF
When stacking a large size of paper (such as A3, DLT) in the jogger unit, the leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers. To prevent the paper from running into the exit rollers and not being aligned correctly, the exit guide plate [A] is moved up to make a gap between the exit rollers. This operation is done for all paper sizes, but is only needed for the larger sizes. The exit guide plate motor [B] and exit roller release cam [C] control the exit guide plate movement. When the exit guide plate motor starts, the cam turns and the exit guide plate moves up. When stapling is finished, the exit guide plate motor turns on again to close the exit guide plate. When the exit guide plate HP sensor [D] turns on, the motor stops.
SM
21
B408
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM

[E] [B]
[D] [C] [A]

B408D116.WMF
The staple hammer motor [A] drives the staple hammer. The staple sheet sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the staple sheet at the stapling position to prevent the hammer from operating if there are no staples at the stapling position. If there is no staple cartridge in the stapler unit or no staples in the staple cartridge, staple end is indicated on the operation panel. The stapler sensor [C] detects this. The stapler rotation HP sensor [D] checks whether the staple hammer mechanism returns to home position after each stack has been stapled. When excessive load is applied to the staple hammer motor, the copier detects a staple jam. When a staple jam has occurred, the jammed staple is inside the staple cartridge [E]. Therefore, the jammed staple can be removed easily after pulling out the staple cartridge.
B408
22
SM
STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM
4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
B408D117.WMF
If two-staple-position mode is selected, the stapler moves to the front stapling position first, then moves to the rear stapling position. However, for the next copy set, it staples in the reverse order (at the rear side first, then at the front side). After the job is completed, the stapler moves back to its home position. The stapler HP sensor [B] detects this.
SM
23
B408
The stapler motor moves the stapler [A] from side to side. After the start key is pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM
4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM
[A]
[B] [C] [D]
B408D118.WMF
After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts. The pawl [B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds it to the shift roller. The shift roller takes over stack feed-out after the leading edge reaches this roller. Just before the stapled stack passes through the lower tray exit sensor, the stackfeed-out motor turns off until the shift rollers have completely fed the stack out to the lower tray. Then, the stack-feed-out motor turns on again until the pawl [B] actuates the stack feed-out belt home position sensor [D].
B408
24
SM
BRIDGE UNIT TYPE 2045 B538

BRIDGE UNIT TYPE 2045 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None
BRIDGE UNIT B538

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION.............................................1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................ 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................... 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................ 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.............................................. 3 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 4
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION ..............................................................5

2.1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM.................................................................. 5

3.1 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT.................................................................. 6
SM
B538
SPECIFICATIONS
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: Standard sizes A6 lengthwise to A3 HLT to DLT Non-standard sizes Width: 100 to 305 mm Length: 148 to 432 mm 52 g/m2 ~ 135 g/m2, 16 lb ~ 42 lb
Paper Weight:
SM
B538
Bridge Unit B538
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1 2
7 3 6 5 4
A688V500.WMF
1. Upper Exit Roller 2. Junction Gate Solenoid 3. Junction Gate 4. 1st Transport Roller
5. Relay Sensor 6. 2nd Transport Roller 7. Left Exit Roller
B538
SM

1 2
7 4 6 5 1. Left Guide Switch 2. Right Guide Switch 3. Tray Exit Sensor 4. Cooling Fan Motor
A688V501.WMF
5. Tray Exit Unit Switch 6. Junction Gate Solenoid 7. Relay Sensor

Symbol Motors M1 Sensors S1 S2 Switches SW1 SW2 SW3 Solenoids SOL1 Junction Gate Moves the junction gate to direct the paper to the upper or left tray. 6 Name Cooling Fan Function Cools the transport unit. Index No. 4
Tray Exit Relay
Checks for misfeeds. Checks for misfeeds.
3 7
Tray Exit Unit Right Guide Left Guide
Detects when the tray exit unit is opened. Detects when the right guide is opened. Detects when the left guide is opened.
5 2 1
Bridge Unit B538
SM
B538
DRIVE LAYOUT
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT

2 1
3 4
A688V502.WMF
1. Left Exit Roller 2. 2nd Transport Roller
3. Upper Exit Roller 4. 1st Transport Roller
B538
SM
JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
2.1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
[C] [B]
[A] [D]
A688D500.WMF
Depending on the selected mode, the copies are directed up or down by the junction gate [A], which is controlled by the junction gate solenoid [B]. When the upper tray is selected, the junction gate solenoid turns on and the paper is sent to the upper tray through the upper exit roller [C]. When the left tray or the finisher is selected, the junction gate stays off and the paper is sent to the left tray or the finisher through the transport rollers [D] and the left exit roller.
SM
B538
Bridge Unit B538
EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

3.1 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[B] [A]
A688R500.WMF
[C]
[D]
A688R501.WMF
1. Remove the whole unit from the copier. 2. Remove the rear upper cover [A] (1 screw). 3. Remove the upper cover unit [B] (2 screws, 2 connectors). 4. Remove the exit guide plate [C] (2 screws). 5. Replace the exit sensor [D] (1 connector).
B538
SM

PAPER TRAY UNIT B542 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT ............................................................................. 1 Right Cover.............................................................................................. 1 Rear Cover .............................................................................................. 1 1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ........................................................................... 2 1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS .................. 2 Pick-up Roller .......................................................................................... 2 Paper Feed Roller.................................................................................... 2 Separation Roller ..................................................................................... 2 1.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT.................................................................. 3 1.4 PAPER FEED AND RELAY Clutch REPLACEMENT................................... 4 1.5 Paper FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT ............................................................ 5 Upper Paper Feed Unit ............................................................................ 6 Lower Paper Feed Unit ............................................................................ 6 1.6 PAPER END, TRAY LIFT, AND RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT........... 7 Paper End Sensor ................................................................................... 7 Tray Lift Sensor ....................................................................................... 7 Relay Sensor ........................................................................................... 7
2. SERVICE TABLES...........................................................................8
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 DIP SWITCHES............................................................................................ 8 test points ..................................................................................................... 8 switches........................................................................................................ 8 fuses............................................................................................................. 8 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................... 9 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT...................................................... 10 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION............................................ 11 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 12 Pick-up and separation roller release mechanism ...................................... 13 Paper lift mechanism .................................................................................. 14 Paper end detection ................................................................................... 16 Paper Height Detection .............................................................................. 17
3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONs ............................................................9
4. SPECIFICATIONS..........................................................................18
SM
B542
SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: Paper Weight: Tray Capacity: Paper Feed System: Paper Height Detection: Power Source: A5 lengthwise to A3 HLT lengthwise to DLT 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb ) x 2 FRR (Feed and Reverse Roller) 4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end) 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from the copier) 120 Vac: 115 V version (from the copier) 220 ~ 240 Vac: 224/240 V version (from the copier) 50 W 25 kg 540 mm x 600 mm x 270 mm
Paper Tray Unit B542 B542
60 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2, 16 lb ~ 28 lb
Power Consumption: Weight: Size (W x D x H):
SM

1 2
10 3 4 9 5 6 7
8 1. Upper Pick-up Roller 2. Upper Paper Feed Roller 3. Upper Relay Roller 4. Upper Separation Roller 5. Lower Relay Roller
A682V500.WMF
6. Lower Paper Feed Roller 7. Lower Separation Roller 8. Lower Pick-up Roller 9. Lower Tray 10. Upper Tray
B542
SM

1 19 18 17 16 6 7 8 9 10 2
5
Paper Tray Unit B542
12 13 15 14
11
A682V501.WMF
1. Main Board 2. Upper Tray Switch 3. Lower Tray Switch 4. Tray Motor 5. Upper Lift Sensor 6. Relay Clutch 7. Upper Paper Feed Clutch 8. Tray Lift Motor 9. Lower Paper Feed Clutch 10. Vertical Guide Switch
11. Lower Lift Sensor 12. Lower Paper End Sensor 13. Lower Relay Sensor 14. Upper Relay Sensor 15. Upper Paper End Sensor 16. Lower Paper Height 2 Sensor 17. Lower Paper Height 1 Sensor 18. Upper Paper Height 2 Sensor 19. Upper Paper Height 1 Sensor
SM
B542

Symbol Motors M1 M2 Name Tray Tray Lift Function Drives all rollers. Lifts the upper and lower tray bottom plates (there are two motors in this unit, one for each tray. Index No. 4 15
Sensors S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 Switches SW1 SW2 SW3 Upper Tray Lower Tray Vertical Guide Informs the copier when the upper tray is set in the machine. Informs the copier when the lower tray is set in the machine. Detects whether the vertical guide is opened or not. 2 3 10 Upper Lift Lower Lift Upper Paper End Lower Paper End Upper Relay Lower Relay Upper Paper Height 1 Upper Paper Height 2 Lower Paper Height 1 Lower Paper Height 2 Detects when the paper in the upper tray is at the correct feed height. Detects when the paper in the lower tray is at the correct feed height. Informs the copier when the upper tray runs out of paper. Informs the copier when the lower tray runs out of paper. Detects misfeeds. Detects misfeeds. Detects the amount of paper in the upper tray. Detects the amount of paper in the upper tray. Detects the amount of paper in the lower tray. Detects the amount of paper in the lower tray. 5 11 15 12 14 13 17 16 19 18
Magnetic Clutches Upper Paper MC1 Feed Lower Paper MC2 Feed MC3 Relay PCBs PCB1 Main
Starts paper feed from the upper tray. Starts paper feed from the lower tray. Drives the transport rollers.
7 9 6
Controls the paper tray unit and communicates with copier.
B542
SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT

1 2 3
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
A682V502.WMF
1. Tray Motor 2. Relay Clutch 3. Upper Paper Feed Clutch 4. Lower Paper Feed Clutch 5. Lower Relay Roller 6. Lower Separation Roller
7. Lower Paper Feed Roller 8. Lower Pick-up Roller 9. Upper Separation Roller 10. Upper Relay Roller 11. Upper Paper Feed Roller 12. Upper Pick-up Roller
SM
B542
PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM
2.1 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM
[E]
[A]
[D]
A682500.WMF
[E] [C]
[A]
[B]
A682D501.WMF
When the paper tray [A] is not inside the paper tray unit, the separation roller [B] is away from the paper feed roller [C], and the pick-up roller [D] stays in the upper position. When the paper tray is put into the paper tray unit, it pushes the release lever [E]. This causes the pick-up roller to move down (top diagram) and the separation roller to move into contact with the paper feed roller (bottom diagram).
B542
SM
PAPER LIFT MECHANISM
2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

[E] [H]
[D]
[A]
Paper Tray Unit B542 B542
[F] [C] [G]
[B]
A682D502.WMF
The paper tray switch [A] detects when the paper tray [B] is placed in the machine. When the machine detects that the paper tray is in the machine, the tray lift motor [C] rotates and the coupling gear [D] on the tray lift motor engages the pin [E] on the lift arm shaft [F]. Then the tray lift arm [G] lifts the tray bottom plate [H].
SM
PAPER LIFT MECHANISM
[C]
[B]
[A]
A682D504.WMF
When the paper tray is placed in the machine, the pick-up roller [A] lowers. When the top sheet of paper reaches the proper height for paper feed, the paper pushes up the pick-up roller, and the actuator [B] on the pick-up roller supporter activates the lift sensor [C] to stop the tray lift motor. After several paper feed cycles, the paper level gradually lowers and the lift sensor is de-activated. The tray lift motor turns on again until this sensor is activated again. When the tray is drawn out of the machine, the tray lift motor coupling gear disengages the pin on the lift arm shaft, and the tray bottom plate then drops under its own weight.
B542
SM
PAPER END DETECTION
2.3 PAPER END DETECTION

[B] [A] [D]
A682D503.WMF
[C] If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper end feeler [A] is raised by the paper stack and the paper end sensor [B] is deactivated. When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout [C] in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated. When the paper tray is drawn out, the paper end feeler is lifted up by the pick-up roller supporter [D].
SM
B542
PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION

The amount of paper in the tray is detected by the combination of two paper height sensors, [A] and [B]. When the amount of 2 paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever [C] moves up and the actuator [D] which is mounted on the same drive shaft as the pressure lever rotates. The following combination of sensor signals is sent to the copier.
Amount of Paper Full Near Full Near End 1 Near End 2 Paper Height Sensor 1 OFF ON ON OFF Paper Height Sensor 2 ON ON OFF OFF
[A]
[B] Full
[D]
34 33 11 35
[C]
Near Full
34 33 11 35
Near End 1
34 33 11 35
Near End 2
36 34 33 11 35
A682D505.WMF
B542
10
SM
DIP SWITCHES
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCHES
1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 DPS101 4 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 1 7 0 0 1 0 8 0 1 1 1 Description
Default Free run, feed from upper tray Free run, feed from lower tray Free run, feed from upper and lower trays alternately
NOTE: 1) Do not use any other settings. 2) To do the free run, proceed as follows: 1. Remove the paper from the tray (this is because the machine has no jam detection). 2. Set DPS101 for the required free run as shown above. 3. Turn the main power switch off, wait a few seconds, then switch on. 4. Press SW101 to start the free run. 5. To stop the free run, press SW102.
3.2 TEST POINTS

No. TP100 TP101 TP103 TP104 TP105 TP106 Label (24 V) (GND) (TXD) (RXD) (5 V) (GND) Monitored Signal +24 V Ground TXD to the copier RXD from the copier +5 V Ground
3.3 SWITCHES
No. SW101 SW102 Function Starts the free run Stops the free run
3.4 FUSES
No. FU101 Function Protects the 24 V line.
SM
11
B542
COVER REPLACEMENT

4.1 COVER REPLACEMENT
[A]
A682R500.WMF
[B]
Right Cover
1. Remove the right cover [A] (2 screws).
Rear Cover
1. Remove the rear cover [B] (2 screws).
B542
12
SM
ROLLER REPLACEMENT
4.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT

4.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS
[B]
[A] [C]
A682R501.WMF
1. Remove the paper tray.
Pick-up Roller
2. Replace the pick-up roller [A].
Paper Feed Roller

2. Replace the paper feed roller [B] (1 snap ring).
Separation Roller
2. Replace the separation roller [C] (1 snap ring).
SM
13
B542
TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT
4.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
A682R502.WMF
1. Remove the rear cover. 2. Remove the tray motor [A] (1 connector, 3 screws).
B542
14
SM
PAPER FEED AND RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
4.4 PAPER FEED AND RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

[E] [D]
[C]
[F] [B] 1. Remove the rear cover. 2. Remove the upper paper feed clutch holder [A] (2 screws). 3. Remove the lower paper feed clutch holder [B] (2 screws). 4. Remove the gear holder [C] (3 screws, 1 spring, 1 bearing). 5. Replace the relay clutch [D] (1 connector). 6. Replace the upper feed clutch [E] (1 bushing, 1 connector). 7. Replace the lower feed clutch [F] (1 connector).
[A]
A682R503.WMF
SM
15
B542
PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
4.5 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT

[C]
[A]
A682R504.WMF
[D]
[B]
A682R505.WMF
1. Remove the rear cover. 2. Remove the upper and lower paper feed clutch holder. 3. Remove the gear holder. 4. Remove the upper feed clutch [A] or lower feed clutch [B]. 5. Remove the upper or lower gear [C, D].
B542
16
SM
PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[C] [D]
A682R506.WMF
[F]
[E]
A682R507.WMF
Upper Paper Feed Unit

6. Remove the docking bracket [A] (1 screw). 7. Remove the vertical transport cover [B] of the copier (1 snap ring). 8. Remove the upper paper feed unit [C] (2 screws, 1 connector).
Lower Paper Feed Unit

6. Remove the docking bracket [D] (1 screw). 7. Remove the vertical transport guide [E] (2 screws). 8. Remove the lower paper feed unit [F] (2 screws, 1 connector).
SM
17
B542
PAPER END, TRAY LIFT, AND RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT
4.6 PAPER END, TRAY LIFT, AND RELAY SENSOR [C] REPLACEMENT
[B] [A]
[D]
A682R508.WMF
1. Remove the paper feed unit.
Paper End Sensor

2. Replace the paper end sensor [A] (1 connector).
Tray Lift Sensor

2. Replace the tray lift sensor [B] (1 connector).
Relay Sensor
2. Remove the sensor bracket [C] (1 screw). 3. Replace the relay sensor [D] (1 connector).
B542
18
SM
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY RT45 B543

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY RT45 (B543) REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION.............................................1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................ 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................... 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................ 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.............................................. 4 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 5
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................6

2.1 PAPER FEED MECHANISM ........................................................................ 6 2.2 TRAY LIFT AND PaPER HEIGHT DETECTION MECHANISM ................... 7 Tray lifting conditions ............................................................................... 7 Tray lowering conditions .......................................................................... 7 2.3 TRAY UNIT SLIDE MECHANISM ................................................................ 8
3. SERVICE TABLES...........................................................................9
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 DIP SWITCHES............................................................................................ 9 test points ..................................................................................................... 9 switches........................................................................................................ 9 fuses............................................................................................................. 9
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........................................10

4.1 COVER REPLACEMENT ........................................................................... 10 Tray Cover ............................................................................................. 10 Front Cover............................................................................................ 10 Rear Cover ............................................................................................ 10 Right Lower Cover ................................................................................. 10 Upper Cover .......................................................................................... 10 4.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ......................................................................... 11 4.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP rollerS....................... 11 Pick-up Roller ........................................................................................ 11 Paper Feed Roller.................................................................................. 11 Separation Roller ................................................................................... 11 4.3 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT........................ 12 Tray Lift Sensor ..................................................................................... 12 Paper End Sensor ................................................................................. 12 4.4 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT............................................................ 13 4.5 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE............................................................ 14
SM
B543
SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: Paper Weight: Tray Capacity: Remaining Paper Detection: Power Source: Power Consumption: Weight: Size (W x D x H): A4 sideways/LT sideways 60 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2, 16 lb ~ 28 lb 1500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb) 5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near end) 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from copier) 40 W 17 kg 390 mm x 500 mm x 390 mm
Large Capacity Tray B543 B543
SM

1 2 3 4 5
A683V500.WMF
1. Relay Roller 2. Relay Sensor 3. Paper Feed Roller 4. Pick-up Roller
5. Paper End Sensor 6. Paper Tray 7. Separation Roller
B543
SM

17 16 15 14 5 13 6
Large Capacity Tray B543
2 3 4
8 12 11 10 9
A683V501.WMF
1. Relay Clutch 2. Paper Feed Clutch 3. LCT Motor 4. Paper Height 1 Sensor 5. Paper Height 2 Sensor 6. Paper Height 3 Sensor 7. Main Board 8. Side Fence Position Sensor 9. Lower Limit Sensor
10. LCT Set Sensor 11. Tray Cover Switch 12. Lift Motor 13. Down Switch 14. Relay Sensor 15. Paper End Sensor 16. Lift Sensor 17. Pick-up Solenoid
SM
B543

Symbol Motors M1 M2 Sensors S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 Switches SW1 SW2 Solenoids SOL1 Pick-up Controls up-down movement of the pick-up roller. 17 Tray Cover Down Stops the LCT lift motor when the tray cover is opened. Lowers the LCT bottom plate if pressed by the user. 11 13 Paper End Relay Lift Lower Limit Paper Height 1 Paper Height 2 Paper Height 3 LCT Set Side Fence Position Informs the copier when the paper has run out. Detects the copy paper coming to the relay roller and checks for misfeeds. Detects when the paper is at the correct paper feed height. Detects when the tray is completely lowered, to stop the LCT motor. Detects the paper height. Detects the paper height. Detects the paper height. Detects whether the LCT is correctly set or not. Detects when the side fence is set at the A4 size position. 15 14 16 9 4 5 6 10 8 Name LCT Lift Function Drives all rollers. Drives the paper tray up or down. Index No. 3 12
Magnetic Clutches MC1 Paper Feed MC2 Relay PCBs PCB1 Main
Drives the paper feed roller. Drives the relay roller.
2 1
Controls the LCT and communicates with the copier.
B543
SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT

10
9
6 7
A683V502.WMF
1. Relay Clutch 2. Paper Feed Clutch 3. LCT Motor 4. Tray Bottom Plate 5. Pick-up Roller
6. Tray Drive Belts 7. Lift Motor 8. Separation Roller 9. Paper Feed Roller 10. Relay Roller
SM
B543
PAPER FEED MECHANISM
2.1 PAPER FEED MECHANISM
[D] [A]
[B] [C]
A683D500.WMF
This machine uses the FRR (Feed and Reverse Roller) paper feed system (paper feed roller [A], separation roller [B], pick-up roller [C]). When the start key is pressed, the pick-up solenoid [D] energizes and the pick-up roller touches the paper.
B543
SM
TRAY LIFT AND PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION MECHANISM
2.2 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION MECHANISM

[D]
[F] [B] [G] [A] [H] [C]

A683D501.WMF
[E]
The lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of the tray bottom plate [B] through gears and timing belts [C].
Tray lifting conditions When the tray lift sensor [D] turns off in the following conditions, the tray lift motor raises the tray bottom plate until the tray lift sensor [D] turns on again. Just after the main switch is turned on During copying Just after the tray cover is closed Just after leaving the energy saving mode Tray lowering conditions In the following conditions, the lift motor lowers the tray bottom plate until the lower limit [E] sensor turns on. Just after the paper end sensor turns on Just after the down switch is pressed by the user
The amount of the paper in the tray is detected by combination of high/low outputs from three sensors (paper height sensor 1 [F], 2 [G], and 3 [H].)
Amount of paper Near end 25% 50% 75% 100% Paper Height Sensor 1 On (High) Off (Low) Off (Low) Off (Low) Off (Low) Paper Height Sensor 2 Off (Low) On (High) On (High) Off (Low) Off (Low) Paper Height Sensor 3 Off (Low) Off (Low) On (High) On (High) Off (Low)
SM
B543
TRAY UNIT SLIDE MECHANISM
2.3 TRAY UNIT SLIDE MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
A683D502.WMF
When there is a paper jam between the copier and the LCT, the user releases the lock lever [A] and can slide the LCT away from the copier to remove the jammed paper. When sliding the LCT back into position, the LCT is secured against the copier in the correct position by the docking pins [B] on the LCT.
B543
SM
DIP SWITCHES
3.
SERVICE TABLES
DPS101 3 4 5 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Default Free run
3.1 DIP SWITCHES

1 1 1 2 0 0 7 0 0 8 0 1
3.2 TEST POINTS

No. TP100 TP101 TP103 TP104 TP105 TP106 Label (24 V) (GND) (TXD) (RXD) (5 V) (GND) Monitored Signal +24 V Ground TXD to the copier RXD from the copier +5 V Ground
3.3 SWITCHES
No. SW101 SW102 Function Starts the free run Stops the free run
3.4 FUSES
SM
B543
NOTE: 1) Do not use any other settings. 2) To do the free run, proceed as follows: 1. Remove the paper from the LCT (this is because the machine has no jam detection). 2. Set DPS101 for the free run as shown above. 3. Turn the main switch off, wait a few seconds, then switch back on. 4. Press SW101 to start the free run. 5. To stop the free run, press SW102.
COVER REPLACEMENT

4.1 COVER REPLACEMENT
[D]
[F]
[B] [A]
[C]
[E]
A683R500.WMF
Tray Cover
1. Remove the tray cover [A] (1 snap ring).
Front Cover
1. Remove the front cover [B] (2 screws).
Rear Cover
1. Remove the tray cover. 2. Remove the cover hinge [C] (2 screws). 3. Remove the rear cover [D] (3 screws).
Right Lower Cover

1. Remove the right lower cover [E] (2 screws).
Upper Cover
1. Remove the front cover. 2. Remove the rear cover. 3. Remove the upper cover [F].
B543
10
SM
ROLLER REPLACEMENT
4.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT

4.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS
[A]
[C]
[D]
A683R501.WMF
1. Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position. 2. Open the tray cover.
Pick-up Roller
3. Replace the pick-up roller [A] (1 snap ring).
Paper Feed Roller

3. Replace the paper feed roller [B] (1 snap ring).
Separation Roller
3. Remove the guide plate [C] (2 screws). 4. Replace the separation roller [D] (1 snap ring).
SM
11
B543
[B]
TRAY LIFT AND PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT
4.3 TRAY LIFT AND PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[A] [C] [B]
A683R502.WMF
1. Remove the front and rear cover. 2. Remove the upper cover. 3. Remove the sensor bracket [A] (1 screw).
Tray Lift Sensor

3. Replace the tray lift sensor [B] (1 connector).
Paper End Sensor

3. Replace the paper end sensor [C] (1 connector).
B543
12
SM
RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT
4.4 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[B] [A]
[C]
A683R503.WMF
1. Pull out the LCT. 2. Remove the joint guide [A] (4 screws). 3. Remove the sensor bracket [B] (1 screw). 4. Replace the relay sensor [C] (1 connector).
SM
13
B543
SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE
4.5 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE

A4 LT
[B]
[A]
A4 LT
A683R504.WMF
1. Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position. 2. Remove the tray cover. 3. Remove the front and rear side fences [A, B] (1 screw each). 4. Install the side fences in the correct position.
B543
14
SM
1-BIN TRAY B544

1-BIN TRAY (B544) REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None
1-BIN TRAY B544

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION............................................ 1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................ 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT .................................. 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ........................................................ 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.............................................. 3
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................... 4

2.1 BASICS OPERATION .................................................................................. 4
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 5

3.1 COVER REMOVAL ...................................................................................... 5 Front Cover .............................................................................................. 5 Upper Cover............................................................................................. 5 Rear Cover............................................................................................... 5 3.2 PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT ............................................................. 6 3.3 ENTRANCE AND PAPER LIMIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ...................... 7 Paper Limit Sensor .................................................................................. 7 Entrance Sensor ...................................................................................... 7
SM
B544
SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: Paper Weight: Tray Capacity: Power Source: Power Consumption: Weight: Size (W x D x H): A5 lengthwise to A3 HLT to DLT 60 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2, 16 lb ~ 28 lb 125 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb) 5 Vdc, 24 Vdc (from copier) 15 W 4 kg 470 mm x 550 mm x 110 mm
SM
B544
1 Bin Tray B544
MECHANICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT

1 2
3 4
B376V500.WMF
5 2 7
4
B376V501.WMF
1. Paper Limit Sensor 2. Exit Roller 3. Entrance Sensor 4. Entrance Roller
5. Paper Sensor 6. Paper Tray 7. Tray Motor
B544
SM
1.3

1 2
4 8 7 1. 2. 3. 4. Motor Lock Sensor Main Board Tray Motor Right Cover Switch 6 5. 6. 7. 8. 5
B376V502.WMF
Paper Limit Sensor Paper Sensor Entrance Sensor Paper Indicator

Symbol Motors M1 Sensors S1 S2 S3 S4 Name Tray Entrance Paper Limit Paper Motor Lock Function Drives the entrance and exit rollers. Checks for misfeeds. Detects the paper stack limit in the tray. Detects whether there is paper in the tray. Detects whether the tray motor is turning. Detects whether the right cover is opened. Controls the 1-bin tray and communicates with the copier. Indicates when there is paper in the tray. Index No. 3 7 5 6 1 4
1 Bin Tray B544
Switches SW1 Right Cover PCBs PCB1 LEDs LED1 Main
Paper Indicator
SM
B544
BASIC OPERATION
2.1 BASIC OPERATION
[B] [C]
[A]
B376V501.WMF
[E] [B]
[D]
B376V500.WMF
When the leading edge of the first sheet of copy paper reaches the copiers hot roller, the tray motor [A] starts and turns off approximately 0.5 s after the trailing edge of the paper passes through the exit rollers [B]. The tray lock sensor [C] checks whether the tray motor rotates or not. When the tray lock sensor does not generate pulses for 300 ms while the tray motor is on, the copier will stop and display an SC code. The paper sensor [D] checks whether there is paper in the tray or not. The paper sensor turns on when paper is stacked in the tray, and the paper indicator is turned on. The paper limit sensor [E] detects when the tray is full. While a sheet of copy paper is passing this sensor, the sensor feeler is always pushed up by the paper. When the paper limit sensor stays on for more than the expected time (based on the copy speed and paper size), the copier indicates that the tray is full.
B544
SM
COVER REMOVAL

3.1 COVER REMOVAL
[B] [C]
[A]
B376R500.WMF
Front Cover
1. Remove the scanner unit if it is at the front. 2. Remove the front cover [A] (1 screw).
Upper Cover
1. Remove the scanner unit. 2. Remove the upper cover [B] (2 screws).
Rear Cover
1. Remove the scanner unit. 2. Remove the rear cover [C] (2 screws).
1 Bin Tray B544 SM 5 B544
PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT
3.2 PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B] 1. Remove the front cover. 2. Remove the exit guide plate [A] (1 screw). 3. Replace the paper sensor [B] (1 connector).
B376R501.WMF
B544
SM
ENTRANCE AND PAPER LIMIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
3.3 ENTRANCE AND PAPER LIMIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[A]
[B]
[C]
B376R502.WMF
1. Remove the front and upper covers.
Paper Limit Sensor

2. Replace the paper limit sensor [A] (1 connector).
Entrance Sensor
2. Remove the sensor bracket [B] (1 screw, 1 spring). 3. Replace the entrance sensor [C] (1 connector).
SM
B544
1 Bin Tray B544

TWO-TRAY FINISHER (B545) REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1
1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS.......................................................................... 1 1.1.2 INNER COVER.................................................................................... 1 1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER............................................................................... 2 1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR ................................................................................ 2 1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR ................. 3 1.5 STAPLER TRAY........................................................................................... 3 1.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH ....... 4 1.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR....................................................................... 5 1.8 LIFT MOTORS ............................................................................................. 5 1.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR ............................................................................... 7 1.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS......................................................... 8 1.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR........................................................ 8 1.12 STAPLER UNIT .......................................................................................... 9 1.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR.......................................................... 9 1.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR ................................................................................... 10 1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS ............................................................................ 10 tray Shift Sensors and tray release sensor ............................................ 11 1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR .................................................................. 11 1.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH........................................................ 11 1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD ......................................................................... 12 1.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ............................................... 12
2. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 13
2.1 TIMING CHARTS ....................................................................................... 13 2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SHIFT MODE WITH PUNCH TRAY 1 ........................ 13 2.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) SHIFT MODE WITH PUNCH TRAY 2 ........................ 14 2.1.3 A4(S)/LT(S) STAPLE MODE WITH PUNCH ..................................... 15 2.2 JAM DETECTION....................................................................................... 16
3. SERVICE TABLES........................................................................ 17
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS............................................................................ 17 3.2 TEST POINTS ............................................................................................ 17 3.3 FUSES........................................................................................................ 17
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ......................................................... 18

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 18 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 19 JUNCTION GATES .................................................................................... 20 TRAY SHIFTING ........................................................................................ 21 4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS............................................................. 21
i B545
SM
Tray 1 (Upper Tray) ............................................................................... 21 TRAY 2 (LOWER TRAY) ................................................................................... 23 4.5.1 TRAY 1 .............................................................................................. 23 Introduction ............................................................................................ 23 Normal and sort/stack modes ................................................................ 23 Staple mode........................................................................................... 24 Tray 1 release mechanism..................................................................... 25 4.5.2 TRAY 2 .............................................................................................. 27 4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM ............................................................... 28 4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM............................... 29 Vertical Paper Alignment .......................................................................29 Horizontal Paper Alignment ...................................................................29 4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM ............................................................................ 30 4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT..................................................................... 30 Stapler Rotation ..................................................................................... 30 Side-to-Side Movement .........................................................................30 4.7.2 STAPLER .......................................................................................... 31 4.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT ......................................................... 32 4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................ 33 4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM ........................................................... 33 4.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ........................................................ 34
B545
ii
SM
COVERS

1.1 COVERS
1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS
1. Top cover [A] ( x4) If the shift tray below is blocking the screw hole, remove the shift tray. 2. Bracket [B] ( x1) 3. Front door [C] 4. Rear cover [D] ( x4) [C] [B] [A] [D]
B352R101.WMF
1.1.2 INNER COVER

1. Front cover ( 1.1.1) 2. Inner cover [A] ( x3, tabs [B] x3)
[A]
[B]
B352R102.WMF
[B]
SM
B545
Two-Tray Finisher B545
POSITIONING ROLLER
1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER

1. Open the front door. 2. Positioning roller [A] ( x1) 3. Belt [B]
[B] [A]
B352R103.WMF
1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR

1. Top cover ( 1.1.1) 2. Open transport door [A] 3. Bracket [B] ( x1, ( x1) 4. Tray 1 exit sensor [C]
[B] [A]
[C]
B352R104.WMF
B545
SM
ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR
1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR

1. Entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x1, x1) 2. Entrance sensor [B] ( x1) 3. Stapler tray entrance sensor bracket [C] ( x1, x1) 4. Stapler tray entrance sensor [D] [C] [B] [A]
[D]
B352R105.WMF
[A]
[C]
[E] [D] [B]

1. External covers, front door, inner cover ( 2. Two clamps [A] 3. Harnesses [B] ( x8) 4. Stapler tray [C] ( x2 [D], x2 [E])
1.1.1, 1.1.2)
At the front of the finisher, pull the stapler tray toward you and lift it out.
SM
B545
1.5 STAPLER TRAY
UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH
1.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH

[B]
[D]
[A]
B352R201.WMF
[F] [E] [G]

B352R109.WMF
[C]
[H]
B352R110.WMF
1. External covers (
1.1.1)
2. Place one hand under tray 2 (the lower tray), press in on the gear [A] to release the tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends. 3. Place one hand under tray 1 (the upper tray), press in on the gear [B] to release the tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends. 4. Tray 1 back fence [C] ( x4) 5. Sensor stay [D] ( x2, ( x4) 6. Plastic bracket [E] ( x1) 7. Stack height sensors [F] 8. Metal bracket [G] ( x1) 9. Upper limit switch [H]
B545
SM
EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR
1.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR

1. Tray 1 back fence ( 1.6) 2. Exit guide plate motor [A] ( x2, x1) Disengage the shaft of the exit guide plate motor from the ring.
[A]
B352R111.WMF
1.8 LIFT MOTORS

1. Top cover and rear cover ( 2. Tray 1 back fence [A] ( 3. Sensor stay [B] ( x4) 1.1.1) [A] 1.6)
[B]
B352R203.WMF
SM
B545
LIFT MOTORS
4. Motor bracket [C] ( x3, x 2)
[C]
B352R204.WMF
5. Tray 1 lift motor [D] ( x2, drive belt) 6. Tray 2 lift motor [E] ( x2, drive belt) [D] [E]
B352R205.WMF
B545
SM
LOWER EXIT SENSOR
1.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR

1. Front door, external and internal covers. ( 1.1) 2. Exit guide plate motor ( 3. Guide plate [A] ( x1) Pull the shaft toward you through the round hole. 1.7)
[A]
B352R112.WMF
4. Guide plate exit assembly [B] ( x1, x1)

[B]
B352R113.WMF
5. Anti-static brush [C] ( x2) 6. Bracket guide exit [D] ( x2) 7. Lower exit sensor [E] ( x1, x1) [E]
[C]
[D]
B352R114.WMF
SM
B545
LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS
1.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS

1. Stapler tray ( 1.5) 2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x1, x2) 3. Bracket [B] ( x1) 4. Feeler [C] 5. Lower stack height sensors [D] [C] [D] [B] [A]
B352R116.WMF
1.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR

1. Stapler tray ( 1.5) 2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x1, x1) 3. Tray 2 position shunt sensor [B] ( x1) [B]
[A]
B351R202.WMF
B545
SM
STAPLER UNIT
1.12 STAPLER UNIT

1. Open the front door 2. Stapler unit [A] ( x1, x2) Hold the stapler holder [B] with one hand as you remove the stapler. Do not twist or rotate the stapler bracket as you remove it. [A]
[B]
B352R117.WMF
1.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR

1. Stapler unit ( 1.12) [D] [C] 2. Carefully rotate the stapler holder [A]. 3. Stapler cover [B] ( x1) 4. Sensor bracket [C] ( x1, x1) 5. Stapler rotation HP sensor [D] [A] [B]
Two-Tray Finisher B545 B545
B352R118.WMF
SM
TRAY 1 INTERIOR
1.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR

1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS
1. Tray 1 [A] ( x1) 2. Rear tray cover [B] ( x1) 3. Front tray cover [C] ( x1) 4. Bottom tray cover [D] ( x2) [C] [D] 5. Bottom bracket [E] ( x3)
B352R207.WMF
[A]
[B]
[E]
B352R208.WMF
B545
10
SM
TRAY 1 INTERIOR
1.14.2 TRAY SHIFT SENSORS AND TRAY RELEASE SENSOR

1. Tray 1 covers ( 1.14.1) [B] 2. Gear disk [A] ( x1) 3. Tray shift sensors [B] ( x1 each). 4. Tray release sensor [C] ( x1) [B] [C] [A]
B352R210.WMF
1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR

1. Tray 1 covers ( 1.14.1)
2. Motor bracket [A] ( x3, x1) 3. Tray 1 shift motor [B] ( x3, belt x1)
[A]
[B]
B352R209.WMF
1.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH

1. Tray 1 covers ( 1.14.1) 2. Back fence lock clutch [A] ( x1, x1)
B352R211.WMF
[A]
SM
11
B545
FINISHER MAIN BOARD
1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD

1. Rear cover ( 1.1.1) 2. Main PCB [A] ( x 6, All )
[A]
B352R206.WMF
1.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

To adjust the position of the punch holes in the paper feed direction, use the appropriate SP mode. To adjust the horizontal position of the holes, use the spacers provided with the punch unit. 1. Rear cover ( 1.1.1) 2. Punch unit [A] ( x3, x5) 3. Spacers [B] The punch position can be adjusted by up to 4 mm using combinations of the 3 spacers provided with the finisher.
[B]
[A]
B352R119.WMF
B545
12
SM
SM
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
0 1579 3157
Time (ms)
Main Unit Finisher 1 0 1 0

467 2046 3624
Feed-out ON
Shift ON 1 0 1 0
Feed-out OFF
Stop
2.1 TIMING CHARTS
Finisher Main Unit 1 0
Feed-out
Finisher
109 576 1688 2155 3266 3733
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
Entrance Sensor
1166 1633 2645 3112
OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF

131 ms 155 ms
2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SHIFT MODE WITH PUNCH TRAY 1
13
ON OFF ON Low OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
1250 ms 399 pulse (2 s) 34 pulse (700 ms) 66 pulse (1353 ms) 34 pulse (700 ms)
4223
4690
Upper Exit Sensor
500 ms
Entrance Motor
Upper Transport Motor
Exit Motor
Punch Motor
Punch Clutch
Punch H.P. Sensor
Tray 1 Shift Motor
Tray 1 Shift Sensor
B352D501.WMF
<Jam Detection>
TIMING CHARTS
B545
B545
Time (ms) Main Unit Finisher
0 1579 3157
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
TIMING CHARTS
Feed-out ON Shift ON
467 2046 3624
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Feed-out OFF Stop Finisher Main Unit Feed-out Finisher

109 576 1688 2155 3266 3774
1 0
Entrance Sensor
1054 1521 2633
OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF

131 ms 155 ms
2.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) SHIFT MODE WITH PUNCH TRAY 2
14
Lower Exit Sensor Entrance Motor Upper Transport Motor ON OFF Exit Motor Punch Motor Punch Clutch Punch H.P. Sensor Tray 2 Shift Motor Tray 2 Shift Sensor ON OFF
1250 ms
3100
4200
4667
500 ms
ON Low OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
<Jam Detection>
399 pulse (2 s) 34 pulse (700 ms)
34 pulse (700 ms) 66 pulse (1353 ms)
B352D502.WMF
SM
SM
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 20000
1579 3157 4736 6314 7893 576 1688 2155 3266 3733 4845 5312 6423 6890 8002 8469 1525 1772 3104 3351 4682 4929 7839 8086 9418 9665 6332 11068 6617 7320 11353 12056
Time (ms)
Main Unit Finisher
Feed-out ON
1 0
Staple ON
1 0
Feed-out OFF
1 0
Stop
1 0
Finisher Main Unit
Feed-out
1 0
Staple Done
Finisher
Entrance Sensor
ON OFF
109
Staple Tray Entrance Sensor
ON OFF
Staple Tray Paper Sensor
ON OFF
Lower Exit Sensor

155 ms
ON OFF
131 ms 156 ms 245 pulse (761 ms) 186 pulse (459 ms)
5304 6039 7765 1348 2927 4505 7662 9241
Upper Transport Motor
ON OFF
484 pulse (1194 ms)
87668816
15286
Lower Transport Motor
ON OFF
2.1.3 A4(S)/LT(S) STAPLE MODE WITH PUNCH
15
120 ms
1892 2252 2404 4092 5492 5520 6148 6772 6168 6814 4158 1932 3471 5049 5409 4006 2278 3511 5437 5698 5670 4032 5089 8206 8246 8741 8767 8893 8827 2338
Pre-stack Motor
ON OFF
Punch Motor
ON OFF
Punch Clutch
ON OFF
Jogger Motor
9785
9825 10256 10434 10145 10406 10256 10228 10904 10884 11545 11508
CCW OFF CW
100 ms 435 pulse (1073 ms)
5918
Stapler Motor
CCW OFF CW
Pre-stack Gate Solenoid
ON OFF
Stapler Gate Solenoid

100 ms
1872 2152 3451 5029 5567 3546 5309 5492
ON OFF
Positioning Roller Solenoid

6148
ON OFF
8186
8281
9705
10045
10228 10303
Staple Hummer Motor Staple Hummer H.P. Sensor

5718
ON OFF ON OFF
150 ms
10884
10454
6168
6767
Stack Fee-out Motor
10904 6958 6844
11503 11689 11575 13777
Stack Feed-out H.P. Sensor
CCW OFF CW
250 ms
OFF
6148 8300 11154 13036
Exit Motor
High Low OFF
Entrance Motor
ON OFF
<Jam Detection>
34 pulse (839 ms) 34 pulse (839 ms)
2000 ms
600 ms
1500 ms
TIMING CHARTS
B352D503.WMF
B545
102 pulse (2516 ms)
1260 ms
JAM DETECTION
2.2 JAM DETECTION

Mode
Shift Staple
Jam Entrance sensor: On check Entrance sensor: Off check Tray exit sensor: On check Tray exit sensor: Off check Stapler tray entrance sensor: On check Stapler tray entrance sensor: Off check Lower tray exit sensor: On check Lower tray exit sensor: Off check
Content The entrance sensor does not turn on within 399 pulse after the main machine exit sensor turns off. *1 The entrance sensor does not turn off within 34 pulse after it turns on. *1 The tray exit sensor does not turn on within 66 pulse after the entrance sensor turns off.
9 9 9 9
9 9
*1
9 9 9 9
The tray exit sensor does not turn off within 66 pulse after the tray exit sensor turns on. The stapler tray entrance sensor does not switch on within 102 pulses after the entrance sensor switched off.*1 The staple tray entrance sensor does not turn off within 34 pulse after the stapler tray entrance sensor turns on.*1 The lower exit sensor does not on within 1260 ms after the stack feed-out motor turns on. The lower exit sensor does not off within 1500 ms after it turns on.
*1
Counted by entrance motor pulses because timing differs for feed out.
B545
16
SM
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those described in the table below.
1 0 1 0 DPS101 2 3 0 0 1 1 0 0 4 0 0 1 Mode Default. Free run. Factory shipping. No paper. See the note below. Description
To position the shift trays for shipping, on the finisher main board set DIP SW4 ON, cycle the main machine power off and on, then set DIP SW4 OFF. The shift trays move automatically to the shipping position. After unpacking the machine again and switching on, turn all DIP switches off to put the machine into factory default mode.
3.2 TEST POINTS

No. TP101 TP102 TP103 TP104 Label GND 5V RXD TXD Monitored Signal Ground 5V Received command data Transmitted command data
Two-Tray Finisher B545 B545
3.3 FUSES
No. FU101 Function Protects 24 V.
SM
17
GENERAL LAYOUT
4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1 8 2
3 7 4
6 5
B352D118.WMF
1 Upper junction gate 2 Punch unit (option) 3 Stapler junction gate 4 Pre-stack tray
5 Stapler 6 Stapler tray 7 Tray 2 8 Tray 1
Tray junction gate: Directs paper either to the upper or lower exit. In staple mode, the stack always goes out to the lower exit. Stapler junction gate: Directs paper either to the lower exit or to the stapler tray. Pre-stack tray: When stapling multiple copies (A4 S, LT S, B5 S only) in the staple mode, the first sheet of the second copy waits here for the next sheet to feed while the previous stack is stapled. After the second copy is fed, the first and second sheets are fed together to the pre-stack tray. This delay allows enough time for the previous stack to be stapled without interrupting paper feed. Shift trays: Tray 1 (upper) and tray 2 (lower) shift side to side in the sort mode, and raise and lower to receive ejected copies. Stapler tray jogger: Employs positioning rollers and jogger fences to align stacks for stapling. Punch unit. Punches holes in stacked copies.
B545
18
SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
4.2
DRIVE LAYOUT
4 2 1 3 5
6 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 16
15 7
B352D104.WMF
17 18 1. Tray 1 lift motor 2. Entrance roller 3. Tray 2 lift motor 4. Upper exit roller 5. Tray 1 shift motor 6. Exit guide plate motor 7. Lower exit roller 8. Tray 2 shift motor 9. Exit motor 10. Lower transport motor 11. Pre-stack motor 12. Upper transport motor 13. Punch motor 14. Entrance motor 15. Stack feed-out motor 16. Jogger motor 17. Stapler motor 18. Stapler rotation motor
B352D103.WMF
SM
19
B545
JUNCTION GATES
4.3 JUNCTION GATES

The two junction gates can direct paper to three destinations. In sort/stack mode for tray 1, the tray junction solenoid [A] is on, and the copies go to the upper exit [A] (tray 1 is at the upper exit for sort/stack mode).
B302D506.WMF
In sort/stack mode for tray 2, both the tray junction gate solenoid [A] and stapler junction gate solenoid [B] are off, and copies go to the lower exit.
[A]
[B]
B302D505.WMF
In staple mode, the tray junction solenoid [A] is off and the stapler junction gate solenoid [B] is on, and copies go to the stapler tray.
[A]
[B]
B302D507.WMF
B545
20
SM
TRAY SHIFTING
4.4 TRAY SHIFTING

4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS
[F]
[A]
[B]
[C] [D] [E]
Tray 1 (Upper Tray)

In sort/stack mode, tray 1 [A] moves from side to side to separate the printed sets. The tray 1 shift motor [B], inside the shift tray, controls the horizontal position of tray 1 through the timing belt [C] and gear disk [D]. After one print set is delivered to tray 1, the shift motor turns on, driving the gear disk and the arm [E], and the tray drive unit moves to one side. Two shift sensors [F] detect when to stop this side-to-side movement. There is a cut-out in the gear disk. The shift tray moves in one direction until one of the shift sensors detects the cut-out. Then the shift tray stops. The next set of prints is then delivered, and the gear disk is turned in the opposite direction until the other shift sensor is activated.
SM
21
B545
B352D106.WMF
TRAY SHIFTING
Tray 2 (Lower Tray)
[C] [A]
[E] [D] [B]

B352D105.WMF
In sort/stack mode, tray 2 [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of prints. The shift mechanism for tray 2 is similar to that used for tray 1. However, when the tray 2 shift motor [B] turns on, the arm [D] moves the entire end fence [C] from side to side (not just the tray). After the gear disk has turned 180 degrees, the cut-out in the gear disk enters the tray half-turn sensor [E], and the motor stops. When the next set of prints is delivered, the motor turns on again, and moves the tray back to its previous position.
B545
22
SM
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS

4.5.1 TRAY 1
[I] [H] [A] [C] [F] [G] [E] [D] [C] [B]
B352D204.WMF
Introduction
The tray 1 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 1 [B] through gears and timing belts [C].
Normal and sort/stack modes

When the main switch is turned on, the tray is initialized at the upper position. To do this, the tray is moved up until upper stack height sensor 1 [D] is de-actuated. During printing, if upper stack height sensor 2 [E] is actuated, the tray 1 lift motor lowers the tray for a specified time. When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator [F] will pass through the tray 1 overflow sensor [G]. When the actuator drops below the sensor (to deactivate the sensor), the machine detects that the paper stack height has exceeded a certain limit. The upper limit switch for tray 1 [H] prevents the drive gear from being damaged if the upper stack height sensor 1 should fail. If the tray is raised to the tray positioning roller [I], the switch will automatically cut the power to the tray 1 lift motor.
SM
23
B545
Staple mode
[A]
[B]
[D] [G] [C] [F]
[E]
B352D204.WMF
In staple mode, stapled stacks can be delivered to either tray, but they can only go to the lower exit. So, if tray 1 is selected, tray 1 [A] moves down to the lower paper exit. Tray 1 lowers until the actuator [B] enters the tray 1 lower limit sensor [C]. Tray 1 then lifts up until lower stack height sensor 1 [D] is activated. When tray 1 is moved down to the lower exit, tray 2 must be moved down out of the way. So, tray 2 [E] is also lowered until the tray 2 shunt position sensor [F] detects tray 2 (or the top of the paper stack in tray 2). The method of paper height detection is the same as for the upper exit area. When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator will enter the tray 1 overflow 2 sensor [G]. When this happens, the machine detects that the paper stack height has exceeded the overflow limit.
B545
24
SM
Tray 1 release mechanism

When tray 1 is selected for staple mode, tray 1 must be moved down to the lower [D] paper exit. However, to move past the sensors at the lower exit, the tray must be moved away from the finisher. To do this, the tray 1 shift motor turns until the cut-out in the gear disk enters the tray release sensor [A]. At this time, the arm [B] has reached position [C], and is pushing against the plate [D], in towards the finisher. However, the plate is fixed, so the tray moves out away from the finisher. Then, the tray 1 shift motor stops, then the tray 1 lift motor lowers tray 1.
[A]
[B] [C]
B352D201.WMF
When the tray 1 lower limit sensor is activated (as described on the previous page), the tray has moved past the sensors at the lower exit. The tray 1 shift motor turns on again until the gear disk activates the tray shift sensor [E]. This moves the tray back against the finisher. Next, tray 1 lifts until the finisher detects that the tray is at the correct height.
[E]
B352D202.WMF
SM
25
B545
When tray 1 is at the lower exit, the tray lock solenoid [F] is on, and the lever [G] locks the tray. This prevents the user from moving the tray out of position (the first tray has some play when it is at the lower position). Before tray 1 goes back to the upper exit area, the tray lock solenoid [F] turns off to unlock the tray. In addition, the back fence lock clutch [H] turns on to hold the back fence [I]. This prevents the springs inside the back fence from suddenly contracting (these springs normally keep the tray steady during side-to-side shift). Then, tray 1 is released and it moves up to the upper exit area.
[I]
[F]
[G] [H]
B352D203.WMF
B545
26
SM
4.5.2 TRAY 2
[H]
[A] [B] [C] [E] [D] [C] [F] [G]

B352D109.WMF
Overflow condition
[D] [F] [E]
Multi Tray Staple Mode
Normal Mode
B352D500.WMF
The tray 2 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 2 [B] through gears and timing belts [C]. The paper height detection is the same as for tray 1. When the tray lowers during printing, the tray is judged to be overflowing when the tray 2 overflow sensor 1 [D] is off and the tray 2 overflow sensor-2 [F] is on (see Normal Mode in the above diagram). In the multi-tray staple mode (selected by the service technician), the machine detects that the paper stack height has exceeded the overflow limit when the actuator [E] enters the tray 2 overflow 1 sensor [D]. The lower limit sensor [G] for tray 2 detects when tray 2 is at its lowest limit and stops the tray 2 lift motor. The function of the tray 2 upper limit switch [H] is the same as for tray 1.
SM
27
B545
4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM
[B] [A]
[C] [D]
00MTY.WMF
This feature is available only when using A4 L, LT L, and B5 L. During stapling, the main machine must wait. This mechanism reduces the wait by holding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. It only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set print job. The pre-stack junction gate solenoid [A] switches on after the first sheet activates the entrance sensor. This directs the sheet to the pre-stack tray [B]. The pre-stack feed roller [C] stops for a specified time after the trailing edge of the paper has passed through the entrance sensor and stops the paper from leaving the pre-stack tray. At the same time, the pre-stack junction gate solenoid switches off, and the second sheet is sent to the paper guide [D]. The pre-stack feed roller (controlled by the pre-stack motor) starts to rotate again for a specified time after the trailing edge of the second page has been passed through the entrance sensor, and then both sheets are sent to the stapler tray together.
B545
28
SM
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM

[C]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[F]
[D]
B352D110.WMF
In staple mode, each sheet of copy paper is vertically and horizontally aligned when it arrives in the stapler tray.
Vertical Paper Alignment After the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor [A], the positioning roller solenoid [B] is energized for a specified time to push the positioning roller [C] into contact with the paper.
The positioning roller rotates to push the paper back and align the trailing edge of the paper against the stack stopper [D].
Horizontal Paper Alignment When the start key is pressed, the jogger motor [E] turns on and the jogger fences [F] move to the waiting position, which is 8 mm wider on both sides than the selected paper.
When the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor, the jogger motor turns on to move the jogger fences 5 mm towards the paper. After a short time, the jogger motor turns on again for the horizontal paper alignment then returns to the waiting position.
SM
29
B545
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM

4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT
[D] [B] [A] [E] [B]

B352D112.WMF
[C] The stapler can be moved from side to side or rotated according to the requirements of the selected stapling mode.
B352D113.WMF
Stapler Rotation
After the start key is pressed, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the staple unit [B] until the stapler rotation HP sensor [C] is activated. Then, the stapler moves from front to rear of the finisher. When oblique stapling at one position has been selected, after the stapler moves to the stapling position, the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler 45 degrees (clockwise) at the stapling position before the stapler fires.
Side-to-Side Movement
The stapler motor [D] moves the stapler from side to side. After the start key is pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position. The amount of movement required to reach the stapling position is determined by the size of the selected paper. If the two-staple mode is selected, the stapler moves to the front stapling position first, and then moves to the rear stapling position. However, for the next print set, it staples in the reverse order. After the stapling job is finished, the stapler returns to its home position, determined by the stapler HP sensor [E].
B545
30
SM
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.7.2 STAPLER
[D] [B]
[C]
B352D208.WMF
[A] The staple hammer is driven by the stapler hammer motor [A] inside the stapler.
As soon as the paper stack is aligned, the staple hammer motor starts. When stapling is finished, the staple hammer HP sensor [B] is turned on, and the staple hammer motor then stops. The staple end sensor [C] detects the staple end condition and whether the staple cartridge is installed or not. If a stapler cassette is not installed, or after the stapler cassette runs out of staples, a message is displayed in the operation panel. If this condition is detected during a print job, the indicator will appear, but the print job will not stop. The staple position sensor [D] detects if there is a staple sheet at the stapling position. After a new staple cartridge is installed, the staple hammer motor turns on to transfer the staple sheet until the staple position sensor is activated by the staple sheet. If a staple jam occurs and overloads the motor, this causes a staple jam message to appear on the operation panel.
SM
31
B545
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT

[A] [C] [I] [B]
B352D115.WMF
[D] [E]
[G]
[F]
[H]
B352D114.WMF
When stapling starts, the exit guide plate motor [A] switches on and opens the exit guide plate [B], so that the stapled stack can exit to the tray. The exit guide plate sensor [C] detects when to switch off the exit guide plate motor. After the prints have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [D] starts. The pawl [E] on the stack feed out belt [F] lifts the stapled set and feeds it to the tray [G]. The exit guide plate closes at a specified interval after the stapled prints have started to feed out. Then the exit roller takes over the stack feed-out. The stack feed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt home position sensor [H]. When tray 1 is passing this area on its way back up to the upper exit, the exit guide safety switch [I] cuts power to the tray lift motor if the guide is opened too far. This prevents damage to the users fingers if they are inside the lower exit when the tray is moving up.
B545
32
SM
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

The punch unit punches holes in printed sheets, one by one. The punch unit is provided with a new punch mechanism to improve the accuracy of punching. [A] [E] [D] [C]
[B]
B352D116.WMF
[I]
B377D101.WMF
[F]
[G]
4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM

The punch drive mechanism is driven by the punch motor [A]. Each sheet is positioned and punched by pressure from above. A certain time after the trailing edge of the paper passes through the finisher entrance sensor [B], the punch motor turns on and the paper stops. Then the punch clutch [C] turns on to make the punch holes. The home position is detected by the punch HP sensor [D]. When the cut-out in the punch shaft disk [E] enters the punch HP sensor, the punch clutch turns off. When the finisher has received the command that changes the number of punch holes, the punch hole motor [F] turns on until the disk changes the status of the punch hole switch [G] (until it switches on or off). This indicates that the cover [H] and the punch cam [I] have moved to one side or the other to change the number of holes.
SM
33
B545
[H]
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
4.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION
[A] [B] [C]
B352D117.WMF
Waste punchouts are collected in the punch waste hopper [A] below the punch unit inside the finisher. When the top of the punchout waste in the hopper reaches and actuates the hopper sensor [B], a message will be displayed on the operation panel after the current job is completed. This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed. When the waste hopper is taken out, the arm [C] moves down and this will actuate the sensor and display a message in the operation panel. This message is the same as for the hopper full condition.
B545
34
SM

BOOKLET FINISHER (B546) REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION............................................ 1
1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT....................................................... 1
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................... 2

2.1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM .................................................................. 2 2.1.1 SHIFT TRAY MODE ............................................................................ 2 A4/LT sideways or shorter ....................................................................... 2 Longer than A4 sideways......................................................................... 2 2.1.2 PROOF TRAY MODE.......................................................................... 3 2.1.3 BOOKLET STITCH MODE .................................................................. 3 2.2 PRE-STACK MECHANISM .......................................................................... 4 2.3 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM ....................................................................... 5 2.4 PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM .......................................................... 6 2.5 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM ............................................... 7 2.5.1 DRIVE.................................................................................................. 7 2.5.2 MOVEMENT ........................................................................................ 7 Front and Rear Stapling........................................................................... 7 Tow-position Stapling............................................................................... 7 2.6 STAPLER ..................................................................................................... 8 2.7 SHIFT TRAY MECHANISM.......................................................................... 9 2.8 BOOKLET UNIT GATE MECHANISM........................................................ 10 2.9 RELAY ROLLER AND POSITIONING PLATE MECHANISM .................... 12 2.10 POSITIONING ROLLER MECHANISM .................................................... 13 2.11 BOOKLET UNIT JOGGER MOVEMENT MECHANISM........................... 14 2.12 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT ...................................................................... 15 2.13 PAPER FOLDER MECHANISM ............................................................... 16
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 18

3.1 REMOVAL .................................................................................................. 18 3.1.1 UPPER DOOR................................................................................... 18 3.1.2 UPPER REAR COVER......................................................................19 3.1.3 LOWER REAR COVER.....................................................................19 3.1.4 TOP COVER...................................................................................... 20 3.1.5 UPPER INNER COVER ....................................................................20 3.1.6 SHIFT TRAY UNIT ............................................................................ 21 3.1.7 UPPER SHIFT GUIDE....................................................................... 22 3.1.8 LOWER SHIFT GUIDE...................................................................... 22 3.1.9 EXIT UNIT ......................................................................................... 23 3.1.10 BUFFER ROLLER UNIT.................................................................. 24 3.1.11 STAPLER ........................................................................................ 25 3.1.12 FINISHER BOARD ......................................................................... 26 3.1.13 BOOKLET UNIT .............................................................................. 27
SM i B546
3.1.14 FOLDER ROLLERS ........................................................................ 29 3.1.15 FOLDER PLATE.............................................................................. 32 Removal................................................................................................. 32 Reinstalling ............................................................................................ 33 3.1.16 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT ............................................................. 34 Removal................................................................................................. 34 Adjustment ............................................................................................. 35 3.1.17 BOOKLET BOARD .......................................................................... 37 3.1.18 POSITIONING PLATE UNIT............................................................ 37 3.1.19 1ST AND 2ND BOOKLET UNIT GATES ......................................... 38 3.2 ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................................... 39 3.2.1 SHIFT TRAY HEIGHT ....................................................................... 39 3.2.2 JOGGER FENCE POSITION ............................................................ 40 3.2.3 STAPLING POSITION....................................................................... 41 3.2.4 BOOKLET STAPLING POSITION ..................................................... 42
B546
ii
SM

6 5 4 3 10 2 1 11 12 13 7 8 9 15 16 17 18 19
Booklet Finisher B546
27 26 25 24 23
20 21
14
B546V500.WMF B546V501.WMF
22
1. Shutter 2. Shift Tray 3. Lower Exit Roller 4. Upper Exit Guide 5. 2nd Transport Roller 6. Proof Tray 7. Buffer Roller Exit Gate 8. Buffer Roller 9. Proof Tray Gate 10. Buffer Roller Entrance Gate 11. Booklet Gate 12. 1st Transport Roller 13. Stapler Unit 14. Transport Belt
15. Booklet Unit Entrance Roller 16. 1st Booklet Unit Gate 17. 2nd Booklet Unit Gate 18. Anvil 19. Folder Plate 20. Positioning Plate 21. Shutter Guide 22. Booklet Tray 23. Exit Guide 24. Positioning Roller 25. Folder Roller 26. Relay Roller 27. Booklet Stapler Unit
SM
B546
2.1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
2.1.1 SHIFT TRAY MODE
A4/LT sideways or shorter
[B]
[C]
[A]
B546D564.PCX
The booklet gate [A] and buffer roller entrance gate [B] are closed and the copy paper goes directly to the shift tray [C].
Longer than A4 sideways

[F] [E] [D]
B546D565.PCX
The booklet gate, proof tray gate [D], and buffer roller exit gate [E] are closed, and the buffer roller entrance gate is opened. The copy paper passes through the buffer roller [F]. This paper path creates a distance between copies.
B546
SM
2.1.2 PROOF TRAY MODE

The booklet gate [A] is closed. The buffer roller entrance gate [B] and proof tray gate [C] are opened. The copy paper goes to the proof tray [D]. [D]
[C]
[B] [A]
B546D101.WMF
2.1.3 BOOKLET STITCH MODE

The booklet gate is opened and the copy paper goes to the booklet unit.
B546D102.WMF
SM
B546
PRE-STACK MECHANISM
2.2 PRE-STACK MECHANISM

This mechanism improves productivity in staple mode and shift mode. During stapling, the copier has to wait. This mechanism reduces the wait by holding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. It only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set copy job. [C] [B] [A]
B546D566.PCX
The buffer roller entrance gate [A] and buffer roller exit gate [B] are opened. Then, the 1st sheet of paper goes around the buffer roller [C]. [D]
B546D567.PCX
When the 2nd copy [D] comes to the buffer roller, the buffer roller exit gate is closed. The two sheets of paper go to the shift tray [E] or staple tray [F].
[E] [F]
B546D568.PCX
B546
SM
PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM
2.3 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM

[B]
[C]
B546D569.PCX
[A]
[F]
[E] [D]
B546D104.WMF
[G] [A]
B546D570.PCX
In sort and stack mode, only the 1st sheet of copy paper from the 2nd set is shifted to the front to separate each set of copies. When the copy paper comes into the staple tray [A], the upper exit guide [B] (which contains the upper exit roller) opens. The paper switches back to the stopper [C]. Then the front guide release solenoid [D] turns on and the front guide [E] is released, the shift motor moves jogger fence [F] to the front, and the copy paper shifts to the front by 30 mm. After copy paper has been shifted, the upper exit guide closes and the lower exit roller [G] turns in the opposite direction to feed out the copy paper.
SM
B546
PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
2.4 PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM

[F] [C] [A] [B]
[E] [D]
B546D105.WMF B546D106.WMF
[G] [G]
[H]
B546D108.WMF
B546D111.WMF
When the trailing edge of the 1st copy paper passes the 2nd transport roller [A], the lower exit roller [B] stops and turns reverse. At the same time, the upper guide plate motor turns on and opens the upper exit guide [C]. The copy paper is sent to the stopper [D] by the lower exit roller and feed belt [E], and it is aligned the by jogger motor. The feed belt solenoid [F] turns on to move the feed belt to the stopper. This function prevents excessive buckling of the paper between belt and stopper. The paddles [G] send the paper to the stopper starting from the 2nd copy paper. When the trailing edge of the 2nd copy paper passes the 2nd transport roller, the paddle solenoid [H] turns on and the drive from the transport roller transmits to the paddle shaft.
B546
SM
STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM
2.5 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM

2.5.1 DRIVE
The stapler motor [A] drives the stapler unit drive gear [B] via a timing belt. The stapler unit guide has a rack gear [C]. The stapler unit moves along the rack gear via the stapler unit [D] drive gear. [D]
B546D107.WMF
[A] [B] [C]
2.5.2 MOVEMENT
Front and Rear Stapling
When the print key is pressed, the stapler unit moves to the center. The stapler unit moves to the front (or rear) stapling position when the copy paper comes into the finisher and stays until the copy job finishes. It returns to home position when the job is finished. [A]
B546D113.WMF B546D115.WMF B546D114.WMF
Two-position Stapling
When the print key is pressed, the stapler unit moves to the center. The stapler unit moves to the rear stapling position first and moves to the front stapling position when stapling. Then it goes back to the center until the copy job finishes. It returns to home position when the job is finished.
SM
B546
STAPLER
2.6 STAPLER
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A] [D]
B546D571.PCX
B546D109.WMF
[A]
[E]
[G]
B546D110.WMF
[F]
The staple hammer motor [A] drives the cam [B] via 2 gears [C, D] and the guide roller on the staple hammer moves on the cam [D] . When the guide roller moves to the highest position on the cam, the copy paper is stapled. The stapler unit contains the cartridge set switch [E], staple end switch [F] and staple position sensor [G]. The staple position sensor detects whether the staple sheet has come to the staple unit or not.
B546
SM
SHIFT TRAY MECHANISM
2.7 SHIFT TRAY MECHANISM
[A]
[H] [C]
[F]
[E] [D]
B546D576.PCX
[B]
B546D572.PCX
The guide gear [A] on which the shift tray is mounted is driven by the lift motor [B] via gear [C]. The finisher board detects the direction of the motor rotation and motor position using the lift motor sensors 1 [D] and 2 [E]. The lift motor contains a thermoswitch [F]. When it detects 73.5 C, the finisher board stops the lift motor until its temperature reaches approximately 40 C. The shutter position switch [G] cuts the lift motor power for safety when the upper exit guide plate opens. The shift tray height sensor [H] detects the distance between the sensor and the top of the copy paper on the shift tray.
SM
B546
[G]
BOOKLET UNIT GATE MECHANISM
2.8 BOOKLET UNIT GATE MECHANISM
[A] [B]
[D]
B546D551.PCX B546D550.PCX
B546D552.PCX
[C]
[A]
B546D563.PCX
There are two junction gates [A] and three paper sensors [B] at the entrance area of the booklet unit. Depending on paper size, the appropriate gate solenoid(s) [C] are energized to close the gate(s) in order to transport paper to the positioning plate [D] through a suitable paper path. This is done for the following reasons: To detect the trailing edge of paper with the correct sensor. To prevent the leading edge of the next sheet from hitting the trailing edge of the previous sheets on the positioning plate.
B546
10
SM
BOOKLET UNIT GATE MECHANISM
The following tables show the relation between paper sizes and solenoids/sensors:
1st Solenoid (Gate) 2nd Solenoid (Gate) A3, 11" x 17" OFF (Opened) OFF (Opened) A3, 11" x 17" ON OFF OFF B4, 11" x 14" ON (Closed) OFF (Opened) B4, 11" x 14" ON ON OFF A4, 81/2" x 11" ON (Closed) ON (Closed) A4, 81/2" x 11" ON ON ON
Trailing Edge Sensor 1 Trailing Edge Sensor 2 Trailing Edge Sensor 3
SM
11
B546
RELAY ROLLER AND POSITIONING PLATE MECHANISM
2.9 RELAY ROLLER AND POSITIONING PLATE MECHANISM

When the first sheet of paper comes to the booklet unit, the booklet transport motor turns on to drive the relay roller [A]. The two relay rollers are out of contact with each other before the paper comes. When the leading edge of the paper passes trailing edge sensor 1, the relay roller solenoid is energized to make the two relay rollers contact each other to transport the paper to the positioning plate [B]. When the trailing edge of the paper comes to the trailing edge sensor that the paper passes last, the relay roller solenoid is de-energized. This solenoid on/off cycle is done for each sheet of paper. [A]
[B]
B546D573.PCX
Before paper comes, the positioning plate moves up from the home position to a position that is suitable for the selected paper size in order that the middle of the paper just comes to the stapling position. The positioning plate motor drives the positioning plate using pulse counts. Only when the first sheet of paper reaches the positioning plate, the positioning plate sensor [C] detects the paper.
B546D574.PCX
[A]
[C] [B]
B546D563.PCX
B546
12
SM
POSITIONING ROLLER MECHANISM
2.10 POSITIONING ROLLER MECHANISM
[C] [E] [D] [A]
[E]
[B] [D]
B546D554.PCX
[C] [A]
B546D555.PCX
The booklet transport motor also drives the positioning roller [A] to vertically align paper against the positioning plate [B]. The positioning roller is not round but elliptical in shape so that it moves away from the paper while the paper is being horizontally aligned. The positioning roller sensor [C] detects the actuator [D] on the roller shaft to determine the rotation of the positioning roller. When the sensor is de-actuated, the roller is away from the paper and the jogger fences [E] start moving.
SM
13
B546
BOOKLET UNIT JOGGER MOVEMENT MECHANISM
2.11 BOOKLET UNIT JOGGER MOVEMENT MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
B546D557.PCX
When the start key is pressed, the booklet jogger motor turns on to move the jogger fences [A] to the waiting positions that are 10 mm from each of the paper side edges. Each time a sheet of paper reaches the positioning plate [B], the jogger fences move toward the paper to align the paper once. The fences move back a short distance and move forward again the paper to align for the second time. Then, the fences go back to the waiting position. When the last sheet is aligned, the fences stay at the aligning positions during stapling.
B546
14
SM
BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT
2.12 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT
B546D575.PCX
There are two staplers whose positions are fixed. When the jogger fences finish aligning the last sheet, the jogger fences stay at the aligning positions and stapling starts. The two staplers do not operate at the same time, the rear stapler operates first, then the front one. This is for the following reasons: To prevent paper from becoming waved in the area between the two stapled positions. To minimize necessary electric power. The staple hammer HP switch in each stapler detects a stapling cycle and the staple end sensor detects the presence of staples in the cartridge. The stapler unit, including the two staplers, can be pulled out to enable staple cartridge replacement or jam removal. The stapler unit set sensor detects when the stapler unit is back in the right position.
SM
15
B546
PAPER FOLDER MECHANISM
2.13 PAPER FOLDER MECHANISM
[C] [A] [B] [A] [B]
B546D559.PCX
B546D560.PCX
20 mm
B546D561.PCX
B546D562.PCX
The positioning plate moves down from the stapling position to a position such that the middle of the paper just comes to the folding position. It depends on the paper size. At the same time, the shutter guide motor moves the shutter guide, which is covering the folder rollers to prevent paper arriving at the positioning plate from being caught by the rollers, down to the home position. Shortly after that, the folder plate motor and the folder roller motor start rotating. The folder plate [A] moves to push the middle of the stapled sheets of paper toward the folder rollers [B] until the folder plate return sensor [C] is de-actuated. Then, the folder plate comes back to the home position. After that, the folder rollers and booklet exit roller feed the paper to the booklet tray.
B546
16
SM
PAPER FOLDER MECHANISM
In the case of 10 sheets or more of A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper, folding is done twice for 20 mm of the leading edge to fold the paper more firmly. When the leading edge of the folded paper passes 20 mm from the folder rollers, the folder roller motor reverses to feed the paper back 20 mm. During this action, the folder plate stays at the return position. Then, the folder roller motor rotates forward again to feed the set of papers out and the folder plate goes back to the home position.
SM
17
B546
REMOVAL
3.
3.1 REMOVAL
3.1.1 UPPER DOOR
[A]
B546R579.WMF
[B]
1. Open the upper door [A]. 2. Remove the lower hinge [B] ( x1). 3. Push up the upper door and remove it.
B546
18
SM
REMOVAL
3.1.2 UPPER REAR COVER
[A]
[B]
B546R580.PCX
[C]
B546R104.WMF
1. Hold up the proof tray and open the top cover [A]. 2. Unhook the upper rear cover [B] and remove it ( x3).
3.1.3 LOWER REAR COVER

1. Remove the lower rear cover [C] ( x4).
SM
19
B546
REMOVAL
3.1.4 TOP COVER

[A] [B] [B]
[C]
B546R580.PCX
B546R581.PCX
1. Hold up the upper tray [A] and open the top cover [B]. 2. Push the hooks [C] of the top cover and remove it.
3.1.5 UPPER INNER COVER
[A]
B546R582.PCX
1. Open the upper door. 2. Remove the upper inner cover [A] ( x 1).
B546
20
SM
REMOVAL
3.1.6 SHIFT TRAY UNIT

[C] [B] [E]
[D]
[A]
[F]
B546R108.WMF
1. Remove the upper and lower rear covers. 2. Disconnect the connector [A] and remove the grounding wire [B] ( x 1). 3. Unhook the two stoppers [C] and remove them. 4. Remove the slide guide [D] by pulling it up.
5. Remove the shift tray unit [E] by pulling it up.

NOTE: When reinstalling the shift tray unit, release the clutch gear [F] of the tray lift motor by carefully inserting a screwdriver.
SM
21
B546
REMOVAL
3.1.7 UPPER SHIFT GUIDE

[A]
B546R112.WMF
1. Remove the slide guide and shift the shift tray unit down by releasing the clutch gear of the tray lift motor (see Shift Tray Unit Removal).
2. Remove the upper shift guide [A] ( x 6 (5 x M4, 1 x M3)).
3.1.8 LOWER SHIFT GUIDE
[A]
B546R109.WMF
1. Remove the shift tray unit. 2. Remove the lower shift guide [A] ( x 2, x 6 (3 x M4, 3 x M3)).
B546
22
SM
REMOVAL
3.1.9 EXIT UNIT

[B] [C]
[A]
B546R113.WMF
[G]
[F]
[D] [E] 1. Remove the shift tray unit, and the upper and lower shift guides. 2. Disconnect the connector [A] and remove the screw [B] that secures the transport belt unit [C]. 3. Disconnect [D] ( x4). 4. Hold up the exit unit [E] and remove it with the transport belt unit ( x 3, 1 clamp). NOTE: When installing the exit unit, make sure to position the exit unit guide plate (black) [F] over the transport guide plate [G].
B546R114.WMF
SM
23
B546
REMOVAL
3.1.10 BUFFER ROLLER UNIT

[B] [A] [C]
B546R583.PCX
B546R112.WMF
[D]
[D]
[E]
B546R584.PCX
B546R585.PCX
1. Remove the upper rear cover and the top cover. 2. Disconnect the connector [A]. 3. Remove the upper shift guide [B] ( x 6) and the guide holder [C] ( x 2). 4. Unhook the shafts [D], and remove the buffer roller unit [E] (2 clamps).
B546
24
SM
REMOVAL
3.1.11 STAPLER
[A]
[B]
B546R586.PCX
B546R587.PCX
[C]
B546R588.PCX
1. Open the upper front door. 2. Slide the stapler [A] towards the front. 3. Remove the stapler ( x 1, x 1 [B]). 4. Remove the cover [C] from the stapler ( x 2).
SM
25
B546
REMOVAL
3.1.12 FINISHER BOARD
[A]
B546R589.PCX
1. Remove the upper rear cover. 2. Remove the finisher board [A] ( x 4, x 19). 3. Do the following adjustments after replacing the board: Shift tray height Jogger fence position Stapling position 4. If you need to release the setting for the maximum number of stacks allowed on the shift tray in the staple mode, set DIP S3 No.5 to ON.
B546
26
SM
REMOVAL
3.1.13 BOOKLET UNIT
[D] [A] [B]
[C]
B546R561.WMF
1. Remove the following items. Upper and lower rear covers. Shift tray unit. Lower shift guide. 2. Remove the lower right cover [A] ( x 4). 3. Remove the folder roller knob [B] ( x 1 stepped). 4. Remove the lower inner cover [C] and lower door [D] ( x 5).
SM
27
B546
REMOVAL
[A] [B]
[C] [G] [D] [F] [H] [I] [I]
B546R110.WMF
[E]
B546R101.WMF
[J]
B546R111.WMF
5. Remove the grounding wire [A] ( x 1) and upper booklet exit guide [B] ( x 2). 6. Open the lower booklet exit guide [C] and remove it (1 L-pin [D], x 2 [E]). 7. Remove the right front and right rear covers [F , G] ( x 2 ea.). 8. Disconnect the two connectors [H]. 9. Remove the two joints [I] and then pull out the booklet unit [J] from the right side ( x 3).
B546
28
SM
REMOVAL
3.1.14 FOLDER ROLLERS

[A]
B546R590.PCX
[B]
[C]
B546R591.PCX
[D] [D]
B546R592.PCX
B546R593.PCX
1. Remove the booklet unit 2. Remove the drive unit [A] ( x 4) [B], ( x 3), [C]). 3. Remove the front and rear tension springs [D].
SM
29
B546
REMOVAL
[A]
B546R595.PCX B546R593.PCX
[B]
[B]
B546R596.PCX
[C]
B546R597.PCX
B546R598.PCX
[C]
4. Remove the gears [A] and ball bearings [B] (4 C-rings). 5. Remove the front and rear tighteners [C] ( x 1 stepped ea.).
B546
30
SM
REMOVAL
B546R599.PCX
[A]
[B]
B546R549.PCX
6. Remove the jogger plates [A] ( x 1 ea.). 7. Slide the folder rollers [B] to the front and remove them.
SM
31
B546
REMOVAL
3.1.15 FOLDER PLATE
[D]
B546R117.WMF
[C]
[B]
[D] [A]
[E]
B546R116.WMF
Removal
1. Remove the following items Lower right cover Folder roller knob Lower door and lower inner cover Booklet board 2. Release the harness [A] from the clamps. 3. Insert two positioning screws [B] in the holes provided in the folder table [C]. 4. Tighten the screws until the ends touch the securing plate [D] for the folder plate. 5. Remove the folder plate [E] and the securing plate ( x 3).
B546
32
SM
REMOVAL
Reinstalling
[B] [C] [B]
[A] [A]
B546R575.PCX
B546R578.PCX
[A, B] [E]
[D]
B546R577.PCX
B546R576.PCX
1. Line up the two small holes [A] in the folder plate with the two small protrusions on the bottom of the securing plate [B]. Then, push the two protrusions through the holes. Note: Be sure that the three screw holes are also lined up. 2. Temporarily fix the two plates together by attaching two strips of electrical tape [C] along the line where they meet (see the illustration). NOTE: 1) Be sure to fold the two strips back toward you so that they can easily be removed. 2) Be careful not to attach the tape too close to the three screw holes. 3. Reattach the two plates [A, B] to the folder table [D] ( x 3). NOTE: Tighten these three screws while holding the securing plate against the two positioning screws [E] that were installed in step 3 of the "Removal" procedure. 4. Remove the two strips of tape.
SM
33
B546
REMOVAL
3.1.16 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT

Removal
[A] [B]
B546R562.PCX
[C]
B546R563.PCX
1. Remove the lower door and inner cover. 2. Remove the guide roller [A] and shaft [B] (1 E-ring). 3. Pull out the booklet stapler unit [C].
B546
34
SM
REMOVAL
[A]
B546R564.PCX
[B]
B546R565.PCX
[C]
B546R567.PCX
Adjustment
1. Remove the booklet stapler cover [A] ( x 3). 2. Remove the three paper guides [B] ( x 1 ea.). 3. Loosen the two screws on each of the anvils [C].
SM
35
B546
REMOVAL
[A] [B]
B546R568.PCX
[A]
B546R569.PCX
[C] [A]
[D]
B546R570.PCX
4. Insert the anvil positioning plate [A] into the staple slot of the stapler [B]. NOTE: The anvil positioning plate is stored in the booklet stapler cover [C]. 5. Rotate the gear to move down the stapler. Then align the anvil positioning plate and the anvil [D]. Then secure the anvils ( x 2 ea.).
B546
36
SM
REMOVAL
3.1.17 BOOKLET BOARD
[B]
[A]
B546R115.WMF
1. Remove the lower right cover [A] ( x 4).

Booklet Finisher B546 B546
2. Remove the booklet board [B] ( x 4, x 14). NOTE: After replacing the board, adjust the booklet stapling position.
3.1.18 POSITIONING PLATE UNIT

[C] [D]
B546R571.PCX
1. Remove the booklet board ( x 4, x 14). 2. Slide the paper positioning unit [C] to the right and remove it ( x 2, x 2 [D]).
SM
37
REMOVAL
3.1.19 1ST AND 2ND BOOKLET UNIT GATES
[A]
[A]
B546R572.PCX
[B]
[D]
[E]
[C]
B546R573.PCX
B546R574.PCX
1. Remove the upper and lower rear covers. 2. Release the two tension springs [A] of the booklet entrance guide [B]. 3. Remove the booklet unit gate solenoids [C] ( x 1, 1 spring each). 4. Pull out the link of the solenoid [D]. 5. Remove the booklet unit gates [E].
B546
38
SM
ADJUSTMENT
3.2 ADJUSTMENT
3.2.1 SHIFT TRAY HEIGHT
SW1 LED 1 SW2 LED 2
Dip Switch 3
B546R550.WMF
Dip Switch 3
B546R551.WMF
After replacing the finisher board or shift tray height sensor, always do this adjustment. 1. Remove the upper rear cover. 2. Turn on dip switches 3 -1 and -4 on the finisher board. 3. Put blank paper (A4/81/2" x 11") on the shift tray. 4. Press switch 1 (SW1) on the finisher board. The finisher automatically adjusts the shift tray height when switch 1 is pressed. After performing the adjustment, the shift tray will return to home position. During the adjustment, LED 1 flashes. After performing the adjustment, LED 1 turns on and remains on. If the automatic adjustment fails, the finisher stops and LED 1 turns off. 5. Turn off dip switches 3 -1 and -4, then turn off the copier main switch.
SM
39
B546
ON
ADJUSTMENT
3.2.2 JOGGER FENCE POSITION

SW1 LED 1 SW2 LED 2
Jogger Fence
Rear SW2 SW1 Front
Dip Switch 3
Shutter
B546R550.WMF
Dip Switch 3 ON
Jogger Fence
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B546R553.WMF
B546R552.WMF
After replacing the finisher board or if a paper alignment fault occurs, do this adjustment. Doing this adjustment once will affect all paper sizes. 1. Remove the upper rear cover. 2. Turn on dip switch 3-1 on the finisher board. 3. Press the following switch on the finisher board. Using A4: Switch 1 (SW1) Using 81/2" x 11": Switch 2 (SW2) After pressing the switch, the upper exit unit will open and the jogger fences will move to the A4 or 81/2" x 11" position. 4. Place 10 sheets of A4/81/2" x 11" paper between the jogger fences and push them until they touch the shutters. 5. Adjust the jogger fence position by pressing switch 1 or 2. Switch 1: Move to the front (0.35 mm/press) Switch 2: Move to the rear (0.35 mm/press) 6. Press switches 1 and 2 simultaneously to store the adjustment data. After pressing the switches, the upper exit unit will close. 7. Turn off dip switch 3-1, then turn off the copier main switch.
B546
40
SM
ADJUSTMENT
3.2.3 STAPLING POSITION

290 2 mm (A4Y), 273 2 mm (LTR)
Dip Switch 3
Staple
ON
B546R554.WMF
Rear SW2
Front SW1
B546R555.WMF
1. Remove the upper rear cover. 2. Turn on dip switches 3 -1 and -2 on the finisher board. 3. Press the following switch on the finisher board. Using A4: Switch 1 (SW1) Using 81/2" x 11": Switch 2 (SW2) After pressing the switch, the upper exit unit will open and the transport belt will rotate. 4. Within five seconds after pressing the switch, place one sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" paper between the jogger fences and push it until it touches the shutter. When the staple tray paper sensor detects the paper, the stapler will staple (rear, 1 point). 5. Take out the stapled paper manually and check the staple position. Staple position: Good Turn off dip switches 3 -1 and -2 to end the procedure. Staple position: No good Change the staple position by doing the following steps. 6. Adjust the staple position by pressing switch 1 or 2. Switch 1: Move the front (0.3 mm/press) Switch 2: Move to the rear (0.3 mm/press) 7. Press switches 1 and 2 simultaneously to store the adjustment data. After pressing the switches, check the staple position again. 8. Turn off dip switches 3 -1 and -2, then turn off the copier main switch.
SM
41
B546
After replacing the finisher board, do this adjustment. Doing this adjustment once will affect all paper sizes and all stapling positions.
ADJUSTMENT
3.2.4 BOOKLET STAPLING POSITION
Dip Switch 1 LED 1 SW2

Dip Switch 1 ON
1
B546R557.WMF
B546R556.WMF
Mark (Trailing edge)
Slot in direction (reading edge)

B546R558.WMF
After replacing the booklet board, dip switches 1 -6, -7, -8 on the new board must be set up the same way as on the old board. 1. Remove the lower right cover and lower rear cover. 2. Turn on dip switches 1 -1 and -2 on the booklet board. 3. Tape the actuators of the booklet entrance guide sensor (S42) and the booklet entrance guide safety switch (SW11), so that S42 and SW11 remain actuated. 4. Press switch 2 (SW2) on the booklet board. After pressing the switch, the booklet transport motor (M10) will start to rotate. 5. Put a mark on the trailing edge of some A3/11" x 17" paper (two sheets).
B546
42
SM
ADJUSTMENT
[B]
[A]
B546R548.PCX
7. Press switch 2 on the booklet board. The booklet finisher makes a booklet automatically.
SM
43
B546
6. Open the booklet entrance guide [A], then slide in the two sheets of paper [B] until their leading edges touch the positioning plate.
ADJUSTMENT
Adjust towards the leading edge Mark
Adjust away from the leading edge Mark
Folding Position L Stapling Position
Stapling Position L Folding Position
Example 1: L= 1 mm
Example 2: L= 0.75 mm
B546R559.WMF
Dip switch 1 -6, -7, -8 setting -6 -7 -8 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
Adjustment (0.25 mm/ step) +3 +2 +1 0 -1 -2 -3 Do not use
8. Measure the distance (L) between the stapling position and the folder position. 9. Adjust the stapling position with dip switches 1 -6, -7, -8. Inputting a lower value than the current setting moves the stapling position towards the leading edge. Adjusting by 1 step moves the stapling position 0.25 mm. Example 1: To move the stapling position 1 mm towards the leading edge. If dip switch 1 is currently set to +2, set the dip switch to reflect -2 (this moves the stapling position 4 steps towards the leading edge). Example 2: To move the stapling position 0.75 mm away from the leading edge. If dip switch 1 is currently set to -1, set the dip switch to reflect +2 (this move,s the stapling position 3 steps away from the leading edge). 10. Turn off dip switched 1-1 and -2, then turn off the copier main switch.
B546
44
SM
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B714

AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B714) REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None
ARDF B714
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1 1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ................................................................................ 2 1.3 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER...................................................................... 2 1.4 ORIGINAL FEED BELT ................................................................................ 3 1.5 SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/ REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS ........................................................................................................... 4 1.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS .................................................................. 5 1.7 SEPARATION ROLLER ............................................................................... 5 1.8 INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS ...................................................... 6 1.9 PICK-UP MOTOR/ORIGINAL STOPPER HP SENSOR/PICK-UP HP SENSOR ............................................................................................................. 6 1.10 TRANSPORT MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR ..................................... 7 1.11 FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH ....................... 8 1.12 EXIT SENSOR ........................................................................................... 9 1.13 STAMP SOLENOID.................................................................................... 9 1.14 CONTROLLER BOARD ............................................................................. 9
2. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................10
2.1 TIMING CHARTS ....................................................................................... 10 2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE ............................... 10 2.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE .............................. 11 2.2 JAM DETECTION....................................................................................... 12
3. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................13
3.1 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................... 13 3.2 TEST POINTS ............................................................................................ 13 3.3 FUSES ....................................................................................................... 13
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ..........................................................14

4.1 MAIN COMPONENTS ................................................................................ 14 4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 15 4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION.................................................................... 16 4.3.1 BASIC MECHANISM ......................................................................... 16 4.3.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE ........................................................ 18 4.4 ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM ............................................................ 19 4.4.1 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ........................................................... 19 4.4.2 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION ..................................................... 20 4.4.3 REDUCING THE INTERVAL BETWEEN PAGES ............................. 20 4.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT.......................................................... 21 4.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS............................................................. 21 4.5.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS ........................................................... 22 4.6 STAMP ....................................................................................................... 23
SM
B714
COVERS
Auto Reverse Document Feeder B714

1.1 COVERS
[B]
[A]
B597R110.WMF
[C]
[D]
[F]
[E]
B597R111.WMF
[A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: [E]: [F]:
Front cover ( x 2) Rear cover ( x 2) Top cover ( x 1, x 2) Original tray ( x 1, x 1) Platen sheet (Velcro pads) Original exit tray ( x 2). Slide to the right and then pull out.
CAUTION
The hinge of the ARDF is spring-loaded and becomes much lighter with all the covers removed. After removing all the covers, lay a heavy book on the front right corner of the ARDF to prevent it from springing up unexpectedly.
SM
B714
ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT

Open the top cover. [A]: Original feed unit Press it toward you on its shaft to release and lift out.
[A]
B597R101.WMF
1.3 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER

Original feed unit ( 1.2) [A]: Pick-up roller ( x 1)
[A]
B597R102.WMF
B714
SM
ORIGINAL FEED BELT

B597R104.WMF
1.4 ORIGINAL FEED BELT

[B]
[A]
B597R103.WMF
[C]
[D]
Original feed unit and original pick-up roller ( 1.2, 1.3) [A]: Shaft ( x 1) NOTE: Before removing the shaft, note carefully the positioning of the spring [B]. This must be reset during re-installation. [C]: Feed belt cover (Timing belt, gear, shaft, springs x 2) NOTE: Do not lose the springs. [D]: Original feed belt
SM
B714
SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/ REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS
1.5 SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/ REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS

[A]
[E]
B597R105.WMF
[F]
[C] [B]
[D]
B597R106.WMF
Open the top cover. [A]: Upper original guide ( x 3). [B]: Skew correction sensor ( x 1) [C]: Interval sensor ( x 1) [D]: Registration sensor ( x 1) [E]: Original width sensor bracket ( x 1, x 4) [F]: Original width sensors
B714
SM
ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS

1.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS

Raise the original table. [A]: Lower cover of original tray ( x 4) [B]: Original length sensor-1 ( x 1) [C]: Original length sensor-2 ( x 1) [B]
[C]
[A]
B597R107.WMF
1.7 SEPARATION ROLLER

Original feed unit ( 1.2) [A]: Separation roller cover [B]: Separation roller ( x 1) [A]
[B]
B597R108.WMF
SM
B714
INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS
1.8 INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS

Rear cover. ( 0) [A]: Lower the original stopper by rotating the pick-up motor Original feed unit ( 1.2) [B]: Feed guide plate ( x 4, stepped screw) NOTE: Raise the original tray before you re-install the paper feed guide. Separation roller, torque limiter ( x 1) ( 1.7) [C]: Bracket ( x 1, x 1) [D]: Inverter sensor ( x 1) [E]: Original set sensor ( x 1) [C] [B] [D] [E]
[A]
B597R109.WMF
1.9 PICK-UP MOTOR/ORIGINAL STOPPER HP SENSOR/PICK-UP HP SENSOR

Rear cover ( 0) [A]: Pick-up motor ( x 1, x 2, Timing belt) [B]: Sensor bracket ( x 2, x 1) [C]: Pick-up HP sensor [D]: Original stopper HP sensor [B] [C] [A]
[D]
B597R114.WMF
B714
SM
TRANSPORT MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR

1.10 TRANSPORT MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR
[A]
B597R113.WMF
[C] [B]
B597R112.WMF
[D]
Rear cover ( 0) [A]: Pick-up roller assembly ( x 1, x 3, x 3) [B]: Motor bracket ( x 3, x 2, Timing belt x 2) [C]: Transport motor ( x 2, Spring x 1) [D]: Inverter motor ( x 2)
SM
B714
FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH
1.11 FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH

[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B597R115.WMF
Rear cover ( 0) [A]: Motor bracket ( x 5, x 1) [B]: Feed motor ( x 2) [C]: Clutch stopper ( x 1) [D]: Skew correction roller clutch ( x 1)
B714
SM
EXIT SENSOR
1.12 EXIT SENSOR

Open the ARDF. [A]: Pull the platen sheet off halfway. [B]: Open the exit guide plate. [C]: Exit guide plate cover ( x 2) [D]: Exit sensor ( x 1, x 1)
[B] [A]
[C]
1.13 STAMP SOLENOID

Rear cover ( 0) Open exit guide plate ( 1.12) [A]: Exit guide plate cover ( x 1) [B]: Stamp solenoid ( x 1, x 1) [A]
[D]
B597R116.WMF
[B]
B597R201.WMF
1.14 CONTROLLER BOARD

Rear cover ( 0) [A]: Controller board ( x 4, all ) [A]
B597R202.WMF
SM
B714
TIMING CHARTS
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 TIMING CHARTS
2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE
0 500 0 500 1000 1500 2000 0 500 1000 1500 2000 (ms) RXD
TXD Original Set Sensor ON OFF CCW OFF CW ON OFF ON OFF 3979 pps Feed Motor CCW OFF CW 6800 pps 4385 pps 1600 pps 1600 pps 1600 pps
Pick-up Motor Original Stopper H.P Sn.
Original Pick-up H.P Sn.
Feed Clutch
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 3433 pps 8268 pps
Skew Correction Sn. Interval Sn.
Registration Sn.
Transport Motor
CCW OFF OFF ON ON OFF
DF Gate
Exit Sn.
Inverter Motor
ON OFF
JAM6 JAM5
JAM7
JAM4 JAM3
JAM2 JAM1
B597T900.WMF
B714
10
SM
TIMING CHARTS
Auto Reverse Document Feeder B714 B714
2.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE

0 500 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
RXD TXD Original Set Sensor ON OFF
CCW 1600 pps OFF CW 1600 pps ON Original Stopper H.P Sn. OFF Pick-up Motor Original Pick-up H.P Sn. ON OFF CCW OFF CW ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF CCW OFF OFF ON ON OFF CCW OFF CW ON OFF ON OFF 2322 pps 73 mm 5138 pps 73 mm 3433 pps 8268 pps 6800 pps 4385 pps 3979 pps
1600 pps
Feed Motor
Feed Clutch Skew Correction Sn. Interval Sn.
Registration Sn.
Transport Motor DF Gate
Exit Sn.
Inverter Motor
Inverter Sol. Inverter Sn.
JAM9 JAM8
B597T901.WMF
SM
11
JAM DETECTION
2.2 JAM DETECTION

1 2 3
6 1. Registration sensor 2. Interval sensor 3. Skew correction sensor

Jam Site Original stopper HP sensor (Jam 1) Pick-up HP sensor (Jam 2) Skew correction sensor jam (Jam 3) Transport jam (Jam 4) Registration sensor (Jam 5) Exit jam (Jam 6) Exit jam (Jam 7) Inverter sensor jam (Jam 8) Interval sensor jam (Jam 9)
4 4. Inverter sensor 5. Exit sensor 6. Scanning position
B597T905.WMF
Cause Original stopper home position could not be detected within 1000 ms after the pick-up motor switched on and started rotating counterclockwise. Pick-up roller home position could not be detected within 1000 ms after the pick-up motor switched on and started rotating clockwise. The skew correction sensor does not turn on after the feed motor has fed the original 185 mm. The interval sensor does not turn on after the feed motor has fed the original 141 mm. The registration sensor does not turn on after the interval sensor turned on and the original has been fed 117 mm. The exit sensor does not turn on after the transport motor has fed the original 124 mm. The exit sensor does not turn off after the exit sensor turned on and the original has been fed 294 mm. The inverter sensor does not turn on after the inverter motor has fed the original 100 mm. The interval sensor does not turn on after the inverter motor has fed the original 339 mm.
B714
12
SM
DIP SWITCHES
Auto Reverse Document Feeder B714 B714
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCHES
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DPS101 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Description Normal operating mode, with/without stamp. Not used Not used Not used Feed motor rotation (pull-out mode) 6800 pps (1-2 phase) Feed motor rotation (feed mode) 4385 pps (1-2 phase) Transport motor rotation 8268 pps (2W1-2 phase) Inverter motor rotation 7720 pps (1-2 phase) Free run: one-sided original 100% (color mode) Free run: one-sided original 200% (color mode) Free run: one-sided original 32% (color mode) Free run: one-sided original 100% (b/w mode) Free run: two-sided original 100% (color mode) Free run: two-sided original 100% (b/w mode) Free run: one-sided (fax mode) 48% (b/w mode) Free run: one-sided (mixed original size mode) 100% (color mode)
3.2 TEST POINTS

No. TP100 TP101 TP103 TP104 Label (GND) (Vcc) (TXD) (RXD) Monitored Signal Ground +5V TXD to the copier RXD from the copier
3.3 FUSES
SM
13
MAIN COMPONENTS
4.1 MAIN COMPONENTS
17 18 1 2 3 4
15 14 13
16
12
11
10
B597D103.WMF
1 Pick-up roller 2 Original tray 3 Original length sensor 1 4 Original length sensor 2 5 Reverse table 6 Inverter roller 7 Junction gate 8 Separation roller 9 Exit roller
10 Exit sensor 11 Idle roller 3 12 Idle roller 2 13 Transport roller 14 Registration sensor 15 Idle roller 1 16 Original width sensor 17 Skew correction roller 18 Feed belt
Pick-up Mechanism: Picks up the originals for scanning. Feed/Separation Mechanism: Comprised of the feed belt and separation roller, feeds and separates the originals, and corrects skew. Original Size Detection Sensors: Comprised of 4 width sensors and 2 length sensors, detect the sizes of the originals. Original Transport Mechanism: Comprised of the transport roller, ADF exposure glass, and exit roller. Original Reverse/Exit Mechanism: Exit/junction gate.
B714
14
SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT

1
11 10
3 4 5 6
9 8 7
B597D102.WMF
1 Feed motor 2 Feed belt 3 Pick-up roller 4 Pick-up motor 5 Transport motor 6 Inverter motor
7 Inverter roller 8 Exit roller 9 Separation roller 10 Transport roller 11 Skew correction roller
SM
15
B714
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

4.3.1 BASIC MECHANISM
[B] B5 [C] LG [A]
B597D110.WMF
The original size is detected by four original width sensors [A] and two original length sensors, [B] and [C]. The machine determines the original width when the leading edge of the original activates the registration sensor. The ARDF detects the original size by combining the readings of the four width sensors and two length sensors, as shown in the table on the next page.
B714
16
SM

Size (Width x Length) A3 L*1 (297 x 420 mm) B4 L (257 x 364 mm) A4 L (210 x 297 mm) A4 S*2 (297 x 210 mm) B5 L (182 x 257 mm) B5 S (257 x 182 mm) A5 L (148 x 210 mm) A5 S (210 x 148 mm) B6 L (128 x 182 mm) B6 S (182 x 128 mm) DLT L (11" x 17") 11" x 15" L 10" x 14" L LG L (81/2" x 14") F4 L (81/2" x 13") F L (8" x 13") LT L (8.5" x 11") LT S (11" x 8.5") 71/4" x 101/2" L 101/2" x 71/4" S 8" x 10" L HLT L 51/2" x 81/2" HLT S 81/2" x 51/2" 267 x 390 mm 195 x 267 mm 267 x 195 mm
*1 L: Lengthways *2 S: Sideways ON: Paper present
Width Sensor ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON -
Length Sensor B5 LG ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON -
SM
17
B714
4.3.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE

This section explains what happens when the user selects mixed original size mode. Because this ADF is a sheet-through document feeder, the method for original document width detection is the same as when the originals are the same size, but the document length detection method is different. Therefore, the scanning speed is slightly slower. Document length detection From when the registration sensor switches on until the interval sensor switches off, the CPU counts the transport motor pulses. The number of pulses determines the length of the original. Feed-in cycle When the original size for the copy modes listed below cannot be determined, the image cannot be correctly scaled (reduced or enlarged) or processed until the document length has been accurately detected. The length must be determined before the image is scanned.
Auto Reduce/Enlarge Centering Erase Center/Border Booklet Image Repeat
An original follows this path during transport: 1. Document length detection Scanning glass Inverter table 2. Inverter table Scanning glass Inverter table (restores original order) 3. Inverter table Scanning glass (image scanned) Exit tray Normal feed-in In a copy mode other than those listed above, when the rate of reduction/enlargement has been determined, the originals are scanned normally. In order to store the scanned images, a large area of memory (the detected document width x 432 mm) is prepared. Next, only the portion of the image up to the detected document length is read from memory and printed.
B714
18
SM
ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM

B597D109.WMF
4.4 ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM

4.4.1 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION
[G] [B] [F] [E] [D]
[A]
[C] [I]
[H]
B597D505.WMF
When the original is put on the original table, it contacts the original stopper [A] and pushes the actuator [B] out of the original set sensor [C]. When Start is pressed, the pick-up motor [D] turns on and the original stopper cam [E] rotates. The original stopper lowers and releases the original. Next, the pick-up roller cam [F] lowers the pick-up roller, and then the feed motor [G (at this location but not shown in the drawing)] turns on to feed the top sheet of paper. After being fed from the pick-up roller, the top sheet is separated from the stack by the separation roller [H] and the feed belt [I].
SM
19
B714
ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM
4.4.2 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION

[A] [B]
[C]
B597D202.WMF
This mechanism is the same as the skew correction used by the registration roller in the main machine. The feed motor and the skew correction clutch control the skew correction roller. Immediately after separation, the skew correction sensor [A] detects the leading edge of the original. The feed belt [B] moves the paper slightly until it presses against the skew correction roller [C] and buckles slightly to correct any skew.
4.4.3 REDUCING THE INTERVAL BETWEEN PAGES

[A]
B597D303.WMF
After performing skew correction, the feed motor runs at a speed higher than its original speed in order for the next original to catch up to the one ahead of it. This reduces the gap between the leading edge of the next original with the trailing edge of the one ahead. When the leading edge of the original activates the interval sensor [A], the feed motor slows to match the speed of paper transport.
B714
20
SM
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

B597D104.WMF
4.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

4.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS
[C]
[A] [B]
The transport motor drives the transport roller [A] and the exit roller [B]. When the leading edge of the original activates the interval sensor [C], the transport motor rotates the transport roller. The transport roller then feeds the original through scanning area. After scanning, the original is fed out by the exit roller to the exit tray.
SM
21
B714
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT
4.5.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS

Shortly after the transport motor has been turned on, the inverter solenoid is activated and junction gate [A] opens. The original is then scanned and transported towards the reverse table [B].
[B]
B597D105.WMF
[A] [E]
Shortly after the original exit sensor [C] detects the trailing edge of the original, the inverter solenoid turns off and the junction gate [D] closes. Next, the inverter motor turns on and the inverter roller [E] starts rotating to feed the original from the reverse table. [C] Then the original is fed to the transport roller and the scanning area [F] (where the reverse side is scanned).
[D]
B597D107.WMF
[F] After scanning the reverse side of the original, the original is then sent to the reverse table [G] a second time and turned over. This ensures that the double-sided original will be properly stacked in the correct order, front side down, in the original exit tray [H].
B597D106.WMF
[G]
[H]
B597D108.WMF
B714
22
SM
STAMP
B597D201.WMF
4.6 STAMP
[C] [A]
[B]
NOTE: This function is only for fax mode. The stamp [A] is located between the transport roller [B] and the exit roller [C]. When the original reaches the stamp, the transport motor stops and the stamp solenoid turns on if the page is sent successfully (immediate transmission) or stored successfully (memory transmission). After stamping, the ARDF feed motor re-starts to feed out the document. NOTE: The position of the stamp can be adjusted with the Stamp Position Adjustment SP mode.
SM
23
B714
FAX OPTION TYPE 3045 B779

FAX OPTION TYPE 3045 (B779) REVISION HISTORY Page 20 93 109 109 Date 10/07/2009 10/06/2006 04/11/2007 09/18/2007 Added/Updated/New Error Code 31-21 added. Updated Information NCU Parameters Updated Information B779 RAM Addresses Updated Information B779 RAM Addresses

Symbol What it means Refer to section number See Core Tech Manual for details Screw Connector E-ring Clip ring Clamp Lengthwise, SEF (Short Edge Feed) Sideways, LEF (Long Edge Feed)
Cautions, Notes, etc. The following headings provide special information:
WARNING
CAUTION
Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries. Important Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
IMPORTANT ALWAYS OBEY THESE GUIDELINES TO AVOID SERIOUS PROBLEMS SUCH AS MISFEEDS, DAMAGE TO ORIGINALS, LOSS OF VALUABLE DATA AND TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE MACHINE. BOLD IS ADDED FOR EMPHASIS.
NOTE: This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS WARNING

1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. 2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. 3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. 4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. 5. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be remote risk of electric shock from lightning. 6. Do not use a telephone or cellular phone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
CAUTION
1. Before installing the fax unit, switch off the main switch, and disconnect the power cord. 2. The fax unit contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard batteries in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and local regulations. NOTE FOR AUSTRALIA Unit must be connected to Telecommunication Network through a line cord which meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008.
FAX OPTION B779

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 1 1.2 FAX OPTION INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.............................................. 2 1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 3045............................................................... 6 1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................... 6 1.3.2 INSTALLATION: ONE G3 BOARD ...................................................... 7 1.3.3 INSTALLATION: TWO G3 BOARDS ................................................... 8
2. TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................................................9
2.1 ERROR CODES........................................................................................... 9 2.2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................... 21 2.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................... 24 IP-Fax Transmission .............................................................................. 24 IP-Fax Reception ................................................................................... 27 2.4 FAX SC CODES......................................................................................... 29 2.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 29 2.4.2 SC1201.............................................................................................. 29 2.4.3 FAX SC CODE TABLE ...................................................................... 30
3. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................31
3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE..................................................................... 31 3.2 BIT SWITCHES .......................................................................................... 38 3.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ........................................................................ 38 3.2.2 I-FAX SWITCHES.............................................................................. 48 3.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES ....................................................................... 54 3.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES........................................................ 59 3.2.5 G3 SWITCHES .................................................................................. 67 3.2.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES............................................................................ 73 3.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES ............................................................... 79 3.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES........................................................... 79 3.2.9 IP FAX SWITCHES ........................................................................... 79 3.3 NCU PARAMETERS .................................................................................. 85 3.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ......................................... 95 3.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ....................................................... 95 3.4.2 PARAMETERS .................................................................................. 96 Fax Parameters ..................................................................................... 96 E-mail Parameters ................................................................................. 99 3.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES.................................................................. 101
4. DETAILS.......................................................................................110
4.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................................. 110 4.2 BOARDS .................................................................................................. 111
SM i B779
4.2.1 FCU ................................................................................................. 111 4.2.2 MBU................................................................................................. 112 4.2.3 SG3 BOARD.................................................................................... 113 4.3 VIDEO DATA PATH ................................................................................. 114 4.3.1 TRANSMISSION ............................................................................. 114 Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission.................. 115 Immediate Transmission...................................................................... 115 JBIG Transmission............................................................................... 115 Adjustments ......................................................................................... 115 4.3.2 RECEPTION.................................................................................... 116 4.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES ...................................................... 117 4.4.1 MULTI-PORT................................................................................... 117 4.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER .................................................................... 118 4.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION ............................................. 119 Mail Transmission ................................................................................ 119 Mail Reception ..................................................................................... 121 Handling Mail Reception Errors ........................................................... 123 Secure Internet Reception ................................................................... 123 Transfer Request: Request by Mail...................................................... 124 E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode) ............................................................ 125 Subject and Level of Importance ......................................................... 125 How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type .................................. 125 Subjects Displayed on the PC ............................................................. 125 E-mail Messages ................................................................................. 126 Message Disposition Notification (MDN).............................................. 127 Handling Reports ................................................................................. 128 4.5 IP-FAX ...................................................................................................... 129 What is IP-FAX? .................................................................................. 129 T.38 Packet Format ............................................................................. 129
5. SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................130
5.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................. 130 5.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS ........................................ 131 5.3 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................... 132 5.4 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 133 5.5 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION ................................................................... 134
B779
ii
SM
ACCESSORY CHECK
1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list: Description Qty
1. Fax Unit B779 (FCU Board)................................................. 1 2. Stamp Cartridge................................................................... 1 3. Super G3 Label.................................................................... 1 4. Serial Number Tape............................................................. 1 5. Cable ................................................................................... 1 6. Facsimile Keytops................................................................ 2 7. Copy Keytops ...................................................................... 2 8. Printed Plate ........................................................................ 1 2 1 5 3 4
8
B779I101.WMF
Important The installation procedure of the previous model required the removal of knockouts from the rear lower cover of the machine. The rear lower covers of the previous model and this model are identical in that both covers contain these knockouts. However, removal of these knockouts on the rear lower cover is not required with this installation.
SM
B779
Fax Option B779
1. INSTALLATION
FAX OPTION INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1.2 FAX OPTION INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[B]
[A]
B779I102.WMF
CAUTION
Before installation: 1. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer buffer. 2. Push the operation switch to put the machine in standby mode. Make sure the power LED is off, turn the main switch off, and then disconnect the power cord and the network cable. NOTE: This installation procedure uses the following symbols. : Screws : Connectors 1. After removing the accessories from the box, read the serial number on the box and write it on the serial number tape provided. 2. Attach the serial number tape near the serial number plate of the mainframe. 3. Remove the controller unit [A] ( x 2) 4. Remove the cover [B] ( x 2)
B779
SM
[A]
[B]
B779I103.WMF
5. Remove the jumper [B] (set to OFF) and set it to ON. 6. If you are going to install one or two G3 Interface Units do this now. If you are installing one G3 board, go to page 1-7. If you are installing two G3 boards, go to page 1-8. 7. After installing the G3 board, slide the FCU board [A] into the right slot of the expansion box. 8. Fasten the board with the screws ( x2). NOTE: Make sure that the MBU is seated correctly. The machine will issue SC819, SC820 if it is not seated correctly. 9. Re-install the controller board.
SM
B779
Fax Option B779
[C]
[D]
[B] [A]
[E]
B779I901.WMF
10. Remove dummy keytop [A] and replace it with the Facsimile keytop [B] 11. Remove the blank plate [C] and replace it with the printed plate [D] 12. Attach the Super G3 decal [E].
B779
SM
[A]
B779I902.WMF
13. Reattach the covers. 14. If the ARDF is installed, raise the ARDF and insert the stamp cartridge [A]. 15. Connect the telephone line to the LINE jack at the rear of the machine. NOTE: The copier must be connected to a properly grounded socket outlet. 16. Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch. Important After you turn the machine on, if you see a message that tells you the SRAM has been formatted due to a problem with SRAM, turn the machine off and on again to clear the message. 17. Enter the User Tools mode and set date and time. 18. Do SP3102 and enter the serial number for the fax unit. NOTE: This is the serial number that you wrote on the plate and attached near the serial number plate of the mainframe in Steps 1 and 2.
SM
B779
Fax Option B779
G3 INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 3045
1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 3045

Description Qty 1. G3 Board ............................................................................. 1 2. RJ-45 Connector Bracket .................................................... 1 3. RJ-45 Connector with Cable................................................ 1 4. Flat Film Connector ............................................................. 1 5. Screws................................................................................. 8 6. Cable ................................................................................... 1 7. Clamps ................................................................................ 2 8. CCUIF.................................................................................. 1 2 1 3 4
6 8
B779I903.WMF
B779
SM
1.3.2 INSTALLATION: ONE G3 BOARD
[A]
[D]
[E]
[C]
[B]
B779I904.WMF
[F]
[G] [H]
B779I905.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Remove the knockout [A]. Attach the clamp [B] ( x1). Attach the head of the RJ-45 connector [C] to the bracket [D]. Set the bracket [D] and fasten it. ( x2). Attach one end of the flat film connector [E]. Attach the CCUIF [F] ( x4) Attach the other end of the flat film connector [G] to the CCUIF. Attach the G3 board [H] ( x2, x1, x2). Return to page 3 and complete the installation.
SM
B779
Fax Option B779
1.3.3 INSTALLATION: TWO G3 BOARDS

[A]
[E] [F]
[C] [D]
[B]
B779I906.WMF
[G]
[J]
[H]
[I]
B779I907.WMF
1. Remove the two knockouts [A]. 2. Attach the clamps [B] ( x1). 3. For the lower board: Attach the head of the RJ-45 connector [C] to the bracket [D]. Set the bracket [D] and fasten it. ( x2). 4. For the upper board, set the second RJ-45 connector [E] in the bracket. NOTE: Cut the band [E] before connecting. 5. Attach one end of the flat film connector [F]. 6. Attach the CCUIF [G] ( x4) 7. Attach the other end of the flat film connector [H] to the CCUIF. 8. Attach the lower G3 board [I] ( x2, x1, x2). 9. Attach the upper G3 Board [J] ( x2, x1, x2). 10. Return to page 3 and complete the installation.
B779
SM
ERROR CODES
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code display and on the service report.
Code 0-00 Meaning DIS/NSF not detected within 40 s of Start being pressed 0-03 0-04 Incompatible modem at the other end CFR or FTT not received after modem training Suggested Cause/Action Check the line connection. Check the NCU - FCU connectors. The machine at the other end may be incompatible. Replace the NCU or FCU. Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope. If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line. The other party is out of paper or has a jammed printer. The other party pressed Stop during communication. The other terminal is incompatible.
0-01
DCN received unexpectedly
0-05
Unsuccessful after modem training at 2400 bps
Check the line connection. Check the NCU - FCU connectors. Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. Replace the FCU or NCU. The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to another machine. If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be a bad line. Cross reference Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN) Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4 Check the line connection. Check the NCU - FCU connectors. Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer. Replace the FCU or NCU. Check for line problems. Cross reference See error code 0-04.
SM
B779
Fax Option B779
ERROR CODES
Code 0-06 Meaning The other terminal did not reply to DCS Suggested Cause/Action Check the line connection. Check the FCU - NCU connectors. Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. Replace the NCU or FCU. The other end may be defective or incompatible; try sending to another machine. Check for line problems. Cross reference See error code 0-04. Check the line connection. Check the FCU - NCU connectors. Replace the NCU or FCU. The other end may have jammed or run out of paper. The other end user may have disconnected the call. Check for a bad line. The other end may be defective; try sending to another machine. Check the line connection. Check the FCU - NCU connectors. Replace the NCU or FCU. The other end may have jammed, or run out of paper or memory space. Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. The other end may have a defective modem/NCU/FCU; try sending to another machine. Check for line problems and noise. Cross reference Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN) Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4 Check the FCU - NCU connectors. Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try sending to another machine. Noisy line: resend. Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. Replace the NCU or FCU. Cross reference See error code 0-08.
0-07
No post-message response from the other end after a page was sent
0-08
The other end sent RTN or PIN after receiving a page, because there were too many errors
0-14
Non-standard post message response code received
B779
10
SM
ERROR CODES
Code 0-15 Meaning The other terminal is not capable of specific functions. Suggested Cause/Action The other terminal is not capable of accepting the following functions, or the other terminals memory is full. Confidential rx Transfer function SEP/SUB/PWD/SID Check the line connection. Check the FCU - NCU connectors. Replace the NCU or FCU. Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. The other end may have disconnected, or it may be defective; try calling another machine. If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a line problem. Cross reference See error code 0-08. Check the line connection. Check the FCU - NCU connectors. Replace the NCU or FCU. Check for line problems. Try calling another fax machine. Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first line and/or rx cable equalizer setting. Cross reference Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6 Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) Check the connections between the FCU, NCU, & line. Check for line noise or other line problems. Replace the NCU or FCU. The remote machine may be defective or may have disconnected. Cross reference Maximum interval between EOLs and between ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4 Check the line connection. Check the FCU - NCU connectors. Replace the NCU or FCU. Defective remote terminal. Check for line noise or other line problems. Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop time. Cross reference Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch 0A, bits 0 and 1
0-16
CFR or FTT not detected after modem training in confidential or transfer mode
0-20
Facsimile data not received within 6 s of retraining
0-21
EOL signal (end-of-line) from the other end not received within 5 s of the previous EOL signal
0-22
The signal from the other end was interrupted for more than the acceptable modem carrier drop time (default: 200 ms)
SM
11
B779
Fax Option B779
ERROR CODES
Code 0-23 Meaning Too many errors during reception Suggested Cause/Action Check the line connection. Check the FCU - NCU connectors. Replace the NCU or FCU. Defective remote terminal. Check for line noise or other line problems. Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level. Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or rx error criteria. Cross reference Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0 and 1 Check the line connection. Check the FCU - NCU connectors. Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. The other terminal may not be compatible. Cross reference Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4 Check the protocol dump list. Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer. Check the line connection. Retry communication. FCU firmware or board defective. SG3-V34 firmware or board defective. SG3-V34 firmware or board defective. The other terminal did not have a compatible communication mode (e.g., the other terminal was a V.34 data modem and not a fax modem.) A polling tx file was not ready at the other terminal when polling rx was initiated from the calling terminal. The calling terminal could not detect ANSam due to noise, etc. ANSam was too short to detect. Check the line connection and condition. Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax. The terminal could not detect ANSam. Check the line connection and condition. Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-30
The other terminal did not reply to NSS(A) in AI short protocol mode
0-32
0-52 0-55 0-56 0-70
The other terminal sent a DCS, which contained functions that the receiving machine cannot handle. Polarity changed during communication FCE does not detect the SG3-V34. The stored message data exceeds the capacity of the mailbox in the SG3-V34. The communication mode specified in CM/JM was not available (V.8 calling and called terminal) The calling terminal fell back to T.30 mode, because it could not detect ANSam after sending CI. The called terminal fell back to T.30 mode, because it could not detect a CM in response to ANSam (ANSam timeout).
0-74
0-75
B779
12
SM
ERROR CODES
Code 0-76 Meaning The calling terminal fell back to T.30 mode, because it could not detect a JM in response to a CM (CM timeout). The called terminal fell back to T.30 mode, because it could not detect a CJ in response to JM (JM timeout). The called terminal detected CI while waiting for a V.21 signal. The line was disconnected due to a timeout in V.34 phase 2 line probing. The line was disconnected due to a timeout in V.34 phase 3 equalizer training. The line was disconnected due to a timeout in the V.34 phase 4 control channel start-up. The line was disconnected due to a timeout in the V.34 control channel restart sequence. The line was disconnected due to abnormal signaling in V.34 phase 4 control channel start-up. The line was disconnected due to abnormal signaling in V.34 control channel restart. The line was disconnected because the other terminal requested a data rate using MPh that was not available in the currently selected symbol rate. The control channel started after an unsuccessful primary channel. The line was disconnected because PPR was transmitted/received 9 (default) times within the same ECM frame. Suggested Cause/Action The called terminal could not detect a CM due to noise, etc. Check the line connection and condition. Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax. The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to noise, etc. A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot pass JM to the other end. Check the line connection and condition. Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax. Check for line noise or other line problems. If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back to T.30 mode. The guard timer expired while starting these phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or low signal level can cause these errors. If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal: Try making a call at a later time. Try using V.17 or a slower modem using dedicated tx parameters. Try increasing the tx level. Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting. If these errors happen at the receiving terminal: Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting. Try increasing the tx level. Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same error is frequent when receiving from multiple senders. The signal did not stop within 10 s. Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU. The signal did not stop within 10 s. Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU. The other terminal was incompatible. Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
0-77
0-79
0-80 0-81 0-82
0-83
0-84
0-85
0-86
0-87
0-88
The receiving terminal restarted the control channel because data reception in the primary channel was not successful. This does not result in an error communication. Try using a lower data rate at the start. Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
SM
13
B779
Fax Option B779
ERROR CODES
Code 2-11 2-12 2-13 Meaning Only one V.21 connection flag was received Modem clock irregularity Modem initialization error Suggested Cause/Action Replace the FCU. Replace the FCU. Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. Update the modem ROM. Replace the FCU. Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is frequent. Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is frequent. JBIG data error Check the senders JBIG function. Update the MBU ROM.
2-23
JBIG compression or reconstruction error JBIG ASIC error
2-24
2-25 2-26 2-27 2-28 2-29 2-50 2-51 2-53
4-01
JBIG data reconstruction error (BIH error) JBIG data reconstruction error (Float marker error) JBIG data reconstruction error (End marker error) JBIG data reconstruction error (Timeout) JBIG trailing edge maker error The machine resets itself for a fatal FCU system error The machine resets itself because of a fatal communication error Snd msg() in the manual task is an error because the mailbox for the operation task is full. Line current was cut
FCU defective Check the destination device. If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the FCU. If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the FCU.
The user did the same operation many times, and this gave too much load to the machine. Check the line connector. Check the connection between FCU and NCU. Check for line problems. Replace the FCU or the NCU. Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs programmed correctly, then resend. The machine at the other end may be defective.
4-10
5-10 5-20 5-21 5-23
Communication failed because of an ID Code mismatch (Closed Network) or Tel. No./CSI mismatch (Protection against Wrong Connections) DCR timer expired Storage impossible because of a lack of memory Memory overflow Print data error when printing a substitute rx or confidential rx message SAF file access error
5-25
Replace the FCU. Temporary memory shortage. Test the SAF memory. Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board Test the SAF memory. Ask the other end to resend the message. Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board. Replace the FCU or EXMEM board.
B779
14
SM
ERROR CODES
Code 6-00 6-01 6-02 6-04 Meaning G3 ECM - T1 time out during reception of facsimile data G3 ECM - no V.21 signal was received G3 ECM - EOR was received G3 ECM - RTC not detected Suggested Cause/Action Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer. Replace the FCU or NCU.
6-05
G3 ECM - facsimile data frame not received within 18 s of CFR, but there was no line fail
6-06 6-08
G3 ECM - coding/decoding error G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received in reply to PPS.NULL G3 ECM - ERR received
6-09
6-10
G3 ECM - error frames still received at the other end after all communication attempts at 2400 bps V.21 flag detected during high speed modem communication The machine resets the sequence because of an abnormal handshake in the V.34 control channel V.21 signal not stopped within 6 s SIP user name registration error SIP server access error
6-21 6-22
Check the line connection. Check connections from the NCU to the FCU. Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal. Replace the FCU or NCU. Check the line connection. Check connections from the NCU to the FCU. Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal. Replace the FCU or NCU. Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer Cross reference Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) Defective FCU. The other terminal may be defective. The other end pressed Stop during communication. The other terminal may be defective. Check for a noisy line. Adjust the tx levels of the communicating machines. See code 6-05. Check for line noise. Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the dedicated tx parameter for that address). Check the line connection. Defective remote terminal. The other terminal may be defective or incompatible. Check for line noise. If the same error occurs frequently, replace the FCU. Defective remote terminal. Replace the FCU. Double registration of the SIP user name. Capacity for user-name registration in the SIP server is not sufficient. Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server. Defective SIP server.
6-99 13-17
13-18
SM
15
B779
Fax Option B779
ERROR CODES
Code 14-00 Meaning SMTP Send Error Suggested Cause/Action Error occurred during sending to the SMTP server. Occurs for any error other than 14-01 to 16. For example, the mail address of the system administrator is not registered. Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout) because the server could not be found. The PC is not ready to transfer files. SMTP server not functioning correctly. The DNS IP address is not registered. Network not operating correctly. Destination folder selection not correct. SMTP server operating incorrectly, or the destination for direct SMTP sending is not correct. Contact the system administrator and check that the SMTP server has the correct settings and operates correctly. Contact the system administrator for direct SMTP sending and check the sending destination. Failed to access the SMTP server because the access is denied. SMTP server operating incorrectly. Contact the system administrator to determine if there is a problem with the SMTP server and to check that the SMTP server settings are correct. Folder send destination is incorrect. Contact the system administrator to determine that the SMTP server settings and path to the server are correct. Device settings incorrect. Confirm that the user name and password settings are correct. Direct SMTP destination incorrect. Contact the system administrator to determine if there is a problem at the destination at that the settings at the destination are correct. SMTP server operating incorrectly Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly Failed to access the SMTP server because the HDD on the server is full. Insufficient free space on the HDD of the SMTP server. Contact the system administrator and check the amount of space remaining on the SMTP server HDD. Insufficient free space on the HDD where the destination folder is located. Contact the system administrator and check the amount of space remaining on the HDD where the target folder is located. Insufficient free space on the HDD at the target destination for SMTP direct sending. Contact the system administrator and check the amount of space remaining on the target HDD.
14-01
SMTP Connection Failed
14-02
No Service by SMTP Service (421)
14-03
Access to SMTP Server Denied (450)
14-04 14-05
Access to SMTP Server Denied (550) SMTP Server HDD Full (452)
B779
16
SM
ERROR CODES
Code 14-06 Meaning User Not Found on SMTP Server (551) Suggested Cause/Action The designated user does not exist. The designated user does not exist on the SMTP server. The designated address is not for use with direct SMTP sending. Failed to access the SMTP server because the transmission failed. PC not operating correctly. SMTP server operating incorrectly Network not operating correctly. Destination folder setting incorrect. Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly. Failed to access the SMTP server because the transmission failed. SMTP server operating incorrectly Destination folder setting incorrect. Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly. Software application error. POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization failed. Incorrect setting for file transfer Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the limit for the SMTP server. The send buffer is full so the transmission could not be completed. Buffer is full due to using Scan-toEmail while the buffer is being used send mail at the same time. Transmission was cancelled because the detected size of the file was too large. Processing is interrupted because the user pressed Stop. Failed to create the MCS file because: The number of files created with other applications on the Document Server has exceeded the limit. HDD is full or not operating correctly. Software error. UFS file could not be created: Not enough space in UFS area to handle both Scan-to-Email and IFAX transmission. HDD full or not operating correctly. Software error. Error detected with NFAX and send was cancelled due to a software error. Neither the mail address of the machine nor the mail address of the network administrator is registered. Operational error in normal mail sending or direct SMTP sending. Check the address selected in the address book for SMTP sending. Check the domain selection.
14-07
Data Send to SMTP Server Failed (4XX)
14-08
Data Send to SMTP Server Failed (5XX)
14-09 14-10 14-11
Authorization Failed for Sending to SMTP Server Addresses Exceeded Buffer Full
14-12 14-13 14-30
Data Size Too Large Send Cancelled MCS File Creation Failed
14-31
UFS File Creation Failed
14-32 14-33 14-34
Cancelled the Mail Due to Error Detected by NFAX No Mail Address For the Machine Address designated in the domain for SMTP sending does not exist
SM
17
B779
Fax Option B779
ERROR CODES
Code 14-50 Meaning Mail Job Task Error Suggested Cause/Action Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send was cancelled: Address book was being edited during creation of the notification mail. Software error. Not even one return notification can be downloaded: The address book was being edited. The number for the specified destination does not exist (it was deleted or edited after the job was created). The cancel operation by the user failed to cancel the send operation. All addresses for return notification mail failed. At startup, the system detected that the IP address of the POP3/IMAP4 server has not been registered in the machine. The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not been registered. The mail address has not been registered. Error other than 15-11 to 15-18. The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be found: The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server is not stored in the machine. The DNS IP address is not registered. Network not operating correctly. POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed: Incorrect IFAX user name or password. Access was attempted by another device, such as the PC. POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect. Occurs only during manual reception. Transmission cannot be received due to insufficient buffer space. The buffer is being used for mail send or Scan-toEmail. The mail header is not standard format. For example, the Date line description is incorrect. The e-mail is not in standard format. There is no boundary between parts of the e-mail, including the header. The mail cannot be received because it is too large. May occur during manual receiving only because the network is not operating correctly. Only one portion of the mail was received. The format of the final destination for the transfer request was incorrect.
14-51
UCS Destination Download Error
14-60 14-61 15-01 15-02 15-03 15-10 15-11
Send Cancel Failed Notification Mail Send Failed for All Destinations POP3/IMAP4 Server Not Registered POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account Information Not Registered Mail Address Not Registered DCS Mail Receive Error Connection Error
15-12
Authorization Error
15-13
Receive Buffer Full
15-14 15-15 15-16 15-17 15-18 15-31
Mail Header Format Error Mail Divide Error Mail Size Receive Error Receive Timeout Incomplete Mail Received Final Destination for Transfer Request Reception Format Error
B779
18
SM
ERROR CODES
Code 15-39 Meaning Send/Delivery Destination Error Suggested Cause/Action The transmission cannot be delivered to the final destination: Destination file format is incorrect. Could not create the destination for the file transmission. Reception rejected because the transaction exceeded the limit for the Auth. E-mail RX setting. The delivery destination address was specified with Off Ramp Gateway OFF. Format error in the address of the Off Ramp Gateway. The number of addresses for the Off Ramp Gateway exceeded the limit of 30. The attached file is not TIFF format. Could not receive transmission due to: Resolution error Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without extended memory. Resolution is not supported. Page size error The page size was larger than A3. Compression error File was compressed with other than MH, MR, or MMR. The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be received because the TIFF header is incorrect: The TIFF file attachment is a type not supported. The TIFF file attachment is corrupted. Software error. The file received as an attachment caused the TIFF decompression error: The TIFF format of the attachment is corrupted. Software error. The file could not be received because the attachment was not binary image data. Could not find the Disposition line in the header of the Return Receipt, or there is a problem with the firmware. Could not find the Original Message ID line in the header of the Return Receipt, or there is a problem with the firmware. Could not receive the transmission because the destination buffer is full and the destination could not be created (this error may occur when receiving a transfer request or a request for notification of reception).
15-41 15-42 15-43 15-44 15-61 15-62
SMTP Receive Error Off Ramp Gateway Error Address Format Error Addresses Over Attachment File Format Error TIFF File Compatibility Error
15-63
TIFF Parameter Error
15-64
TIFF Decompression Error
15-71 15-73 15-74 15-80
Not Binary Image Data MDN Status Error MSDN Message ID Error Mail Job Task Read Error
SM
19
B779
Fax Option B779
ERROR CODES
Code 15-81 Meaning Repeated Destination Registration Error
Rev. 10/05/2009
15-91
Send Registration Error
15-92 15-93 15-94 15-95 22-00
Memory Overflow Memory Access Error Incorrect ID Code Transfer Station Function Original length exceeded the maximum scan length Memory overflow while receiving
22-01
22-02
22-04 22-05 23-00 25-00
Tx or Rx job stalled due to line disconnection at the other end The machine cannot store received data in the SAF No G3 parameter confirmation answer Data read timeout during construction The machine software resets itself after a fatal transmission error occurred LAN Fax Error
Suggested Cause/Action Could not repeat receive the transmission because the destination buffer is full and the destination could not be created (this error may occur when receiving a transfer request or a request for notification of reception). Could not receive the file for transfer to the final destination: The format of the final destination or the transfer destination is incorrect. Destinations are full so the final and transfer destinations could not be created. Transmission could not be received because memory overflowed during the transaction. Transaction could not complete due to a malfunction of SAF memory. The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for transfer request, because the ID code in the incoming e-mail did not match the ID code registered in the machine. The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for transfer because the transfer function was unavailable. Divide the original into more than one page. Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower the scan resolution if possible. Add optional page memory. Wait for the files in the queue to be sent. Delete unnecessary files from memory. Transfer the substitute reception files to an another fax machine, if the machines printer is busy or out of order. Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk. The job started normally but did not finish normally; data may or may not have been received fully. Restart the machine. Update the ROM Replace the FCU. Defective FCU board or firmware. Restart the machine. Replace the FCU Update the ROM Replace the FCU.
It was cancelled received LAN Fax images during store the image to SAF of FCU. The LAN Fax transmission of a message was cancelled by the LAN Fax driver. Replace the FCU. Update the SG3-V34 modem ROM. Replace the SG3-V34 board. Check for line noise or other line problems. Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.
31-21
F0-xx F6-xx
V.34 modem error SG3-V34 modem error
B779
20
SM
IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING
2.2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING

Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the network is causing the problem.
Communication Route Item 1. Connection with the LAN Action Remarks
General LAN
Between IFAX and PC
Between machine and email server
Check that the LAN cable is connected to the machine. Check that the LEDs on the hub are lit. 2. LAN activity Check that other devices connected to the LAN can communicate through the LAN. 1. Network settings on Check the network Is the IP address the PC settings on the PC. registered in the TCP/IP properties in the network setup correct? Check the IP address with the administrator of the network. 2. Check that PC can Use the ping At the MS-DOS connect with the command on the PC prompt, type ping then machine to contact the the IP address of the machine. machine, then press Enter. 3. LAN settings in the Check the LAN Use the Network machine parameters function in the User Tools. Check if there is an If there is an IP IP address conflict with other PCs. address conflict, inform the administrator. 1. LAN settings in the Check the LAN Use the Network machine parameters function in the User Tools. Check if there is an If there is an IP IP address conflict with other PCs. address conflict, inform the administrator.
SM
21
B779
Fax Option B779
Communication Route Item 2. E-mail account on the server Action Make sure that the machine can log into the e-mail server. Check that the account and password stored in the server are the same as in the machine. Make sure that the client devices which have an account in the server can send/receive e-mail. Remarks Ask the administrator to check.
Between machine and email server
3. E-mail server
1. E-mail account on the Server
2. E-mail server Between e-mail server and internet
3. Destination e-mail address
Ask the administrator to check. Send a test e-mail with the machines own number as the destination. The machine receives the returned e-mail if the communication is performed successfully. Make sure that the Ask the administrator PC can log into the eto check. mail server. Check that the account and password stored in the server are the same as in the machine. Make sure that the Ask the administrator client devices which to check. have an account in Send a test e-mail the server can with the machines send/receive e-mail. own number as the destination. The machine receives the returned e-mail if the communication is performed successfully. Make sure that the email address is actually used. Check that the e-mail address contains no incorrect characters such as spaces.
B779
22
SM
Communication Route Between e-mail server and internet 1. Error message by e-mail from the network of the destination. Item 4. Router settings Action Remarks
Between e-mail server and internet
Use the ping command Ask the administrator to contact the router. of the server to check. Check that other devices connected to the router can sent data over the router. Check whether e-mail Inform the can be sent to administrator of the another address on LAN. the same network, using the application e-mail software. Check the error email message.
SM
23
B779
Fax Option B779
IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING
2.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING

IP-Fax Transmission Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name
Check Point 1 LAN cable connected? 2 Specified IP address/host name correct? 3 Firewall/NAT is installed? 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Transmission sent manually? IP address of local machine registered? Remote terminal port number setting other than 1720? Specified port number correct? DNS server registered when host name specified? Remote fax a T.38 terminal? Remote fax switched off or busy? Network bandwidth too narrow? Action Check the LAN cable connection. Check the IP address/host name. Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using another method (Fax, Internet Fax) Manual sending not supported. Register the IP address. Send by specifying the port number. Confirm the port number of the remote fax. Contact the network administrator. Check whether the remote fax is a T38 terminal. Check that the remote fax is switched on. Request the network administrator to increase the bandwidth. Raise the delay level. IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3 IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to 1. Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission.
12
Remote fax cancelled transmission?
B779
24
SM
Check Point 1 LAN cable connected? 2 VoIP Gateway T.38 standard? 3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? 4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? 5 Is the IP address/host name of the specified Gateway correct? 6 Number of the specified fax correct? 7 Firewall/NAT is installed? 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Transmission sent manually? IP address of local fax registered? DNS registered when host name specified? Remote fax a G3 fax? G3 fax is connected to VoIP gateway? Remote G3 fax turned on? Network bandwidth too narrow?
Action Check the LAN cable connection. Contact the network administrator. Contact the network administrator. Contact the network administrator. Check the IP address/host name. Check the remote fax number. Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using another method (Fax, Internet Fax) Manual sending not supported. Register the IP address. Contact the network administrator. Check that the remote fax is a G3 fax. Check that G3 fax is connected. Check that G3 fax is switched on. Request the network administrator to increase the bandwidth. Raise the network delay level. IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3 IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to 1.
SM
25
B779
Fax Option B779
Cannot send via VoIP Gateway
Cannot send by Alias Fax number.

Check Point 1 LAN cable connected? 2 Number of specified Alias fax correct? 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Firewall/NAT installed? Transmission sent manually? Gatekeeper installed correctly? Gatekeeper power switched on? IP address/host name of Gatekeeper correct? DNS server registered when Gatekeeper host name specified? Enable H.323 SW is set to on? IP address of local fax registered? Alias number of local fax registered? Remote fax registered in Gatekeeper? Remote fax a T.38 terminal? Remote fax switched off or busy? Network bandwidth too narrow? Action Check the LAN cable connection. Confirm the Alias of the remote fax. Error Code: 13-14 Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using another method (Fax, Internet Fax) Manual sending not supported. Contact the network administrator. Contact the network administrator. Check the IP address/host name. Contact the network administrator. Check the settings. See User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0 Register the IP address of the local fax. Register the Alias number of the local fax. Contact the network administrator. Check whether the remote fax is a T38 terminal. Contact the network administrator. Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth. Raise the delay level. IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3 Lower the modem transmission baud rate. IPFAX SW 05 Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission.
16
B779
26
SM
Cannot receive by IP Address/Host name.

Check Point 1 LAN cable connected? 2 Firewall/NAT is installed? 3 4 5 6 IP address of local fax registered? Port number specified at remote sender fax (if required)? Specified port number correct (if required)? DNS server registered when host name specified on sender side? Network bandwidth too narrow? Action Check the LAN cable connection. Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using another method (Fax, Internet Fax) Register the IP address. Request the sender to specify the port number. Request the sender to check the port number. Contact the network administrator. Note: The sender machine displays this error code if the sender fax is a Ricoh model. Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth. Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the receiving side. IPFAX SW06 Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission.
Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway.

Check Point 1 LAN cable connected? 2 Firewall/NAT is installed? 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? VoIP Gateway power switched on? IP address/host name of specified VoIP Gateway correct on senders side? DNS server registered when host name specified on sender side? Network bandwidth too narrow? G3 fax connected? G3 fax power switched on? Action Check the LAN cable connection. Cannot breach the firewall. Request the remote fax to send by using another method (Fax, Internet Fax) Contact the network administrator. Contact the network administrator. Request the remote fax to check the IP address/host name. Contact the network administrator. Request the network administrator to increase the bandwidth. Check that G3 fax is connected. Check that G3 fax is switched on.
SM
27
B779
Fax Option B779
IP-Fax Reception
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number.

Check Point 1 LAN cable connected? 2 Firewall/NAT is installed? 3 Gatekeeper installed correctly? Action Check the LAN cable connection. Cannot the breach firewall. Request the remote fax to send by using another method (Fax, Internet Fax) Contact the network administrator. Note: The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model. Contact the network administrator. Note: The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model. Request the sender to check the IP address/host name. Note: The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model. Contact the network administrator. Note: The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model. Request the sender to check the settings. User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0 Note: Only if the remote sender fax is a Ricoh fax. Register the IP address. Register the Alias number. Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth. Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the receiving side. IPFAX SW06 Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission. Contact the network administrator. Note: The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model.
Power to Gatekeeper switched on?
IP address/host name of Gatekeeper correct on the senders side?
DNS server registered when Gatekeeper host name specified on senders side? Enable H.323 SW is set to on?
8 9 10
Local fax IP address registered? Local fax Alias number registered? Network bandwidth too narrow?
11 12
Remote fax cancelled transmission? Local fax registered in Gatekeeper?
B779
28
SM
FAX SC CODES
2.4 FAX SC CODES

2.4.1 OVERVIEW
When the FCU detects a Fax SC Code condition, it resets itself automatically (default setting). This initializes the FCU without erasing files in the SAF memory or resetting the switches. For details on Fax SC Codes 1201, refer to the following sections. If bit 7 of System Switch 1F is changed to 1, when the FCU detects a Fax SC Code condition, it displays the code on the display and stops working until the fax unit is initialized using one of the following methods: Hold down the 7 and 9 keys for more than 10 s. Turn off the main power switch and turn it back on.
2.4.2 SC1201
When the FCU detects an unrecoverable error in the SRAM, which requires a complete SRAM initialization, the fax unit displays this SC Code and stops. There is no way to recover from this error condition without a complete SRAM initialization (all the user and service programmed data will be erased). The possible causes are: SRAM backup battery defect, or SW1 on the MBU is at the OFF position. The SRAM on the MBU has a physical defect. SD card connection was loose.
SM
29
B779
Fax Option B779
FAX SC CODES
2.4.3 FAX SC CODE TABLE

SC Code 1001 1201 1299 1305 1310 1311 1312 1401 1405 Description FCU error Unrecoverable FCU SRAM error Software error Suggested Action Initialize the fax unit. Refer to section 2.4.2. Initialize the fax unit.
Sys Switch 1F bit 7 = 0 Automatic reset Service Call display Automatic reset
Sys Switch 1F bit 7 = 1 SC Code display
B779
30
SM
3. SERVICE TABLES
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off. NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data.
3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

SP1-XXX (Bit Switches) Section 3.2 Bit Switches 1
101 Mode No. System Switch 001 032 00 1F Ifax Switch 001 016 Printer Switch 001 016 Function Change the bit switches for system settings for the fax option Section 3.2 Bit Switches Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for the fax option Section 3.2 Bit Switches Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax option Section 3.2 Bit Switches Change the bit switches for communication settings for the fax option Section 3.2 Bit Switches Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the standard G3 board Section 3.2 Bit Switches Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the optional G3 board Section 3.2 Bit Switches Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the optional G3 board Section 3.2 Bit Switches Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
102
00 0F
103
00 0F
104
Communication Switch 001 032 00 1F G3-1 Switch 001 016 G3-2 Switch 001 016 G3-3 Switch 001 016 G4 Internal Switch 001 032
105
00 0F
106
00 0F
107
00 0F
108
00 1F
SM
31
B779
Fax Option B779

109 111 G4 Parameter Switch 001 016 00 0F IP fax Switch 001 016 00 0F
Not used (Do not change the bit switches) Change the bit switches for optional IP fax parameters Section 3.2 Bit Switches
SP2-XXX (RAM Data) 2

101 Mode No. RAM Read/Write 001 Memory Dump 001 G3-1 Memory Dump 002 003 004 103 G3-2 Memory Dump G3-3 Memory Dump G4 Memory Dump Function Change RAM data for the fax board directly. Section 3.5 Service RAM Addresses Print out RAM data for the fax board. Section 3.5 Service RAM Addresses Print out RAM data for the optional SG3 board. Print out RAM data for the optional SG3 board. Print out RAM data for the SiG4 board.
102
102
G3-1 NCU Parameters 001 023 CC, 01 22 G3-2 NCU Parameters 001 023 CC, 01 22 G3-3 NCU Parameters 001 023 CC, 01 22
NCU parameter settings for the standard G3 board. Section 3.3 NCU Parameters NCU parameter settings for the optional G3 board. Section 3.3 NCU Parameters NCU parameter settings for the optional G3 board. Section 3.3 NCU Parameters
104
105
SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings) 3

101 Mode No. Service Station 001 Fax Number 002 Select Line Serial Number 000 PSTN-1 Port Settings 001 Select Line Function Enter the fax number of the service station. Select the line type. Enter the fax units serial number. Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line. If the machine is installed on a PABX line, select PABX, PABX(GND) or PABX(FLASH). Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-1 line.
102 103
002
PSTN Access Number
B779
32
SM
003
Memory Lock Disabled
If the customer does not want to receive transmissions using Memory Lock on this line, turn this SP on. Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If the machine is installed on a PABX line, select PABX, PABX(GND) or PABX(FLASH). Enter the PSTN access number for the G32 line. If the customer does not want to receive transmissions using Memory Lock on this line, change this SP to on. If you turn this SP on, the machine does not send any fax messages on the G3-2 line.
104
PSTN-2 Port Settings 001 Select Line
002
PSTN Access Number
003
Memory Lock Disabled
004
Transmission Disabled
105
PSTN-3 Port Settings 001 Select Line
002 003
PSTN Access Number Memory Lock Disabled
106
107
201
Transmission Disabled ISDN Port Settings 001 Select Line 002 PSTN Access Number 003 Memory Lock Disabled 004 Transmission Disabled IPFAX Port Settings 001 H323 Port 002 SIP Port 003 RAS Port 004 Gatekeeper port 005 T.38 Port 006 SIP Server Port 007 IPFAX Protocol Priority FAX SW 001 032 00 1F
004
Select the line setting for the G3-3 line. If the machine is installed on a PABX line, select PABX, PABX(GND) or PABX(FLASH). Enter the PSTN access number for the G33 line. If the customer does not want to receive transmissions using Memory Lock on this line, change this SP to on. If you turn this SP on, the machine does not send any fax messages on the G3-3 line. Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
Select "H323" or "SIP".
SM
33
B779
Fax Option B779
Mode No.
Function
SP4-XXX (ROM Versions) 4

101 102 103 104 105 106 107 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 Mode No. FCU ROM Version Error Codes G3-1 ROM Version G3-2 ROM Version G3-3 ROM Version G4 ROM Version Charge ROM Version Function Displays the FCU ROM version. Displays the latest 64 fax error codes. Displays the G3-1 modem version. Displays the G3-2 modem version. Displays the G3-3 modem version. Not used (Do not change the bit switches) Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
B779
34
SM
5
101
Mode No. Initialize SRAM 000 Erase All Files 000 Reset Bit Switches 000 Factory setting 000 Initialize All Bit Switches 000 Initialize Security Bit Switches 000
Function Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in the SAF memory, and clock. Erases all files stored in the SAF memory. Resets the bit switches and user parameters. Resets the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the SRAM and files in the SAF memory. Initializes all the current bit switch settings. Initializes only the security bit switches. If you select automatic output/display for the user parameter switches, the security settings are initialized.
102 103
104
105 106
SP6-XXX (Reports) 6
101 Mode No. System Parameter List 000 Service Monitor Report 000 G3 Protocol Dump List 001 G3 All Communications 002 G3-1 (All Communications) 003 G3-1 (1 Communication) 004 G3-2 (All Communications) 005 G3-2 (1 Communication) 006 G3-3 (All Communications) 007 G3-3 (1 Communication) G4 Protocol Dump List 001 Dch + Bch 1 Function Touch the ON button to print the system parameter list. Touch the ON button to print the service monitor report. Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for all G3 lines. Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the G3-1 line. Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the G3-1 line. Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the G3-2 line. Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the G3-2 line. Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the G3-3 line. Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the G3-3 line. Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
102
103
103
104
SM
35
B779
Fax Option B779
SP5-XXX (Initializing)
6
002 003 004 005 006
Mode No. Dch Bch 1 Link Layer Dch Link Layer Dch +Bch 2 Bch 2 Link Layer
Function
105
All Files print out 000
Prints out all the user files in the SAF memory, including confidential messages. NOTE: Do not use this function, unless the customer is having trouble printing confidential messages or recovering files stored using the memory lock feature. The machine prints all the communication records on the report. The machine prints all communication records after the specified date. These log print out functions are for designer use only.
106
Journal Print out 001 All Journals 002 Specified Date
107
108
Log List Print out 001 All log files 002 Printer 003 SC/TRAP Stored 004 Decompression 005 Scanner 006 JOB/SAF 007 Reconstruction 008 JBIG 009 Fax Driver 010 G3CCU 011 Fax Job 012 CCU 013 Scanner Condition IP Protocol Dump List 001 All Communications 002 1 Communication
Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the IP fax line. Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the IP fax line.
B779
36
SM
These are the test modes for PTT approval.
7
101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137
Function G3-1 Modem Tests G3-1 DTMF Tests Ringer Test G3-1 V34 (S2400baud) G3-1 V34 (S2800baud) G3-1 V34 (S3000baud) G3-1 V34 (S3200baud) G3-1 V34 (S3429baud) Recorded Message Test G3-2 Modem Tests G3-2 DTMF Tests G3-2 V34 (S2400baud) G3-2 V34 (S2800baud) G3-2 V34 (S3000baud) G3-2 V34 (S3200baud) G3-2 V34 (S3429baud) G3-3 Modem Tests G3-3 DTMF Tests G3-3 V34 (S2400baud) G3-3 V34 (S2800baud) G3-3 V34 (S3000baud) G3-3 V34 (S3200baud) G3-3 V34 (S3429baud) IG3-1 Modem Tests - Not used IG3-1 DTMF Tests - Not used IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used IG3-1 V34 (S2800baud) - Not used IG3-1 V34 (S3000baud) - Not used IG3-1 V34 (S3200baud) - Not used IG3-1 V34 (S3429baud) - Not used IG3-2 Modem Tests - Not used IG3-2 DTMF Tests - Not used IG3-2 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used IG3-2 V34 (S2800baud) - Not used IG3-2 V34 (S3000baud) - Not used IG3-2 V34 (S3200baud) - Not used IG3-2 V34 (S3429baud) - Not used
SP9-XXX (Design Switch Mode) 9

702 Mode No. Design Switch DFU Function
SM
37
B779
Fax Option B779
SP7-XXX (Test Modes)
BIT SWITCHES
3.2 BIT SWITCHES WARNING

Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as Not used, as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan. NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List printed by the machine.
3.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

System Switch 00 No FUNCTION 0 Dedicated transmission parameter programming 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1 2 Not used Technical data printout on the Journal 0: Disabled 1: Enabled SP No. 1-101-001 COMMENTS Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated transmission parameters. Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated transmission parameters. Do not change 1: Instead of the personal name, the following data are listed on the Journal for each G3 communication.
e.g. 0000 32V34 288/264 L0100 03 04 (1) (2)(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors. (2): Symbol rate (V.34 only) (3): Final modem type used (4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps) (5): Final data rate (6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level) (7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception. (8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception. Note: EQM and rx level are fixed at FFFF in tx mode. The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at 00 for transmission records and ECM reception records. Rx level calculation
Example: 0000 32 V34 288/264 L 01 00 03 04 The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after L indicates the rx level. The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by 16 to get the rx level. In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256. So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB Not used Do not change this setting.
B779
38
SM
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 00 No FUNCTION 4 Line error mark print 0: OFF, 1: ON (print) 5 G3/G4 communication parameter display 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 6 Protocol dump list output after each communication 0: Off 1: On SP No. 1-101-001 COMMENTS When "1" is selected, a line error mark is printed on the printout if a line error occurs during reception. This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key parameters (see below). This is normally disabled because it cancels the CSI display for the user. Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing. This is only used for communication troubleshooting. It shows the content of the transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing. If system switch 09 bit 6 is at 1, the list is only printed if there was an error during the communication. Do not change the setting.
Not used
G3 Communication Parameters
Modem rate 336: 33600 bps 168: 16800 bps 312: 31200 bps 144: 14400 bps 288: 28800 bps 120: 12000 bps 264: 26400 bps 96: 9600 bps 240: 24000 bps 72: 7200 bps 216: 21600 bps 48: 4800 bps 192: 19200 bps 24: 2400 bps S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm) D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm) F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm) SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm) 21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi) 22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi) 44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi) MMR: MMR compression MR: MR compression MH: MH compression JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode) JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode) ECM: With ECM NML: With no ECM A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction 0: 0 ms/line 10: 10 ms/line 25: 2.5 ms/line 20: 20 ms/line 5: 5 ms/line 40: 40 ms/line Note: 40 is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI short protocol.
Resolution
Compression mode
Communication mode Width and reduction I/O rate
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
SM
39
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 02 No FUNCTION 0 Not used 2 Force after transmission stall 0: Off 1: On 3 Not used 4 File retention time 0: Depends on User Parameter 24 [18(H)] 1: No limit 5 Not used 6-7 Memory read/write by RDS Bit 7 6 Setting 0 0 Always disabled 0 1 User selectable 1 0 User selectable 1 1 Always enabled
SP No. 1-101-003 COMMENTS Do not change these settings. With this setting on, the machine resets itself automatically if a transmission stalls and fails to complete the job. Do not change these settings. 1: A file that had a communication error will not be erased unless the communication is successful.
Do not change this setting. (0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out. (0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out, but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow RDS operations to take place. RDS will automatically be locked out again after a certain time, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note that if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switch off until this time limit has expired. (1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the machine. SP No. 1-101-004 COMMENTS 00 - 99 hours (BCD). This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System Switch 02 are set to User selectable. The default setting is 24 hours. SP No. 1-101-005 COMMENTS Do not change these settings. 1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is printed with the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes each). The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed dedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for service technicians). Do not change these settings.
System Switch 03 No FUNCTION 0 Length of time that RDS is to temporarily switched on when 7 bits 6 and 7 of System Switch 02 are set to User selectable
System Switch 04 No FUNCTION 0-2 Not used 3 Printing dedicated tx parameters on Quick/Speed Dial Lists 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
4-7
Not used
System Switch 05 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
B779
40
SM
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 06 No FUNCTION 0 Margin setting for Create to Margin Transmission 7
SP No. 1-101-007 COMMENTS 71 to 99 (BCD) %. This setting determines the reduction ratio when the user uses the Create Margin Transmission feature. Default setting:1001 0011 (93%)
System Switch 07 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 08 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 09 No FUNCTION 0 Addition of image data from confidential transmissions on the transmission result report 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1 Inclusion of communications on the Journal when no image data was exchanged. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 2 Automatic error report printout 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Printing of the error code on the error report 0: No 1: Yes Not used Power failure report 0: Disabled 1: Enabled SP No. 1-101-010 COMMENTS If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first page of confidential messages will be printed on transmission result reports. 0: Communications that reached phase C (message tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal. 1: Communications that reached phase A (call setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal. This will include telephone calls. 0: Error reports will not be printed. 1: Error reports will be printed automatically after failed communications. 1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
4 5
Conditions for printing the protocol dump list 0: Print for all communications 1: Print only when there is a communication error Priority given to various types of remote terminal ID when printing reports 0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel. number 1: Dial label > Tel. number > RTI > CSI
Do not change this setting. 1: A power failure report will be automatically printed after the power is switched on if a fax message disappeared from the memory when the power was turned off last. This switch becomes effective only when system switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1. 1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol dump list only for communications with errors. This bit determines which set of priorities the machine uses when listing remote terminal names on reports. Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the Quick/Speed Dial number.
SM
41
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 0A No FUNCTION 0 Automatic port selection 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 1-2 Not used 3 Continuous polling reception 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
Dialing on the ten-key pad when the external telephone is off-hook 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
5 6-7
On hook dial 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Not used
SP No. 1-101-011 COMMENTS When "1" is selected, a suitable port is automatically selected if the selected port is not used. Do not change these settings. This feature allows a series of stations to be polled in a continuous cycle. This will continue until the polling reception file is erased. The dialing interval is the same as memory transmission. 0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when the external telephone is not by the machine, or if a wireless telephone is connected as an external telephone. 1: The user can dial on the machines ten-key pad when the handset is off-hook. 0: On hook dial is disabled. Do not change the factory settings
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 0E No FUNCTION 0-1 Not used 2 Enable/disable for direct sending selection 0: Direct sending off 1: Direct sending on 3 Action when the external handset goes off-hook 0: Manual tx and rx operation 1: Memory tx and rx operation (the display remains the same) SP No. 1-101-015 COMMENTS Do not change the settings. Direct sending cannot operate when the capture function is on during sending. Setting this switch to "1" enables direct sending without capture. Setting this switch to "0" masks the direct sending function on the operation panel so it cannot be selected. 0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the external handset is off-hook. However, memory tx is not possible. 1: The display stays in standby mode even when the external handset is used, so that other people can use the machine for memory tx operation. Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with this setting. Do not change these settings.
4-7
Not used
B779
42
SM
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 0F No FUNCTION 0 Country/area code for functional to settings (Hex) 7 00: France 11: USA 01: Germany 12: Asia 02: UK 13: Japan 03: Italy 14: Hong Kong 04: Austria 15: South Africa 05: Belgium 16: Australia 06: Denmark 17: New Zealand 07: Finland 18: Singapore 08: Ireland 19: Malaysia 09: Norway 1A: China 0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan 0B: Switz. 1C: Korea 0C: Portugal 20: Turkey 0D: Holland 21: Greece 0E: Spain 22: Hungary 0F: Israel 23: Czech 10: --24: Poland System Switch 10 No FUNCTION 0 Threshold memory level for to parallel memory transmission 7 System Switch 11 No FUNCTION 0 TTI printing position 0: Superimposed on the page data 1: Printed before the data leading edge 1 TSI (G3) printing position 0: Superimposed on the page data 1: Printed before the data leading edge 2 Not used 3 TTI used for broadcasting 0: The TTIs selected for each Quick/Speed dial are used 1: The same TTI is used for all destinations 4-7 Not used
SP No. 1-101-016 COMMENTS This country/area code determines the factory settings of bit switches and RAM addresses. However, it has no effect on the NCU parameter settings and communication parameter RAM addresses. Cross reference NCU country code: SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1 SP No. 2-104-001 for G3-2 SP No. 2-105-001 for G3-3
SP No. 1-101-017 COMMENTS Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB N can be between 00 - FF(H) Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB SP No. 1-101-018 COMMENTS Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information that the customer considers to be important (G3 transmissions).
Change this bit to 1 if the TSI (G3) overprints information that the customer considers to be important. Do not change the factory settings. 1: The TTI (TTI_1 or TTI_2) which is selected for all destinations during broadcasting.
Do not change the factory settings.
SM
43
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 12 No FUNCTION 0 TTI printing position in the main to scan direction 7
SP No. 1-101-019 COMMENTS TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm Input even numbers only. This setting determines the print start position for the TTI from the left edge of the paper. If the TTI is moved too far to the right, it may overwrite the file number which is on the top right of the page. On an A4 page, if the TTI is moved over by more than 50 mm, it may overwrite the page number.
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings) System Switch 14 - Not used (do not change these settings) System Switch 15 No FUNCTION 0 Not used 1 Going into the Energy Saver mode automatically 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 2-3 Not used 4-5 Interval for preventing the machine from entering Energy Saver mode if there is a pending transmission file. Bit 5 4 Setting 0 0 1 min 0 1 30 min 1 0 1 hour 1 1 24 hours 6-7 Not used SP No. 1-101-022 COMMENTS Do not change the settings. 1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is active even in the Energy Saver mode. Do not change these settings. If there is a file waiting for transmission, the machine does not go to Energy Saver mode during the selected period. After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting for transmission, the machine goes to the Energy Saver mode.
Do not change
B779
44
SM
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 16 No FUNCTION 0 Parallel Broadcasting 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1 Priority setting for the G3 line. 0: PSTN-1 > PSTN-2 or 3 1: PSTN-2 or 3 > PSTN-1 2-7 Not used
SP No. 1-101-023 COMMENTS 1: The machine sends messages simultaneously using all available ports during broadcasting. This function allows the user to select the default G3 line type. The optional SG3 unit(s) are required to use the PSTN-2 or 3 setting. Do not change these settings.
System Switch 17 - Not used (do not change these settings) System Switch 18 - Not used (do not change these settings) System Switch 19 No FUNCTION 0-5 Not used 6 Extended scanner page memory after memory option is installed 0: Disabled 1: Enabled SP No. 1-101-026 COMMENTS Do not change the settings. 0: After installing the memory expansion option, the scanner page memory is extended to 4 MB from 2 MB. 1: If this bit is set to 1 after installing the memory expansion option, the scanner page memory is extended to 12 MB. But the SAF memory decreases to 18 MB. 1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form or letterhead which has a colored or printed background, change this bit to 1. Original 1 and Original 2 can be selected in addition to the Text, Text/Photo and Photo modes.
Special Original mode 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
System Switch 1A No. FUNCTION 0-7 LS RX memory capacity threshold setting 00-FF (0-1020 Kbyte: Hex)
COMMENTS Sets the value to x4KB. When the amount of available memory drops below this setting, RX documents are printed to conserve memory. Initial setting 0x80 (512 KB)
System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change these settings) System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)
SM
45
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 1D No FUNCTION 0 RTI/CSI/CPS code display 0: Enable 1: Disable 1 Not used 2 Destination telephone number display limitation 0: OFF, 1: ON 3-7 Not used System Switch 1E No FUNCTION 0 Communication after the Journal data storage area has become full 0: Impossible 1: Possible SP No. 1-101-030 COMMENTS 0: RTI, CSI, CPS codes are displayed on the top line of the LCD panel during communication. 1: Codes are switched off (no display) Do not change this setting. When "1" is selected, the destination telephone number display is limited and redial is disabled. Do not change these settings. SP No. 1-101-031 COMMENTS 0: When this switch is on and the journal history becomes full, the next report prints. If the journal history is not deleted, the next transmission cannot be received. This prevents overwriting communication records before the machine can print them. 1: If the buffer memory of the communication records for the Journal is full, fax communications are still possible. But the machine will overwrite the oldest communication records. Note: This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the report (e.g., no paper). 0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning, the successfully scanned pages are transmitted. 1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning, the file is erased and no pages are transmitted. This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory transmission. This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is displayed on the LCD while the machine is communicating in G3 non-standard mode. 1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
Action when the SAF memory has become full during scanning 0: The current page is erased. 1: The entire file is erased.
RTI/CSI display priority 0: RTI 1: CSI File No. printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled Action when authorized reception is enabled but authorized RTIs/CSIs are not yet programmed 0: All fax reception is disabled 1: Faxes can be received if the sender has an RTI or CSI
5-7
Not used
If authorized reception is enabled but the user has stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the machine will not be able to receive any fax messages. If the customer wishes to receive messages from any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block messages from senders that do not include an RTI or CSI, change this bit to 1, then enable Authorized Reception. Otherwise, keep this bit at 0 (default setting). Do not change the settings
B779
46
SM
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 1F No FUNCTION 0 Not used 1 Report printout after an original jam during SAF storage or if the SAF memory fills up 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 2 3 Not used Received fax print start timing (G3 reception) 0: After receiving each page 1: After receiving all pages Not used Action when a fax SC has occurred 0: Automatic reset 1: Fax unit stops
SP No. 1-101-032 COMMENTS Do not change the settings. 0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory overflows during scanning, a report will be printed. Change this bit to 1 if the customer does not want to have a report in these cases. Memory tx Memory storage report Parallel memory tx Transmission result report Do not change the settings. 0: The machine prints each page immediately after the machine receives it. 1: The machine prints the complete message after the machine receives all the pages in the memory. Do not change the factory settings. 0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automatically resets itself. 1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the fax unit stops. Cross Reference Fax SC codes - See Troubleshooting
4-6 7
SM
47
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
3.2.2 I-Fax Switches

I-fax Switch 00 No FUNCTION Original Width of TX Attachment File 0 1 2 3-6 7 A4 B4 A3 Reserved Not used SP No. 1-102-001 COMMENTS This setting sets the maximum size of the original that the destination can receive. (Bits 3~7 are reserved for future use or not used.) 0: Off (not selected), 1: On (selected) If more than one of these three bits is set to 1, the larger size has priority. For example, if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to 1 then the maximum size is A3 (Bit 2). When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the destination, so the sending machine cannot make a selection for the receiving capabilities (original width setting) of the receiving machine. The original width selected with this switch is used as the RX machines original width setting, and the original is reduced to this size before sending. The default is A4. If the width selected with this switch is higher than the receiving machine can accept, the machine detects this and this causes an error.
B779
48
SM
BIT SWITCHES
I-fax Switch 01 SP No. 1-102-002 No FUNCTION COMMENTS Original Line Resolution of TX These settings set the maximum resolution of the Attachment File original that the destination can receive. 0: Not selected 0 200x100 Standard 1: Selected 1 200x200 Detail If more than one of these three bits is set to 1, the 2 200x400 Fine higher resolution has priority. For example, if both 3 300 x 300 Reserve Bit 0 and Bit 2 are set to 1 then the resolution is 4 400 x 400 Super Fine set for "Bit 2 200 x 400. 5 600 x 600 Reserve 6 Reserve 7 mm/inch This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission. 0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion) When on (set to 1), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail. There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters. NOTE: Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver to determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the mm/inch selection is determined by the sender fax. When this switch is Off (0): Images scanned in inches are sent in inches. Images scanned in mm are sent in mm. Images received in inches are transmitted in inches. Images received in mm are transmitted in mm. When this switch is On (1): Images scanned in inches are sent in inches. Images scanned in mm are converted to inches. Images received in inches are transmitted in inches. Images received in mm are converted to inches.
SM
49
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
I-fax Switch 02 SP No. 1-102-003 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 RX Text Mail Header Processing This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails when they are received. 0: Prints only text mail. 1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail. When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the From address and Subject address are printed as header information. When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this setting is ignored and no header is printed. 1 Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs. This allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their intended destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example. 0: Prints 1st page only. 1: Prints all pages. Text String for Return Receipt This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the transmission was received normally at the destination. 00: Dispatched Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with dispatched in the 2nd part: Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched The dispatched string is included in the Subject string. 01: Displayed Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with displayed in the 2nd part: Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed The displayed string is included in the Subject string. 10: Reserved 11: Reserved NOTE: A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to 00 (for dispatched) received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error. If any setting other than displayed (01) causes a problem, change the setting to 01 to enable normal sending of the Return Receipt. Media accept feature This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to confirm a reception. 0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail 1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail. NOTE: Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer mail, which contains the media accept feature field. Not Used
2-3
5-6
B779
50
SM
BIT SWITCHES
Image Resolution of RX Text Mail This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail. 0: 200 x 200 1: 400 x 400 NOTE: The 1 setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to have enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400 resolution.
I-fax Switch 03 SP No. 1-102-004 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Original Output at Transfer Station This setting determines whether the original is output at the transfer station when it is received from the sender that initiated the transfer transmission. This feature is the same as for G3 transfer transmissions. 0: Received original not output at the transfer station. 1: Received original output. The original is printed after the transfer station has transferred it to the destinations, so its output confirms that the original has been transferred. 1 Transfer Result Report This setting determines when a Transfer Result Report is generated and returned to the transfer requestor. 0: Returns the report after each transfer. 1: Returns the report only if an error occurred during transfer. 2 Destination Error Handling for Reception Transfer Request This setting restricts transfer transmission based on whether the final destinations are correct or not. 0: The transfer station transmits to correct destinations only (addresses with no errors in them). 1: If any address has an error in it, the transfer station transfers no transmissions and returns a transfer transmission failure report to the requestor that initiated the transfer. There is no negotiation between the transfer initiator and the transfer station to determine whether the final destination addresses are correct or not. This setting determines whether or not the transfer station transfers the transmissions if there is a mistake in even one of the final destination addresses. 3 Polling ID Check for Reception of Transfer Request This setting determines whether the polling IDs of incoming transmissions are checked to ensure that the polling IDs match. 0: Receives and transfers only messages that have matching polling IDs. 1: Receives and transfers all messages, even if the polling IDs do not match. 4-7 Not Used
SM
51
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
I-fax Switch 04 SP No. 1-102-005 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents. 0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line. 1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line. When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determine automatically the destination folder for each e-mail. Subject corresponding to mail post database 0: Standard subject 1: Mail post database subject The standard subject is replaced by the mail post database subject in the following three cases: 1) When the service technician sets the service (software) switch. 2) When memory sending or delivery specified by F code is applied by the SMTP server 3) With relay broadcasting (1st stage without the Schmidt 4 function). Note: This switch does not apply for condition 3) when the RX system is set up for memory sending, delivery by F-code, sending with SMTP RX and when operators are using FOL (to prevent problems when receiving transmissions). Not Used
2-7
I-fax Switch 05 SP No. 1-102-006 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal. For example: "1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a broadcast to 9 destinations. 0: Not recorded 1: Recorded 1-7 Not Used I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-007 SP No. 1-102-008
B779
52
SM
BIT SWITCHES
I-fax Switch 08 SP No. 1-102-009 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0-7 Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF stores fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and also holds incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF memory available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received; received mail is then stored on the mail server. 00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX) NOTE: The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the amount of memory. I-fax Switch 09 No FUNCTION 0-3 Not used 4-7 Restrict TX Retries SP No. 1-102-010 COMMENTS Do not change the settings This setting determines the number of retries when connection and transmission fails due to errors. 01-F (1-15 Hex) SP No. 1-102-011 SP No. 1-102-012 SP No. 1-102-013 SP No. 1-102-014 SP No. 1-102-015
I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) I-fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0F SP No. 1-102-016 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or output immediately. 0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery. 1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations. 1-7 Not used
SM
53
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
3.2.3 Printer Switches

Printer Switch 00 No FUNCTION 0 Select page separation marks 0: Off 1: On SP No. 1-103-001 COMMENTS 0: If a 2 page RX transmission is split, [*] is printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page. 1: If a 2 page RX transmission is split into two pages, for example, [*] [2] is printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page. Note: This helps the user to identify pages that have been split because the size of the paper is smaller than the size of the document received. (When A5 is used to print an A4 size document, for example.) 1: Default. 10 mm of the trailing edge of the previous page are repeated at the top of the next page. 0: The next page continues from where the previous page stopped without any repeated text. This switch is only effective when user parameter 02 - bit 2 (printing the received date and time on received fax messages) is enabled. 1: The machine prints the received and printed date and time at the bottom of each received page. Do not change the settings. SP No. 1-103-002 COMMENTS Do not change the settings. These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer switch 01 is 1.
Repetition of data when the received page is longer than the printer paper 0: Off 1: On Prints the date and time on received fax messages 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Not used
3-7
Printer Switch 01 No FUNCTION 0-2 Not used 3-4 Maximum print width used in the setup protocol Bit 4 3 Setting 0 0 Not used 0 1 A3 1 0 B4 1 1 A4 5-6 Not used 7 Received message width restriction in the protocol signal to the sender 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
Do not change the settings. 0: The machine informs the transmitting machine of the print width depending on the paper size available from the paper feed stations. Refer to the table on the next page for how the machine chooses the paper width used in the setup protocol (NSF/DIS). 1: The machine informs the transmitting machine of the fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3 and 4 above.
B779
54
SM
BIT SWITCHES
Available Paper Size A4 or 8.5" x 11" B5 A5 or 8.5" x 5.5" No paper available (Paper end) Printer Switch 02 No FUNCTION 0 1st paper feed station usage for fax printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 1 2nd paper feed station usage for fax printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 2 3rd paper feed station usage for fax printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 3 4th paper feed station usage for fax printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 4 LCT usage for fax printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 5-7 Not used
Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS) 297 mm width 256 mm width 216 mm width 216 mm width SP No. 1-103-003 COMMENTS 0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax messages and reports. 1: The specified paper feed station will not be used for printing fax messages and reports. Note: Do not disable usage for a paper feed station which has been specified by User Parameter Switch 0F (15), or which is used for the Specified Cassette Selection feature.
Do not change the settings.
SM
55
B779
Fax Option B779
Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the setup protocol
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 03 No FUNCTION 0 Length reduction of received data 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1-3 4 to 7
Not used Page separation setting when sub scan compression is forbidden 00-0F (0-15 mm: Hex) Default: 6 mm
SP No. 1-103-004 COMMENTS 0: Incoming pages are printed without length reduction. (Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4 to 7) 1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing. (Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04, bits 0 to 4) Do not change the settings Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with switch 03-0 above). For example, if this setting is set to "10", and A4 is the selected paper size: If the received document is 10 mm or less longer than A4, then the 10 mm are cut and only 1 page prints. If the received document is 10 mm longer than A4, then the document is split into 2 pages.
Printer Switch 04 SP No. 1-103-005 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above. to <Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm) 4 N is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4. Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 mm 0 0 0 0 1 5 mm 0 0 1 0 0 20 mm (default setting) 1 1 1 1 1 155 mm For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper <Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm) Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken place.
5 6
0 1 0 1 0 =4 mm, 0 =10 mm, 1 =15 mm, 1 = Not used

7 Not used. Do not change the setting.
B779
56
SM
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings) Printer Switch 06 No FUNCTION 0 Printing while a paper cassette is pulled out, when the Just Size Printing feature is enabled. 0: Printing will not start 1: Printing will start if another cassette has a suitable size of paper, based on the paper size selection priority tables. 1-7 Not used. Printer Switch 07 No FUNCTION 0 Reduction for Journal printing 0: Off 1: On 2-3 Not used. 4 List of destinations in the Communication Failure Report for broadcasting 0: All destinations 1: Only destinations where communication failure occurred 5-7 Not used. SP No. 1-103-007 COMMENTS
Cross reference Just size printing on/off User switch 05, bit 5
Do not change the settings. SP No. 1-103-008 COMMENTS 1: The Journal is reduced to 91% to ensure that there is enough space in the left margin for punch holes or staples. Do not change the settings. 1: Only destinations where communication failure occurred are printed on the Communication Failure Report.
Printer Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) Printer Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings) Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM
57
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 0E No FUNCTION 0 Paper size selection priority 0: Width 1: Length 1 Paper size selected for printing A4 width fax data 0: 8.5" x 11" size 1: A4 size Page separation 0: Enabled 1: Disabled
SP No. 1-103-015 COMMENTS 0: A paper size that has the same width as the received data is selected first. 1: A paper size which has enough length to print all the received lines without reduction is selected first. This switch determines which paper size is selected for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine has both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper. 1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page separation to print a received fax message, the machine does not print the message (Substitute Reception is used). After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the machine automatically prints the fax message. Same size means the sample image is printed at 100%, even if page separation occurs. User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to 0 to enable this switch. Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on this feature.
3 to 4
5-6 7
Printing the sample image on reports Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting 0 0 The upper half only 0 1 50% reduction in sub-scan only 1 0 Same size 1 1 Not used Not used Equalizing the reduction ratio among separated pages (Page Separation) 0: Enabled 1: Disabled
Do not change the settings. 0: When page separation has taken place, all the pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio. 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected paper size when page separation has taken place. Other pages are printed without reduction. SP No. 1-103-016 COMMENTS (0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine receives halftone images from other manufacturers fax machines frequently.
Printer Switch 0F No FUNCTION 0 Smoothing feature to Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 1 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Disabled 1 0 Enabled 1 1 Not used 2 Duplex printing 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 3 Binding direction for Duplex printing 0: Left binding 1: Top binding 4-7 Not used
1: The machine always prints received fax messages in duplex printing mode: 0: Sets the binding for the left edge of the stack. 1: Sets the binding for the top of the stack. Do not change the settings.
B779
58
SM
BIT SWITCHES
3.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES

Communication Switch 00 No FUNCTION 0 Compression modes available to in receive mode 1 Bit 1 0 Modes 0 0 MH only 0 1 MH/MR 1 0 MH/MR/MMR 1 1 MH/MR/MMR/ JBIG 2 Compression modes available to in transmit mode 3 Bit 3 2 Modes 0 0 MH only 0 1 MH/MR 1 0 MH/MR/MMR 1 1 MH/MR/MMR/ JBIG 4 Not used 5 JBIG compression method: Reception 0: Only basic supported 1: Basic and optional both supported 6 JBIG compression method: Transmission 0: Basic mode priority 1: Optional mode priority 7 Closed network (reception) 0: Disabled 1: Enabled SP No. 1-104-001 COMMENTS These bits determine the compression capabilities to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
These bits determine the compression capabilities to be used in the transmission and to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
Do not change the settings. Change the setting when communication problems occur using JBIG compression.
Change the setting when communication problems occur using JBIG compression.
1: Reception will not go ahead if the polling ID code of the remote terminal does not match the polling ID code of the local terminal. This function is only available in NSF/NSS mode.
SM
59
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 01 No FUNCTION 0 ECM 0: Off 1: On
1 2 to 3
Not used Wrong connection prevention method Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 8 digit CSI 1 0 4 digit CSI 1 1 CSI/RTI
SP No. 1-104-002 COMMENTS If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all communications. In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are switched off automatically. Do not change the setting. (0,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without sending a fax message, if the last 8 digits of the received CSI do not match the last 8 digits of the dialed telephone number. This does not work when manually dialed. (1,0) - The same as above, except that only the last 4 digits are compared. (1,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without sending a fax message, if the other end does not identify itself with an RTI or CSI. (0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will always go ahead. Note: This function does not work when dialing is done from the external telephone. Do not change the setting. The setting determined by these bits is informed to the transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
4-5 6 to 7
Not used Maximum printable page length available Bit 7 6 Setting 0 0 No limit 0 1 B4 (364 mm) 1 0 A4 (297 mm) 1 1 Not used
Communication Switch 02 No FUNCTION 0 G3 Burst error threshold 0: Low 1: High
1 2
Acceptable total error line ratio 0: 5% 1: 10% Treatment of pages received with errors during G3 reception 0: Deleted from memory without printing 1: Printed
SP No. 1-104-003 COMMENTS If there are more consecutive error lines in the received page than the threshold, the machine will send a negative response. The Low and High threshold values depend on the sub-scan resolution, and are as follows. 6(L) 12(H) 100 dpi 12(L) 24(H) 200 dpi 18(L) 36(H) 300 dpi 24(L) 48(H) 400 dpi If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end. 0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
B779
60
SM
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 02 No FUNCTION 3 Hang-up decision when a negative code (RTN or PIN) is received during G3 immediate transmission 0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up SP No. 1-104-003 COMMENTS 0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is received. 1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it receives RTN or PIN. This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if ECM is being used. Do not change the settings. SP No. 1-104-004 COMMENTS 00 - FF (Hex) times. This setting is not used if ECM is switched on. Default setting - 03(H)
4-7
Not used
Communication Switch 03 No FUNCTION 0 Maximum number of page to retransmissions in a G3 7 memory transmission
Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 0A No FUNCTION 0 Point of resumption of memory transmission upon redialing 0: From the error page 1: From page 1 1-7 Not used SP No. 1-104-011 COMMENTS 0: The transmission begins from the page where transmission failed the previous time. 1: Transmission begins from the first page, using normal memory transmission. Do not change the settings.
SM
61
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 0B No FUNCTION 0 Use of Economy Transmission during a Transfer operation to end receivers 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1 Use of Economy Transmission during a Transfer operation to the Next Transfer Stations 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 2 Use of Label Insertion for the End Receivers in a Transfer operation 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 3 Conditions required for Transfer Result Report transmission 0: Always transmitted 1: Only transmitted if there was an error
SP No. 1-104-012 COMMENTS These bits determine whether the machine uses the Economy Transmission feature when it is carrying out a Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
This bit determines whether the machine uses the Label Insertion feature when it is carrying out a Transfer operation as a Transfer Station. 0: When acting as a Transfer Station, the machine will always send a Transfer Result Report back to the Requesting Station after completing the Transfer Request, even if there were no problems. 1: The machine will only send back a Transfer Result Report if there were errors during communication, meaning one or more of the End Receivers could not be contacted. When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station, this bit determines whether the machine prints the fax message coming in from the Requesting Terminal. After the machine receives a transfer request, the machine compares the last N digits of the requesting terminals own fax number with all the Quick/Speed dials programmed in the machine. (N is the number programmed in communication switch 0C.) 0: If there is no matching number programmed in the machine, the machine rejects the transfer request. 1: Even if there is no matching number programmed in the machine, the machine accepts the transfer request. The result report will be printed at the transfer terminal, but will not be sent back to the requesting terminal. Do not change the settings.
Printout of the message when acting as a Transfer Station 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Action when there is no fax number in the programmed Quick/Speed dials which meets the requesting terminals own fax number 0: Transfer is disabled 1: Transfer is enabled
6-7
Not used
B779
62
SM
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 0C No FUNCTION 0 Number of digits compared to to find the requesters fax number 4 from the programmed Quick/Speed Dials when acting as a Transfer Station
5-7
Not used
SP No. 1-104-013 COMMENTS 00 1F (0 to 31 digits) After the machine receives a transfer request, the machine compares the own telephone number sent from the Requesting Terminal with all Quick/Speed Dials programmed in the machine, starting from Quick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed Dials. This number determines how many digits from the end of the telephone numbers the machine compares. If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report to the first Quick/Speed Dial that the machine compared. If Quick Dial 01 is programmed, the machine will send the report to Quick 01. If Quick Dial 01 through 04 are not programmed and Quick Dial 05 is programmed, the machine will send the report to Quick 05. Default setting 05(H) = 5 digits Do not change the settings. SP No. 1-104-014 COMMENTS 00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes (e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes) One page is about 24 kbytes. The machine refers to this setting before each fax reception. If the amount of remaining memory is below this threshold, the machine cannot receive any fax messages. If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect ringing signals and go into receive mode even if there is no memory available. This will result in communication failure. SP No. 1-104-015 COMMENTS 06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s (e.g., 06(H) = 12 s) This value is the minimum time that the machine waits before it dials the next destination.
Communication Switch 0D No FUNCTION 0 The available memory to threshold, below which ringing 7 detection (and therefore reception into memory) is disabled
Communication Switch 0E No FUNCTION 0 Minimum interval between to automatic dialing attempts 7
Communication Switch 0F Not used (do not change the settings.)
SM
63
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 10 No FUNCTION 0 Memory transmission: to Maximum number of dialing 7 attempts to the same destination
SP No. 1-104-017 COMMENTS 01 FE (Hex) times
Communication Switch 11 Not used (do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 12 No FUNCTION 0 Memory transmission: Interval to between dialing attempts to the 7 same destination SP No. 1-104-019 COMMENTS 01 FF (Hex) minutes
Communication Switch 13 Not used (do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 14 No FUNCTION 0 Inch-to-mm conversion during transmission 0: Disabled 1: Enabled SP No. 1-104-021 COMMENTS 0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch format are transmitted without conversion. In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF memory in mm format are transmitted without conversion. Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF memory, the fax unit always converts the data into mm format. 1: The machine converts the scanned data or stored data in the SAF memory to the format which was specified in the set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before transmission. Do not change the factory settings. For the best performance, do not change the factory settings. The setting determined by these bits is informed to the transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
1-5 6 to 7
Not used Available unit of resolution in which fax messages are received Bit 7 Bit 6 Unit 0 0 mm 0 1 inch 1 0 mm and inch (default) 1 1 Not used
Communication Switch 15 Not used (do not change the settings)
B779
64
SM
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 16 No FUNCTION 0 Not used 1 Optional G3 unit (G3-2) 0: Not installed 1: Installed 2 Not used 3 Select PSTN connection 0: Off 1: On
SP No. 1-104-023 COMMENTS Do not change the settings. Change this bit to 1 when installing the first optional G3 unit.
4-7
Not used
This switch enables the G3-2. 0: Off, no connection 1: Recognizes and enables G3-2. This switch can be used only after G3-2 has been installed. Do not change the settings. SP No. 1-104-024 COMMENTS 0: Polling transmission to another makers machine using the SEP (Selective Polling) signal is disabled. 0: Confidential reception to another makers machine using the SUB (Sub-address) signal is disabled. 0: Disables features that require PWD (Password) signal reception. Do not change the settings. Change this setting when the customer requires.
Communication Switch 17 No FUNCTION 0 SEP reception 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1 SUB reception 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 2 PWD reception 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 3-6 Not used 7 Action when there is no box with an F-code that matches the received SUB code 0: Disconnect the line 1: Receive the message (using normal reception mode)
Communication Switch 18 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 19 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM
65
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 1B No FUNCTION 0 Extension access code (0 to 7) to to turn V.8 protocol On/Off 7 0: On 1: Off
SP No. 1-104-028 COMMENTS If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol procedure, set this bit to 1 to disable V.8. Example: If 0 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0 to 1. When the machine detects 0 as the first dialed number, it automatically disables V.8 protocol. (Alternatively, if 3 is the PSTN access code, set bit 3 to 1.)
Communication Switch 1C No FUNCTION 0 Extension access code (8 and to 9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off 1 0: On 1: Off 2-7 Not used
SP No. 1-104-029 COMMENTS Refer to communication switch 1B. Example: If 8 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0 to 1. When the machine detects 8 as the first dialed number, it automatically disables V.8 protocol. (If 9 is the PSTN access code, use bit 1.) Do not change the settings.
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
B779
66
SM
BIT SWITCHES
3.2.5 G3 SWITCHES
G3 Switch 00 No FUNCTION 0 Monitor speaker during 1 communication (tx and rx) Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Up to Phase B 1 0 All the time 1 1 Not used 2 Monitor speaker during memory transmission 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 3-7 Not used G3 Switch 01 No FUNCTION 0 Not used 1 Select V.8 protocol for manual RX function 0: No 1: Yes 2-3 Not used 4 DIS frame length 0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes SP No. 1-105-001 COMMENTS (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through the communication. (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in the T.30 protocol. (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on all through the communication. Make sure that you reset these bits after testing. 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory transmission. Do not change the settings. SP No. 1-105-002 COMMENTS Do not change the settings. This switch switches the V.8 protocol for manual receiving off and on.
5 6
Not used Forbid CED/AMsam output 0: Off 1: On (Forbid output) Not used
Do not change the settings. 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are communication problems with PC-based faxes which cannot receive the extended DIS frames). Do not change the setting. Do not change this setting (Default: 0: Off), unless communication problem is caused by a CED or ANSam transmission. Do not change the setting. SP No. 1-105-003 COMMENTS Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only communicate with machines that send T.30standard frames only. 1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in non-standard mode communication) Do not change the settings. 0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always start from the highest modem rate. 1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for communications with the same machine when determining the most suitable rate for the current communication. Do not change the settings.
67 B779
G3 Switch 02 No FUNCTION 0 G3 protocol mode used 0: Standard and non-standard 1: Standard only
1-4 5
Not used Use of modem rate history for transmission using Quick/Speed Dials 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Not Used
6
SM
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 02 7 Short preamble 0: Disabled 1: Enabled G3 Switch 03 No FUNCTION 0 DIS detection number (Echo countermeasure) 0: 1 1: 2 1 Not Used 2 V.8 protocol 0: Disabled 1: Enabled SP No. 1-105-003 Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual for details about Short Preamble. SP No. 1-105-004 COMMENTS 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same DIS frame twice. 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the second DIS which is caused by echo on the line. Do not change the settings. 0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible. Note: Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps or lower. Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
ECM frame size 0: 256 bytes 1: 64 bytes CTC transmission conditions 0: After one PPR signal received 1: After four PPR signals received (ITU-T standard)
0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS) mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0, 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
N Transmit NRe send

NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted 1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving four PPRs. PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals. This bit is not effective in V.34 communications. 1: The machines tx modem rate will fall back before sending the next page if a negative code is received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used. Do not change the settings This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in ringing on the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3 ringing). Do not change this setting 0: No detection Outside Japan 1: Detection Inside Japan only
6 7
Modem rate used for the next page after receiving a negative code (RTN or PIN) 0: No change 1: Fallback Not Used Select detection of reverse polarity in ringing 0: Off 1: On
B779
68
SM
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 04 No FUNCTION 0 Training error detection to threshold 3 4-7 Not used
SP No. 1-105-005 COMMENTS 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits If the number of error bits in the received TCF is below this threshold, the machine informs the sender that training has succeeded. Do not change the settings. SP No. 1-105-006 COMMENTS These bits set the initial starting modem rate for transmission. Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need to change this for specific receivers. If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8 protocol should be disabled manually. Cross reference V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
G3 Switch 05 No FUNCTION 0 Initial Tx modem rate to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) 3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k 0 0 1 0 4.8 k 0 0 1 1 7.2 k 0 1 0 0 9.6 k 0 1 0 1 12.0 k 0 1 1 0 14.4 k 0 1 1 1 16.8 k 1 0 0 0 19.2 k 1 0 0 1 21.6 k 1 0 1 0 24.0 k 1 0 1 1 26.4 k 1 1 0 0 28.8 k 1 1 0 1 31.2 k 1 1 1 0 33.6 k Other settings - Not used 4 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or to 7.2 kbps. 5 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting 0 0 V.29 0 1 V.17 1 0 V.34 1 1 Not used 6-7 Not used
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
SM
69
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 06 No FUNCTION 0 Initial Rx modem rate to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) 3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k 0 0 1 0 4.8 k 0 0 1 1 7.2 k 0 1 0 0 9.6 k 0 1 0 1 12.0 k 0 1 1 0 14.4 k 0 1 1 1 16.8 k 1 0 0 0 19.2 k 1 0 0 1 21.6 k 1 0 1 0 24.0 k 1 0 1 1 26.4 k 1 1 0 0 28.8 k 1 1 0 1 31.2 k 1 1 1 0 33.6 k Other settings - Not used 4 Modem types available for to reception 7 Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting 0 0 0 1 V.27ter 0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29 0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29 V.33 0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, V.17/V.33 0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.17/V33, V.34 Other settings - Not used G3 Switch 07 No FUNCTION 0 PSTN cable equalizer to (tx mode: Internal) 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High
SP No. 1-105-007 COMMENTS These bits set the initial starting modem rate for reception. Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems during reception. If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8 protocol should be disabled manually. Cross reference V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available modem type for the machine in receive mode. If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be disabled manually. Cross reference V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
SP No. 1-105-008 COMMENTS Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange. Use the dedicated transmission parameters for specific receivers. Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following symptoms occurs. Communication error Modem rate fallback occurs frequently. Note: This setting is not effective in V.34 communications.
B779
70
SM
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 07 No FUNCTION 2 PSTN cable equalizer to (rx mode: Internal) 3 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High SP No. 1-105-008 COMMENTS Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange. Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following symptoms occurs. Communication error with error codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc. Modem rate fallback occurs frequently. Note: This setting is not effective in V.34 communications. Keep this bit at 1.
5-7
PSTN cable equalizer (V.8/V.17 rx mode: External) 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Not used
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings) G3 Switch 0A No FUNCTION 1 Maximum allowable carrier drop during image data reception Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms) 0 0 200 0 1 400 1 0 800 1 1 Not used 2 Select cancellation of highspeed RX if carrier signal lost while receiving 0: Off 1: On 3 Not used 4 Maximum allowable frame interval during image data reception. 0: 5 s 1: 13 s 5 Not used SP No. 1-105-011 COMMENTS These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop time. Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is frequent.
This switch setting determines if high-speed receiving ends if the carrier signal is lost when receiving during non-ECM mode
Do not change the settings This bit set the maximum interval between EOL (end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval between ECM frames from the other end. Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is frequent. Do not change the settings.
SM
71
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 0A No FUNCTION 6 Reconstruction time for the first line in receive mode 0: 6 s 1: 12 s SP No. 1-105-011 COMMENTS When the sending terminal is controlled by a computer, there may be a delay in receiving page data after the local machine accepts set-up data and sends CFR. This is outside the T.30 recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to send data. Refer to error code 0-20. ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should come within 5 s of CFR. Do not change the settings.
Not used
G3 Switch 0B Not used (do not change the settings). G3 Switch 0C Not used (do not change the settings). G3 Switch 0D Not used (do not change the settings). G3 Switch 0E SP No 1-105-015 0-7 Set CNG send time interval Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the 3second CNG interval. High order bit 3000-2250ms: 3000-50xNms 3000 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) N FF (2250 ms) Low order bit 00-0E(3000-3700ms: 3000+50xNms 3000 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) N 0F (3700 ms) G3 Switch 0F No FUNCTION 0 Alarm when an error occurred in Phase C or later 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1 Alarm when the handset is offhook at the end of communication 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 2-7 Not used SP No. 1-105-016 COMMENTS If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each error communication, change this bit to 1.
If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the handset is off-hook at the end of fax communication, change this bit to 1.
B779
72
SM
BIT SWITCHES
3.2.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES

These switches require an optional G3 interface unit. G3-3 switches are the same as for G3-2 switches.
G3-2 Switch 00 No FUNCTION 0-1 Monitor speaker during communication (tx and rx) Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Up to Phase B 1 0 All the time 1 1 Not used 2 Monitor speaker during memory transmission 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 3-7 Not used G3-2 Switch 01 No FUNCTION 0-3 Not used 4 DIS frame length 0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes SP No. 1-106-001 COMMENTS (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through the communication. (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in the T.30 protocol. (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on all through the communication. Make sure that you reset these bits after testing. 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory transmission. Do not change the settings. SP No. 1-106-002 COMMENTS Do not change the settings. 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are communication problems with PC-based faxes which cannot receive the extended DIS frames). Do not change the setting. Do not change this setting, unless the communication problem is caused by a CED or ANSam transmission. Do not change the setting.
5 6
Not used Forbid CED/AMsam output 0: Off 1: On (Forbid output) Not used
SM
73
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 02 No FUNCTION 0 G3 protocol mode used 0: Standard and non-standard 1: Standard only
1-4 5
Not used Use of modem rate history for transmission using Quick/Speed Dials 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Not used Short preamble 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
6 7
SP No. 1-106-003 COMMENTS Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only communicate with machines that send T.30standard frames only. 1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in non-standard mode communication) Do not change the settings. 0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always start from the highest modem rate. 1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for communications with the same machine when determining the most suitable rate for the current communication. Do not change the settings. Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual for details about Short Preamble. SP No. 1-106-004 COMMENTS 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same DIS frame twice. 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the second DIS which is caused by echo on the line. Do not change the settings. 0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible. Note: Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps or lower. Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
G3-2 Switch 03 No FUNCTION 0 DIS detection number (Echo countermeasure) 0: 1 1: 2 1 Not used 2 V.8 protocol 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
ECM frame size 0: 256 bytes 1: 64 bytes
B779
74
SM
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 03 No FUNCTION 4 CTC transmission conditions 0: After one PPR signal received 1: After four PPR signals received (ITU-T standard) SP No. 1-106-004 COMMENTS 0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS) mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0, 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
N Transmit NRe send

NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted 1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving four PPRs. PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals. This bit is not effective in V.34 communications. 1: The machines tx modem rate will fall back before sending the next page if a negative code is received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used. Do not change the settings. This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in ringing on the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3 ringing). Do not change this setting 0: No detection Outside Japan 1: Detection Inside Japan only SP No. 1-106-005 COMMENTS 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits If the number of error bits in the received TCF is below this threshold, the machine informs the sender that training has succeeded. Do not change the settings.
6 7
Modem rate used for the next page after receiving a negative code (RTN or PIN) 0: No change 1: Fallback Not used Select detection of reverse polarity in ringing 0: Off 1: On
G3-2 Switch 04 No FUNCTION 0 Training error detection to threshold 3 4-7 Not used
SM
75
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 05 No FUNCTION 0 Initial Tx modem rate to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) 3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k 0 0 1 0 4.8 k 0 0 1 1 7.2 k 0 1 0 0 9.6 k 0 1 0 1 12.0 k 0 1 1 0 14.4 k 0 1 1 1 16.8 k 1 0 0 0 19.2 k 1 0 0 1 21.6 k 1 0 1 0 24.0 k 1 0 1 1 26.4 k 1 1 0 0 28.8 k 1 1 0 1 31.2 k 1 1 1 0 33.6 k Other settings - Not used 4 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or to 7.2 kbps. 5 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting 0 0 V.29 0 1 V.17 1 0 V.34 1 1 Not used 6-7 Not used G3-2 Switch 06 No FUNCTION 0 Initial Rx modem rate to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) 3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k 0 0 1 0 4.8 k 0 0 1 1 7.2 k 0 1 0 0 9.6 k 0 1 0 1 12.0 k 0 1 1 0 14.4 k 0 1 1 1 16.8 k 1 0 0 0 19.2 k 1 0 0 1 21.6 k 1 0 1 0 24.0 k 1 0 1 1 26.4 k 1 1 0 0 28.8 k 1 1 0 1 31.2 k 1 1 1 0 33.6 k Other settings - Not used
SP No. 1-106-006 COMMENTS These bits set the initial starting modem rate for transmission. Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need to change this for specific receivers. If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8 protocol should be disabled manually. Cross reference V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
Do not change the settings. SP No. 1-106-007 COMMENTS These bits set the initial starting modem rate for reception. Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems during reception. If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8 protocol should be disabled manually. Cross reference V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
B779
76
SM
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 06 No FUNCTION 4 Modem types available for to reception 7 Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting 0 0 0 1 V.27ter 0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29 0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29 V.33 0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, V.17/V.33 0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.17/V33, V.34 Other settings - Not used G3-2 Switch 07 No FUNCTION 0 PSTN cable equalizer to (tx mode: Internal) 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High SP No. 1-106-007 COMMENTS The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available modem type for the machine in receive mode. If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be disabled manually. Cross reference V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
SP No. 1-106-008 COMMENTS Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange. Use the dedicated transmission parameters for specific receivers. Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following symptoms occurs. Communication error Modem rate fallback occurs frequently. Note: This setting is not effective in V.34 communications. Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange. Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following symptoms occurs. Communication error with error codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc. Modem rate fallback occurs frequently. Note: This setting is not effective in V.34 communications. Keep this bit at 1.
2 to 3
PSTN cable equalizer (rx mode: Internal) Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High
5-7
PSTN cable equalizer (V.8/V.17 rx mode: External) 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Not used
SM
77
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) G3-2 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings) G3-2 Switch 0A No FUNCTION 0 Maximum allowable carrier 1 drop during image data reception Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms) 0 0 200 0 1 400 1 0 800 1 1 Not used 2 Select cancellation of highspeed RX if carrier signal lost while receiving 0: Off 1: On 3 Not used 4 Maximum allowable frame interval during image data reception. 0: 5 s 1: 13 s 5 6 Not used Reconstruction time for the first line in receive mode 0: 6 s 1: 12 s SP No. 1-106-011 COMMENTS These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop time. Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is frequent.
This switch setting determines if high-speed receiving ends if the carrier signal is lost when receiving during non-ECM mode
Not used
Do not change the settings. This bit set the maximum interval between EOL (end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval between ECM frames from the other end. Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is frequent. Do not change the settings. When the sending terminal is controlled by a computer, there may be a delay in receiving page data after the local machine accepts set-up data and sends CFR. This is outside the T.30 recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to send data. Refer to error code 0-20. ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should come within 5 s of CFR. Do not change the settings.
G3-2 Switch 0B- Not used (do not change the settings) G3-2 Switch 0C- Not used (do not change the settings) G3-2 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) G3-2 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings) G3-2 Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)
B779
78
SM
BIT SWITCHES
3.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES

The G4 internal switches (SW00 to 1F) are displayed but do not change these settings.
3.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES

The G4 parameter switches (SW00 to 0F) are displayed but do not change these settings.
3.2.9 IP FAX SWITCHES

IP Fax Switch 00 No. FUNCTION 0 Not used IP Fax Transport 1 0: TCP, 1: UDP IP Fax single port selection 2 0: OFF, 1: ON (enable) IP Fax double ports (single data port) selection 3 0: OFF, 1: ON (enable) IP Fax Gatekeeper 4 0: OFF, 1: ON (enable) IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse 5 0: LSB first, 1: MSB first IP Fax max bit rate setting 0: Not affected, 1: Affected 6 IP Fax received telephone number confirmation 0: No confirmation, 1: Confirmation SP No. 1-111-001 COMMENTS Do not change this setting. Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP-Fax Selects single data port. Selects whether IP-Fax uses a double port.
Enables/disables the gatekeeper for IP-Fax. Reverses the T30 bit signal. When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does not affect the value of the DIS/DCS. When "1" is selected, the max bit rate affects the value of the DIS/DCS. When "0" is selected, fax data is received without checking the telephone number. When "1" is selected, fax data is received only when confirming that the telephone number from the sender matches the registered telephone number in this machine. If this confirmation fails, the line is disconnected.
SM
79
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
IP Fax Switch 01 No. FUNCTION IP Fax delay level setting Selects the acceptable delay level. Level 0 is the highest quality 0-3 Default is "0000" (level 0).
SP No. 1-111-002 COMMENTS

Bit 3 0 0 0 0 Bit 2 0 0 0 0 Bit 1 0 0 1 1 Bit 0 0 1 0 1
Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
IP Fax preamble wait time setting
4-7
Selects the preamble wait time. [00 to 0f] There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary switch combination. Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time) The default is "0000" (00H).
IP Fax Switch 02 No. FUNCTION 0 IP Fax bit signal reverse setting 0: Maker code setting 1: Internal bit switch setting
IP Fax transmission speed setting 0: Modem speed 1: No limitation SIP transport setting 0: TCP 1: UDP Not used
SP No. 1-111-003 COMMENTS When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse method is decided by the maker code. When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse method is decided by the internal bit switch. NOTE: When communicating between IP Fax devices, LSB first is selected.) Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax communication. This bit switch sets the transport that has priority for receiving IP Fax data. This function is activated only when the sender has both TCP and UDP. Do not change these settings.
3-7
B779
80
SM
BIT SWITCHES
IP Fax Switch 03 No. FUNCTION 0 Effective field limitation for G3 standard function information 0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS) 1 Switching between G3 standard and G3 non standard 0: Enable switching 1: G3 standard only 2 AI modem rate function 0: OFF, 1: ON (enable) 3 ECM frame size selection at transmitting 0: 256byte, 1: 64byte 4 DIS detection times for echo prevention 0: 1 time, 1: 2 times 5 CTC transmission selection 0: PPRx1 1: PPRx4 6 Shift down setting at receiving negative code 0: OFF, 1: ON Not used
SP No. 1-111-004 COMMENTS Limits the effective field for standard G3 function information. Enables/disables switching between G3 standard and G3 non-standard.
Enables/disables the AI modem rate. Selects the ECM frame size for sending.
Sets the number of times for DIS to detect echoes. When "0" is selected, the transmission condition is decided by error frame numbers. When "1" is selected, the transmission condition is based on the ITU-T method. Selects whether to shift down when negative codes are received. Do not change this setting. SP No. 1-111-005 COMMENTS Sets the TCF error threshold level. [00 to 0f] The default is "1111" (0fH). Do not change these settings.
IP Fax Switch 04 No. FUNCTION TCF error threshold 0 1 2 3 4-7 Not used
SM
81
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
IP Fax Switch 05 SP No. 1-111-006 No. FUNCTION COMMENTS Modem bit rate setting for transmission 0-3 Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps). Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 Modem setting for transmission Sets the modem for transmission. The default is "00" (V29). Bit 5 Bit 4 0 0 V29 0 1 V17 1 0 V34 1 1 Not used Not used 2400 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps 9600 bps 12.0 Kbps 14.4 Kbps 16.8 Kbps 19.2 Kbps 21.6 Kbps 24.0 Kbps 26.4 Kbps 28.8 Kbps 31.2 Kbps 33.6 Kbps
4-5
6-7
Do not change these settings.
B779
82
SM
BIT SWITCHES
IP Fax Switch 06 SP No. 1-111-007 No. FUNCTION COMMENTS Modem bit rate setting for reception Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
Bit 7 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 6 0 0 0 1 1 Bit 5 0 1 1 0 0 Bit 4 1 0 1 0 1 V27ter V27ter, V29 V27ter, V29, V33 (invalid) V27ter, V29, V17 V27ter, V29, V17, V34
0-3
Modem setting for reception Sets the modem type for reception. The default is "0100" (V27ter, V29, V17). Bit 3 Bit 1 Bit 1 4-7 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 V27ter V27ter, V29 Not used V27ter, V29, V17 V27ter, V29, V17, V34 SP No. 1-111-008 COMMENTS Adds or does not add TSI information to NSS(S). Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1 timeout. Do not change this setting. Sets whether the machine disconnects after DIS reception.
IP Fax Switch 07 No. FUNCTION 0 TSI information 0: Not added, 1: Added 1 DCN transmission setting at T1 timeout 0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted 2 Not used 3 Hang up setting at DIS reception disabled 0: No hang up 1: Hang up after transmitting DCN 4 Number of times for training 0: 1 time, 1: 2 times 5 Space CSI transmission setting at no CSI registration 0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted 6-7 Not used
Selects the number of times training is done at the same bit rate. When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled. When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is all spaces. Do not change these settings.
SM
83
B779
Fax Option B779
BIT SWITCHES
IP Fax Switch 08 No. FUNCTION 0-1 T1 timer adjustment Adjusts the T1 timer. The default is "00" (35 seconds).
SP No. 1-111-009 COMMENTS

Bit 1 0 0 1 1 Bit 3 0 0 1 1 Bit 0 0 1 0 1 Bit 2 0 1 0 1 35 sec 40 sec 50 sec 60 sec
2-3
T4 timer adjustment Adjust the T4 timer. The default is "00" (3 seconds).
3 sec 3.5 sec 4 sec 5 sec
4-5
6-7
T0 timer adjustment Bit 5 Bit 4 0 0 75 sec 0 1 120 sec 1 0 180 sec 1 1 240 sec Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets the interval between "setup" data transmission and T.38 phase decision. If your destination return is late on the network or G3 fax return is late, adjust the longer interval timer. The default is "00" (75 seconds). Not used Do not change these settings.
B779
84
SM
NCU PARAMETERS
3.3 NCU PARAMETERS

The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104 and 105 can be used, this will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column. NOTE: The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU. Change the fourth digit from 5 to 6 (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for the settings for the first optional G3 interface unit and from 5 to 7 (e.g. 680700) for the settings for the second optional G3 interface unit.
SM
85
B779
Fax Option B779
NCU PARAMETERS
Address 680500
Function Unit Remarks Country/Area code for NCU parameters Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this address, or use the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001 Country/Area France Germany UK Italy Austria Belgium Denmark Finland Ireland Norway Sweden Switzerland Portugal Holland Spain Israel USA Asia Decimal Hex 00 00 01 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 07 08 08 09 09 10 0A 11 0B 12 0C 13 0D 14 0E 15 0F 17 11 18 12 20 ms Hong Kong 20 South Africa 21 Australia 22 New Zealand 23 Singapore 24 Malaysia 25 China 26 Taiwan 27 Korea 28 Greece 33 Turkey 32 Greece 33 Hungary 34 Czech 35 Poland 36 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 21 20 21 22 23 24
680501 680502 680503 680504 680505 680506 680507 680508 680509 68050A 68050B 68050C 68050D 68050E 68050F 680510
Line current detection time Line current wait time Line current drop detect time PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit (high byte) PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit (low byte) PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit (high byte) PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit (low byte) PSTN dial tone detection time PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW) PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH) PSTN dial tone continuous tone time PSTN dial tone permissible drop time PSTN wait interval (LOW) PSTN wait interval (HIGH) PSTN ring-back tone detection time PSTN ring-back tone off detection time
Hz (BCD)
Line current detection is disabled. Line current is not detected if 680501 contains FF. If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled. If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled. If 680508 contains FF(H), the machine pauses for the pause time (address 68050D / 68050E). Italy: See Note 2.
Hz (BCD)
20 ms
20 ms 20 ms
Detection is disabled if this contains FF.
B779
86
SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Address 680511 680512 680513 680514 680515 680516 680517 680518 680519 68051A 68051B 68051C 68051D 68051E 68051F 680520 680521 680522 680523 680524 680525 680526 680527 680528 680529 68052A 68052B 68052C 68052D 68052E Function PSTN detection time for silent period after ring-back tone detected (LOW) PSTN detection time for silent period after ring-back tone detected (HIGH) PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit (high byte) PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit (low byte) PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit (high byte) PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit (low byte) PABX dial tone frequency upper limit (high byte) PABX dial tone frequency upper limit (low byte) PABX dial tone frequency lower limit (high byte) PABX dial tone frequency lower limit (low byte) PABX dial tone detection time PABX dial tone reset time (LOW) PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH) PABX dial tone continuous tone time PABX dial tone permissible drop time PABX wait interval (LOW) PABX wait interval (HIGH) PABX ringback tone detection time PABX ringback tone off detection time PABX detection time for silent period after ringback tone detected (LOW) PABX detection time for silent period after ringback tone detected (HIGH) PABX busy tone frequency upper limit (high byte) PABX busy tone frequency upper limit (low byte) PABX busy tone frequency lower limit (high byte) PABX busy tone frequency lower limit (low byte) Busy tone ON time: range 1 Busy tone OFF time: range 1 Busy tone ON time: range 2 Busy tone OFF time: range 2 Busy tone ON time: range 3 20 ms Unit 20 ms 20 ms Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled. If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled. If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled. If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled. Remarks
Hz (BCD)
Hz (BCD)
Hz (BCD)
If 68051B contains FF, the machine pauses for the pause time (680520 / 680521).
20 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms Hz (BCD)
If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled. If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled.
If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled. If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled.
Hz (BCD)
20 ms
SM
87
B779
Fax Option B779
NCU PARAMETERS
Address 68052F 680530 680531 680532 680533 Function Unit Remarks Busy tone OFF time: range 3 20 ms Busy tone ON time: range 4 Busy tone OFF time: range 4 Busy tone continuous tone detection time Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ONOFF must be detected twice). Tolerance () Bit 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 680534 680535 680536 680537 680538 680539 68053A 68053B 68053C 68053D 68053E 68053F 680540 680541 680542 680543 680544 680545 680546
75% Bits 2 and 3 must always 50% be kept at 0. 25% 12.5%
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection Hz (BCD) International dial tone frequency If both addresses contain upper limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is disabled. International dial tone frequency upper limit (low byte) Hz (BCD) International dial tone frequency If both addresses contain lower limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is disabled. International dial tone frequency lower limit (low byte) International dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680538 contains FF, the machine pauses for International dial tone reset time the pause time (68053D / (LOW) 68053E). International dial tone reset time (HIGH) Belgium: See Note 2. International dial tone continuous tone time International dial tone permissible drop time International dial wait interval (LOW) International dial wait interval (HIGH) Hz (BCD) Country dial tone upper frequency If both addresses contain limit (HIGH) FF(H), tone detection is disabled. Country dial tone upper frequency limit (LOW) If both addresses contain Country dial tone lower frequency limit (HIGH) FF(H), tone detection is disabled. Country dial tone lower frequency limit (LOW) Country dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680543 contains FF, the machine pauses for Country dial tone reset time (LOW) the pause time (680548 / Country dial tone reset time (HIGH) 680549). Country dial tone continuous tone time
B779
88
SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Address 680547 680548 680549 68054A 68054B Function Country dial tone permissible drop time Country dial wait interval (LOW) Country dial wait interval (HIGH) Time between opening or closing the DO relay and opening the OHDI relay Break time for pulse dialing Unit 20 ms Remarks
1 ms 1 ms
68054C
Make time for pulse dialing
1 ms
68054D
Time between final OHDI relay closure and DO relay opening or closing
1 ms
68054E 68054F 680550 680551 680552
Minimum pause between dialed digits (pulse dial mode) Time waited when a pause is entered at the operation panel DTMF tone on time DTMF tone off time Tone attenuation level of DTMF signals while dialing Tone attenuation value difference between high frequency tone and low frequency tone in DTMF signals
20 ms
1 ms
-N x 0.5 3.5 dBm
680553
-dBm x 0.5
680554 680555 680556 680557 680558 680559 68055A
PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level after dialing ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level after dialing Not used Time between 68054Dh (NCU parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU parameter 15) Not used Grounding time (ground start mode) Break time (flash start mode)
-N x 0.5 3.5 dBm -dBm x 0.5
See Notes 3, 6 and 8. SP2-103-012 (parameter 11). See Note 3. SP2-103-013 (parameter 12). See Note 3. SP2-103-014 (parameter 13). See Notes 3, 6 and 8. SP2-103-015 (parameter 14). This parameter is only valid in Europe. See Note 3 and 8. SP2103-016 (parameter 15). SP2-103-017 (parameter 16). See Note 3. SP2-103-018 (parameter 17). SP2-103-019 (parameter 18). SP2-103-020 (parameter 19). See Note 5. SP2-103-021 (parameter 20). The setting must be less than 5dBm, and should not exceed the setting at 680552h above. See Note 5. SP2-103-022 (parameter 21). See Note 5. See Note 5 Do not change the settings. This parameter takes effect when the country code is set to France. Do not change the setting. The Gs relay is closed for this interval. The OHDI relay is open for this interval.
1 ms
20 ms 1 ms
SM
89
B779
Fax Option B779
NCU PARAMETERS
Address 68055B 68055C 68055D Function International dial access code (High) International dial access code (Low) PSTN access pause time Remarks For a code of 100: 68055B - F1 68055C - 00 20 ms This time is waited for each pause input after the PSTN access code. If this address contains FF[H], the pause time stored in address 68054F is used. Do not set a number more than 7 in the UK. Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm 0 0 0 -25.0 0 0 1 -35.0 0 1 0 -30.0 1 0 0 -40.0 1 1 0 -49.0 Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2. Do not change the settings. BCD BCD For a code of 0: 680565 - FF 680566 - FF Do not change the settings. SP2-103-003 (parameter 02). SP2-103-004 (parameter 03). SP2-103-005 (parameter 04). SP2-103-006 (parameter 05). SP2-103-007 (parameter 06). The setting must not be zero. See Note 4. SP2-103-008 (parameter 07). SP2-103-009 (parameter 08). SP2-103-010 (parameter 09). SP2-103-011 (parameter 10). Unit BCD
68055E
Progress tone detection level, and cadence detection enable flags
68055F to 680564 680565 680566 680567 to 680571 680572 680573 680574 680575 680576
Not used Long distance call prefix (HIGH) Long distance call prefix (LOW) Not used Acceptable ringing signal frequency: range 1, upper limit Acceptable ringing signal frequency: range 1, lower limit Acceptable ringing signal frequency: range 2, upper limit Acceptable ringing signal frequency: range 2, lower limit Number of rings until a call is detected
1000/ N (Hz).
680577
Minimum required length of the first ring Minimum required length of the second and subsequent rings Ringing signal detection reset time (LOW) Ringing signal detection reset time (HIGH)
20 ms
680578 680579 68057A
20 ms 20 ms
B779
90
SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Address 68057B to 680580 680581 Function Not used Interval between dialing the last digit 20 ms and switching the Oh relay over to the external telephone when dialing from the operation panel in handset mode. Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time Bit 1 0 Setting 0 0 200 ms 0 1 800 ms Other Not used Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time Bit 3 2 Setting 0 0 200 ms 0 1 800 ms Other Not used 680583 to 6805A0 6805A1 6805A2 6805A3 6805A4 6805A5 6805A6 6805A7 6805A8 6805A9 6805AA 6805AB 6805AC 6805AD 6805AE Bits 4 to 7 - Not used Not used Acceptable CED detection frequency upper limit (high byte) Acceptable CED detection frequency upper limit (low byte) Acceptable CED detection frequency lower limit (high byte) Acceptable CED detection frequency lower limit (low byte) CED detection time Acceptable CNG detection frequency upper limit (high byte) Acceptable CNG detection frequency upper limit (low byte) Acceptable CNG detection frequency lower limit (high byte) Acceptable CNG detection frequency lower limit (low byte) Not used CNG on time CNG off time Number of CNG cycles required for detection Not used BCD (Hz) Do not change the settings. If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled. If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled. Factory setting: 200 ms If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled. If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled. Do not change the setting. Factory setting: 500 ms Factory setting: 3000 ms The data is coded in the same way as address 680533. Do not change the settings. Unit Remarks Do not change the settings. Factory setting: 500 ms
680582
BCD (Hz)
20 ms 20 ms BCD (Hz)
BCD (Hz)
20 ms 20 ms
SM
91
B779
Fax Option B779
NCU PARAMETERS
Address 6805AF 6805B0 6805B1 6805B2 6805B3 6805B4 6805B5 6805B6 6805B7 6805B8 6805B9 6805BD 6805BE to 6805C6 6805C7 Function Acceptable AI short protocol tone (800Hz) detection frequency upper limit (high byte) Acceptable AI short protocol tone (800Hz) detection frequency upper limit (low byte) Acceptable AI short protocol tone (800Hz) detection frequency lower limit (high byte) Acceptable AI short protocol tone (800Hz) detection frequency lower limit (low byte) Detection time for 800 Hz AI short protocol tone PSTN: Tx level from the modem PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission level PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission level PABX: Tx level from the modem PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission level PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission level Modem turn-on level (incoming signal detection level) Not used Unit Hz (BCD) Remarks If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled.
Hz(BCD)
If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled.
20 ms -N 3 dBm
Factory setting: 360 ms
SP2-103-002 (parameter 01). - N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 3.5 (dB) See Note 7. - N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 3 (dB) See Note 7. - dBm - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB) - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB) -37-0.5N (dBm) Do not change the settings.
6805C8 to 6805D9 6805DA 6805E0 bit 3
Bits 0 to 3 Not used. Bit 4 V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default) Bits 5 to 7 Not used. Not used Do not change the settings. T.30 T1 timer Maximum wait time for post message 1s 0: 12 s 1: 30 s
1: Maximum wait time for post message (EOP/EOM/MPS) can be changed to 30 s. Change this bit to 1 if communication errors occur frequently during V.17 reception.
B779
92
SM
Rev. 10/2006
NCU PARAMETERS
6805E3
6805E4 bit 2 6805E4 bit 3 6805E5 bits 0 and 1
Voltage setting to detect off-hook for 0: Auto Do not change these settings voltage/DP detection for an 1: Fixed V externally connected line. Here is a summary of the fixed voltage settings (1: Fixed) for an externally connected line. Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 0 0 0 0 Not used 0 0 0 1 2.75 V 0 0 1 0 5.5 V 1 0 0 0 22 V 1 1 1 1 41.25 V Threshold for ring level Change bit 2 to 1 This will increase the threshold for ringing level detection. On-Hook impedance level Change bit 3 0 to 1 This will decrease the on-hook impedance level Selection of positive and Bit 0= 0: Automatically judged negative sides of the signal Bit 0= 1: Manually select to use either positive waveform for incoming call or negative side detection Bit 1= 0: Use positive side of waveform Bit 1= 1: Use negative side of waveform
SM
93
B779
Fax Option B779
NCU PARAMETERS
NOTES 1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address. 2. Italy and Belgium only RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning. Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium) Bit 1 - Not used Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy) If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are changed. 680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address 680533. 68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms) 68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms) 3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10 pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates. 4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time specified by this parameter. 5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10. The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are: High frequency tone: 0.5 x N680552/6805543.5 dBm 0.5 x N680555 dBm Low frequency tone: 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) 3.5 dBm 0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm NOTE: N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H) 6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds closing and Di opening 68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds opening and Di closing 7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI short protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h. 8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and 68054E.
B779
94
SM
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
3.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

There are two sets of transmission parameters: iFax and E-mail Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience problems, store that terminals fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to that number. The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be described.
3.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1. 2. Enter Address Book Management mode ([User Tools]> System Settings> Key Operator> Address Book Management). 3. Press "Program/Change/Delete Quick Dial". 4. Select the address book that you want to program. 5. For the fax parameter, select "Fax Dest.", for the E-mail parameter, select "Email", then press Start. Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights green. 6. The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed. Press the bit number that you wish to change. 7. To scroll through the parameter switches, either: 8. Select the next switch: press Next or Select the previous switch: Prev. until the correct switch is displayed. Then go back to step 6. 9. After the setting is changed, press OK. 10. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.
SM
95
B779
Fax Option B779
3.4.2 PARAMETERS
Fax Parameters
The initial settings of the following fax parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are disabled.
Switch 00 FUNCTION AND COMMENTS ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode) If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting, adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1 second. Range: 0 to 120 s (00h to 78h) FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used. Do not program a value between 79h and FEh. Switch 01 No FUNCTION 0 Tx level to Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 -1 0 0 0 1 0 -2 0 0 0 1 1 -3 0 0 1 0 0 -4 : : 0 1 1 1 1 -15 1 1 1 1 1 Disabled 5 Cable equalizer to Bit 7 6 5 Setting 7 0 0 0 None 0 0 1 Low 0 1 0 Medium 0 1 1 High 1 1 1 Disabled
COMMENTS If communication with a particular remote terminal often contains errors, the signal level may be inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for communications with that terminal until the results are better. If the setting is Disabled, the NCU parameter 01 setting is used. Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the left. Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange when calling the number stored in this Quick/Speed Dial. Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following symptoms occurs. Communication error with error codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc. Modem rate fallback occurs frequently. Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the left. If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is used.
B779
96
SM
Switch 02 No FUNCTION 0 Initial Tx modem rate to Bit3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) 3 0 0 0 0 Not used 0 0 0 1 2,400 0 0 1 0 4,800 0 0 1 1 7,200 0 1 0 0 9,600 0 1 0 1 12,000 0 1 1 0 14,400 0 1 1 1 16,800 1 0 0 0 19,200 1 0 0 1 21,600 1 0 1 0 24,000 1 0 1 1 26,400 1 1 0 0 28,800 1 1 0 1 31,200 1 1 1 0 33,600 1 1 1 1 Disabled 4-7 Other settings: Not used Not used
COMMENTS If training with a particular remote terminal always takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too high. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these bits. For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit 4 must be changed to 0. Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the left. If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is used.
Switch 03 No FUNCTION 0 Inch-mm conversion before tx 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Inch-mm conversion available 0 1 Inch only 1 0 Not used 1 1 Disabled 2 DIS/NSF detection method to Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 3 0 0 First DIS or NSF 0 1 Second DIS or NSF 1 0 Not used 1 1 Disabled 4 V.8 protocol 0: Off 1: Disabled
COMMENTS The machine uses inch-based resolutions for scanning. If inch only is selected, the printed copy may be slightly distorted at the other end if that machine uses mm-based resolutions. If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is used. (0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of transmission. The machine will then wait for the second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS. If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is used. If transmissions to a specific destination always end at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower), disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol. 0: V.34 communication will not be possible. If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is used.
SM
97
B779
Fax Option B779

Switch 03 No FUNCTION 5 Compression modes available in transmit mode 0: MH only 1: Disabled 6 ECM during transmission 7 Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting 0 0 Off 0 1 On 1 0 Not used 1 1 Disabled
COMMENTS This bit determines the capabilities that are informed to the other terminal during transmission. If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is used. For example, if ECM is switched on but is not wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use the (0, 0) setting. Note that V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled. If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is used.
Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
B779
98
SM
E-mail Parameters
The initial settings of the following e-mail parameters are all "0" (all parameters disabled).
Switch 00 No FUNCTION 00 HM Compression mode for e-mail attachments 0: Off 1: On 01 HR Compression mode for e-mail attachments 0: Off 1: On 02 MMR Compression mode for e-mail attachments 0: Off 1: On 03-06 Not used 07 Designates the bits to reference for compression method of e-mail attachments 0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6) 1: No registration. Switch 01 No FUNCTION 00 Original width of e-mail attachment: A4 0: Off 1: On 01 Original width of e-mail attachment: B4 0: Off 1: On 02 Original width of e-mail attachment: A3 0: Off 1: On 03-06 Not used 07 Designates the bits to reference for original size of e-mail attachments 0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6) 1: No registration. COMMENTS Switches HM compression on and off for files attached to e-mails for sending.
Switches HR compression on and off for files attached to e-mails for sending.
Switches MMR compression on and off for files attached to e-mails for sending.
Do not change these settings. The "0" selection (default) references the settings for Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.
COMMENTS Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as A4.
Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as B4.
Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as A3.
Do not change these settings. The "0" selection (default) references the settings for Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.
SM
99
B779
Fax Option B779
Switch 02 No FUNCTION 00 Line resolution of e-mail attachment: 200 x 100 0: Off 1: On 01 Line resolution of e-mail attachment: 200 x 200 0: Off 1: On 02 Line resolution of e-mail attachment: 200 x 400 0: Off 1: On 03 Not used 04 Line resolution of e-mail attachment: 400 x 400 0: Off 1: On 05-06 Not used 07 Designates the bits to reference for original size of e-mail attachments 0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6) 1: No registration.
COMMENTS Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200 x100.
Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200 x 200.
Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200 x 400.
Do not change these settings. Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 400 x 400.
Do not change these settings. The "0" selection (default) references the settings for Bits 00, 01, 02, 04 above. The "1" selection ignores the selections of Bits 00, 01, 02, 04.
Switch 03 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
B779
100
SM
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
3.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES CAUTION

Do not change the settings which are marked as Not used or Read only.
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only) 680001(H) - Revision number (BCD) 680002(H) - Year (BCD) 680003(H) - Month (BCD) 680004(H) - Day (BCD) 680006 to 680015(H) - Machines serial number (16 digits - ASCII) 680018(H) - Total program checksum (low) 680019(H) - Total program checksum (high) 680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches 680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches 680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches 680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches 680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches 6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches 6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used 6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used 6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02) Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 2: Reception time printing (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 4: Checkered mark printing (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 5: Not used Bit 6: Not used Bit 7: Not used
SM
101
B779
Fax Option B779
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report printout) Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 1: Not used Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 6: Polling clear report 0: Off, 1: On Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On 6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report printout) Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output 0: Off, 1: On Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output 0: Off, 1: On Bits 2 to 3: Not used Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated Bit 5: Include senders name on reports 0: Off, 1: On Bit 6: Not used Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On 6800D5(H) - User parameter switch 05 (SWUSR_05) Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages (Paper end, toner end, jam, and during night mode) Bit 2 1 Setting 0 0 The machine receives all the fax messages. 0 1 The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI. 1 0 The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code. 1 1 The machine does not receive anything. Bit 3: Not used Bit 4: Not used Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On Bit 6: Not used Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On 6800D6(H) - User parameter switch 06 (SWUSR_06) Bits 0 to 5: Not used Bit 6: Scan sequence in Book transmission 0: Left page then right page, 1: Right page then left page Bit 7: Not used 6800D7(H) - User parameter switch 07 (SWUSR_07) Bits 0 and 1: Not used Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On Bits 3 to 7: Not used
B779
102
SM
6800D8(H) - User parameter switch 08 (SWUSR_08) Bits 0 and 1: Not used. Bit 2: Authorized reception 0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are accepted. 1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are accepted. Bits 3 to 7: Not used. 6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09) : Not used 6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A) Bit 0: Not used Bit 1: 2 into 1 0: Off, 1: On Bit 2: Not used Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On Bit 4: Not used Bit 5: Reception file printout 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 6: Use both e-mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission results 0: Off, 1: On 6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B) Bit 0: Not used Bit 1: Not used Bits 2 to 5: Not used Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0: Off, 1: On Bit 7: Polling Standby duration 0: Once, 1: No limit 6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used 6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used 6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E) Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off Bit 1: Maximum document length detection 0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log) up to 1,200 mm Bit 2: Batch transmission 0: Off, 1: On Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer /Scanner) is pressed 0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared Bits 4 to 6: Not used Bit 7: Manual service call (sends the system parameter list to the service station) 0: Off, 1: On
SM
103
B779
Fax Option B779
6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F) (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout Bit 2 1 0 Setting 0 0 1 1st paper feed station 0 1 0 2nd paper feed station 0 1 1 3rd paper feed station 1 0 0 4th paper feed station 1 0 1 LCT Other settings Not used Bits 3 and 4: Not used Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off Bits 6 and 7: Not used 6800E1(H) User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11) Bit 0: IFAX Group Destination Selection/Release Method 0 Priority Select Mode Select the priority destination according to input mode. The Group button reflects either email or fax input mode. Released as soon as the entry mode is selected, regardless of the current entry mode. 1 All Select Mode Acquires all registered members regardless of entry mode. If both email and fax are registered, both are selected. The Group button reflects either email or fax input mode. All registered members are released, regardless of the entry mode. If both email/fax are registered, both are released. Bits 0 and 1: Not used Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size paper is not available. 0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority Bits 3 to 7: Not used 6800E1(H) User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11) Bits 0 and 1: Not used Bit 2: Inclusion of the Add button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is selected for broadcasting 0:Not needed, 1: Needed Bits 3 to 6: Not used Bit 7: Press Start key without an original when using the on hook dial or the external telephone, 0: displays Cannot detect original size. 1: Receives fax messages. 6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12) Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On Bit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: On Bit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: On Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On Bit 4 to 7: Not used
B779
104
SM
6800E3(H) - User parameter switch 19 (SWUSR_13) Bit 0: Offset sort function for the fax (only using the shift tray on the 1,000 sheet finisher) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 1: Journal format 0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions 1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications Bit 2: Action when the paper cassette that was selected by the specified cassette selection feature becomes empty. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: The machine will not print any received files until paper is added. 1: The machine will use other cassettes to print received files that are not specified by this feature. Bit 3: 90 image rotation during B5 portrait Tx (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and subscan directions. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Off, 1: On Bits 6 and 7: Not used 6800E4(H) - User parameter switch 20 (SWUSR_14) Bit 0: Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0: Off, 1: On Bit 1: Not used. Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax (LAN fax) driver Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting 0 0 0 0 0 min. 0 0 0 1 1 min. 1 1 1 0 14 min. 1 1 1 1 15 min. Bits 6 and 7: Not used. 6800E5(H) - User parameter switch 21 (SWUSR_15) Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message 0: Disabled (print only when error occurs), 1: Enabled Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 2: Not used Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1:PDF Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 5: Not used Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
SM
105
B779
Fax Option B779
Rev. 09/2007
6800E6(H) - User parameter switch 22 (SWUSR_16) (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 1: Dial tone detection (PSTN 2) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 2: Dial tone detection (PSTN 3) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bits 3 to 7: Not used 6800E7(H) User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17) : Not used 6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18) Bits 0 and 1: File retention time (Cross reference: System switch 02 bit 4) Bit 1 0 Setting 0 0 File retention impossible 0 1 24 hours 1 0 File retention impossible 1 1 72 hours Bits 2 to 7: Not used 6800E9(H) - User parameter switch 25 (SWUSR_19) Bit 0 and 1: Not used Bit 2: Auto switching 0: Fax, 1: Telephone Bit 3: Not used Bit 4: RDS operation 0: Not acceptable 1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03 NOTE: This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user (see system switch 02). Bits 5 to 7: Not used 6800EA(H) to 6800EF(H) - User parameter switch 26 to 31 (SWUSR_1A to 1F) : Not used 6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20) Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the specified type 0: Paper output priority Priority order 1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3. E-mail address, 4. Folder 1: Electric putout order Priority order 1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax destination, 4. Fax number Bits 1 to 7: Not used
6800F2(H) - User parameter switch 34 (SWUSR_22)
6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used Bit 0: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 1: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches Not used 680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches Not used
B779
106
SM
680190 to 6801AF(H) - Service stations fax number (SP3-101) 6801B0 to 6801B9(H) - Own fax PABX extension number 6801BA to 6801C3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) 6801C4 to 6801D7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) Not used 6801D8 to 6801E3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) Not used 6801E4 to 6801EF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) Not used 6801F0 to 6801FB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) Not used 6801FC to 680207(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) Not used 680208 to 68021B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note. 68021C to 68022F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note. 680230 to 680246(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note. 680247 to 680286(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note. 680287 to 6802C6(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See following note. 6802C7 to 680306(H) - TTI 3 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See following note. 680307 to 68031A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) 68031B to 68032E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) 68032F to 680342(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) 680343(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex) 680344(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex) 680345(H) Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex)NOTE: If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for TTI), add a stop code (00[H]) after the last character. 680380 to 680387(H) - Last power off time (Read only) 680380(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM) 680381(H) - Year (BCD) 680382(H) - Month (BCD) 680383(H) - Day (BCD) 680384(H) - Hour 680385(H) - Minute 680386(H) - Second 680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday 680394(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings) Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bit 1: SAF Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bits 2 to 7; Not used 680395(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings) Bits 0 to 3: Not used Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bit 6 and 7: Not used
SM 107 B779
Fax Option B779
680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches 680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches
680406 to 68040A Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only) 680406(H) - Suffix (BCD) 680407(H) - Version (BCD) 680408(H) - Year (BCD) 680409(H) - Month (BCD) 68040A(H) - Day (BCD) 68040B to 68040F Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only) 68040B(H) - Suffix (BCD) 68040C(H) - Version (BCD) 68040D(H) - Year (BCD) 68040E(H) - Month (BCD) 68040F(H) - Day (BCD) 680410(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only) 680412(H) - G3-2 Modem ROM version (Read only) 680414(H) - G3-3 Modem ROM version (Read only) 680420(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only) 680476(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD) 680477(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD) 680492(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H) 680493(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H) 680494(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H) 680495(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H) 680496(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H) 680497(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H) 69ED04 to 69F003(H) - SIP server address (Read only) 69ED04(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 69ED84(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 69EE04(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 69EE04(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 69EF04(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 69EF04(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 69F004(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 69F084(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 69F104(H) - Arias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 69F184(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 69F204(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 6A0DC0(H) - Stand-by port number for H.232 connection 6A0DC2(H) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection 6A0DC4(H) - RAS port number 6A0DC6(H) - Gatekeeper port number 6A0DC8(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38 6A0DCA(H) - Port number of SIP server 6A0DCC(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP 6A0DCD(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 6A0DCE(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
B779 108 SM
Rev. 04/2007
6A0DD0(H) - RAS/SIP back-up server: IP address (Max. 128 characters- ASCII) 6A0DD4(H) - SIP back-up server: Host name (Max. 128 characters- ASCII) 6A0E54(H) - RAS back-up server: gatekeeper address - Main (Max. 128 characters- ASCII) 6A0ED4(H) - RAS back-up server: gatekeeper address - Sub (Max. 128 characters- ASCII) 6A0F54(H) - SIP back-up server: registrar server address - Main (Max. 128 characters- ASCII) 6A0FD4(H) - SIP back-up server: registrar server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters- ASCII) 6A1054(H) - RAS back-up server: Arias number (Max. 128 characters- ASCII) 6A10D4(H) - RAS back-up server: Stand-by port number for H.232 connection 6A10D6(H) - RAS back-up server: RAS port number 6BEBFE(H) Important: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are not for use in the field. 6BEBFF(H) Important: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are not for use in the field. 6BEC00(H) Important: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are not for use in the field. 6BEC01(H) Important: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are not for use in the field. 6BEC02(H) Important: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are not for use in the field. 6BEC03 to 6BEC04 Important: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are not for use in the field. 6BEC05(H) Important: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are not for use in the field. 6BEC06(H) Important: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are not for use in the field.
SM
109
B779
Fax Option B779
OVERVIEW
4. DETAILS
4.1 OVERVIEW
FCUIF
MBU
to BICU
Memory DIMM CCUDRV CCUIF SG3
GWFCU3
SG3
B779D901.WMF
The basic fax unit consists of two PCBs: an FCU and an MBU. The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with the controller board. The MBU contains the ROM and SRAM. Also, the FCU has an NCU circuit. Fax Options: 1. Extra G3 Interface option: This provides one more analog line interface. This allows full dual access. Two extra G3 interface options can be installed. 2. Memory Expansion: This expands the SAF memory and the page memory (used for image rotation); without this expansion, the page memory is not big enough for image rotation at 400 dpi, so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible.
B779
110
SM
BOARDS
4.2 BOARDS
4.2.1 FCU
SAF BACKUP FCUIF BICU
DMA BUS PCI BUS
SDRAM (16MB)
DIMM (32 MB)
FCU
FACE3
CPU BUS
SRAM (256kB)
FROM (3MB) BACKUP & RESET
v.34 MODEM Speaker Drive
NCU Circuit
Line TEL
MBU
CCUIF
CCUDRV
G3
G3
Speaker
B779D902.WMF
The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface to the base copiers engine, and all the fax options.
FACE3 (Fax Application Control Engine) CPU Data compression and reconstruction (DCR) DMA control Clock generation DRAM backup control Modem (FAME) V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8
SM
111
B779
Fax Option B779
BOARDS
DRAM The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows. SAF memory : 4MB Working memory : 4MB Page memory : 8MB The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery. Memory back-up A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 1 hour.
4.2.2 MBU
On this board, the flash ROM contains the FCU firmware, and the SRAM contains the system data and user parameters. Even if the FCU is changed, the system data and user parameters are kept on the MBU board.
ROM 3MB flash ROMs for system software storage 2MB (16bit x 1MB) + 1MB (16bit x 512K) SRAM The 256 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a lithium battery. Memory back-up A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in the SRAM, in case the base copier's main switch is turned off. Switches
Item SW1 Description Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.
B779
112
SM
BOARDS
4.2.3 SG3 BOARD

G3 Board
SG3-D SG3-D
NCCP
CPU (Ru30) DPRAM DMAC
FROM (1MB)
SDRAM (8MB)
FCU
DCR JBIG DSP (modem)
Line CODEC AFE NCU
+5V
REG
+3.3V
B779D903.WMF
The SG3 board allows up to three simultaneous communications when used in combination with the FCU and optional G3 boards. The NCU is on the same board as the common SG-3 board. This makes the total board structure smaller. But, the specifications of the SG3 board do not change.
NCCP (New Communication Control Processor)

Controls the SG3 board. CPU (RU30) DPRAM (Dual Port RAM): Handshaking with the FCU is done through this block. DMA controller JBIG DSP V34 modem (RL5T892): Includes the DTMF Receiver function DCR for MH, MR, MMR, and JBIG compression and decompression
FROM 1Mbyte flash ROM for SG3 software storage and modem software storage SDRAM 4Mbyte DRAM shared between ECM buffer, line buffer, and working memory AFE (Analog Front End) Analog processing CODEC (COder-DECoder) A/D & D/A conversions for modem REG
Generates +3.3 V from the +5V from the FCU
SM
113
B779
Fax Option B779
VIDEO DATA PATH
4.3 VIDEO DATA PATH

4.3.1 TRANSMISSION
SCANNER
BICU
FBI
FCU
FACE3
Page Memory
DCR
SAF
SG3
DCR
QM-CODER
DCR
QM-CODER
Modem
Modem
NCCP
NCU
NCU
Analog G3
Analog G3
B779D904.WMF1.WMF
B779
114
SM
VIDEO DATA PATH
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch format. The BICU processes the data and transfers it to the FCU. NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the BICU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax units scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes. Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR or raw format to store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the image is rotated in page memory before compression. At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.
Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the receiving terminal. The BICU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU. NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the BICU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax units scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes. Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.
JBIG Transmission Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the DCR to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line. Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the page memory to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line. Adjustments Priority for the line used for G3 transmissions (PSTN 1/PSTN 2 or 3): System switch 16 bit 1
SM
115
B779
Fax Option B779
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission
VIDEO DATA PATH
4.3.2 RECEPTION
Analog G3 Analog G3
NCU
NCU
Modem
Modem
QM-CODER SAF DCR
CCD (DCR) NCCP
DCR
QM-CODER
Page Memory
FACE3
SG3
FBI
FCU
BICU
Printer
B779D905 WMFWMF
First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAF memory. (The data goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for error lines/frames.) The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image rotation will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is transferred to the BICU. If the optional G3 unit is installed, the line that the message comes in on depends on the telephone number dialed by the other party (the optional G3 unit has a different telephone number from the main fax board). JBIG Reception When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line), the data is sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored in the page memory, and transferred to the BICU. When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-2 (optional extra analog line), the data is sent to the QM-CODER on the SG3 board for decompression.
B779
116
SM
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
4.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

4.4.1 MULTI-PORT
When the optional extra G3 Interface Unit is installed, communication can take place at the same time through the two or three lines at once.
Option Standard only Extra G3 Interface Unit (single) Extra G3 Interface Unit (double) Available Line Type PSTN PSTN + PSTN PSTN + PSTN +PSTN Available protocol Combinations G3 G3 + G3 G3 + G3 +G3
SM
117
B779
Fax Option B779
4.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER

Scanner Controller Comoressed MMR
BICU
Page Memory
HDD
FCU FBI To PSTN
FACE3
DCR
Modem
NCU
DATA/ADDRESS BUS
B779D906.WMF
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution. The BICU video processes the data and transfers it to the controller board. Then the controller stores the data in the page memory for the copier function, and compresses the data in MMR (by software) to store it in the HDD. If image rotation will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory before compression. For transmission, the stored image data is transferred to the FCU. The FCU decompresses the image data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. the NCU transmits the data to the line. The documents can be stored in the HDD (Document Server) from the fax application. The stored documents in the document sever can be used for the fax transmission in many times. More than one document and the scanned document can be combined into one file and then the file can be transmitted. When using the document server, the SAF memory is not used. The document is compressed with MMR and stored. Up to 9,000 pages can be stored. (1 file: Up to 1,000 pages) from the fax application. Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted. Scanned documents are given a name automatically, such as FAX001. But it is possible to change the file name, user name and password. Up to 30 files can be selected at once. NOTE: 1) The compression method of the fax application is different from the copy application. The storing time is longer than the copier storing. 2) When selecting Print 1st page, the stored document will be reduced to A4 size.
B779 118 SM
4.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

Mail Transmission
This machine supports T.37 full mode. (ITU-, RFC232). The difference between T.37 simple mode and full mode is as follows.
Function Resolution T.37 Simple Mode 200 x 100 200 x 200 T.37 Full Mode 200 x100 200 x 200 200 x 400 400 x 400 (if available) A4, B4, A3 MH (default), MR, MMR, Image data transmission, exchange of capability information between the two terminals, and acknowledgement of receipt of fax messages
RX Paper Width RX Data Compression Method Signals
A4 MH Image data transmission only
Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file. The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field From Reply To To Bcc Subject Content Type Content Transfer Encoding Message Body Content Mail address of the sender Destination requested for reply Mail address of the destination Backup mail address From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx) Multipart/mixed Attached files: image/tiff Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how files are attached to e-mail messages)
Direct SMTP Transmission

Internet Fax documents can be sent directly to their destinations without going through the SMTP server. (Internet Faxes normally transmit via the SMTP server.) For example: e-mail address: SMTP server address: gts@ricoh.co.jp gts.abcd.com
In this case this feature destination e-mail address (gts@ricoh.co.jp) is read as the SMTP server address "gts.abcd.com" and the transmissions bypass the SMTP server.
SM
119
B779
Fax Option B779
Selectable Options
These options are available for selection: With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail. Inch-mm conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution will be used if Super Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled with IFAX SW01. The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory capacity) are the same as for G3 fax memory tx. The default compression is TIFF-F format. IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination
Secure Internet Transmission SMTP Authentication: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP Authentication POP Before SMTP: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP
B779
120
SM
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception: POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.) IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol) SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC Internet/LAN Fax Boards Mail Reception
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure

The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which is adjustable in the range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> E-mail Reception Interval
SMTP Reception The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS server, and the address of the received mail must specify the IFAX. Enable SMTP reception: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot be received with SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled: However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the MX record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on the setting: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Mail Delivery Conditions: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP 1) The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery: User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings 2) If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only deliver mail from designated senders, the machines Auth. E-mail RX feature must be set (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings). 3) If the SMTP RX File Delivery Setting is set to 0 to prohibit SMTP receiving, and if there is mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds with an error. (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings) 4) If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mail transmission is lost, and the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and outputs an error report.
SM
121
B779
Fax Option B779
Mail Reception
Auth. E-mail RX
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must be limited using the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered. 1) Access Limit Entry For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp: gts@IFAX.ricoh.co.jp gts@IFAX.abcde.co.jp IFAX@ricoh.co.jp Matches and is delivered. Does not match and is not delivered. Does not match and is not delivered.
2) Conditions The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters. If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming mail do not match, the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and the SMTP server responds with an error. However, in this case an error report is not output. If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming mail specifies a delivery destination, then the mail is delivered unconditionally.
B779
122
SM
Abnormal files When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the server to erase the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sends information about the error by e-mail to the sender address (specified in the From or Reply-to field of the message). If there is an incomplete received message in the machine memory, it will be erased.
The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive error notification after a certain number of attempts. The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of the following are detected: 1. Unsupported MIME headers. Supported types of MIME header
Header Content-Type Charset Content-Transfer-Encoding Supported Types Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be handled, and some garbage may appear in the data. Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
2. MIME decoding errors 3. File format not recognized as TIFF-F format 4. Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted
Remaining SAF capacity error The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAF capacity is less than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The email will be received when the SAF capacity increases (for example, after substitute reception files have been printed). The error handling method for this type of error is the same as for Abnormal files.
If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machine operates in the same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to Abnormal files above).
Secure Internet Reception

To enable password encryption and higher level security: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP3/IMAP4 Settings> Encryption (set to On)
SM
123
B779
Fax Option B779
Handling Mail Reception Errors
Transfer Request: Request by Mail

For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC Internet/LAN Fax Boards Transfer Request The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field From To Bcc Subject Content-Type Content-Transfer-Encoding Mail body (text part) Message body Content E-mail address of the requesting terminal Destination address (Transfer Station address) Backup mail address From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx) Multipart/mixed Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files) Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code) RELAY: #01#*X#**01. MIME-converted TIFF-F.
B779
124
SM
The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject, designating the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail.
Subject and Level of Importance

You can enter a subject message with: Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 64 characters. The subject can also be prefixed with an Urgent or High notation.
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type

Mail Type Subject Entry No Subject Entry
--Entry Condition 1. CSI (RTI) 2. RTI 3. CSI 4. None 1. CSI (RTI) 2. RTI From 3. CSI 4. None RTI or CSI of the station designated for delivery RTI or CSI of sender Mail address of sender Mail address of sender
CSI not registered RTI not registered CSI, RTI not registered
Fax Message No. + File No. Normal: Return Receipt (dispatched). You can select displayed with IFAX SW02 Bits 2 and 3. Error: Return Receipt (processed/error)
Confirmation of Reception
CSI not registered RTI not registered CSI, RTI not registered Mail delivery Mail sending from G3 memory Memory sending SMTP receiving and delivery (Off Ramp Gateway)
Mail delivery, memory transfer, SMTP receiving and delivery
From
Fax Message No. + File Number
Mail error notification
---
Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)
Items of the table above are in the Subject.
Subjects Displayed on the PC
B779D907.WMF
SM
125
B779
Fax Option B779
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode)
E-mail Messages
After entering the subject, you can enter a message with: Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message Limitations on Entries
Item Number of Lines Line Length Name Length Maximum 5 lines 80 characters 20 characters
B779
126
SM
For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC Internet/LAN Fax Boards E-mail Options The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been received correctly or not. This confirmation is done in four steps. 1. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this request (known as MDN): Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options 2. Mail reception (receive confirmation request) 3. Send confirmation of mail reception 4. Receive confirmation of mail reception The other partys machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions below are met: The other partys machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request. The other partys machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification). - Setting up the Receiving Party The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if: 1) The Disposition Notification To field is in the received mail header (automatically inserted in the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page, if MDN is enabled), and 2) Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter Setting SW21 (15 [H]) Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response is as follows:
Normal reception: IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3) Error: Return Receipt (dispatched) in the Subject line Return Receipt (displayed) in the Subject line Return Receipt (processed/error) in the Subject line
SM
127
B779
Fax Option B779
Message Disposition Notification (MDN)
Handling Reports
1. Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail senders journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a Q in the Mode column. 2. Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt Response After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the mail receivers journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and an A in the Mode column. 3. Receiving the Return Receipt Mail After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail senders journal about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is annotated with OK in the Result column. When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an E in the Result column. The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate communication. Its arrival is only reported by the presence of OK or E in the Result column. If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group destination; the machine sends the mail to more than one location. See How to set up Mail Delivery), the Result column of the Journal is updated every time a return receipt is received. For example, if the mailing list was to 5 destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the communication with the 5th destination only. The results of the communications to the first 4 destinations are not shown. Exceptions: If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E, even if subsequent communications were OK. If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the destination for the first error only. Report Sample
DATE MAY. 5 TIME 10:15 10:16 10:17 10:19 ADDRESS fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co. fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co. MODE Mail SM TIME 0'09" PAGE 2 1 2 1 RESULT --OK --
Mail SMQ 0'05"
s_tadashi@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'09" m_masataka@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMA 0'05"
B779D908.WMF
B779
128
SM
IP-FAX
4.5 IP-FAX
What is IP-FAX?
For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC Internet/LAN Fax Boards IP-FAX
T.38 Packet Format

TCP is selected by default for this machine, but you can change this to UDP with IPFAX SW 00 Bit 1. UDP Related Switches
IP-Fax Switch 01 No. FUNCTION 0-3 Select IP FAX Delay Level Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 Level 0 0 0 0 1 Level 1 0 0 1 0 Level 2 0 0 1 1 Level 3 COMMENTS Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too many transmission errors are occurring on the network. If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise this setting on the T.30 machine. Increasing the delay time allows the recovery of more lost packets. If only UDP is enabled, increase the number of redundant packets. Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets Level 3: 4 Redundant packets Do not change these settings.
4-7
Not used.
Settings User parameter switch 34 (22[H]), bit 0 IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage 0: No, 1: Yes
IP Fax Switches: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)
SM
129
B779
Fax Option B779
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
5. SPECIFICATIONS
5.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Type: Circuit: Connection: Original Size: Desktop type transceiver PSTN (max. 3ch.) PABX Direct couple Book (Face down) Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins] Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins] ARDF (Face up) (Single-sided document) Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins] Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch] (Double-sided document) Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch] Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch] Scanning Method: Resolution: Flat bed, with CCD G3 8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard) 8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail) 8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) Note1 16 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note 1 200 x 100 dpi (Standard) 200 x 200 dpi (Detail) 400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note 1 NOTE: 1. Optional Expansion Memory required Transmission Time: G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using memory for an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at standard resolution MH, MR, MMR JBIG Group 3 with ECM V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM), V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM) G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/ 19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps Automatic fallback
Data Compression: Protocol: Modulation: Data Rate:
B779
130
SM
CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS
Memory Capacity:
ECM: 128 KB SAF Standard: 4 MB With optional Expansion Memory: 28 MB (4 MB+ 24 MB) Page Memory Standard: 4 MB (Print: 2 MB + Scanner: 2 MB) With optional Expansion Memory: 12 MB (4 MB + 8 MB) (Print 8 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)
5.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS

The following table shows how the capabilities of each programmable item will change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit is installed.
Item Quick Dial Groups Destination per Group Destinations dialed from the ten-key pad overall Programs Auto Document Communication records for Journal stored in the memory Specific Senders Standard 2000 100 500 500 100 6 200 30
The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memory are installed.
Without the Expansion Memory Memory Transmission file Maximum number of page for memory transmission Memory capacity for memory transmission ( Note1) 400 1000 With the Expansion Memory 400 1000
320
2240
NOTE: Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at the standard resolution, the auto image density mode and the Text mode.
SM
131
B779
Fax Option B779
I/O Rate:
With ECM: 0 ms/line Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
IFAX SPECIFICATIONS
5.3 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS

Connectivity Local area network Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T IEEE1394 (IP over 1394) IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN) Resolution Main scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi NOTE: To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit 4 must be set to 1. Transmission Time 1 s (through a LAN to the server) Condition: ITU-T #1 test document (Selerexe Letter) MTF correction: OFF TTI: None Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi Communication speed: 10 Mbps Correspondent device: E-mail server Line conditions: No terminal access Document Size Maximum message width is A4/LT. Note: To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2 (A3) must be set to 1. E-mail File Format Single/multi-part MIME conversion Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR) Protocol Transmission: SMTP, TCP/IP Reception: POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP Data rate 100 Mbps(100base-Tx) 10 Mbps (10base-T) Authentication method SMTP-AUTH POP before SMTP A-POP Remark The machine must be set up as an email client before installation. Any client PCs connected to the machine through a LAN must also be e-mail clients, or some features will not work (e.g. Autorouting).
B779
132
SM
IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS
5.4 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS

Network: LAN: Local Area Network Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX, IEEE1394 (IP over 1394), IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN) 8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200x100dpi (standard character), 8 x 7.7lines/mm, 200x200dpi (detail character), 8 x 15.4lines/mm (fine character: optional expansion memory required), 16 x 15.4lines/mm, 400x400dpi (super fine character: optional expansion memory required) Maximum A3 or 11"x 17" (DLT) Standard: A3, 297mm x 432mm Irregular: 297mm x 1200mm Recommended: T.38 Annex protocol, TCP, UDP/IP communication IP-Fax compatible machines Specify IP address and send fax to an IP-Fax compatible fax through a network. Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax connected to the public telephone lines via a VoIP gateway. IP-Fax reception function: Receive a fax sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a network. Also capable of receiving fax from a G3 fax connected the public telephone lines via a VoIP gateway.
Scan line density:
Original size: Maximum scanning size:
Transmission protocol:
Compatible machines: IP-Fax transmission function:
SM
133
B779
Fax Option B779
FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION
5.5 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION

6 5
3
B779V101.WMF
Component FCU MBU FCU Interface Interface Board G3 Board Expansion Memory Handset Type 1018 Marker Type 30
Code B799
No. 2 3 1 5 6 4 A646
Remarks Included with fax unit
B780 G578 H903
Included with optional G3 unit. Common with B180. Common with B003, B079 Refill for stamp ink.
B779
134
SM

PRINTER/SCANNER OPTION (B783) REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None

Symbol What it means Refer to section number See Core Tech Manual for details Screw Connector E-ring Clip ring Clamp Lengthwise, SEF (Short Edge Feed) Sideways, LEF (Long Edge Feed)
Cautions, Notes, etc.

The following headings provide special information:
WARNING
CAUTION
Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries. Important Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
IMPORTANT ALWAYS OBEY THESE GUIDELINES TO AVOID SERIOUS PROBLEMS SUCH AS MISFEEDS, DAMAGE TO ORIGINALS, LOSS OF VALUABLE DATA AND TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE MACHINE. BOLD IS ADDED FOR EMPHASIS.
NOTE: This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
1.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 1 Board, SD Card Slots............................................................................... 1 Board Slots .............................................................................................. 2 1.2 INSTALLING SD CARDS ............................................................................. 3 1.2.1 SD CARDS .......................................................................................... 3 1.3 MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD ......................................... 4 1.3.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... 4 1.3.2 MERGING APPLICATIONS ................................................................ 5 1.3.3 UNDO EXEC ....................................................................................... 6 1.4 INSTALLING CONTROLLER OPTIONS ...................................................... 7 1.4.1 P/S MODULE (B783), 256 MB MEMORY (G818) ............................... 7 Accessories ............................................................................................. 7 Printer/Scanner Installation...................................................................... 8 1.4.2 USB/NIC FUNCTION ENABLE ......................................................... 10 1.4.3 IEEE 1284 (B679).............................................................................. 11 1.4.4 IEEE 1394 INTERFACE KIT (B581) .................................................. 12 UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394........................................................... 13 1.4.5 IEEE 802.11B INTERFACE KIT (G813) ............................................ 14 1.4.6 BLUETOOTH UNIT 2045 (B736)....................................................... 17 1.4.7 POSTSCRIPT 3 UNIT (B757)............................................................ 18 1.4.8 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (B609)................................................ 19 1.4.9 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS ........................................................... 20
2. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................21
2.1 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE....................................................................... 21 2.2 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE ..................................................................... 22
3. DETAILS.........................................................................................23
3.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................ 23
4. SPECIFICATIONS..........................................................................24
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 PRINTER CONTROLLER (GENERAL) ...................................................... 24 USB SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................. 25 IEEE 802.11B SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 25 IEEE 1394 SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................... 25 BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATIONS............................................................... 25 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................... 26 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES .................................................................... 27 4.7.1 PRINTER........................................................................................... 27 4.7.2 PRINTER DRIVERS .......................................................................... 27 4.7.3 SCANNER.......................................................................................... 28
i B783
SM
OVERVIEW
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 OVERVIEW
Board, SD Card Slots
The machine controller box has two board slots and three SD card slots. Make sure that each board and SD card is put in the correct slot.
Slot 1 Slot 2
C1 C2 C3 Printer/ Scanner Option B783

B783I101.WMF
The names of the slots for the boards and SD cards are embossed on the face of the controller plate. Slot 1, Slot 2 The optional boards are inserted here (see the next page). SD Card Slots
C1 C2 C3 Printer/Scanner B783. The printer/scanner option also requires installation of the 256 MB memory DIMM and HDD unit. PostScript3 B720 or Data Overwrite Security B735. The DOS option can be moved to the PostScript SD card if both options will be used. Service slot for firmware version updates, moving applications to other SD cards, and downloading/uploading NVRAM contents.
SM
B783
OVERVIEW
Board Slots
Two slots are available for the following boards:

B783I100.WMF
Slot 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2
Board File Format Converter B609 (MLB) Bluetooth Interface Unit B736*1 IEEE802.11b G813 Wireless LAN*1 IEEE1284 Interface Board B679 Centronics*1 IEEE1394 Interface Board B581 FireWire*1
*1 Only one of these boards can be installed at one time.
B783
SM
INSTALLING SD CARDS
1.2 INSTALLING SD CARDS WARNING!

Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you install a controller option. Important! To prevent damage to the controller box, always do your work carefully. Do not put your hand or a tool into the box when you remove the controller box or install an option. To prevent damage to the circuits on the boards, always touch a metal surface to remove static charge from your hands before you touch electronic components.
1.2.1 SD CARDS
SD cards are held in position by a small spring-lock mechanism. 1. To install an SD card, push it into the slot until it stops, then release it.
Printer/ Scanner Option B783
2. To remove an SD card, push the SD card in carefully to release it, and then remove it from the slot. Important: To prevent damage to the SD card or the slot lock, always push the card in, to release it, before you try to remove it.
SM
B783
MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD
1.3 MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD

1.3.1 OVERVIEW
The machine has three SD card slots: C1 is for the printer/scanner option only. C2 is for either PostScript3 or the Data Overwrite Security SD card. If both options are to be installed, the DOS application can be moved to the PS3 SD card. ( 1.3) C3 is used for servicing only. Otherwise this slot should always be empty.
C1 C2 C3
Important The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program to the target SD card. Do not use an SD card if it was used with a computer before this time. Correct operation is not guaranteed if this type of SD card is used. The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is licensed to use the application program. The service technician may occasionally need to check the SD card and its data to solve problems. SD cards must be stored in a safe location at the work site. A licensing agreement prohibits copying of the PostScript SD card. However, you can copy an application from another SD card to the PS SD card. If an SD card was used to combine applications on that card, that SD card cannot be used for a different function.
B783I101.WMF
B783
SM
1.3.2 MERGING APPLICATIONS

Do this procedure to put more than one application on one SD card. This procedure shows you how to move the DOS application to the PS3 SD card. 1. Turn off the copier. 2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( x1). 3. Put the Source (DOS) SD card [B] in C3. This card contains the application that you want to copy. NOTE: The PS SD card cannot be the source card, because it cannot be copied.
[C] [D]
[A]
4. Put the Target (PS3) SD card in C1 [C]. The application on the card in C3 will be copied to this card. 5. Open the front door. 6. Turn the copier on. 7. Go into the SP mode and select SP5873 001. 8. Touch "Execute".
[B]
B783I901.WMF
9. Read the instructions on the display and touch "Execute" to start copying. 10. When the display tells you copying is completed, touch "Exit". 11. Turn the copier off. 12. Remove the Source SD card from C3. Remove the target SD card from C1 and insert it in C2 [D]. 13. Turn the copier on. 14. Go into the User Tools mode and check that all the applications on the SD card in C2 are enabled: User Tools> System Settings> Administrator Tools> Firmware Version> Next 15. Turn the copier off again, then: Attach the SD card slot cover. Tape the copied source card (DOS) to the faceplate of the controller box. Attach the rear cover of the machine.
SM
B783
Important! After an SD card is copied, it cannot be used. But it must be stored in the front door, to serve as proof of purchase by the customer. The original card can also be used to perform an undo procedure (SP 5873 002). Before you put the card in the front cover, label it carefully so that you can identify it easily if you need to do the undo procedure (see the next page).
1.3.3 UNDO EXEC

1. Turn the main switch off. 2. Put the SD card with the merged applications in C1. 3. Put the original destination SD card (the one taped to the faceplate of the controller box) into C3. NOTE: The SD card in C3 must be the original SD card of the application you want to move from C1 to C3. You cannot use any blank SD card in C3. 4. Turn the main switch on. 5. Go into the SP mode and do SP5873-002 (Undo Exec) 6. Follow the messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure. 7. Turn the main switch off. 8. Remove the SD cards from the slots. 9. Turn the main switch on.
B783
SM
INSTALLING CONTROLLER OPTIONS
1.4 INSTALLING CONTROLLER OPTIONS

1.4.1 P/S MODULE (B783), 256 MB MEMORY (G818)
Accessories
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list: Description Q'ty 1. Paper Sensor..................................................................... 1 2. Paper Limit Sensor Unit ..................................................... 1 3. Tapping Screws M3 x8 ...................................................... 2 4. Pan Head Screw M3 x 8 .................................................... 1 5. Ferrite Core........................................................................ 1 6. Stamp ................................................................................ 1 7. CD-ROM (Printer) .............................................................. 1 8. CD-ROM (Scanner) ........................................................... 1 9. Conductive Tape (for Bluetooth option) ............................. 1 10. Printer/Scanner SD
SM
B783
Printer/Scanner Installation
CAUTION
TURN OFF THE MAIN POWER SWITCH AND DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD.
1. Remove the application cover ( x1). 2. Remove controller board [A] ( x1).
B783I902.WMF
3. Install the 256 MB memory DIMM [A]. ( 1.2) 4. Reinstall the controller board.
[A]
B783I103.WMF
B783
SM
5. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] (x1). 6. Insert the Printer/Scanner SD card [B] in SD card slot C1. 7. Reattach the covers. 8. Connect the LAN cable to the "NIC" connection. 9. Connect the USB cable to the "USB" connection. 10. Remove the 1st, 2nd, 4th, and 5th blank key tops. NOTE: The 3rd blank keytop from the top is reserved for the "Fax" keytop. Do not remove it at this time. 11. Replace the blank keytops: Copy Document Server Printer Scanner 12. Connect the machines power cord and turn the main power switch on. 13. Enable the network and USB functions. Important: The NIB and USB functions must be enabled with SP5985. These functions are built into the controller. To enable the Ethernet function, enter the SP mode and set SP5985-001 (On Board NIC) to "1" (Enable). To enable the USB function, enter the SP mode and set SP5985-002 (On Board USB) to 1" (Enable).
B783I903.WMF
[B] [A]
SM
B783
21. If there was no HDD in the machine before you installed the printer/scanner kit, do SP5846 41 to let the user get access to the address book. Important This SP must be done immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine power is turned on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it on the new HDD. But, only the system administrator can get access to the new address book on the HDD at this time. If you do SP5846 41 immediately after power on, then all users can use the address book. NOTE: It is not necessary to format the HDD.
1.4.2 USB/NIC FUNCTION ENABLE

The NIB and USB functions are built into the controller. Installation procedures for these functions are not necessary. However, these functions must be enabled with SP5985. 1. If you want to use the Ethernet function, enter the SP mode and set SP5985001 (On Board NIC) to "1" (Enable). 2. If you want to use the USB function, enter the SP mode and set SP5985-002 (On Board USB) to 1" (Enable).
B783
10
SM
1.4.3 IEEE 1284 (B679)

Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list: Description Q'ty 1. IEEE 1284 Interface Board B679......................................... 1
CAUTION
NOTE: You can only install one of these network interfaces: IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics), IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth.
[A]
[B]
B783I904.WMF
1. Remove the cover [A] of board Slot 1 or 2 ( x1) 2. Install the interface board [B] ( x2 knob screws) NOTE: Use a screwdriver to tighten the knob-screws. Do not tighten manually, because this can disconnect the board. 3. Reattach the application cover ( x1)
SM
11
B783
1.4.4 IEEE 1394 INTERFACE KIT (B581)

Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list: Description Q'ty 1. IEEE 1394 Interface Board B581......................................... 1
CAUTION
NOTE: You can only install one of these network interface boards: IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics), IEEE1394 (FireWire), or Bluetooth.
[A]
[B]
B783I905.WMF
1. Remove the cover [A] of board Slot 1 or 2 ( x1). 2. Install the interface board [B] ( x1 knob screw). NOTE: Use a screwdriver to tighten the knob-screw. Do not tighten manually, because this can disconnect the board. 3. Reattach the application cover ( x1).
B783
12
SM
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394

Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE 1394. These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on. 1. Press the User Tools/Counterkey. 2. On the touch panel, press System Settings. 3. Press Interface Settings. 4. Press IEEE1394. 5. Press the following soft keys on the touch panel. Then select the following settings: IP Address. Select the AUTO-Obtain (DHCP) or Specify. When you select Specify, you can set the IP Address and Subnet Mask manually. IP over 1394. Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables IP over 1394 as the default setting for the printing method. SCSI Print. Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables SCSI Print as the default setting for the printing method. Bi-directional SCSI Print. Switch bi-directional printing on or off for SCSI print. SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394 The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 1394.
SP No. 5839 004 5839 007 5839 008 Name Host Name Cycle Master BCR Mode Function Sets the name of the device used on the network. Example: RNPXXXXXXXXXX Enables or disables cycle master function of the IEEE 1394 standard bus. Sets the BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) setting for the Auto Node operation for the standard IEEE1394 bus for when IRM is not in use. The following three settings are available: Standard, IRM Color Copy, and Always Effective. Determines whether an IRM check for IEEE 1394a is conducted for the Auto Node when IRM is not used. Enables the Node_Unique_Id setting for enumeration on the standard IEEE 1394 bus. Determines how successive initiator login requests are handled during login in for SBP-2. Enables or disables exclusive login for SBP-2. Sets the limit for the number of logins for SBP-2. Range: 1 ~ 62.
5839 009 5839 010 5839 011 5839 012 5839 013
IRM 1394a Check Unique ID Logout Login Login MAX
SM
13
B783
1.4.5 IEEE 802.11B INTERFACE KIT (G813)

Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list: Description Q'ty 1. IEEE 802.11b Board ..............................................................1 2. PCI Card ................................................................................1
[A] [C]
[D]
[B]
B783I906.WMF
CAUTION
NOTE: You can only install one of the following network interfaces at the same time: IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics), IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth. 1. Remove the cover [A] of board Slot 1 or 2 ( x1) 2. Attach the interface board [B] to the controller board ( x1 knob screw). NOTE: Use a screwdriver to tighten the knob-screws. Do not tighten manually, because this can disconnect the board. 3. With the printed side facing the front of the machine, insert the interface card [C] board. 4. Attach the antenna cap [D].
B783
14
SM
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE 802.11b. These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on. NOTE: You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet. 1. Press the User Tools/Counter key. 2. On the touch panel, press System Settings. NOTE: The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN. 3. Select Interface Settings Network (tab) Network I/F Setting 4. Press IEEE 802.11b. Only the wireless LAN options show. 5. Communication Mode. Select either 802.11 Ad hoc, Ad hoc or Infrastructure. 6. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.) 7. Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected. Range: 1 ~ 14 (default: 11) NOTE: The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries. 8. WEP (Encryption) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is designed to protect wireless data transmission. The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded data. There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys. WEP: Selects Active or Inactive. (Inactive is default.) Range of Allowed Settings: 64 bit 10 characters 128 bit 26 characters 9. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to show more settings. Then select the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match the distance between the closest machine or access point. This depends on which mode is selected. NOTE: For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine and the closest PC in the network. For the Infrastructure Mode, this is the distance between the machine and the closest access point.
11 Mbps 5.5 Mbps 2 Mbps 1 Mbps 140 m (153 yd.) 200 m (219 yd.) 270 m (295 yd.) 400 m (437 yd.) Printer/ Scanner Option B783 B783
SM
15
10. Press Return to Default to initialize the wireless LAN settings. Press Yes to initialize the following settings: Transmission mode Channel Transmission Speed WEP SSID WEP Key SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11b
SP No. 5840 006 5840 007 5840 011 UP mode Name Channel MAX Channel MIN WEP Key Select Name SSID WEP Key WEP Mode Function Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the country. Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed for your country. Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00). Function Used to confirm the current SSID setting. Used to confirm the current WEP key setting. Used to show the maximum length of the string that can be used for the WEP Key entry.
B783
16
SM
1.4.6 BLUETOOTH UNIT 2045 (B736)

Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list: Description Q'ty 1. Bluetooth Unit B736.............................................................1 2. PCI Card..............................................................................1 3. Cap ......................................................................................1
[A]
[E] [C]
[B]
B783I907.WMF
CAUTION
NOTE: You can only install one of these network interfaces at the same time: IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics), IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth. 1. Remove the cover [A] of board Slot 1 or 2 ( x1). 2. Attach the conductive tape [B] to the Bluetooth card. Important: Attach the tape to the card on the side of the card opposite to the position shown at [B] 3. Attach the interface board [C] to the controller board ( x2 knob screws). NOTE: Use a screwdriver to tighten the knob-screws. Do not tighten manually, because this can disconnect the board. 4. Install the Bluetooth card [D] in the slot in the Bluetooth unit. 5. Attach the antenna cap [E].
SM
17
B783
[D]
1.4.7 POSTSCRIPT 3 UNIT (B757)

Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list: Description Q'ty 1. PostScript 3 Emulation SD Card............................................1 2. Decal .....................................................................................1
[B]
[A]
B783I908.WMF
CAUTION
1. Remove the application cover [A] ( x1). 2. With the printed side of the SD card [B] facing the rear of the machine, install the SD card in SD card slot C2. ( 1.2) 3. Reattach the application cover ( x1). 4. Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 decal to the front cover.
B783
18
SM
1.4.8 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (B609)

Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list: Description Q'ty 1. File Format Converter Board ............................................... 1
[A]
[B]
B783I909.WMF
CAUTION
1. Remove the cover [A] of Board Slot 1 or 2 ( x1). 2. Install the board [B] ( x2 knob screws). NOTE: Use a screwdriver to tighten the knob-screw. Do not tighten manually, because this can disconnect the board. 3. Reattach the application cover ( x1). Important: This option also requires installation of the Printer/Scanner Unit B783.
SM
19
B783
1.4.9 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS

1. Plug in the power cord and turn on the main switch. 2. Enter the printer user mode and print the configuration page. User Tools> Printer Settings> List Test Print> Config. Page NOTE: The same data can also be printed by executing SP1-004 Print Summary. All installed options are listed in the System Reference column.
B783
20
SM
PRINTER SERVICE TABLE
2. SERVICE TABLES
2.1 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE
SP 1001 Number/Bit SW Bit Switch 001 Bit SW 1 002 Bit SW 2 003 Bit SW 3 004 Bit SW 4 005 Bit SW 5 006 Bit SW 6 007 Bit SW 7 008 Bit SW 8 Clear setting 001 Initialize Printer System 002 Clear CSS Counter 003 Delete Program Print Summary Display Version. Sample/Proof Print Initial 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H Adjusts the bit switch settings. Note: These bit switches are currently not being used
1003
1004 1005 1006
Initializes the settings in the printer feature settings of UP mode. DFU DFU Prints the printer summary sheet. Displays the version of the controller firmware. [0~1/0/1] 0: Link with Doc. Server 1: Enable Returns a text string for the version. 156 PDF 162 157 BMLinks 163 156 PICTBRIDGE 164 159 FONT 180 160 FONT1 181 161 FONT2 182 Returns a text string for the version. 156 PDF 162 157 BMLinks 163 156 PICTBRIDGE 164 159 FONT 180 160 FONT1 181 161 FONT2 182
7910
PDL Part No. Information RPCS 150 PS 151 RPDL 152 R98 153 R16 154 RPGL 155 PDL Version Information RPCS 150 PS 151 RPDL 152 R98 153 R16 154 RPGL 155
R55 RTIFF PCL PCLXL MSIS MSIS (OPT)
7911
R55 RTIFF PCL PCLXL MSIS MSIS (OPT)
SM
21
B783
SCANNER SERVICE TABLE
2.2 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE

SP 1004 Number/Name Compression Type Function/[Setting] Selects the compression type for binary picture processing. [1-3/1/1] 1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image. If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. [0 5/0/1mm] Sets the system not to use the network TWAIN scanner driver. 0: Not forbidden (can use TWAIN) 1: Forbid using TWAIN driver.
1005
Erase Margin
1009
Forbid Using TWAIN
SP 2021
1 2 3 4 5
Number/Name Function/[Setting] Compression level (grayscale) These SP codes set the compression ratio for the grayscale processing mode that can be selected with the notch settings on the operation panel. Range: 5 (lowest ratio) 95 (highest ratio) Level 3 (Middle I-Qual) [5~95/40/1/step] Level 2 (High I-Qual) [5~95/50/1/step] Level 4 (Low I-Qual) [5~95/30/1/step] Level 1 (Highest I-Qual) [5~95/60/1/step] Level 5 (Lowest I-Qual) [5~95/20/1/step]
Compression Notch Assignment
5 3 1 2 4
B783S901.WMF
B783
22
SM
OVERVIEW
3. DETAILS
3.1 OVERVIEW
Enhanced and New Printer Features Table
Feature Sample Print Status Enhanced Description Outputs a single hard copy of the document so it can be checked for errors or irregularities. If the sample copy looks acceptable, the user can enter a number to print additional copies. This feature can be used before setting up large copy jobs. Printing a document requires a password entry. This feature is useful for protecting sensitive information. Documents are stored on the printer HDD (similar to a locked print) but printing does not require a password entry. Documents are stored on the printer HDD and printed as needed. This is useful for documents that are printed frequently (applications, catalogs, etc.)
Locked Print Hold Print Stored Print
Enhanced New New
Printer Features Comparison Table

Model Feature Storage Capacity Sort by User ID No No 100*1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Multiple File Print/Delete Save at Power Off No No Yes Yes Yes Yes File Password Save After Printing No No No No No Yes
B135/B138
Sample Print Locked Print
30*1
No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes (4-digit) NO Yes (4-8 digits) No No Optional (4-8 digits)
B264/B265
Sample Print Locked Print Hold Print Stored Print
*1 Total number of files (includes all job types).
SM
23
B783
SPECIFICATIONS
4. SPECIFICATIONS
4.1 PRINTER CONTROLLER (GENERAL)
Printing Speed: Printer Languages: Maximum 35 ppm (A4/LT LEF): B264 Maximum 45 ppm (A4/LT LEF): B265 PCLXL/PCL5e PostScript 3 (option) RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream) - an original Ricoh PDL) RPCS PS3 PCL5e PCLXL Resident Fonts: Connectivity PCL PS3 Std. Option Network Protocols RAM: 200/600 dpi 600 dpi 300/600 dpi 600 dpi TrueType: 10, Intellifont: 35, International: 13, Bitmap: 1 Option fonts PS3 RJ-45 network port (100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, USB 2.0) IEEE1394 (FireWire), IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN), Bluetooth, IEEE1284 (Centronics Parallel)
Resolution (Driver):
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, SMB (NetBIOS over TCP/IP), AppleTalk (Auto Switching) Maximum 384 MB (Resident 128 MB + Additional 256 MB) Note: Additional 256 MB is required for the printer/scanner option.
B783
24
SM
SPECIFICATIONS
4.2 USB SPECIFICATIONS

USB connectivity is built into the controller firmware.
Interface Data rates USB 1.1, USB 2.0 480 Mbps (high speed), 12 Mbps (full speed), 1.5 Mbps (low speed) High speed mode is only supported by USB 2.0.
4.3 IEEE 802.11B SPECIFICATIONS

Standard applied Data transmission rates IEEE802.11b Speed Distance 11 Mbps 140 m (153 yd.) 5.5 Mbps 200 m (219 yd.) 2 Mbps 270 m (295 yd.) 1 Mbps 400 m (437 yd.) TCP/IP, Apple Talk, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, SMB 2.4GHz (divided over 14 channels, 2400 to 2497 MHz for each channel)
4.4 IEEE 1394 SPECIFICATIONS

Interface Number of Ports Data Transmission Speed Available Features, Functions, Protocols IEEE 1394 (firewire) 2 ports 400 Mbps, 200 Mbps, 100 Mbps SCSI print IP over 1384 Print Print, Scan SBP-2 TCP/IP
4.5 BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATIONS

Transmission Specifications Data Transfer Speed Profile Distance Between Devices Based on Bluetooth V1.1 1 Mbps Hard Copy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP), Serial Port Profile (SPP), BIP 10 m (The maximum distance when using outdoors, otherwise depends on the office environment.)
SM
25
B783
Network protocols Bandwidth
SPECIFICATIONS
4.6 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS

Standard Scanner Resolution: Scanning Speed Available scanning Resolution Range: Main scan/Sub scan 600 dpi 52 ppm, E-mail/Scan-to-Folder/Network Delivery Scanner (A4 LEF, Text 200 dpi, MH Compression) 100 ~ 1200 dpi; When used as a Network TWAIN scanner. 100, 200, 300, 400, 600 dpi; When used as a network delivery scanner or for sending e-mail 8 bits/pixel Ethernet 10/100BASE TX, IP over IEEE1394, Wireless LAN 802.11b MH, MR, MMR (Binary Picture Processing) JPEG (Grayscale Processing) 384 MB Number of originals per file: Maximum 1,000 pages Maximum of files: 3000 files 9,000 pp. (B&W (ITUT No. 1/200 dpi MMR)
Grayscales: Interface: Compression Method: Video Memory Capacity: Image Storage Capacity: Max. Storage on Doc. Svr.
B783
26
SM
SPECIFICATIONS
4.7 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES

4.7.1 PRINTER
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows you to select which components to install.
4.7.2 PRINTER DRIVERS

Printer Language PCL 6 PCL 5e PS3 RPCS Windows 95/98/Me Yes Yes Yes Yes Windows NT4.0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003 Yes Yes Yes Yes Macintosh No No Yes No
NOTE: 1) The printer drivers for Windows NT 4.0 are only for the Intel x86 platform. There is no Windows NT 4.0 printer driver for the PowerPC, Alpha, or MIPS platforms. 2) The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, which uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each operating system is provided with the driver. Utility Software
Software Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000 (Win 95/98/Me, NT4, 2000) SmartNetMonitor for Admin (Win 95/98/Me, NT4, 2000/XP/Server 2003) SmartNetMonitor for Client (Win 95/98/Me, NT4, 2000/XP/Server 2003)
1394 Utility (Win 2000/XP) LAN-Fax M3 Driver (Win 95/98/Me, NT4, 2000/XP)
Printer Utility for Mac USB Printing Support
Acrobat Reader
Description A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer. A printer management utility for network administrators. NIB setup utilities are also available. A printer management utility for client users. Peer-to-peer printing utility and parallel/recovery printing functions are included. A utility for removal IEEE 1394 printers. This driver allows use of the LAN-Fax functions by installing the LAN-Fax driver, Address Book, and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor. This software provides several convenient functions for printing from Macintosh clients. A utility for the USB 2.0 board. A computer running Windows 98 SE or Windows ME requires installation of this utility. A utility that allows reading PDF files.
SM
27
B783
SPECIFICATIONS
4.7.3 SCANNER
The scanner driver and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. Scanner Driver Network Twain Driver for Win95/98/Me/NT4/2000/XP/Server 2003 Scanner Utilities Scan Router V2 Lite for Win95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP Desk Top Binder V2 Lite for Win95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003
B783
28
SM

Ricoh 3035 3045 - Complete Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ricoh 3035 3045 - Complete Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ricoh 3035 3045 - Complete Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B264/B265 SERVICE MANUAL

B264/B265 SERVICE MANUAL

2005 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

Registration.........................................................................................3-96 3.21.4 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION ................................................3-97

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

PUNCH UNIT B377

1000-SHEET FINISHER B408

BRIDGE UNIT B538

PAPER TRAY UNIT B542

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B543

1-BIN TRAY B544

TWO-TRAY FINISHER B545

BOOKLET FINISHER B546

AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B714

FAX OPTION B779

PRINTER/SCANNER OPTION B783

IIMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

Conventions Used in this Manual This manual uses several symbols.

Lengthwise, SEF (Short Edge Feed)

Sideways, LEF (Long Edge Feed)

Cautions, Notes, etc.

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B543

1-BIN TRAY B544

BRIDGE UNIT B538

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS CAUTION

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

*1 Without tray extended.

1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

1.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

Install the copier

Install the bridge unit (if required)

Install the remaining options in any order

MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

1.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

Development Unit and PCU

MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

Initialize TD Sensor and Developer

MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

1. Press User Tools/Counter .

2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.

Set Paper Size for Paper Trays

MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

Electrical Total Counter

HDD Caution Decal

MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

Exposure Glass Cleaner